BIDDING DOCUMENT - the e-Tendering System for Government of

PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT
(BUILDING WING)
BIDDING DOCUMENT
Name of work: - “CONSTRUCTION WORK OF THE PROPOSED NEW ASSAM LEGISLATIVE
ASSEMBLY BUILDING AT DISPUR WITH BUDGETARY COST ESTIMATE
& REVISED DESIGN PROPOSAL (INTERIOR WORKS FOR ASSEMBLY
MAIN BUILDING)”
OFFICE OF THE CHIEF ENGINEER, P.W.D., BUILDING
ASSAM, CHANDMARI, GUWAHATI.
2
GOVERNMENT OF ASSAM
OFFICE OF THE CHIEF ENGINEER: P.W.D.: BUILDING: ASSAM: GUWAHATI-3
NATIONAL COMPETITIVE BIDDING
(CIVIL WORKS)
NAME OF THE WORK
:
“Construction work of the proposed New Assam
Legislative Assembly Building at Dispur with Budgetary
cost estimate & revised Design proposal (Interior works
for Assembly Main Building)”
NODAL AUTHORITY
:
The Chief Engineer, PWD (B), Govt. of Assam.
PERIOD OF DOWNLOAD OF BIDDING
DOCUMENT.
:
Date31-03-2015 at 13.31 hrs to 18-04-2015 at 14.00 hrs
DATE AND TIME OF PRE-BID
CONFERENCE
:
Date: 10-04-2015 time 14:00 hrs
LAST DATE AND TIME FOR RECEIPT
OF BIDS
:
Date:18-04-2015 time 14:00 hrs
DATE AND TIME OF OPENING OF
TECHNICAL BIDS.
:
Date 20-04-2015 time 11:01 hrs to 27-04-2015 time 17:00
hrs
DATE AND TIME OF
OPENING OF FINANCIAL BIDS
:
Date 27-04-2015 time 11:01 hrs to 28-04-2015 time
17.00hrs
PLACE OF OPENING BIDS
:
Office of the Chief Engineer, P.W.D., (Bldg.) Assam,
Chandmari, Guwahati – 3.
OFFICER INVITING BIDS
:
Chief Engineer, P.W.D., (Bldg.) Assam,
Chandmari, Guwahati – 3.
3
INVITATION FOR BID
( IFB )
4
GOVERNMENT OF ASSAM
OFFICE OF THE CHIEF ENGINEER: : P.W.D.: : BUILDING:
ASSAM : : CHANDMARI : : GUWAHATI-3
No. CS/T/BD/8/2013/46
Dated Guwahati the 17th March 2015
PRESS NOTICE
The Chief Engineer, P.W.D (Building), Assam on behalf of the Governor of Assam invites bids for
“Construction work of the proposed New Assam Legislative Assembly Building at Dispur with Budgetary cost
estimate & revised Design proposal (Interior works for Assembly Main Building)” amounting to Rs.
40,00,00,000.00 (approx) from Reputed firms experienced in execution of Interior works in Individual/Joint
Venture(JV). Details of the bids may be seen at website- assam.etenders.in and also in the office of the
undersigned from 30-03-2015 to 31-03-2015 during office hours.
Press Notice published vide this office letter No: CS/T/BD/8/2013/28 dated 31 st October 2014 and subsequent
extension Notices may be treated as canceled.
Chief Engineer, P.W.D. (Bldg.)
Assam, Chandmari, Guwahati-3.
Memo No: CS/T/BD/8/2013/ 46-A
Copy to:
Dated Guwahati the 17th March 2015
1.The Principal Secretary, Assam Legislative Assembly for favour of information.
2.The Commissioner & Special Secretary to the Govt. of Assam, PW (Bldg. & NH) Deptt., Dispur, Guwahati6 for favour of information.
3.The Addl. Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg) P.C.C. Project Complex Assam, Chandmari, Guwahati-3 for
information.
4.The Addl. Chief Engineer P.W.D. (Electrical) O/o the Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati3 for information.
5.The Director of Information and Public Relation, Govt. of Assam, Dispur, Guwahati-6 for information. He
is requested to publish the notice in two consecutive issues of at least widely circulated English daily
The Telegraph, The Assam Tribune and Assamese Daily News papers on or before 26-03-2015.
Enclosed: 6 (six) spare copies.
6.The Director Printing & Stationary, Bamunimaidam, Guwahati-21, for information with 2(two) spare
copies with a request to publish the notice in Assam Gazette on or before 26-03-2015.
7.The Superintending Engineer, P.W.D. Guwahati Building Circle-I, Fancy Bazar, Guwahati-1 for
information and wide circulation. Enclosed: 4(Four) spare copies.
8.The Sr Architect (B/N) O/o the Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati-3 for information.
9.The Executive Engineer, PCC Division, Dispur, Guwahati-6, for information and wide circulation.
Enclosed: 4(Four) spare copies
10.Consultant M/S Dulal Mukherjee & Associates for information and necessary action.
11.M/S Nex Tenders India Pvt. Ltd. camp Guwahati for information with a request to publish the notice in
their web site. The time schedule has been fixed as discussed with the officials of Nex Tenders
stationed at the CE PWD’s office premises at Guwahati.
12.Notice Board
Chief Engineer, P.W.D. (Bldg.)
Assam ,Chandmari, Guwahati-3.
5
Name of work: “Construction work of the proposed New Assam Legislative Assembly Building at Dispur
with Budgetary cost estimate & revised Design proposal (Interior works for Assembly
Main Building)”
Tender Schedule
Seq.
No.
1
PWD Stage
Contractor Stage
Tender Release
2
Tender Download
3
Submit Bid-Hash online and
payment
4
5
Super hash Generation
& Bid Lock
6
Technical Bid Opening
7
Financial Bid Opening
Control transfer of bid
Start Date
& Time
30-03-2015
10:01
31-03-2015
13:31
31-03-2015
13:31
18-04-2015
14:01
18-04-2015
17:01
20-04-2015
11:01
27-04-2015
11:01
Expiry Date
& Time
31-03-2015
13:30
18-04-2015
14:00
18-04-2015
14:00
18-04-2015
17:00
20-04-2015
11:00
27-04-2015
17:00
28-04-2015
17:00
Note:
1.The dates & time shown in above table for Technical & financial Bid opening is tentative.
2.Cost of Bid document should be drawn in favour of Assam State Road Board Maintenance
(Roads) Fund; A/C No. 10566991479 is to be submitted along with the technical Bid.
3.Bid Security should be drawn in favour of the respective Executive Engineer, PWD (Building) as
stated in the bid document.
4.A sum of Service fees shall be paid online to M/S Nextenders (India) Pvt. Ltd., in order to
participate on Tender. However contractors can download documents free of cost.
5.Pre-bid meeting will be held at 14.00 Hrs of 10-04-2015.
Venue: - O/o the Chief Engineer, PWD (Building) Assam, Chandmari, Guwahati-3.
6.Technical bid is to be submitted manually only & financial bid is to be submitted online only.
7.Bid Security, Cost of Bid document and Supporting Documents are to be submitted together
along with the technical bid before the expiry date & time of the sequence-“Submit BidHash online and payment” as given in the above tender schedule.
8.Last date and time of manual submission of Technical Bid on or before 14:00 Hrs of
18.04.2015.
9.In case of any Bandh falls in any sequence will be held in next working day.
10.Detailed NIT amount may vary from the Press Notice amount.
11.Any modification of tender may be seen in the P.W.D. portal http://assam.etenders.in.
Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.)
Assam, Chandmari, Guwahati-3
6
Conditions for E-Tendering
This annexure contains instructions and rules governing e -Tendering that is now to be adopted. This is
not a user guide. Please obtain a user guide from the service provider M/s Nextenders India Private
Limited
Name of work: “Construction work of the proposed New Assam Legislative Assembly Building at Dispur
with Budgetary cost estimate & revised Design proposal (Interior works for Assembly
Main Building)”
Tender Schedule
Seq.
No.
1
PWD Stage
Contractor Stage
Tender Release
2
Tender Download
3
Submit Bid-Hash online and
payment
4
5
Super hash Generation
& Bid Lock
6
Technical Bid Opening
7
Financial Bid Opening
Control transfer of bid
Start Date
& Time
30-03-2015
10:01
31-03-2015
13:31
31-03-2015
13:31
18-04-2015
14:01
18-04-2015
17:01
20-04-2015
11:01
27-04-2015
11:01
Expiry Date
& Time
31-03-2015
13:30
18-04-2015
14:00
18-04-2015
14:00
18-04-2015
17:00
20-04-2015
11:00
27-04-2015
17:00
28-04-2015
17:00
All the key dates and deadlines will be followed as per the above time schedule unless explicitly amended
through a corrigendum pursuant to clause 10 of ITB. Only those clauses of ITB and Appendix to ITB are
mentioned in this Annexure where the procedure differs from manual tendering. These notes must be
read in conjunction with ITB.
A. GENERAL
B. BIDDING DOCUMENTS
Additional Notes to Clause 8 of ITB
The technical Bids of the bidders will be received manually.
Priced Bill of Quantities
Irrespective of the mode of submission selected, the following documents will have to be submitted on
paper.
Bid Security or EMD
Documents to be furnished by the bidder in compliance to section 2 that have not been submitted
online, specifically Certificates, undertakings, affidavits as specified in Section 2. Shall be prepared
by the bidder and furnished in duplicate. (refer clause 12) in A-4 size paper in a bound form and
7
not in loose forms. The serial order will be maintained for the different forms as furnished in the
section.
Additional Notes to Clause 10
All amendments issued will be published on the website – assam.etenders.in. It is the prerogative of the
contractors to visit the aforementioned site for corrigendum, addendum and amendment notices. These
notices have to be read in conjunction with the tender document and have to be signed and submitted
manually along with the bid.
C. PREPARATION OF BIDS
Additional Notes to clause 12
Mode of Bid Preparation and Documents comprising the Bid
Technical Bid should be prepared as per Part-I of Clause no. 12.1 of ITB.
Online Price (Financial) Bid shall not be submitted on paper.
Bidders need not submit form of bid and priced bid of quantities in paper form. Even if these are
submitted in paper form, the data filled up online would be considered in bid evaluation and price paper
bids will not be opened.
Additional Notes to clause 18 of ITB – Format and Signing of Bid
All online forms to be filled up by the bidders will be hashed and digitally signed as per the procedure
described in the user guide.
For manual submission of Technical bid refer clause no 18 of ITB. Financial bid needs to be submitted
online only.
D. SUBMISSION OF BIDS
Notes to Clause 19 of ITB -Sealing and Marking of Bids
Refer to notes 19.1 to 19.8 mentioned hereafter.
Notes 19.1 through 19.4 apply to all documents comprising the technical bid. Financial bid needs to be
submitted online only. Notes 19.5 through 19.8 apply to online bid forms.
19.1The Bidder shall seal the technical bids (original & copy) in one envelope duly marking the envelope
as “Technical Bid” respectively.
Technical Bid: to be opened not before (date & time of Technical Bid opening)
The contents of Technical Bids will be as specified in clause 12.2 of ITB and notes to Clause 12 of
ITB in this appendix.
19.2The envelope containing Technical Bid shall be
(a)Addressed to the Employer at the address given in Appendix to ITB
(b)Bear the identification as indicated in Appendix to ITB
8
19.3In addition to the identification required in Sub-Clauses 19.1 and 19.2 of ITB, each of the envelopes
shall indicate the name and address of the bidder to enable the bid to be returned unopened in case
it is declared late, pursuant to Clause 21 of ITB, or the Evaluation Committee declares the bid as nonresponsive pursuant to Clause 23 of ITB.
Bidders are required to mention the Company ID (obtained at the time of the ETS registration),
and the Tender No (as seen on the ETS website) on the outer envelope of the bid as well as each
enclosed envelope (viz., Technical, Financial, EMD and Document Fee).
19.4
19.5
If the outer envelope is not sealed and marked as above, the Employer will assume no
responsibility for the misplacement or premature opening of the bid.
The Bidder shall fill up all online forms following the procedure for e-tendering.
19.6 The Bidder shall generate the bid hash following the procedure of online bid preparation and
digitally sign with his own digital certificate and submit the hash as per the online bidding
procedure for financial bid.
19.7
The bidder shall verify the generation of the Super hash as per the time schedule in IFB.
19.8
The bidder shall decrypt the bid and submit it in an encrypted form as per the online bidding
procedure.
Additional Notes to Clause 20 of ITB -Deadline for Submission of the Bids
Online bid forms must be filled up and bid hashes signed and submitted before the deadline specified at
serial no. 5 in the tender time schedule of IFB
All Documents to be submitted in paper form must be received by the Employer at the address specified
in Appendix to ITB not later than the date indicated at serial no. 3 of the tender time schedule of IFB;. In
the event of the specified date for the submission of bids declared a holiday for the Employer, the Bids
will be received up to the appointed time on the next working day.
Online bidders must decrypt and submit their re-encrypted bids before the expiry date specified at Serial
No 5 of the Tender Time Schedule in IFB. Failure to submit re-encrypted bids will result in the bids being
treated as cancelled bids and would entail forfeiture of the bid security.
The Employer may extend the deadline for submission of the bids by issuing an amendment in accordance
with clause 10 of ITB, in which case all rights and obligations of the Employer and the bidders previously
subject to the original deadline will then be subject to the new deadline.
Additional Notes to Clause 22 of ITB.
Online bids can be modified or cancelled online before the expiry date and time specified at Serial No 3 of
the Tender Time Schedule in IFB. After the deadline no modifications or withdrawals are allowed.
E. BID OPENING AND EVALUATION
Notes to Clause 23 of ITB - Bid Opening
The Employer will open all the technical Bids received (except those received late), including
modifications made pursuant to Clause 22 of ITB and serial-3 of time schedule, in the presence of the
9
Bidders or their representatives who choose to attend at time, date specified in Tender Time Schedule in
IFB at the address specified in Appendix to ITB in the manner specified in Clause 20 and 23.3. In the event
of the specified date of Bid opening being declared a holiday for the Employer, the Bids will be opened at
the appointed time and location on the next working day.
After opening the envelope containing “Technical Bid” the amount, form and validity of the bid security
furnished with each bid will be announced. If the bid security furnished does not conform to the amount
and validity period as specified in the Appendix to ITB, and has not been furnished in the form specified
in Clause 16, the “Technical Bid” will be returned and their online financial bid with be destroyed.
The “Technical Bid” of only those bidders will be entitled for financial evaluation online whose technical
bids are found responsive.
1. Electronic Tender No:
887
2. Package No.:
3. Name of Work
“Construction work of the proposed New Assam Legislative Assembly
Building at Dispur with Budgetary cost estimate & revised Design
proposal (Interior works for Assembly Main Building)”
4. Value of work (in Rs.):
Rs. 40, 00, 00,000.00)
5. Bid Security (in Rs):
Rs. 80,00,000.00
6. Cost of Document (in Rs.):
Rs. 12,500/-
7. Time of Completion:
9 (nine) months
8. Name of the officer inviting Bid:
Shri.P.K.Choudhury.
9. Address for Paper Submissions and Opening: Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.) Assam, Chandmari,
Guwahati 3.
10
INDEX
SECTION
ITEM
1)
INSTRUCTION TO BIDDER
2)
QUALIFICATION INFORMATION
3)
CONDITIONS OF CONTGRACT (GCC & SCC)
4)
CONTRACT DATA
5)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
6)
SECURITIES AND OTHER FORMS
7)
FORM OF BID
8)
BILL OF QUANTITIES
9)
DRAWINGS
10)
DOCUMENTS TO BE FURNISHED BY THE BIDDER
PAGE NO.
11
SECTION : 1
INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS
( ITB )
12
INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS
Table of clauses
SL
NO.
A)
PAGE NO.
General
1.
Scope of Bid
……
2.
Source of Funds
……
3.
Eligible Bidders
……
4.
Qualification of the Bidder
……
5.
One bid per Bidder
……
6.
Cost of Bidding
……
7.
Site Visit
……
B)
Bidding Documents
8.
Contents of Bidding Documents
……
9.
Clarification of Bidding Documents.
……
10
Amendments of Bidding Documents.
……
C)
D)
ITEM
Preparation of Bids
11
Language of Bid.
……
12
Documents Comprising the Bid
……
13
Bid Prices.
……
14
Currencies of Bid and Payment.
……
15
Bid Validity
……
16
Bid Security.
……
17
Alternative Proposals by Bidders
……
18
Format and Signing of Bid
……
Submission of Bids
13
19
Sealing and Marking of Bids.
……
20
Deadlines for Submission of Bids.
……
21
Late Bids.
……
22
Modification and withdrawal of Bids.
……
E)
Bid Opening and Evaluation
23.
Bid Opening.
……
24
Process to be Confidential
……
25
Clarification of Financial Bids
……
26.
Examination of Bids and Determination of responsiveness.
……
27.
Correction of Errors.
……
28
Deleted.
……
29.
Evaluation and comparison of Financial Bids.
……
30
Deleted.
……
F)
Award of Contract
31.
Award Criteria
……
32.
Employer’s right to accept any Bid and to reject any or all bids.
……
33.
Notification of Award and Signing of Agreement.
……
34.
Performance Security.
……
35.
Advance Payment and security.
……
36
Dispute Review Expert.
……
37.
Corrupt or Fraudulent Practices.
……
14
GENERAL
1.0
Scope of Bid
1.1.
The Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati (named in Appendix to ITB) invites bids
for the work: “Construction work of the proposed New Assam Legislative Assembly Building at
Dispur with Budgetary cost estimate & revised Design proposal (Interior works for Assembly
Main Building)” from eligible bidders.
1.2.
The successful bidder will be expected to complete the works by the intended completion
date specified in the Contract data.
1.3.
Throughout this bidding document, the terms `bid’ and `tender’ and their derivatives
(bidder/tenderer, bid/tender, bidding/tendering, etc.) are synonymous.
2.0
Source of Funds
2.1
The expenditure on this project will be met by the Government of Assam from fund made
available by the Government of India, Plan and Non-Plan Resources of the State Government.
3.0
Eligible Bidders
3.1
This Invitation for Bids is open to all bidders who meet the qualification criteria.
3.2.
All bidders shall provide in Section 2, Forms of Bid and Qualification Information, a statement
(unless otherwise specified) that the Bidder is neither associates, nor has been associated
directly or indirectly with the Consultant or any other entity that has prepared the design,
specifications and other documents for the project or propose the Consultancy as Project-incharge for the contract. A firm that has been engaged by the Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.),
Chandmari, Guwahati – 3 to provide consultancy services for the preparation or supervision of
the works, and any of its affiliates shall not be eligible to bid.
4.0
Qualification of the Bidder
4.1.
All bidders shall provide in Section -2, Forms of Bid and Qualification, Information, a
preliminary description of the proposed work method and schedule, including charts, PERT &
CPM diagram as necessary. The proposed methodology should include programme of
construction backed with equipment planning and development duly supported with broad
calculations and quality assurance procedures proposed to be adopted justifying their capability
of execution and completion of work as per technical specifications, within stipulated period of
completion.
A Quality Assurance Manual (QAM) including but not limited to policy statement, project
organization (Flow Chart) Project Organisation (Duties and Responsibilities), Project Control
and Administration, Document control, control of Material, Methodology of Working, Test
and Inspection Plan, Calibration, Non Conformity and Corrective Actions, Quality Audits and
15
Safety should also accompany the bid.
4.2.
Deleted.
4.3.
All bidders shall include the following information and documents with their bids in
Section 2.
4.4.
i)
Copies of Original documents defining the constitution or legal status, place of
registration, and principal place of business; written power of attorney of the
signatory of the Bid to commit the bidder;
ii)
Total monetary value of construction work performed during each of the last five
years;
iii)
Experience in works of a similar nature and size of each of the last five years, and
details of works underway or contractually committed; and clients who may be
contacted for further information on those contracts;
iv)
Major items of construction equipment proposed to carry out the contract;
v)
Qualification and experience of key site management and technical personnel
proposed for contract;
vi)
Reports on the financial standing of the Bidder, such as profit and loss statements and
auditor’s reports for the past five years;
vii)
Evidence of access to line (s) of credit and availability of other financial Resources
facilities (10% of Contract Value), certified by the Bankers (Not more than 1 Month
old);
viii)
Undertaking that the bidder will be able to invest a minimum cash of 25% of contract
value of work, during implementation of work;
ix)
Authority to seek references from the Bidder’s Bankers;
x)
Information regarding any litigation, current or during the last five years in which the
Bidder is involved, the parties concerned, and disputed amount;
xi)
Proposals for sub Contracting components of the Works amounting to more than 20%
of the Bid Price (for each , the qualifications and experience of the identified subcontractor in the relevant field should be annexed); and
xii)
The proposed methodology and programme of construction, backed with equipment
planning and deployment, duly supported with broad calculations and quality control
procedures proposed to be adopted, justifying their capability of execution and
completion of the work as per Technical Specification within the stipulated period of
completion Milestones.
xiii)
Details of plants for seasoning and treatment of timber articles and thin preservative
treatment system equipments.
Subject to fulfillment of qualifying criteria Joint Venture (JV) of contractors or consortium
may also participate in the bidding.
16
GENERAL EXPERIENCE:
4.5.
A.
To qualify for award of the contract, each bidder in its name should have in the last
five years as referred to in Appendix.
(a)
Achieved a minimum average financial turnover (in all classes of civil engineering
construction works only) over the last five years equivalent to amount indicated in
Appendix – I (not less than 40% of the value of contract applied for)
(b)
The bidder must be a profit making one for the last five years.
(c)
Satisfactorily completed 90% of contract value, as a prime contractor (or as a
nominated sub contractor, where the sub contractor involved in execution of all main
items of work described in the bid document, provided further that all other
qualification criteria are satisfied) at least one similar work of minimum value in last 5
(five) years must be as follows:
Rs.16 Crores - In case of single order / In multiple order limiting the maximum
number of orders to the number of stories in single Building.
(d)
Deleted
(e)
The contractor should possess required valid electrical license
B.
Each Bidder should demonstrate :(a) Availability (either owned or leased) of the following key and critical equipment for
this work :
Based on the Studies, carried out by the Engineer the minimum suggested major
equipment to attain the completion of works in accordance with the prescribed
construction schedule is shown in the Appendix – II.
The bidders should , however, undertake their own studies and furnish with their bid,
a detailed construction planning and methodology supported with layout and
necessary drawings and calculations (detailed) as stated in Clause 4.3 ( i) above to
facilitate the Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati – 3 to review their
proposals. The numbers, types and capacities of each plant / equipment shall be
shown in the proposals along with the cycle time for each operation for the given
production capacity to match the requirements.
(b) Availability for this work of personnel with adequate experience as required; as per
Appendix – III.
(c) Liquid assets and/ or availability of credit facilities of not less than the amount
indicated in Appendix – I
(Credit lines / letter of credit/ certificates from nationalized/ Scheduled banks for
meeting the funds requirement etc.)
17
C.
To qualify for the package of contracts made up of this contract for which bids are
invited, the bidder must demonstrate having experience and resources sufficiently to
meet of the qualifying criteria for the contracts.
D. JOINT VENTURES
1. If a Joint Venture (JV) or consortium wish to participate in the bidding
(a) The JV/ consortium should be formed with a maximum of 3 partners.
(b) A financial partner in the JV, who need not have any technical qualification but
should pitch in with financial support to the JV is permitted
(c) The JV shall submit along with the bid, in a separate envelope super scripting
‘JOINT VENTURE/ CONSORTIUM DETAILS’, the following-----(i) Name of the Lead partner or the Partner-in-Charge duly evidenced by Power of Attorney signed by
legally authorized signatories of all the partners.
(ii) Complete information pertaining to each partner.
(iii) Copy of agreement confirming the intent of all parties to form a JV. It should distinctly show



The financial participation of each member as regards to planning and execution of
the work.
Name of the lead partner or Partner-in-charge authorized to incur liabilities and
receive instructions for or on behalf of any / all partner(s) of the JV and the execution
of the contract including receiving of payment due.
All partners of the JV shall be liable jointly or severally for the execution of the
contract, in accordance with the terms and conditions of the contract.
2. In a JV/ Consortium, the combined standing of all the partners, irrespective of their proposed
financial participation in the work, shall be considered in evaluation of its credentials.
3. At least one of the JV/ Consortium partner should meet the minimum qualification criteria in
respect of single similar works.
4. Firm, individual, company or corporation neither can join more than one JV nor they can also
participate in the bidding in individual capacity.
5. A JV cannot incorporate more partner(s) in the JV after submission of bids.
4.6
4.6.1. Joint Ventures must comply with the following requirements:
a) Following are the minimum qualification requirements,
i)
The lead partner shall meet not less than 50% of all the qualifying criteria given in
paras 2.6.3 and 2.6.6 of chapter Joint Venture. The joint venture must collectively
satisfy the criteria of para 2.6.3 & 2.6.6 of chapter Joint Venture. The experience of
the other joint venture partners shall be considered if it is not less than 30 per cent of
the qualifying criteria given in paras 2.6.3. and 2.6.6 of Chapter Joint Venture.
However, in case one of the joint venture partners is proposed to be included
18
primarily to provide financial strength to the joint venture, such joint venture partner
shall have to commit to provide liquidity support to the project to the extent of 20
percent of the value of the contract.
The joint ventures must satisfy collectively the criteria of paras 2.6.4 & 2.6.5 of
chapter Joint Venture for which purpose the relevant figures for each of the partners
shall be added together to arrive at the joint venture’s total capacity. Individual
members must each satisfy requirements of para 2.6.7 & 2.6.8 chapter Joint Venture.
ii)
b) Bid shall be signed so as to legally bind all partners, jointly and severally, and shall be submitted
with a copy of the joint venture agreement providing the ‘joint and several’ liability with respect
to the contract.
4.6.2
Qualification of a joint venture does not necessarily qualify any of its partners individually or as a
partner in any other joint venture. In case of dissolution of a joint venture, each one of the
constituent firms may qualify if they meet all the qualification requirements, subject to the
written approval of the Employer.
4.7.
Sub Contractor’s experience and resources shall not be taken into account in determining the
bidder’s compliance with the qualifying criteria except to the extent stated in 4.5(A), above.
4.8.
Bidders who meet the minimum qualification criteria will be qualified only if their available
bid capacity is more than the total bid value. The available bid capacity will be calculated as
under :
Assessed Available bid Capacity = (A X N X 2 – B)
Where,
A
=
Maximum value of Interior works executed in any one year during the
last five years (updated to the price level of the year indicated in
Appendix – I) taking into account the completed as well as works in
progress.
N
=
Number of years prescribed for completion of the works for which bids
are invited.
B
=
Value (updated to the price level of the year indicated in Appendix – I)
of existing commitments and on-going works to be completed during
the next 9 months. (Period of completion of the works for which bid is
invited).
Note
4.9.
:
The Statements showing the value of existing commitments and ongoing works as well as the stipulated period of completion remaining
for each of the works listed should be countersigned by the Engineerin-charge, not below the rank of an Executive Engineer or equivalent.
Even though the bidders meet the above qualifying criteria, they are subject to be disqualified
if they have :
19

Made misleading or false representations in the forms, statements and
attachments submitted in proof of the qualification requirements;
and/or.

Record of poor performance such as abandoning the works, not
properly completing the contract, inordinate delays in completion,
litigation history, or financial failures etc. and /or

Participated in the previous bidding for the same work and had quoted
unreasonably high bid prices and could not furnish rational justification
to the Chief Engineer, PWD (BLDG.), Chandmari, Guwahati – 3.
5.0.
One Bid per Bidder
5.1.
Each bidder shall submit only one bid for one package. A bidder who submits or participates
in more than one Bid (other than as a sub-contractor or in cases of alternatives that have
been permitted or requested) will cause all the proposals with the Bidder’s participation to be
disqualified.
6.0.
Cost of Bidding
6.1.
The bidder shall bear all costs associated with the preparation and submission of this
Bid, and the Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati – 3 will in no case
responsible and liable for those costs.
7.0.
Site Visit
7.1.
The Bidder, at the Bidder’s own responsibility and risk is encouraged to visit and
examine Site of Works and its surroundings and obtain all information that may be necessary
for preparing the Bid and entering into a contract for construction of the works. The cost of
visiting the Site shall be at the Bidder’s own expense.
be
20
B. BIDDING DOCUMENTS
8.0.
Content of Bidding Documents
8.1.
The set of bidding documents comprises the documents listed below and agenda
in accordance with Clause 10 :
Section
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
8.2.
Particulars
Invitation of Bids
Instruction to Bidders
Qualification Information, and other forms
Conditions of Contract
Contract of Data
Technical Specifications
Securities and other forms of Bid
Form of Bid
Bill of Quantities
Drawings
Documents to be furnished by bidder
issued
Volume No.
I
II
III
IV
Table - 1
One copy of each of the volumes I, II & III will be issued to the bidder. Documents to be
furnished by the bidder in compliance to section 2 will be prepared by him and furnished as
Volume – IV in two parts (to be submitted in A4 size paper in a bound volume) (refer clause
12).
8.3.
The bidder is expected to examine carefully all instructions, conditions of Contract, contract
data, forms, terms, technical specifications, bill of quantities, forms, Appendices and drawings
in the Bid Document. Failure to comply with the requirements of Bid Document shall be at the
bidder’s own risk. Pursuant to clause 26 here of bids, which are not substantially responsive
to the requirements of the Bid Documents shall be rejected.
9.0.
Clarification of Bidding Documents
9.1.
A prospective bidder requiring any clarification of the bidding documents may notify the Chief
Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati – 3 in writing or by cable (hereinafter “cable”
includes telex and facsimile) at the chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati-3’s
address indicated in the invitation to bid. The Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg) will respond to any
request for clarification. Copes of the Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati-3’s
response will be forwarded to all purchasers of the bidding documents in the pre-bid meeting,
including a description of the enquiry but without identifying its source.
Pre-bid meeting
9.1.1 The bidder or his official representative is invited to attend a pre-bid meeting, which will take
place at the address, venue, time and date as indicated in APPENDIX-1.
9.1.2 The purpose of the meeting will be to clarify issues and to answer questions on any matter
that may be raised at that stage.
9.1.3 The bidder may submit any questions in writing to the Chief Engineer, PWD
21
(Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati-3 on the day of the meeting.
9.1.4
Minutes of the meeting, including the text of the questions (without identifying the source of
enquiry) and the responses given will be transmitted without delay. Any modification of the
bidding documents listed in Sub Clause 8.1, which may become necessary as a result of the
pre-bid meeting shall be made by the Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandrmari, Guwahati-3
exclusively through the issue of an Addendum pursuant to Clause 10 and not through the
minutes of the pre-bid meeting.
9.1.5
Non-attendance at the pre-bid meeting will not be a cause for disqualification of a bidder.
10.0
Amendment of Bidding Documents
10.1.
Before the deadline for submission of bids, the Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari,
Guwahati-3 may modify the bidding documents by issuing addenda/ amendments.
10.2
Any addendum thus issued shall be a part of the bidding documents and shall be
communicated in writing or by cable to all the purchasers of the bidding documents.
Prospective bidders shall acknowledge receipt of each addendum in wiring or by cable to the
Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati-3. The Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.)
Chandmari, Guwahati-3 will assume no responsibility for postal delays.
10.3.
All corrections / amendments may be seen in the website- assam.etenders.in
10.4.
To give prospective bidders reasonable time in which to take an addendum into account in
preparing their bids, the Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati – 3 may, at his
discretion, extend as necessary the deadline for submission of bid, in accordance with SubClause 20.2. below
22
C.
11.
PREPARATION OF BIDS
Language of the Bid
All documents relating to the bid shall be in the English Language.
12.
Documents Comprising Bid
12.1
The bid to be submitted by the bidder as Volume IV of the bid document (refer Clause 8.1)
shall be in Two separate parts :
Part – I shall be named “Technical Bid” and shall comprise
i)
Bid Security in the form Specified in Section 6.
ii)
Qualification Information and supporting documents as specified in Section – 2.
iii)
Certificates, undertakings, affidavits as specified in Section -6, 2
iv)
Undertaking that the bid shall remain valid for the period specified in Clause 15.1
v)
Acceptance / non acceptance of Dispute Review Expert proposed in Clause 36.1
Part – II shall be named “Financial Bid” and shall comprise
1)
Form of Bid as Specified in Section – 7.
2)
Priced Bill of Quantities for items specified in Section – 8.
Part-I will be separately sealed and marked in accordance with the sealing and Marking
Instructions in clause 19.
Part – II shall be submitted online.
The bidder shall prepare Two Copies of the bid, marking them “Original” and “Copy”
respectively.
Following documents, which are not submitted with the bid, will be deemed to be part of the
bid.
Section
Invitation of Bids
1
Instruction to Bidders
3
Conditions of Contract
4
Contract Data
5
Specifications
9
Drawings
Particulars
Volume No.
Volume - I
Volume - III
23
13.0
Bid Prices
13.1
The contract shall be for the whole works as described in Sub-Clause 1.1 based on the priced
Bill of Quantities submitted by the Bidder.
13.2
The Bidder shall fill in rates and prices and line item total (both in figures and words) for all
items of the works rounded to the nearest rupee described in the bill of Quantities along
with total bid price (both in figures and words). Items for which no rate or price is entered by
the bidder will not be paid for by the Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati-3
when executed and shall be deemed covered by the other rates and prices in the Bill of
Quantities. Corrections, if any, shall be made by crossing out, initialing, dating and rewriting.
The Bidder must quote his bid price in Section 7 (Form of Bid) both in figures and words,
which is to be duly signed by the bidder. A Financial Bid without any mention of bid price in
the Form of Bid shall be treated as Non-Responsive and shall not be considered for
evaluation.
13.3
All duties, taxes (VAT, forest Royalty, labour cess etc.) levies payable by the contractor under
the contract, or for any other cause shall be included in the rates, prices and total Bid Price
submitted by the Bidder.
13.4
The rates and prices quoted by the Bidder shall be fixed for the duration of the Contract and
shall not be subject to adjustment on any account.
14.
Currencies of Bid and Payment
14.1
The unit rates and the prices shall be quoted by the bidder entirely in Indian Rupees. All
payments shall be made in Indian Rupees.
15.
Bid Validity
15.1
Bids shall remain valid for a period not less than 180 days after the deadline date for bid
submission specified in Clause 20.A bid valid for a shorter period shall be rejected by the
Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati-3 as non-responsive. In case of
discrepancy in bid validity period between that given in the undertaking pursuant to Clause
12.1 (iv) and Form of Bid submitted by the bidder, the later shall be deemed to stand
corrected in accordance with the former and the bidder has to provide for any additional
security that is required.
15.2.
In exceptional circumstances, prior to expiry of the original time limit, the chief Engineer,
PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati-3 may request that the bidders may extend the period of
validity for a specified additional period. The request and the bidder’s responses shall be
made in writing or by cable. A bidder may refuse the request without forfeiting his bid
security. A bidder agreeing to the request will not be required or permitted to modify his bid,
but will be required to extend the validity of his bid security for a period of the extension,
and in compliance with Clause 16 in all respects.
24
15.3.
Deleted.
15.4.
Bid evaluation will be based on the bid prices without taking into consideration the above
correction.
16.
Bid Security.
16.1
The Bidder shall furnish, as a part of his Bid, a Bid Security in the amount as shown in the press
notice for this particular work. The bid security shall be in favour of The Executive Engineer,
PCC Division, Dispur, Guwahati Assam as named in Appendix and may be in one of the
following forms :
i)
Deleted.
ii)
Deleted
iii)
Bank Guarantee from any Nationalized Indian Bank, in the format given in section-8 in
favour of Executive Engineer, PCC Division, Dispur, Guwahati-6 (A written confirmation
in the Bank’s letterhead confirming the authenticity of the Guarantee shall be furnished
along with the Guarantee)
iv)
Fixed Deposit Receipt issued by any nationalized / schedule Indian Bank or a foreign
Bank approved by R.B.I. acceptable to the employer.
16.2
Bank guarantees (and other instruments having fixed validity) issued as security for the bid
shall be valid for 45 days beyond the validity of the bid.
16.3
Any bid not accompanied by an acceptable Bid Security and not secured as indicated in SubClause 16.1 and Sub Clause 16.2 above shall be rejected by the Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.),
Chandmari, Guwahati – 3 as non-responsive.
16.4
The bid Security of unsuccessful bidders will be retuned within 28 days of the end of the validity
period specified in Sub Clause 15.1.
16.5
The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be discharged when the bidder has signed the
Agreement and furnished the Performance Security.
16.6
The Bid Security may be forfeited :a)
If the Bidder withdraws the Bid after Bid opening during the period of Bid Validity;
b)
If the Bidder does not accept the correction of the Bid Price, pursuant to Clause 27; or
c)
In the case of a successful Bidder, if the Bidder fails within the specified time limit to :
i)
Sign the Agreement; or.
25
17.0.
ii)
Furnish the required Performance Security.
Alternative Proposals by Bidders
17.1.
Bidders shall submit offers that fully comply with the requirements of the bidding documents,
including the conditions of contract (Time for completion), basic technical design as indicated
in the drawing and specifications. Conditional offers or alternative offers will not be considered
further in the process of bid evaluation.
18.
Format and Signing of Bid
18.1.
The Bidder shall prepare one original and one copy of the documents comprising the bid as
described below in Clause 12 of these Instruction to Bidders, bound with the volume containing
the “Technical Bid” in separate parts and clearly marked “ORIGINAL” and “COPY” as
appropriate. In event of discrepancy between them, the original shall prevail. “Financial Bid”
shall be submitted online.
18.2.
The Original copy of bid shall be typed or written in indelible ink and shall be signed by a
person or persons duly authorized to sign on behalf of the Bidder, pursuant to Sub-Clause 4.3,
4.4 and 4.5(B). All pages of the bid where entries or amendments have been made shall be
initialed by person signing the bid.
18.3.
The Bid shall contain no alterations or additions, except those to comply with instructions
issued by the Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati-3, or as necessary to correct
errors made by the Bidder, in which case such corrections shall be initialized by the person or
persons signing the bid.
26
D. SUBMISSION OF BIDS
19.0.
Sealing and Marking of Bids
19.1.
The Bidder shall seal the original and copy of the Bid in separate envelopes, duly marking the
envelopes as “ORIGINAL” and “COPY”. These two envelopes (called as inner envelopes) shall
then be put inside one outer envelope. Each set of the inner envelopes marked “ORIGINAL”
and “COPY” shall contain within sealed envelopes marked as “Technical Bid” with additional
markings as follows :
.
“Original or Copy”, as the case may be
Bid to be opened on 20-04-2015 at 11:01 Hrs.
The contents of Bid will be as specified in Clause 12.1.
19.2.
The inner and outer and separate enveloped containing Technical shall
(a)Be addressed to the Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati-3
(b)
Bear the identification as indicated in Appendix-I
19.3.
In addition to the identification required in Sub-Clause 19.1 and 19.2, each of the enveloped
shall indicate the name and address of the bidder to enable the bid to be returned unopened
incase it is declared late, pursuant to Clause 21, or the Evaluation Committee declares the Bid
as non-responsive pursuant to Clause 23.
19.4.
If the outer envelope is not sealed and marked as above, the Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.),
Chandmari, Guwahati - 3 will assume no responsibility for the misplacement or premature
opening of the bid.
19.5
The Financial Bid along with the Form of Bid as specified in section-7 shall be submitted online.
20.
Deadline for Submission of Bids
20.1.
Complete Bids (including Technical and Financial Bids) must be received by the Chief Engineer,
PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati-3 at the address specified above not later than the date
indicated in Appendix-I. In the event of the specified date for the submission of bids declared
as holiday on the date of receipt of the bids as specified the bids will be received and opened
on the next working day at the same time and venue.
20.2
The Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati-3 may extend the deadline for
submission of bids by issuing an amendment in accordance with Clause 10, in which case all
rights and obligations of the chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati-3 and the
Bidders previously subject to original deadline will then be subject to the new deadline.
27
21.
Late Bids
21.1.
Any Bid received late by the Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati -3 after the
deadline prescribed in Clause 20 will be returned unopened to the bidder.
22.
Modifications and Withdrawal of Bids
22.1
Deleted
22.2
Each Bidder’s modification or withdrawal notice shall be prepared, sealed, marked, and
delivered in accordance to Clause 18 & 19, with the outer and inner envelopes additionally
marked “MODIFICATION” or “WITHDRAWAL” as appropriate.
22.3
No bid may be modified after the Deadline for submission of bids except in pursuance of Clause
- 23.
22.4
Withdrawal or modification of a Bid between the deadline for submission of bids and the
expiration of the original period of bid validity specified in Clause 15.1 above or as extended to
Clause 15.2 may result in the forfeiture of Bid Security pursuant to Clause 16.6.
28
E.BID OPENING AND EVALUATION
23.
Bid Opening
23.1
The Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati - 3 will open all the Bids received
(except those received late), including modifications made pursuant to Clause 22, in the
presence of the Bidders or their representatives who choose to attend at time, date and the
place specified in Appendix-I in the manner specified in Clause 20 and 23.3. In the event of
specified date of Bid opening being declared a holiday on the date of receipt of the bids as
specified the bids will be received and opened on the next working day at the same time and
venue.
23.2
Envelope marked “WITHDRAWAL” shall be opened and read out first. Bids for which an
acceptance notice of withdrawal has been submitted pursuant to Clause 22 shall not be
opened.
23.3
The envelope “Technical Bid” shall be opened. The amount, form and validity of the Bid
security furnished with each bid will be announced. If the bid security furnished does not
conform to the amount and validity period as specified in the Invitation for Bid, and has not
been furnished in the form specified in Clause 16, the bid shall be returned to the bidder.
23.4
i)
Subject to confirmation of the bid security by the issuing Bank, the bid
accompanied with valid bid security will be taken up for evaluation with respect to the
Qualification information and other information furnished in Part I if the bid pursuant
to Clause 12.1.
ii)
After receipt to confirmation of the bid security, the bidder will be asked in writing
(usually) within 10 days of opening of the Technical Bid) to clarify or modify his
technical bid, if necessary, with respect to any rectifiable defects.
Tiii)
The bidders will respond in not more than 7 days of issue of the clarification letter, which
will also indicate the date, time and venue of opening of the financial bid (usually on 21st
day of opening of the technical bid).
iv)
Immediately (usually within 3 or 4 days), on receipt of these clarifications the Evaluation
Committee will finalize the list of responsive bidders, whose financial bids are eligible
for consideration.
23.5
If, as a consequence of the modification carried out by the bidder. In response to sub-clause
23.4, the bidders desire to modify their financial bid; they will submit the modification in
separate sealed envelope so as to reach the Employer’s address (refer sub-clause 19.2) before
the opening of the Technical Bid/financial bid as intimated in the clarification letter (refer subclause 23.4). The envelope shall have clear marking “MODIFICATION TO BID – Not to be
opened except with the approval of the
Evaluation Committee”.
23.6
At the time of opening of “Bid”, the name of the bidders will be announced. The Bidders
Names, the Bid prices, the total amount of each bid, any discounts, Bid modifications and
withdrawals, and such others details as the Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati-
29
3 may consider appropriate, will be announced by the Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari,
Guwahati-3 at the opening. Any bid price or discounts, which is not read out recorded will not
be taken into account in Bid Evaluation. The Bidders responsiveness to the Bids will be
examined as per Clause 26.2. Only the responsive bidders’ Bids will be evaluated.
23.7.
Deleted.
23.8.
The Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati-3 shall prepare minutes of the Bid
opening, including the information disclosed to those present in accordance with Sub-Clause
23.6.
24.
Process to be Confidential
24.1.
Information relating to the examination, clarification, evaluation and comparison of Bids and
recommendations for the award of a contract shall not be disclosed to Bidders or any other
person officially concerned with such process until the award to the successful Bidder has been
announced. Any effort by a Bidder to influence the Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari,
Guwahati-3’s processing of Bids or award decision may result in the rejection of his Bid.
25.
Clarification of Financial Bids
25.1
To assist in the examination, evaluation and comparison of Bids, the chief Engineer, PWD
(Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati-3 may, at his discretion, ask any Bidder for clarification of his bid,
including breakdowns of unit rates. The request for clarification and the response shall be in
writing or by cable, but no change in the price or substance of the Bid shall be sought, offered,
or permitted except as required to confirm the correction of arithmetic errors discovered by
the Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati-3 in the evaluation of the Bids in
accordance with Clause 27.
25.2
Subject to sub-clause 25.1, no Bidders shall contact the Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.),
Chandmari, Guwahati-3 on any matter relating to his bid from the time of the bid opening to
the time the contract is awarded. If the Bidders wish to bring additional information to the
notice of the Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati-3, it should do so in writing.
25.3
Any effort by the Bidders to influence the chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati-3
in the Chief Engineer , PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati-3’s bid evaluation, bid comparisons
or contract award decisions may result in the rejection of the Bidders’ bid.
26.
Examination of Bids and Determination of Responsiveness
26.1
Deleted.
26.2
A substantially responsive “Bid” in one, which conforms to all the terms, conditions, and
specifications of bidding documents, without material deviation or reservation. A material
deviation or reservation is one (a) which affects in any substantial way the scope, quality, or
performance of the works; (b) which limits in any substantial way, inconsistent with the Bidding
documents, the Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati-3’s right or the Bidder’s
obligations under the contract; or (c) whose rectification would affect unfairly the competitive
position of other Bidders presenting substantially responsive Bids.
26.3
If a “Bid” is not substantially responsive, it will be rejected by the Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.),
30
27.
27.1
27.2.
Chandmari, Guwahati-3 and may not subsequently be made responsive by correction or
withdrawals of the non-conforming deviation or reservation.
Correction of Errors
“Bids” determined to be substantially responsive will be checked by the Chief Engineer, PWD
(Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati-3 for any arithmetic errors. Errors will be corrected by the Chief
Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati-3 as follows :
a)
Where there is a discrepancy between the rates in figures and in words, the rate in
words will govern; and
b)
Where there is a discrepancy between the unit rate and the line item total resulting
from multiplying the unit rate by the quantity, the unit rate as quoted will govern.
The amount stated in the “Bid” will be corrected by the Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.),
Chandmari, Guwahati-3 in accordance with the above procedure and the bid amount adjusted
with the concurrence of the Bidder in the following manner :
a)
If the Bid price increases as a result of this correction, the amount as stated in the bid
will be the `bid price’ and the increase will be treated as rebate;
b)
If the Bid price decreases as a result of this correction, the decreased amount will be
the “bid price”. Such adjusted bid price shall be considered as binding upon the Bidder.
If the Bidder does not accept the corrected amount the Bid will be rejected, and the
Bid security may be forfeited in accordance with Sub-Clause 16.6(b).
28.
Deleted.
29.
Evaluation and Comparison of Bids
29.1.
The chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati-3 will evaluate and compare only the
Bids determine to be substantially responsive in accordance with Sub-Clause 26.2.
29.2.
In evaluating the Bids the Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati-3 will determine
for each Bid the evaluated Bid Price by adjusting the Bid Price as follows :
a)
Making any correction for errors pursuant to Clause 27; or
b)
Making an appropriate adjustments for any other acceptable variations, deviations;
and
c)
Making appropriate adjustments to reflect discounts or other price modifications
offered in accordance with Sub-Clause 23.6.
29.3.
The Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati-3 reserves the right to accept or reject
any variation or deviation. Variations and deviations and other factors, which are in excess of
the requirements of the Bidding documents or otherwise results in unsolicited benefits for the
Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.),Chandmari, Guwahati-3 shall not be taken into account in Bid
evaluation.
29.4.
The estimated effect of the price adjustment during the period of implementation of the
contract will not be taken into account in Bid evaluation.
31
29.5.
If the Bid of the successful Bidder is seriously unbalanced in relation to the Department’s
estimate of the cost of work to be performed under the contract, the Chief Engineer, PWD
(Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati – 3 may require the Bidder to produce detailed price analysis for
any or all item of the Bill of Quantities, to demonstrate the internal consistency of those prices
with the construction methods and schedule proposed. After evaluation of the amount of the
performance security set forth in Clause 34 be increased at the expense of the successful
Bidder to a level sufficient to protect the Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati-3
against financial loss in the event of default of the successful Bidder under the Contract.
29.6.
If a bid contains several items in the Bill of Quantities, which are unrealistically priced low, and
which cannot be substantiated satisfactorily by the bidder, may be rejected as non-responsive.
30.
Deleted.
32
F. AWARD OF CONTRACT
31.
Award Criteria
31.1.
Subject to Clause 32, the chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati-3 will award the
Contract to the Bidder whose Bids has been determined.
i)
To be substantially responsive to the Bidding documents and who has offered the
lowest evaluated Bid pursuant to Clause 29 provided further that the bidder has the
capability and resources to carry out the contract effectively.
ii)
To be within the available Bid capacity adjusted to account for his quoted bid price.
iii)
The work shall be awarded at the lowest responsive bid price.
In no case, the contract shall be awarded to any bidder whose available bid capacity is less
than the evaluated bid price, even if the said bid is the lowest evaluated bid. The contract will
in such case be awarded to the next lowest bidder at his evaluated bid.
31.2
Deleted.
32.
Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati-3’s right to accept any Bid and to reject
any or all Bids.
32.1
Notwithstanding Clause 31, the Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati-3 reserves the
right to accept or reject any Bid and to cancel the Bidding process and reject all bids, at any time
prior to the awards of Contract, without thereby incurring any liability to the affected Bidder or
Bidders or any obligations to inform the affected Bidder or Bidders of the grounds for the chief
Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati-3’s actions.
33.
Notification of Award and Signing of Agreement.
33.1
The Bidders whose Bid has been accepted will be notified for the award by the Chief Engineer,
PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati - 3 prior to expiration of the Bid validity period by cable,
telex or facsimile confirmed by registered letter. This letter (hereinafter and in the Condition of
Contract called the “Letter of Acceptance”) will state the sum that the Chief Engineer, PWD
(Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati-3 will pay the Contractor in consideration of the execution,
completion and maintenance of the Works by the Contractor as prescribed by the contract
(hereinafter and in the Contract called the “Contract Price”).
33.2
The notification of award will constitute the formation of the Contract, subject only to the
furnishing of a performance security in accordance with the provisions of Clause 34.
33.3
The agreement will incorporate all agreements between the Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.),
Chandmari, Guwahati-3 and the Successful Bidder. Within 21days of receipt of the “Letter of
Acceptance”, the successful Bidder will deposit the requisite Performance Security and attend
before the Chief Engineer, P.W.D. (Building) to sign the Agreement and deliver it to the Chief
Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati-3.
33.4
Upon the furnishing of the Performance security by the successful Bidder, the Chief Engineer,
PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati-3 will promptly notify the other Bidders that their Bids have
been unsuccessful.
34.
Performance Security
33
34.1
Within 21 days of receipt of the Letter of Acceptance, the successful Bidder shall deliver to the
Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati - 3, a Performance Security in any of the
form given below for an amount equivalent to 5% of the Contract price plus additional security
for unbalanced Bids in accordance with Clause 29.5 of ITB Clause - 52 of Conditions of Contract.
A bank guarantee in the form given in section 6 :
If the performance security is provided by the successful Bidder in the form of a Bank
Guarantee, it shall be issued at the Bidder’s option, by a Nationalized Indian Bank, prepared in
non-judicial stamp paper of specified value.
34.2
Failure of the successful Bidder to comply with the requirements of Sub-Clause 34.1. shall
constitute sufficient grounds for cancellation of the award and forfeiture of the Bid security.
35.
Advance Payment and Security
35.1.
The Executive Engineer of the concerned Division will provide an advance Payment as
stipulated in the conditions of Contract, subject to maximum amount, as stated in the Contract
Data. However such advance will be subject to fund made available.
36.
.
Dispute Review Experts
36.1.
The Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati-3 proposes that ( name of proposed
Dispute Review Expert in Appendix - I) be appointed as Disputes Review Expert under the
Contract, at a daily fee plus reimbursable expenses. If the Bidders disagree with this proposal,
the Bidders should so state in the Bids.
37.
.
Corrupt or Fraudulent Practices
37.1.
The Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati - 3 will reject a proposal for award if it
determine that the Bidder recommended for award has engaged in corrupt or fraudulent in
competing for the contract in question and will declare the firm ineligible, either indefinitely or
for a stated period of time to be awarded a contract with CPWD / APWD and any other
agencies, if it at any time determines that the firm has engaged in corrupt or fraudulent
practices in competing for the contractor, or in execution.
37.2
Furthermore, Bidders shall be aware of the provision stated in Sub-Clause 25.3 and Sub-Clause
- 59.2 of the Condition of Contract.
34
APPENDIX – I
( PRIME QUALIFICATION INFORMATION )
1.
Name of the Employer is: Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.) Assam, Chandmari, Guwahati – 3.
(Cl. 1.1)
2.
The Total Volume of Interior work performed in the last five years :
i)
2009 – 2010
ii)
2010 – 2011
iii)
2011 – 2012
iv)
2012– 2013
v)
2013– 2014
3.
The annual minimum average financial turn over amount is Rs. 16.00 crore
(Rupees sixteen crore) only over the last five years.
(Cl. 4.5A (a))
4.
Value of completed work of similar nature
(Cl. 4.5A (c))
Rs.16 Crores - In case of single order / In multiple order limiting the
maximum number of orders to the number of stories in single Building.
5.
Deleted
(Cl. 4.5A (d))
6.
Liquid assets and / or availability of credit facilities is 10% of Bid Value
(Cl. 4.5B (c))
7.
Deleted
8.
The pre bid meeting will take place at the Office of the CE, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari,
Guwahati - 3 on 10-04-2015 at 14-00 Hours.
9.
The Bids will be opened at the Office of the CE, PWD (Bldg.) Chandmari,
Guwahati - 3 on 20-04-2015 at 11-01Hours.
10.
Address of the Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati - 3
Office of the Chief Engineer, PWD (B), Chandmari, Guwahati - 781003, Assam.
11.
Identification :
i)
Construction work of the proposed New Assam Legislative Assembly Building at
Dispur with Budgetary cost estimate & revised Design proposal (Interior works for
Assembly Main Building)
35
ii)
Bid reference No.CS/T/BD/8/2013/46 Dated Guwahati-17-03-2015
iii)
.
Do not open before 11:01Hours of 20-04-2015
iv)
The bid should be submitted latest by 14:00 Hours on 18-04-2015
12.
The Bid Security should be drawn in favour of the Executive Engineer, PWD, PCC Division,
Dispur, Guwahati – 781 003, Assam.
13.
The name of Dispute Review Expert –
14
Updating factors for updating work value of single building project executed during last five
years.
Year before
Multiply factor
One
1.10
Two
1.21
Three
1.33
Four
1.46
Five
1.61
36
APPENDIX – II
( LIST OF KEY PLANT & EQUIPMENT TO BE DEPLOYED ON CONTRACT WORK )
[ Reference Cl. 4.5 (B) (a) ]
Sl
No.
Maximum age as on
March’2014 (Years) Required
Type of Equipment
1.0
Wood Planning machine.
2
4 Nos
2.0
Wood moulding and carving machine.
2
2 Nos
3.0
Wood lathe machine.
2
3 Nos
4.0
Concrete drilling machine
a) Pneumatic.
3.
4 Nos
b) Electrical.
3
4 Nos
5.0
Timber steam seasoning equipments and pressure
chamber.
1
1 Set.
6.0
Timber preservation treatment vat.
2
2 Sets.
7.0
Floor Grinding Machine.
2
6 Nos.
8.0
Hand Grinding Machine.
2
4 Nos.
9.0
Mirror Polish Grinder.
2
2 Sets.
10.
Spray painting equipments.
2
4 Sets.
11.
Palette Painting equipments.
2
4 Sets.
12.
Welding machine.
2
2 Sets.
13.
Steel grinders (Hand & stationery).
2
4 Sets.
14.
Equipments / grinders for stone relief works.
1
4 Sets.
Table - 2
The bidder hereby confirms that the quality and type of equipments, he will deploy for construction
will not be less than listed in Appendix – II and agreed to bring more equipments, if so warranted, in
the opinion of the Engineer at no extra cost to the Chief Engineer, P.W.D. (Building).
NB: The bidder should owned or should have assured ownership to the key items of equipment in full
working order and must demonstrate that based on known commitment, they will be available for use
in the proposed contract.
37
APPENDIX – III
( LIST OF KEY PERSONNEL TO BE DEPLOYED ON CONTRACT WORK )
[ Reference Cl. 4.5 (B) (b) ]
Sl
No.
1
Personnel
2
1.0
Project Manager
2.0
Site Engineer
3.0
Qualification
3
Nos. Required
4
B.E. Civil + 10 years experience
(5 years as Manager)
1
Diploma in Civil + 15 years experience
B.E. Civil + 10 years experience
or (5 years as in Interior works.)
2
Electrical Engineer
B.E. Elect. + 10 years experience
2
4.0
Interior Decorators
Diploma in interior decoration + 10
years experience in interior decoration
works.
4
5.0
Interior works supervisor
Interior works supervision. Certificate
+ 5 years experience.
4
6.0
Quality Assurance Engineer
B.E Civil + 5 years Experience or
Diploma Civil + 10 years Exp.
1
7.0
Other Staff (Supervisor,
Overseers, Office Assistant,
Foreman, Machine Operator
etc.
15
TOTAL
……….
29
Table - 3
N.B :The bidder should submit the Bio data of the Key personnel as above with attested copies of
certificates in support of their qualification and their experience and their consent letters (not more
than one month old) for working on behalf of the contractor for work concerned.
38
SECTION 2
QUALIFICATION INFORMATION
39
QUALIFICATION INFORMATION
The information to be filled in by the Bidder in the following pages will be used for purposes of post
qualification as provided for in Clause 4 of the Instruction to Bidders. The information will not be
incorporated to the Contract.
For Individual Bidders
1.
Constitution or legal status of Bidder ( Attach Copy )
Place of Registration :
Principal Place of Business :
Power of Attorney of Signatory of Bid (Attach)
Total value of Civil Engineering Construction
Work performed in the last five years
(In Rs. Crore)
2009-2010
2010-2011
2011-2012
2012-2013
2013-2014
(Attach Certificate from Chartered
Accountant)
1.2.1. Work performed as prime contractor, work performed in the past as a nominated subcontractor will also be considered provided the sub-contract involved execution of all
main items of work described in the bid document, provided further that all other
qualification criteria are satisfied (in the same name) on works of a similar nature over
the last five years.
1
Name of
the
Employer
Description of
work
Contract
No.
Value of
Contract
(Rs.
Crore)
Date of
Issue of
Work
order
Stipulated
period
of completion
2
3
4
5
6
7
Table – 4
Actual
date of
completion
(Attach
certificate
from
Engineerin Charge
8
Remarks
explaining
reasons for
delay &
work
completed
9
40
1.3.2. Quantities of work executed as prime contractor, work performed in the past as a
nominated sub-contractor, will also be considered provided the sub-contract involved
execution of all main items of work described in the bid document, provided further that
all other qualification criteria are satisfied ( in the same name and style ) in the last five
years.
Quantity of work performed
( Cu.m) Remarks
Year
Name of
the work
1
Name of
the
Employer
Cement Concrete
(including RCC &
PCC.)
Brick Work
3
4
5
2
Steel
Reinforcement
6
Remarks
(indicate
contract
Ref.) (Attach
Certificate
from Engineerin-Charge)
7
2009-2010
2010-2011
2011-2012
2012-2013
2013-2014
Table - 5
1.4
Information of Bid Capacity (works for which bids have been submitted and works which
are yet to be completed) as on date of this bid.
A)
Existing Commitments and on-going works :
Description
works
Place
&
State
Contract
No.
Name &
Address
of
Employer
1
2
3
4
Value of
Contract
(Rs.)
Stipulated
Period of
Completion
5
Total =
Table - 6
6
Value of
Work
Remaining
to be
completed
(Rs.)
7
Anticipated
date of
completion
8
41
B)
Works for which bids are already submitted :
Description
works
Place &
State
1
Name &
Address of
Employer
2
3
Estimated
Value of
Works (Rs.
Crore)
4
Stipulated
Period of
Completion
Date when
Decision is
expected
5
Remarks
If any
6
7
Table - 7
1.5
Availability of key items of Contractor’s Equipment essential for carrying out the works
(Ref. Clause – 4.5(B)(a)]. The Bidder should list all the information requested below.
Refer also to Sub-Clause 4.3 (iv) of the Instruction to Bidders.
Item of
Equipment
1
Wood Plaining
machine.
Wood moulding and
carving machine
Wood lathe machine
Concrete drilling
machine
(Pneumatic)
Concrete drilling
machine (Electrical)
Timber steam
seasoning
equipments and
pressure chamber.
Timber preservation
treatment vat.
Floor Grinding
Machine.
Hand Grinding
Machine.
Mirror Polish
Grinder.
Spray painting
equipments.
Palette Painting
equipments.
Welding machine.
Steel grinders (Hand
& stationery).
Equipments /
grinders for stone
Requirement
No. Capacity
2
3
Availability Proposals
Owned/Leased
Nos./
Age/
to be Procured
Capacity
Condition
4
5
6
Remarks
(From whom
to be
purchased)
7
42
relief works.
Table - 8
NB: The bidder should owned or should have assured ownership to the key items of equipment in full
working order and must demonstrate that based on known commitment, they will be available for use
in the proposed contract.
.6
Qualifications and experience of key personnel required for administration and Execution
of the contract [Ref. Clause 4.5(B)(b)]. Attach biographical data. Refer also to Sub-Clause 4.3 (v)
of instructions to Bidders and Sub-Clause 9.1 of the Conditions of Contract.
Position
Name
Qualification
Year of
Experience
1
2
3
4
Year of
Experience in the
proposed position
5
Project Manager
Site Engineer
Electrical Engineer
Interior Decorators
Interior works
supervisor
Quantity Assurance
Engineer
Other Staff (supervisor,
Overseers, office
assistant, Foreman,
Machine Operator etc.)
Table - 9
1.7
Proposed Sub-contracts and firms involved, (Refer IITB Clause 4.3 (xi)]
Sanctions of the
Works
1
Value of Sub-Contract
2
Sub-Contractor
(Name & Address)
3
Experience in
similar work
4
Table - 10
1.8
Financial reports for the last five years; balance sheets, profit and loss statements, auditor’s
reports (in case of companies/corporation), etc. List them below and attach copies.
1.9
Evidence of access to financial resources to meet the qualification requirements; cash in
Hand, lines of credit, etc. List them below and attach copies of support documents.
43
1.10.
Name, address and telephone, telex and fax numbers of the bidder’s bankers who may provide
references if contacted by the Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati – 3.
1.11.
Information of litigation history in which the Bidder is involved.
Order Party
Employer
Cause of Dispute
1
2
3
Amount
involved
4
Remark showing
present status
5
Table - 11
1.12.
Statement of compliance under the requirements of Sub-Clause - 3.2 of the instructions to
Bidders. ( name of Consultant engaged for project preparation is M/s. Dulal Mukherjee &
Associates, 28B, Shakespeare Sarani, Kolkata – 700 017 (email : [email protected])
(Web : www.dmaindia.org).
1.13.
Proposed work method and schedule. The bidder should attach descriptions, drawings and
charts as necessary to comply with the requirements of the Bidding Documents. (Refer ITB
Clause 4.1 & 4.3 (xii)].
1.14.
Programme.
1.15.
Quality Assurance Programme.
2.
Deleted.
3.
Additional Requirements
3.1
Bidders should provide any additional information required to fulfill the requirements of
Clause – 4 of Information to Bidders, if applicable.
I.
Affidavit.
II.
Undertaking.
III.
Authority to seek reference from Bidders Banker
44
SECTION 3
CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
45
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT ( G.C.C.)
A.
GENERAL
1.
Definitions
1.1.
Terms which are defined in the Contract Data are not also defined in the Conditions of
Contract but deep their defined meanings. Capital.
The Adjudicator will be a Dispute Review Board jointly appointed by the Employer and the
Contractor to resolve disputes as provided for in Clauses 24 and 25. The name of the
Adjudicator is defined in the Contract Data.
Bill of Quantities means the priced and completed Bill of Quantities forming part of the Bid.
Compensation Events are those defined in Clause 44 hereunder.
The Completion Date is the date of completion of the Works as certified by the Engineer in
accordance with Sub Clause 55.1.
The Contract is the contract between the Employer and the Contractor to design, plan and
execute complete and maintain the Works. It consists of the documents listed in Clause - 2.3
below.
The Contract Data defines the “documents and other information which comprise the
Contract.
The Contractor is a person or corporate body whose Bid to carry out the Works has been
accepted by the Employer.
The Contractor’s Bid is the completed Bidding document submitted by the Contractor to the
Employer includes Technical and Financial bids.
The Contract Price is the price stated in the Letter of Acceptance and thereafter as adjusted in
accordance with the provisions of the Contract.
Days are calendar days; months are calendar months.
A Defects Liability Period is the period named in the Contract Data and calculated from the
Completion Date.
The Employer is the Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati - 3, Assam.
The “Engineer” is the Executive Engineer, PWD, PCC Division, Dispur, Guwahati, Assam who is
responsible of supervising the Contractor, administering the Contract, certifying payments due to
the Contractor issuing and valuing Variations to the Contract, awarding extensions of time, and
valuing the Compensation Events.
Equipment is the contractor’s machinery and vehicles brought temporarily to the Site to
construct the Works.
The Initial Contract Price is the Contract Price listed in the Employer’s Letter of Acceptance.
46
The Intended Completion Date is the date on which it is intended that the Contractor shall
complete the Works. The Intended Completion Date is specified in the Contract Data. The
Intended Completion Date may be revised only by the Engineer by issuing an extension of
time.
Materials are all supplies, including consumables, used by the contractor for incorporation in
the Works.
Plant is any integral part of the Works that is to have a mechanical, electrical, electronic or
chemical or biological function.
The Site is the area defined as such in the Contract Data.
Site Investigation Reports are those, which were included in the bidding documents and are
factual interpretative reports about the surface and sub-surface conditions at the site.
Specification means the Specification of the Works included in the contract and any
modification or addition made or approved by the Engineer.
The Start Date is given in the Contract Data. It is the date when the Contractor shall
commence execution of the works. It does not necessarily coincide with any of the Site
Possession Dates.
A Subcontractor is a person or corporate body who has a Contract with the Contractor to
carry out a part of the work in the Contract, which includes work on the Site.
Temporary Works are works designed, constructed, installed , and removed by the
contractor, which are needed for construction or installation of the Works
A Variation is an instruction given by the Engineer, which varies the Works.
The Works are what the contract requires the Contractor to construct, install, and turn over
to the Employer, as defined in the Contract Data.
2.
Interpretation
2.1
In interpreting these Conditions of Contract, singular also means Plural, male also means
female or neuter, and the other way around. Headings have no significance. Works have their
normal meaning under the language of the Contract unless specifically defined. The Engineer
will provide instructions clarifying queries about the Conditions of Contract.
2.2
If sectional completion is specified in the Contract Data, references in the conditions of
Contract to the Works, the Completion Date, and the Intended Completion Date apply to any
Section of the Works (other than references to the Completion Date and Intended Completion
date for the whole of the Works).
2.3
The documents forming the contract shall be interpreted in the following order of priority :
1)
Agreement.
2)
Letter of Acceptance, notice to proceed with the works.
47
3.
3)
Contractor’s Bid.
4)
Contract Data.
5)
Conditions of Contract including Special Conditions of Contract.
6)
Specifications.
7)
Drawings.
8)
Bill of quantities and
9)
Any other document listed in the Contract in the Contract Data as forming part of the
Contract.
Language and Law
3.1. The language of the Contract and the law governing the Contract are stated in
the Contract Data.
4.
Engineer’s Decisions
4.1. Except where otherwise specifically stated, the Engineer will decide contractual matters
between the Employer and the Contractor in the role representing the Employer.
5.
Delegation
5.1. The Engineer may delegate any of his duties and responsibilities to other people except
to the Adjudicate after notifying the Contractor and may cancel any delegation after
notifying the Contractor.
6.
Communications
6.1. Communications between parties which are referred to in the conditions are
effective only when in writing. A notice shall be effective only when it is delivered
( in terms of Indian Contract Act ).
7.
Sub-contracting
7.1.
8.
The Contractor may sub-contract up to a limit of 20% work as specified in contract data,
with the approval of the Executive Engineer, PWD, Assam, PCC Division, Dispur, Division,
Guwahati - 6 but may not assign the Contract without the approval of the Employer in
writing Sub-contracting does not alter the Contractor’s obligations.
Other Contractors
8.1. The Contractor shall cooperate and share the Site with other contractors, public
authorities, utilities, and the Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati -3,
48
Assam, between the dates given in the Schedule of other Contracts. The Contractor shall
as referred to in the Contract Data, also provide facilities and services for them as
described in the Schedule. The Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati - 3,
Assam may modify the schedule of other contractors and shall notify the contractor of
any such modification.
9.
Personnel
9.1. The Contractor shall employ the key personnel named in the Schedule of Key Personnel
as referred to in the contract Data to carry out the functions stated in the Schedule or
other personnel approved by the Engineer. The Engineer will approve any proposed
replacement of key personnel only if their qualifications, abilities, and relevant
experience are substantially equal to or better than those of the personnel listed in the
Schedule.
9.2. If the Engineer asks the Contractor to remove a person who is a member of the
Contractor’s staff or his work force stating the reasons the Contractor shall ensure that
the person leaves the Site within seven days and has no further connection with the
work in the Contract.
10.
Employer’s and Contractor’s Risks
10.1. The Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati - 3, Assam carries the risks
which this Contract states are contractor’s risks, and the contractor carries the risks,
which this Contract states are contractor’s risks.
11.
Employer’s Risks
11.1.
12.
Contractor’s Risks
12.1.
13.
The Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati - 3, Assam is responsible for the
excepted risks which are (a) in so far as they directly affect the execution of the works
in India, the risks of war, hostilities, invasion, act of foreign enemies, rebellion,
revolution, insurrection or military or usurped power, civil war, riot commotion or
disorder (unless restricted to the Contractor’s employees), and contamination from
any nuclear fuel or nuclear waste or radioactive toxic explosive, or (b) a cause due
solely to the design of the Works, other than the Contractor’s design.
All risks of loss of or damage to physical property and of personal injury and death
which arise during and in consequence of the performance of the Contract other than
the excepted risks are the responsibility of the Contractor.
Insurance
13.1. The Contractor shall provide, in the joint names of the Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.) ,
Chandmari, Guwahati-3, Assam and the Contractor, insurance cover from the Start Date
to the end of the Defects Liability Period, in the amounts and deductibles stated in the
Contract Data for the following events which are due to the contractor’s risks :
a)
Loss of or damage to the Works, Plant and Materials;
b)
Loss of or damage to Equipment;
49
c)
Loss of or damage of property (except the Works, plant, Materials and
Equipment) in connection with the contract; and
d)
Personal injury or death.
13.2
Policies and certificates for Insurance shall be delivered by the Contractor to the
Engineer for the Engineer’s approval before the Start Date. All such Insurance shall
provide for compensation to be payable in the types and proportions of currencies
required to rectify the loss or damage incurred.
13.3
If the Contractor does not provide any of the policies and certificates required, the
Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati-3, Assam may effect the insurance
which the Contractor should have provided and recover the premiums the Chief
Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati-3, Assam has paid from payments
otherwise due to the contractor or, if no payment is due, the payment of the Premiums
shall be a debt due.
13.4 Alterations to the terms of insurance shall not be made without the approval of the
Engineer.
13.5 Both parties shall comply with any conditions of the Insurance policies.
14.
Currency for payment
14.1.
15.
The currency of the contract is Indian Rupees.
Queries about the Contract Data
15.1 The Engineer will clarify queries on the Contract Data.
16.
Contractor to Construct the Works
16.1 The Contractor shall construct and install the Works in accordance with the Specification
and Drawings.
17.
The Works to be completed by the Intended Completion Date
17.1 The contractor may commence execution of the Works on the Start Date and shall carry
out the Works in accordance with the programmed submitted by the contractor, as
updated with the approval of the Engineer, and complete them by the Intended
Completion Date.
18.
Approval by the Engineer
18.1 The Contractor shall submit Specifications and Drawing showing the proposed
Temporary Works to the Engineer, who is to approve them if they comply with the
Specifications and Drawings.
50
18.2 The Contractor shall be responsible of design of Temporary Works.
19.
18.3
The Engineer’s approval shall not alter the Contractor’s responsibility for design of the
Temporary Works.
18.4
The Contractor shall obtain approval of third parties to the design of the Temporary
Works where required.
18.5
All Drawings prepared by the Contractor for the execution of the temporary or
permanent Works, are subject to prior approval by the Engineer before their use.
Safety
19.1
20.
Discoveries
20.1
21.
24.
The Chief Engineer, PWD ( Bldg. ), Chandmari, Guwahati - 3, Assam / The Executive
Engineer, PCC, Division, Dispur Guwahati - 6 shall give possession of the entire site at a
time or part by part in a phased manner to the Contractor as stated in contract data.
Access to the Site
22.1
23.
Anything of his topical or other interest or of significant value unexpectedly
discovered on the site is the property of the Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.),
Chandmari, Guwahati - 3, Assam. The Contractor is to notify the Engineer of such
discoveries and carry out the Engineer’s instructions for dealing with them.
Possession of the Site
21.1
22.
The Contractor shall be responsible of the safety of all activities on the Site.
The Contractor shall allow the Engineer and any person authorized by the Engineer
access to the Site, to any place where work in connection with the Contract is being
carried out or is intended to be carried out and to any place where materials or plant
are being manufactured / fabricated / assembled for the works.
Instructions
23.1
The Contractor shall carry out all instructions of the Engineer pertaining to works, which
comply with the applicable laws where the Site is located.
23.2
The Contractor shall permit the Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati - 3,
Assam to inspect the Contractor’s accounts and records relating to the performance of
the Contractor and to have them audited by auditors appointed by the Chief Engineer,
PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati - 3, Assam, if so required by the Employer
Disputes
24.1
If the Contractor believes that a decision taken by the Engineer was either outside the
authority given to the Engineer by the Contract or that the decision was wrongly taken,
51
the decision shall be referred to the dispute Review Board within 14 days of the
notification of the Engineer’s decision. If the decision is not referred to the Dispute
Review Board within 14 days of the notification of the Engineer’s decision, the matter
will be time barred.
25.
26.
Procedure for Disputes
25.1
The Dispute Review Board shall be constituted with three members, one from
Employer, One from Contractor and the other to be nominated jointly by the above two
members to give a decision in writing within 28 days of receipt of a notification of a
dispute.
25.2
The Dispute Review Board shall be paid daily at the rate specified in the Contract Data
together with reimbursable expenses of types specified in the Contract Data and the
cost shall be divided equally between the Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.),Chandmari,
Guwahati - 3, Assam and the Contractor, whatever decision is reached by the Dispute
Review Board. Either party may give notice to the other to refer a decision of the
Dispute Review Board to an Arbitrator within 28 days of the Dispute Review Board’s
written decision. If neither party refers the dispute to arbitration within the next 28
days, the Dispute Review Board’s decision will be final and binding.
25.3
The arbitration shall be conducted in accordance with the arbitration procedure stated
in the Special Conditions of Contract (SCC)
The Replacement of Dispute Review Board
26.1
Should any member of the Dispute Review Board resign or die, or should the
Chief Engineer, PWD ( Bldg. ), Chandmari, Guwahati - 3, Assam and the
Contractor agree that the Dispute Review Board is not fulfilling their functions in
accordance with the provisions of the Contract, a new Dispute Review Board
will be jointly appointed by the Chief Engineer, PWD ( Bldg. ), Chandmari,
Guwahati - 3, Assam and the contractor. In case of disagreement between the
Employer and the Contractor, within 30 days, the Dispute Review Board shall be
designated by the Appointing Authority designated in the Contract Data at the
request of either party, within 14 days of receipt of such request.
B.
27.
TIME CONTROL
Programme
27.1.
Within the time stated in the Contract Data the contractor shall submit to the
engineer for approval a Programme showing the general methods, arrangements,
order, timing for all the activities in the Works along with monthly cash flow
forecast.
27.2.
An update of the Programme shall be a programme showing the actual progress
achieved on each activity and the effect of the progress achieved on the timing of
the remaining work including any changes to the sequence of the activities.
52
28.
27.3.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, for approval, an updated Programme at
intervals no longer than the period stated in the Contract Data. If the Contractor
does not submit an updated Programme within this period, the Engineer may
withhold the amount stated in the Contract Data from the next payment certificate
and continue to withhold this amount until the next payment after the date on
which the overdue programme has been submitted.
27.4.
The Engineer’s approval of the programme shall not alter the Contractor’s
obligations. The Contractor may revise the Programme and submit it to the Engineer
again at any time. A revised Programme is to show the effect of Variations and
Compensation Events.
Extension of the Intended Completion Date
28.1.
The Engineer shall extend the Intended Completion Date if a Compensation Event
occurs or a Variation is issued which makes it impossible for Completion to be
achieved by the Intended Completion Date without the Contractor taking steps to
accelerate the remaining work and which would cause the Contractor to incur
additional cost.
28.2.
The Engineer shall decide whether and by how much to extend the Intended
Completion Date within 35 days of the Contractor asking the Engineer for decision
upon the effect of a Compensation Event or Variation and submitting full supporting
information. If the Contractor has failed to give early warning of a delay or has failed
to cooperate in dealing with a delay, the delay by this failure shall not be considered
in assessing the new Intended Completion Date.
28.3.
The Engineer shall within 14 days of receiving full justification from the contractor
for extension of Intended Completion Date refer to the Employer his decision. The
Employer shall in not more than 21 days communicate to the Engineer the
acceptance or otherwise of the Engineer’s decision.
29.
Deleted
30.
Delays Ordered by the Engineer
30.1
31.
The Engineer may instruct the Contractor to delay the start or progress of any
activity within the works.
Management meetings
31.1
Either the Engineer or the Contractor may require the other to attend a
management meeting. The business of a management meeting shall be to review the
plans for remaining work and to deal with matters raised in accordance with the
early warning procedure.
31.2
The Engineer shall record the business of management meetings and is to provide
53
copies of his record to those attending the meeting and to the Chief Engineer, PWD
(Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati-3, Assam. The responsibility of the parties of actions to
be taken is to be decided by the Engineer either at the management meeting or after
the management meeting and stated in writing to all who attended the meeting.
32.
Early Warning
32.1
The Contractor is to warn the Engineer at the earliest opportunity of specific likely
future events or circumstances that may adversely affect the quality of the work
increase the Contract Price or delay the execution of works. The Engineer may
require the Contractor to provide an estimate of the expected effect of the future
event or circumstance on the Contract Price and completion Date. The estimate is to
be provided by the Contractor as soon as reasonably possible.
32.2
The Contractor shall cooperate with the Engineer in making and considering
proposals for how the effect of such an event or circumstance can be avoided or
reduced by anyone involved in the work and in carrying out any resulting instruction
of the Engineer.
54
C.
33.
Identifying Defects
33.1
34.
36.
The Engineer shall check the Contractor’s work and notify the Contractor of any
defects that are found. Such checking shall not affect the contractor’s
responsibilities. The Engineer may instruct the Contractor to search for a Defect and
to uncover and test any work that the Engineer considers may have a defect.
Tests
34.1
35.
QUALITY CONTROL
If the Engineer instructs the Contractor to carry out a test not specified in the
Specification to check whether any work has a effect and the test shows that it does,
the Contractor shall pay for the test and any samples.
Correction of Defects
35.1
The Engineer shall give notice to the Contractor of any Defects before the end of the
Defects Liability Period, which begins at completion and is defined in the Contract
Data. The Defects Liability Period shall be extended for as long as Defects remain to
be corrected.
35.1
Every time notice of a Defect is given, the Contractor shall correct the notified Defect
within the length of time specified by the Engineer’s notice.
Uncorrected Defects
36.1
If the Contractor has not corrected a Defect within the time specified in the
Engineer’s notice, the Engineer will assess the cost of having the Defect corrected,
and the Contractor will pay this amount.
55
D.
37.
38.
COST CONTROL
Bill of Quantities
37.1
The Bill of Quantities shall contain items for the construction and installation, work
to be done by the Contractor.
37.2
The Bill of Quantities is used to calculate the Contract Price. The Contractor is paid
for the quantity of the work done at the rate in the Bill of Quantities for each item.
Changes in the Quantities
38.1
If the final quantity of the work done differs from the quantity in the Bill of
Quantities for the particular item by more than 25 percent provided the change is
attributed to the Department i.e., either the B.O.Q. is prepared by the department or
variation is due to change / modification ordered by the Department and the same
exceeds 1% of initial Contract Price, the Engineer shall adjust the rate to allow for the
change, duly considering,
a) Justification for rate adjustment as furnished by the contractor,
b) Economies resulting from increase in quantities by way of reduced plant,
equipment, and overhead costs.
c) Entitlement of contractor to compensation events where such events are caused
by any additional work.
39.
40.
38.2
The Engineer shall not adjust rates from changes in quantities if thereby the Initial
Contract Price is exceeded by more than 15 per cent, except with the prior approval
of the Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati-3, Assam.
38.3
If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a
detailed cost break down of any rate in the Bill of Quantities.
Variations
39.1
All Variations shall be included in updated Programmes produced by the Contractor.
39.2
The Engineer shall find out and evaluate all the probable variations in the early
period of the contract and submit the same to the Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.),
Chandmari, Guwahati - 3, Assam.
Payments for Variations
40.1
The contractor shall provide the Engineer with a quotation (with break down of unit
rates) for carrying out the Variation when requested to do so by the Engineer. The
Engineer shall assess the quotation, which shall be given within seven days of the
request or within any longer period stated by the Engineer and before the Variation
is ordered. The Engineer shall send the rate so assessed to the Chief Engineer, P.W.D.
(Bldg.), Assam for approval.
56
41.
40.2
If the work in the Variation corresponds with an item description in the Bill of
Quantities and if, in the opinion of Engineer, the quantity of work above the limit
stated in Sub Clause 38.1 or the; timing of its execution do not cause the cost per
unit of quantity to change, the rate in the Bill of quantities shall be used to calculate
the value of the Variation. If the Cost per unit of quantity changes, or if the nature or
timing of the work in the Variation does not correspond with items in the Bill of
Quantities, the quotation by the contractor shall be in the form of new rates for the
relevant items of work..
40.3
If the Contractor’s quotation is unreasonable, the Engineer may order the Variation
and make a change to the Contract Price, which shall be based on Engineer’s own
forecaster of the effects of the Variation on the contractor’s costs.
40.4
If the Engineer decides that the urgency of varying the work would prevent a
quotation being given and considered without delaying the work, the Engineer shall
allow the contractor to proceed with the work using materials having I.S. marks/
approved brand as specified in the A.P.W.D.S.O.R. obtained from approved dealers
of the company. The Engineer shall collect the quotation for himself and assess the
cost/ rate of the item considering all aspects and submit the same to the Chief
Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari,Guwahati-3, Assam for approval.
40.5
The contractor shall not be entitled to additional payment for costs, which could
have been avoided by giving early warning. No claim of any kind will be entertained
for delays in payments.
Cash Flow Forecasts
41.1
42.
When the Programme is updated, the contractor is to provide the Engineer with an
updated cash flow forecast.
Payment Certificates
42.1
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer monthly statements of the estimated
value of the work completed less the cumulative amount certified previously.
42.2
The Engineer shall check the Contractor’s monthly statement within 14 days and
certify the amount to be paid to the contractor after taking into account any credit
or debit for the month in question in respect of materials for the works in the
relevant amounts and under conditions set forth in sub-clause 51(3) of the Contract
Data (Secured advance). The payment will be made according to the availability of
fund.
42.3
The value of work executed shall be determined by the Engineer.
42.4
The value of work executed shall comprise the value of the quantities of the items in
the Bill of Quantities completed.
57
43.
44.
42.5
The value of work executed shall include the valuation of variations and
Compensation Events.
42.6
The Engineer may exclude any item certified in a previous certificate or reduce the
proportion of any item previously certified in any certificate in the light of later
information.
Payments
43.1
Payments shall be adjusted for deductions for advance payments, retention, other
recoveries in terms of the contract and taxes at source, as applicable under the law.
The Employer shall pay the Contractor the amounts certified by the Engineer within
a reasonable time subject to the availability of fund. The Engineer/ Employer shall
not delay the payment unreasonably (i.e., without valid reasons), if fund is available.
43.2
If an amount certified is increased in a later certificate as a result of an award by the
Dispute Review Board, the contractor shall be paid interest upon the delayed
payment as set out in this clause. Interest shall be calculated from the date upon
which the increased amount would have been certified in the absence of dispute.
The interest rate will be the Bank’s minimum lending rate prevailing at that time.
43.3
Items of the Works for which no rate or price has been entered in will not be paid for
by the Employer and shall be deemed covered by other rates and prices in the
contract.
43.4
Payments shall be made subject to availability of fund. The non-payment of bills
due to non-availability of fund will not be a ground for compensation or any other
claim whatsoever.
Compensation Events
44.1
The following are Compensation Events unless they are caused by the contractor.
a) The employer does not give access to a part of the Site by the site possession
date stated in the contract Data.
b) The Employer modifies the schedule of other contractors in a way, which affects
the work of the contractor under the contract.
c) Engineer orders a delay or does not issue drawings, specifications or instructions
required for execution of works on time.
d) The Deleted.
e) The Engineer unreasonably does not approve of a subcontract to be let, within
15 days.
f)
Deleted.
g) The Engineer gives an instruction for dealing with an unforeseen condition,
caused by the Employer, or additional work required for safety or other reasons.
h) Other contractors, public authorities, utilities or the Employer does not work
within the dates and other constraints stated in the contract, and they cause
58
delay or extra cost to the contractor.
i)
Deleted.
j)
The effect on the contractor or any of the Employer’s risks.
k) The Engineer unreasonably delays issuing a Certificate of Completion.
l)
45.
44.2
If compensation Event would cause additional cost or would prevent the work being
completed before the Intended Completion Time, the Date, the Contract price shall
be increased and / or the Intended Completion Date is extended. The Engineer shall
decide whether and by how much the Contract Price shall be extended.
44.3
As soon as information demonstrating the effect of each Compensation Event upon
the contractor, it is to be assessed by the Engineer and the contract price shall be
adjusted accordingly. If the Contractor’s forecast is deemed unreasonable the
Engineer shall adjust the contract price based on Engineer’s own forecast. The
Engineer will assume that the contractor will react competently and promptly to the
event.
44.4
The Contractor shall not be entitled to compensation to the extend that the
Employer’s interests are adversely affected by the Contractor not having given early
warning or not having cooperated with the Engineer.
Tax
45.1
46.
The rates quoted by the contractor shall be deemed to be inclusive of the VAT, sales,
labour cess and any other taxes that the Contractor will have to pay for the
performance of this contract. The Employer will perform such duties in regard to the
deduction of such taxes at source as per applicable law.
Currencies
46.1
47.
Other Compensation Events listed in the Contract Data or mentioned in the
Contract.
All payments shall be made in Indian rupees.
Price Adjustment
No price adjustment will be allowed during the contract period.
48.
Retention
48.1
The Employer shall retain from each payment due to the contractor the proportion
stated in the Contract Data until Completion of the whole of the Works.
48.2
On completion of whole of the Works half the total amount retained is repaid to the
Contractor and half when the Defects Liability Period has passed and the Engineer
has certified that all Defects notified by the Engineer to the Contractor before the
end of this period have been corrected.
48.3
On completion of the whole works, the contractor may substitute retention money
59
with an “on demand” Bank guarantee.
49.
Liquidated Damages
49.1
The Contractor shall pay liquidated damages to the Employer at the rate per day
stated in the contract data for each day that the completion date is later than the
intended completion date (for the whole of the works for the milestone as stated in
the contract data). The total amount of liquidated damages shall not exceed the
amount defined in the contract Data. The Employer may deduct liquidated damages
from payments due to the Contractor. Payment of liquidated damages does not
affect the Contractor’s liabilities.
49.2
If the Intended Completion Date is extended after liquidated damages have been
paid, the Engineer shall correct any overpayment of liquidated damages by the
contractor by adjusting the next payment certificate. The contractor shall be paid
interest on the over payment calculated from the date of payment to the date of
repayment at the rates specified in Sub Clause - 43.1.
If the contractor fails to comply with the time for completion as stipulated in the bid,
then the contractor shall pay to the employer the relevant sum stated in the contract
data as liquidated damages for such default and not as penalty for everyday or part
of day which elapse between relevant time for completion and the date stated in the
taking over certificate of the whole of the works on the relevant sections, subject top
the limit stated in the contract data.
49.3
The employer may without prejudice to any other method of recovery deduct the
amount of such damages from any monies due or to decode due to the contractor.
The payment or deduction of such damages shall not relieve the contractor from his
obligation to complete the works on form any other of his obligations and liabilities
under the contract.
49.4.
If, before the Time for Completion of the whole of the Works or, if applicable, any
Section, a Taking – Over Certificate has been issued for any part of the works or of a
section, the liquidated damages for delay in completion of the remainder of the
Works or of that Section shall, for any period of delay after the date stated in such
Taking-Over Certificate, and in the absence of alternative provisions in the Contract,
be reduced in the proportion which the value of the part so certified bears to the
value of the whole of the Works or section, a applicable. The provisions of this SubClause shall only apply to the rate of liquidated damages and shall not affect the limit
thereof.
50.
Deleted
51.
Advance Payment
51.1
The Employer shall make advance payment to the Contractor of the amounts stated
in the contract Data by the date stated in the Contract Data. Interest will be charged
60
10% per annum on the advance payment.
51.2
Deleted.
51.3
Deleted.
51.4
Secured Advance
The engineer shall certify and forward to the competent authority for advance payment in respect
of materials intended for but not yet incorporated in the Works in accordance with the conditions
stipulated in the Contract Data.
52.
Securities
52.1.
The Performance Security (including additional security for unbalanced bids) shall be
provided to the Employer no later than the date specified in the Letter of Acceptance
and shall be issued in an amount and form and by a bank or surety acceptable to the
Employer, and denominated in Indian Rupees. The Performance Security shall be
valid until a date 28 days from the date of expiry of Defects Liability Period and the
additional security for unbalanced bids shall be valid until a date 28 days from the
date of issue of the certificate of completion.
53.
Deleted
54.
Cost of Repairs
54.1.
Loss or damage to the Works or Materials to be incorporated in the Works between
the Start Date and the end of the Defects Correction periods shall be remedied by
the Contractor at the Contractor’s cost if the loss or damage arises from the
Contractor’s acts or omissions.
E.
55.
Completion
55.1.
56.
The contractor shall request the Engineer to issue a Certificate of Completion of the
Works and the Engineer will do so upon deciding that the Work is completed upto
the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge and functional aspects of all items are
tested to achieve its intended values.
Taking Over
56.1.
57.
FINISHING THE CONTRACT
The employer shall take over the Site and the Works within seven days of the
Engineer issuing a certificate of Completion.
.Final Account
61
57.1.
58.
59.
The Contractor shall supply to the Engineer a detailed account of the total amount
that the contractor considers payable under the contract before that end of the
Defects Liability Period. The engineer shall issue a Defect Liability Certificate and
certify any final payment that is due to the Contractor within 56 days of receiving the
contractor’s account if it is correct and complete. If it is not, the Engineer shall issue
within 56 days a schedule that states the scope of the corrections or additions that
are necessary. If the final Account is still unsatisfactory after it has been resubmitted,
the Engineer shall decide on the amount payable to the contractor and issue a
payment certificate, within 70 days of receiving the Contractor’s revised account.
Operating and Maintenance Manuals
58.1.
If “as built” drawings and/or operating and maintenance manuals are required,
the Contractor shall supply them by the dates stated in the contract Data.
58.2.
If the Contractor does not supply the Drawings and / or manuals by the dates stated
in the Contract Data, or they do not receive the Engineer’s approval, the Engineer
shall withhold the amount stated in the Contract Data from payments due to the
Contractor.
Termination
59.1.
The Employer or the contractor may terminate the Contract if the other party causes
a fundamental breach of the Contract.
59.2.
Fundamental breaches of contract include, but shall not be limited to the following :
a) The Contractor stops work for 28 days when no stoppage of work is shown on
the current Programme and the stoppage has not been authorized by the
Engineer.
b) The Engineer instructs the Contractor to delay the progress of the Works and
the instruction is not withdrawn within 28 days.
c)
The Employer or the contractor is made bankrupt or goes into liquidation other
than for a reconstruction or amalgamation;
d) A payment certified by the Engineer is not paid by the Employer to the
Contractor within 90 days of the date of the Engineer’s certificate;
e) The Engineer gives notice that failure to correct a particular Defect is a
fundamental breach of Contract and the Contractor fails to correct it within a
reasonable period of time determined by the Engineer;
f)
The contractor does not maintain a security, which is required;
g) The Contractor has delayed the completion of works by the number of days for
which the maximum amount of liquidated damages can be paid as defined in the
Contract data; and
62
h) If the Contractor, in the judgment of the Employer has engaged in corrupt or
fraudulent practices in competing for or in executing the contract.
For the purpose of this paragraph: “corrupt practice means the offering, giving,
receiving or soliciting of any thing of value to influence the action of a public official
in the procurement process or in contract execution. “Fraudulent practice” means a
misrepresentation of facts in order to establish bid prices at artificial noncompetitive levels and to deprive the Borrower, and includes collusive practice
among Bidders (prior to or after bid submission designed to establish bid prices at
artificial non-competitive levels and to deprive the Borrower of the benefits of free
and open competition.”
60.
61.
59.3.
When either party to the Contractor gives notice of a breach of contract to the
Engineer for a cause other than those listed under Sub Clause 59.2 above, the
Engineer shall decide whether the breach is fundamental or not.
59.4.
Notwithstanding the above, the Employer may terminate the Contract for
convenience.
59.5.
If the contract is terminated the Contractor shall stop work immediately, make the
Site safe and secure and leave the Site within a period of one month.
Payment upon Termination
60.1.
If the Contract is terminated because of a fundamental breach of Contract by the
Contractor, the Engineer shall issue a certificate for the value of the work done less
advance payments received up to the date of the issue of the certificate, less other
recoveries due in terms of the contract, less taxes due to be deducted at source as
per applicable law and less the percentage to apply to the work not completed as
indicated in the Contract Data. Additional Liquidated Damages shall not apply. If the
total amount due to the Employer exceeds any payment due to the Contractor the
difference shall be a debt payable to the Employer.
60.2
If the contract is terminated at the Employer’s convenience or because of a
fundamental breach of Contract by the Employer, the Engineer shall issue a
certificate for the value of the work done, the cost of balance material brought by
the contractor and available at site, the reasonable cost of removal of Equipment,
repatriation of the Contractor’s personnel employed solely on the Works, and the
Contractor’s costs of protecting and security the Works and less advance payments
received up to the date of the certificate, less other recoveries due in terms of the
contract and less taxes due to be deducted at source as per applicable law.
Property
61.1
All materials on the Site, Plant, Equipment, Temporary Works and Works are
deemed to be the property of the Employer, if the contract is terminated because of
a Contractor’s default.
63
62.
Release from Performance
62.1
If the contract is frustrated by the outbreak of war or by any other event entirely
outside the control of either the employer or the contractor the Engineer shall
certify that the contract has been frustrated. The contractor shall make the site safe
and stop work as quickly as possible after receiving this certificate and shall be paid
for all work carried out before receiving it and for any work carried out afterwards to
which commitment was made.
SPEICAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT (SCC)
F.
1.
GENERAL
1.1
In case of an irreconcilable conflict between general conditions of contract, special
conditions of contract, scope of work, specifications, drawings, schedule of rates, prevail to
the extent of such irreconcilable conflict in order of precedence.
a)
Detailed Letter of Award.
b)
Fax / Letter of intent
c)
Special conditions of contract.
d)
Scope of Work.
e)
Job / Particular specification.
f)
Drawings.
g)
Technical / Material specifications.
h)
General conditions of contract.
j)
Indian Standards.
j)
Other applicable standards.
k)
Assam Public Works Department (A.P.W.D) Specifications.
1.2
It will be Bidder’s responsibility to bring the notice of the Department any irreconcilable
conflict in various parts of contract documents before starting the work(s), of making supply
with reference to, which the conflict exists.
1.3
In absence of any specifications for any materials, design or work(s), the same shall be
performed / supplied / executed in accordance with the instructions / directions of the
engineer-in-charge, which will be binding on the contractor.
64
2.
SITE INFORMATION
2.1.
The Project site is situated at Dispur, Guwahati, Assam.
2.2
The intending bidder shall be deemed to have visited the site and familiarized themselves
with site conditions before submitting their bids at their own cost and responsibility.
3
SCOPE OF WORK
3.1
The scope of work shall include inter-alias, the carrying out of any / all works, and providing
any and all facilities, as required, for completing all the works as per terms and conditions of
contract documents.
3.2
No materials shall be supplied by the Department. Bidder will have to procure all materials,
Labour, T&P and any other arrangements for proper execution of the work and to be of the
best quality and workmanship in all respect as per relevant I.S. code of practices and
A.P.W.D. general specification.
The lack of road communication during flood seasons will not be considered as a ground for
extension of time of completion of the work and escalation of rates.
4.
CEMENT
4.1
The Contractor will have to submit their design mix for different grades of concrete, keeping
in view the requirements stipulated in specific gravity of materials brought to site as
analyzed in the laboratories. The design shall be based upon absolute volume method and
theoretical consumption of cement shall be worked on this basis. For other than concrete
items, the coefficient for consumption of cement shall be adopted as per APWD practice and
relevant IS Codes. Cement required for the work shall be procured by the Contractor only
from manufacturer or their authorized dealer directly to ensure quality to their product.
Cement of brand conforming to BIS specification only be used subject to the approval of
Engineer-in-charge.
Super plasticizer shall have to be used in all concreting works e.g. Choksey, Sika wherever
required.
4.2.
The Contractor shall maintain a goods store for storing cement. The flooring of the storage
house, the clearance of cement bags from the sidewalls etc shall be a instructed by the
Engineer-In-Charge or his authorized representatives..
4.3.
The cement store shall be open for supervision and verification by the Engineer-in-charge or
his authorized representatives at any time when he feels the need to do so along with the
Contractor’s representatives
5.
REINFORCEMENT BARS
5.1.
Reinforcement bars to be used should be in conformity with relevant IS code of Practice.
65
Steel reinforcement required for the work shall be procured from manufacture or their
authorized dealer directly to ensure proper quality of steel. Super ductile T.M.T. Re-bars
manufactured by SAIL / TATA can only be used.
The Engineer-in-Charge shall conduct necessary tests as per codes of practice on all
construction materials and maintain the test reports and submit the same to the Chief
Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati – 3.
6.
TIME SCHEDULE
6.1.
Time is the essence of the Contract. The work shall be executed strictly as per the TimeSchedule attached separately in the Bid document.
7.
PROJECT SCHEDULING AND MONITORING
7.1
The following Schedules / documents / reports shall be prepared and submitted by the
contractor for review / approval at various stages of the Contract.
8.
ALONG WITH BID
a)
Time Schedule.
The Bidder is required to submit a Project Time Schedule as stated in Clause along
with the Bid. The Schedule shall cover all aspects like Planning, Designing, Execution,
Sub-Ordering and Delivery, Sub-Contracting and within the completion time
indicated in the bid Document. The Department interface activities shall be clearly
identified with their latest required dates. Department reserves the right to
disqualify the Bid if the above Schedule submitted by the Bidder is not in line with
the over all Project requirements.
b)
Scheduling and Monitoring System
The Bidder should describe their system of Project Scheduling and Monitoring the
extent of Computerization Level of Detailing, Track Methodology etc. with the name
of Computer Packages and sample outputs.
9.
AFTER THE AWARD OF CONTRACT
a)
Overall Project Schedule
The Contractor shall submit within 2 (Two) weeks of Letter of Intent, a sufficiently
detailed overall Project schedule (in Prima Vera/ MS Project) indicating the inter
relationship / inter dependence between various events and tasks.
The project schedule will be reviewed and approved by the Department and the
comments if any shall be incorporated in the network before issuing the same for
implementation. The Project Schedule thus finalized shall form part of the Contract
Document and the same shall not be revised without prior permission from the
Department during the entire period of the contract.
b)
The contractor shall also submit one quality assurance plan and work programme showing completion of the work in Prima Vera/MS Project with events and tasks.
66
c)
Progress Measurement Methodology
The contractor is required to submit within two weeks of award of work, the
methodology of progress measurement of planning, designing, execution., subordering and delivery, sub-contracting, and commissioning of works and the basis of
computation of overall services / physical progress informed. Department reserves
the right to modify the methodology in part or in full.
d)
10.
The Bidder should prepare detailed functional schedule in line with network for
functional monitoring and control and submit scheduled progress curves for
each function viz., Planning, Designing, Execution, Ordering, Delivery and
Commissioning.
PROJECT REVIEW MEETINGS
The Bidder shall present the programme and status at various review meetings as required.
A)
Monthly Review Meeting :
Level of Participation :
i) Senior Officer PWD (Bldg.) Department.
ii) The concerned Executive Engineer.
iii) A deputed member (MLA or Minister) to be deputed by Speaker of the Assam
Legislative Assembly.
iv) The contractor or his authorized representatives.
v) A representative from the Consultant’s organization.
.
Agenda :
a) Progress status / statistics.
b) Completion outlook.
c) Major Hold Ups / Slippages.
d) Assistance Required.
e) Critical Issues.
f) Depts. Query/Approval.
g) Progress Updating.
Venue :
Office of the Chief Engineer, PWD(Bldg.), Chandmari, Guwahati-3
67
10.1
PROGRESS REPORTS
This report shall be submitted on a monthly basis within ten calendar days from cut-off date
as agreed upon, covering overall scenario of the work. The report shall include but not be
limited, to the following :
a) Brief Introduction of the Work.
b) Activities Executed/ Achievements during the Month.
c) Schedule v/s actual cumulative percentage progress and progress curves for subcontracting and overall and quantum wise status of purchase orders against
schedule.
d) Area of Concern/ Problem/ Hold Ups, Impact and action plans.
e) Resources deployment status.
f) Annexure giving summary for materials requirements and deliveries, sub-contracting
and construction.
11.
12.
PRICE SCHEDULE WITH PRICE BID
11.1
The rates of price bid shall be read in conjunction of special conditions of contract,
General Conditions of contract, Scope of work, scope of supply, Technical
specifications, drawings and any other document forming a part of this contract.
11.2.
All expenses towards mobilization at site and demobilization including bringing in
equipment, work force, materials, dismantling the equipment, clearing the site, etc.
shall be deemed to be included in the rates quoted and no separate payment on
account of such expenses shall be entertained.
MOBILISATION ADVANCE LOAN
12.1
The contractor is entitled for an interest free advance loan for the cost of
mobilization in respect of works in lump sum amount equivalent to 5% of Tender
value payable in one installment. Payment of loan will be due under separate
certification by the Engineer in charge after.
a) Execution of form of agreement by the parties thereto.
b) Providing by the Contractor 5% of Performance Security in accordance with bid
clause.
c) Providing by the contractor a non-revocable bank guarantee by a nationalized bank
acceptable to the department in an amount equal to the mobilization advance loan.
Such bank guarantee to remain effective until the advance loan has been completely
repaid by the contractor out of current earning under the contract and certified by
the Engineer-in-charge. A form of Bank Guarantee acceptable to the Dept. is
indicated in Annexure-X for payment of mobilization advance loan as per this clause.
68
d) The mobilization advance loan shall be used by the contractor exclusively for
mobilization expenditure in connection with the works, should the contractor
misappropriate any portion of the advance loan, it shall become due and payable to
the Chief Engineer, PWD (Building) Assam, Chandmari, Guwahati-3, Assam
immediately and no further loan will be made to the contractor thereafter.
e) Repayment of Mobilization advance loan shall commence immediately after
commencement of the work and shall be entered as a deduction in the first bill and
subsequent interim payment certificate in equal installment until the total amount of
advance loan has been repaid by the contractor. The entire amount shall be
recovered before 75% of work completed, payment of mobilization advance by itself
shall not be considered as first interim payment to contractor. Percentage of
progress referred to shall be reckoned with reference to the gross value of work
done as shown in bill.
13.
PRICE ADJUSTMENT
The rates and price quoted by the contractor shall be fixed for the duration of the contract
and shall not be subjected to adjustment on any account.
14.
MEASUREMENT OF WORK
In addition to the provisions of Clause of the General Condition of Contract and associated
provision thereof the following provisions shall applicable.
15.
14.1
Payment will be made on the basis of joint measurements, taken by contractor and
certified by the Engineer-In-Charge. Measurement shall be based on drawings
approved for construction to the extent that the work conforms to the drawings and
details are adequate.
14.2
Wherever work is executed based on instruction of Engineer-In-Charge or details are
not adequate in the drawings, physical measurement shall be taken by the
contractor in the presence of authorized representatives of Engineer-In-Charge.
14.3
Measurement of weight shall be in Metric Tonnes/ Quintal, correct to the nearest
kilogram, linear measurements shall be in meters, correct to the nearest centimeter.
14.4
Measurements shall be taken over finished surface in all cases.
TERMS OF PAYMENT
All interim payments to the contractor will be made by Engineer-In-Charge on the basis of
price bid rates of as the case may be. The Department reserves the rights to alter the
percentage breakup for price bid items rate submitted by the contractor were found
reasonably and necessary, which shall be binding on contractor.
16.
INCOME TAX
69
Income tax at the prevailing rate as applicable from time to time shall be deducted from the
contractor’s bills as per Income Tax Act, and quoted rates shall be deemed to include the
same.
17.
TAXES, DUTIES AND OTHER LEVIES
Without prejudice to stipulations in general conditions of contract, the bidder should quote
prices inclusive of all taxes, duties, sales tax, VAT including A.G.S.T on works contract and all
other levies.
18.
LABOUR
If the contractor is covered under the contractor labour (regulation and abolition) act he
shall obtain a license from licensing authority (i.e. office of the labour commissioner, Govt. of
Assam) by payment of necessary prescribed fees and deposit, if any, before starting the work
under the contract. Such fee / deposit shall be borne by the contractor.
The contractor shall, if required by the engineer, deliver to the engineer a return in detail, in
such form and at such intervals as the engineer may prescribe , showing the staff and the
numbers of the several classes of labour from time to time employed by the contractor on
the site and such other information as the engineer may require.
The contractor shall unless otherwise provided in the contract, make his own arrangements
of the engagement of all staff and labour, local or other, and for their payment, housing ,
feeding and transport.
19.
COMPLIANCE WITH LABOUR REGULATIONS
During continuance of the contract, the contractor and his sub-contractors shall abide at all
times by all existing labour enactments an rules made hereunder, regulations, notifications
and bye laws of the State or Central Government or local authority and any other labour law
(including rules), regulations, bye laws that may be passed or notification that may be issued
under any labour law in future either by the state or the central government or the local
authority. Salient features of some of the major labour laws that are applicable to
construction authority. Salient features of some of the major labour laws that are applicable
to construction industry are given below. The contractor shall keep the Employer
indemnified in case any action is taken
against the Employer by the competent authority on account of contravention of any of the
provisions of any act or rules made there under, regulations or notifications including
amendments. If the Employer is caused to pay or reimburse such amount as may be
necessary to cause or observe, or for non-observance of the provisions stipulated in the
notifications / bye laws / Acts/ Rules / regulations including amendments, if any, on the part
of the contractor, the engineer/employer shall have the right to deduct any money due to
the Contractor including his amount of performance security.The employer / engineer shall
also have right to recover from the contractor any sum required or estimated to be required
for making good the loss or damage suffered by the Employer.
The employees of the contractor and the sub-contractor in no case shall be treated as the
70
employees of the Employer at any point of time.
SALIENT FEATURES OF SOME MAJOR LABOUR LAWS APPLICABLE TO
ESTABLISHMENTS ENGAGED IN BUILDING AND OTHER CONSTRUCTION WORK
a)
Workmen compensation Act 1973 : The Act provides for compensation in case of
injury by accident arising out of and during the course of employment.
b)
Payment Gratuity Act 1972 : Gratuity payable to an employee under the Act on
satisfaction of certain conditions on separation if an employee has completed 5 years
service or more on death, the rate of 15 days wages for every completed year of
service. The Act is applicable to all establishments employing 10 or more employee.
c)
Employees P.F. and Miscellaneous Provision Act 1952 : The Act provides for monthly
contributions by the employer plus worker @ 10% or 8.33%. The benefits payable
under the Act are :
i)
Pension or family pension on retirement or death, as the case may be.
ii)
Deposit linked insurance on the death in harness of the worker.
iii)
Payment of P.F. accumulation on retirement / death, etc.
d)
Maternity Benefit Act 1951 : The Act provides for leave and some other benefits to
women employees in case of confinement or miscarriage etc.
e)
Contract Labour Regulation and Abolition Act 1970 : The Act provides for certain
welfare measures to be provided by the Contractor to contract labour and in case
the Contractor fails to provide , the same are required to be provided, by the
principal Employer by law. The Principal Employer is required to take certificate of
registration and the Contractor is required to take license from the designated
Officer. The act is applicable to the establishments or contractor of Principal
Employer, if they employ 20 or more contact labour.
f)
Minimum wages Act 1948 : The employer is supposed to pay not less than the
minimum wages fixed by appropriate Government as per provision of the act, if the
employment is a scheduled employment. Construction of Buildings, roads, and
runways are scheduled employments.
g)
Payment of wages Act 1936 : It lays down as to by what date the wages are to be
paid, when it will be paid and what deductions can be made from the wages of the
workers
h)
Equal Remuneration Act 1979 : The Act provides for payment of equal wages for
work nature to Male and Female employees in the matters of transfers, training and
promotions etc.
i)
Payment of Bonus Act 1956 : The Act is applicable to all establishments employing 20
or more employees. The Act provides for payments of annual bonus subject to a
minimum of 8.33% of wages and maximum of 20% of wages to employees drawing
Rs. 3,500/- or less. The bonus to be paid to employees getting Rs.2500/- per month
71
or above up to Rs.3500/- per month shall be worked out by taking wages as Rs.
2,500/- per month only. The Act does not apply to certain establishments. Some of
the State Governments have reduced the employment size from 20 to 10 for the
purpose of applicability of this Act.
j)
Industrial Disputes Act : The Act lays down the machinery and procedure for
resolution of industrial disputes, in what situations a strike or lock-out becomes
illegal and what are the requirements for laying off or retrenching the employees or
closing down the establishment.
k)
Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act 1946 : It is applicable to all
establishments employing 100 or more workmen (employment size reduced by some
of the states and central government to 50). The Act provides for laying down rules
governing the conditions of employment by the Employer on matters provided in the
Act and get the same certified by the designated Authority.
l)
Trade Union Act1926 :- The Act lays down the procedure for registration of
trade unions of workmen and employers. The trade unions registered under the
Act have been given certain immunities from civil and Criminal liabilities.
m)
Child Labour ( prohibition & Regulation ) Act 1986 : The Act prohibits
employment of children below 14 years of age in certain occupations and processes
and provides for regulation of employment in all other occupations
and processes. Employment of Child Labour is prohibited in Building and
Construction Industry.
n)
Inter-State Migrant workmen’s ( Regulation of Employment & Conditions of
Service ) Act 1979 : The Act is applicable to an establishment, which employs 5, or
more inter state migrant workmen through an intermediary (who has recruited
workmen in one state of employment in the establishment situated in another
state. The Inter State migrant workmen, in an establishment to which this Act
becomes applicable, are required to be provided certain facilities such as housing,
medical aid, traveling expenses from home up to the establishment and back etc.
o)
The Building and Other Construction workers ( Regulation of Employment and
Conditions of Service ) Ct1996 and the Cess Act of 1996 :- All the Establishments who
carry on any building or other construction work employs 10 or more workers are
covered under this Act. All such establishments are required to pay cess at the rate
not exceeding 2% of the cost of construction as may be modified by the Government
. The employer of the establishment is required to provide safety measures at the
Building or construction works and other welfare measures, such as Canteens, First
Aid facilities, Ambulance, Housing accommodations for workers near the work place
etc. The Employer to whom the Act applies has to obtain a registration certificate
from the Registering Officer appointed by the Government.
p)
Factories Act 1948 : The Act lays down the procedure for approval of plans before
setting up a factory, health and safety provisions, welfare provisions, working hours,
annual earned leave and rendering information regarding accidents or dangerous
occurrences to designated authorities. It is able to premises employing 10 persons or
more with aid of power or 20 or more persons without aid of power engaged in
manufacturing process.
72
20.
ARBITRATION ( GCC Clause 25.3 )
This procedure for arbitration will be as follows :
21.
a)
In case of Dispute or difference arising between the Employer and the contractor
relating to any matter arising out of or connected with this agreement, such disputes
or difference shall be settled in accordance with the Arbitration and Conciliation Act,
1996. The Arbitral Tribunal consisting of 3 arbitrators, one each appointed by the
Employer and the Contractor. The third arbitrator shall be chosen by the two
Arbitrators so appointed by the parties to act as Presiding Arbitrator. In case of
failure of the two arbitrators appointed by the parties to reach upon a consensus
within a period of 30 days from the appointment of the arbitrator appointed
subsequently, the Presiding Arbitrator shall be appointed by the Indian Council of
Arbitration/President of the Institution of Engineers India)/ The International Centre
for Alternative Dispute Resolution (India ).
b)
Deleted
c)
Deleted
d)
Arbitration proceedings shall be held in Guwahati, and the language of the
Arbitration proceedings and that of all documents and communications between
the parties shall be in English.
e)
The decision of majority of arbitrators shall be final and binding upon both parties.
The cost and expenses of Arbitration proceedings will be paid as determined by the
arbitral tribunal. However, the expenses incurred by each party in connection with
the preparation, presentation etc. of its proceedings as also the fees expenses paid
to the arbitrator appointed by such party or on its behalf shall be borne by its party
itself.
f)
Performance under the contract shall continue during the arbitration proceedings
and payments due to the contractor by the owners shall not be withheld, unless they
are subject matter of the arbitration proceedings.
JURISDICTION
21.1
22.
In the event of court cases, Jurisdiction for Settlement of any disputes concerning
this agreement shall be at the courts situated in Guwahati.
STATUTORY APPROVALS
73
The approval from any authority required as per statutory rules and regulations of Central /
State Government shall be the Contractor’s Responsibility unless otherwise specified in the
bid document.
The application of behalf of the Department for submission to relevant authorities along
with copies of required certificates complete in all respects shall be prepared and submitted
by the contractor well ahead of time so that the actual construction / commissioning of the
works is not delayed for want of the approval /inspection by concerned authorities. The
inspection of the works by the authorities shall be arranged by the contractor and necessary
co-ordination of liaison work in this respect shall be the responsibility of the contractor.
However, statutory fees paid , if any, for all inspections and approvals by such authorities
shall be reimbursed at the actual y the department, to the contractor on production of the
documentary evidence. In any fee is to be paid to A.S.E.B or Development Authority for any
permission, then the payment will be made by firm and the same will be reimbursed by the
department.
Any Changes/ addition required to be made to meet the requirements of the statutory
authorities shall be carried by the contractor free of charge. The inspection and acceptance
of the work by statutory authorities shall however, not absolve the contractor from any of
his responsibilities under this contract.
23.
STANDARDS
Materials shall be supplied in brand new conditions and work shall be carried out in
conformity with specifications herein and Indian Standard Codes.
The work shall also conform to the regulations laid down by the local authorities.
Approval of statutory authorities for layout and other requirements must be obtained by the
contractor before commencement of work.
24.
WATER AND POWER
Arrangement of water and electric power required by the contractor for the works shall be
made by him at own cost. Department will however recommend to the State Electricity
board for giving the connection and power to the contractor. However the Department will
bear no responsibility in this respect.
25.
LAND FOR RESIDENTIAL ACCOMODATION
Contractor makes his own arrangement for the engagement of labour at site so far as the
contract otherwise provide in respect of housing , feeding and payment thereof.
26.
RECRUITMENT OF PERSONNEL
The contractor shall not recruit any personnel of any category from those who are already
employed by other agencies working within the state.
27.
UTILISATION OF LOCAL RESOURCES
74
The contractor shall maximize the employment of local labour, skilled and /or unskilled, to
the extent available. In case of any part or parts of the work is / are sub-contracted, the
contractor shall ascertain availability of and endeavor to employ the local sub-contractors.
The contractor shall, however, be responsible for maintaining quality of works and
adherence to time schedule as per the requirements specified in the agreement.
28.
COORDINATION WITH OTHER AGENCIES
The work shall be carried out in such a manner that the work of other agencies working out
at the site is not hampered due to any action of the contractor. The contractor will be
responsible for ensuring proper co-ordination with other agencies. In the event of any
dispute between the contractor and any other agency employed at or about then job site
arising out of or related the performance of work, the decision of Engineer-In Charge shall be
final and binding on the contractor.
29.
URGENCY OF WORK
The work being of very urgent nature it shall be carried out with all efforts by the contractor
to complete it in all respects within the stipulated time of completion. The progress of the
work as shown in work programme shall be continued, by the contractor even if any dispute
arises between the contractor and the department on any matter connected with the work
and contractor approaches legal authority for settlement of the dispute, on being not
satisfied with the decision of the Deptt. on the matter of dispute. The continuation of
progress of the work should not be hampered in any case by both parties and order given by
legal authority on matter of dispute shall be binding on the parties.
30.
REPORT OF ACCIDENTS
The Contractor shall forthwith report of the occurrence of any accident at or about the site
or in connection with the execution of the work, report in details such an accident to the
Engineer-In-Charge and competent authority wherever such a report is required by law.
31.
ROLE OF ARCHITECT / CONSULTANT REPRESENTATIVE :
31.1
Duties & Powers :
The duties of the Architect's/consultant’s Representative are to watch and supervise the
works periodically and to test and examine any materials to be used or workmanship
employed in connection with the works. He shall have no authority to relieve the
Contractor of any of his duties of obligations under the contract or except as expressly
provided hereunder or elsewhere in the contract, to order any work involving delay or any
extra payment by the Employer nor to make any variation of or in the works. The
representative of the consultant shall examine the various works at site during execution,
so that the vision of the consultant is reflected.
31.2
Delegation of architect’s/ consultant’s Power :
The Architect/consultants may from time to time in writing delegate to the
75
Architect'/consultant’s Representative any of the powers and authorities vested in the
Architect. Any written instruction of approval given by the Architect'/consultant’s
Representative to the Contractor within the terms of such delegation [but not otherwise]
shall bind the Contractor and the Employer as though it had been given by the
Architect/consultant. Provided always as follows :a)
Failure of the Architect'/consultant’s Representative to disapprove any work or
materials shall not prejudice the power of the Architect/consultant thereafter to
disapprove such work or materials and to order the pulling down removal or breaking
up thereof at no additional cost to the Employer may be added.
b)
If the Contractor shall be dissatisfied by reason of any decision of the
Architect'/consultant’s Representative he shall be entitled to refer the matter to the
Architect/consultant who shall thereupon confirm, reverse or vary such decision.
76
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
FOR AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEM, IBMS, ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM,
IPTV AND TELEPHONE NETWORKING SYSTEM, FIRE ALARM SYSTEM,
SECURITY AND SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM
AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM ETC.
77
SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEM, IBMS, ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM, IPTV AND
TELEPHONE NETWORKING SYSTEM, FIRE ALARM SYSTEM, SECURITY AND SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM AND
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM ETC.
1.GENERAL
These special conditions are intended to amplify the General Conditions of Contract, and shall be
read in conjunction with the same. For any discrepancies between the General Conditions and Special
Conditions, the more stringent shall apply.
The tender consists of the following sections:
a.Building Automation Management System
b.Fire Alarm System.
c.Public Address system
d.Security and Surveillance System



CCTV System
Access Control System
Intrusion Alarm System
e.IPT/Net working System.
f. Audio Video System.
This tender shall act as a guide to the type of system desired for the project. The specifications
described in this tender are as per the ‘Basis of Design’ and are the minimum required from the
tenderer. The features offered over and above those mentioned in the tender shall be given due
credit.
In the event of any discrepancy between the input/output summary and the schedule of quantities,
the input/output summary shall have precedence.
The basic architecture of the system shall be as described here in the tender and the detail
engineering based on this shall be carried out by the Integrated Building Management System
Contractor after the award of work. The tenderer shall work out the number of controllers required
and mark their tentative position on the drawings along with their model numbers, at the time of
submission of tender. The tenderer shall also mark any system integration unit, gateway or interface
unit required for their proposed system architecture. The final number of controllers and their
relative position shall be decided in consultation with the Architect / Consultant / Engineer-in-charge,
representative and their decision in this regard shall be final and binding.
Standard literature, not complying to the format and requirement of this tender, submitted by the
contractor, shall not be considered or evaluated.
78
2.SCOPE OF WORK
The general character and the scope of work to be carried out under this contract is illustrated in
input/output summary, Specifications and Schedule of Quantities. The Contractor shall execute the
said work as per the terms & condition set out in the tender documents and in conformity with the
specifications laid down. The contractor shall furnish all labour, materials and equipment,
transportation and incidentals necessary for supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the
complete Integrated Building Management and other allied system as described in the tender
document. This also includes any material, equipment, appliances and incidental work not
specifically mentioned herein or noted on the Drawings/Documents as being furnished (or installed),
but which are necessary and customary to complete the installation.
Contractor should employ an expert and specialized agency who has sound experience in this field
and have successfully completed similar type of projects. Before employing the expert agency
contractor should submit the credentials of the proposed subcontractor to the Engineer-in-charge
and obtain this approval.
Subcontractors’ workmen, technicians should also be certified trained personnel from equipment
manufacturers.
In general, the work to be performed under this contract shall comprise/include the following :
2.1Building Automation System
a.
The contractor shall supply, install, test, commission and maintain the Building Automation
System (BAS) including provision of all necessary hardware, software and relevant spares.
Tenant Billing software along with BTU meters for Multitenant Buildings shall also be
included in the scope.
b.
The IBMS Contractor shall provide all interface components for automation system including,
sensors, transducers etc. to interface with other mechanical & electrical equipment unless
specified otherwise in this contract. Normally, the dry contacts shall be made available, but
in the event of these not being available, the BAS contractor may be required to provide
the necessary paraphernalia. The terminations in the other services panels shall be in
scope of respective services contractors.
c.
It shall be the responsibility of BAS contractor to perform all checks on wiring, sensor and
actuator mounting for trouble-free operation of the equipment.
d.
It shall be responsibility of BAS contractor to in close coordination with services contractor so
that desired results are obtained along with complete monitoring of various systems.
e.
Cables for the integration of the system shall run in separate ……..(MS/GI) conduits to be
provided and installed by the contractor.
f.
Proper operation and maintenance of the system shall be responsibility of the contractor and
shall include debugging and calibration of each component in the entire system.
Maintenance Software package also should be included in the scope. IBMS contractor should
obtain all technical details of each equipment which are being controlled/ monitored and
programme the maintenance software as per the manufacturer’s recommendations.
79
g.
No claim for extra items shall be entertained for installation / commissioning of the
system. All works in connection with completion of the system shall be in scope of this
tender. The tenderer shall take into its scope, price for all works and approvals in
connection with installation of the BAS System from government as well as statutory bodies.
Besides the above, general scope of work shall also include the following :
a.
Supply of all shop drawings produced using latest editing of Computer Aided Design (CAD)
and drafting package.
b.Supply and installation of all necessary BAS control and monitoring outstations.
c.
Supply and installation of all BAS field controls cabling including local area networks.
d.
Supply and installation of field interface cabling between all equipment and the BAS
System.
e.
Identification of all field cabling from the motor control panels at both ends of each
core, and in junction boxes using the same numbering as used for associated outgoing
enclosure terminal.
f.
Supply and installation of controls for temperature, humidity and pressure detectors,
thermostats, flow switches and differential pressure switches, etc. associated with the
BAS.
g.
Ensure all control devices are positioned such that maximum stability of control for
each system can be achieved.
h.
Supply and fitting of necessary clips, hangers and supports for all averaging element
detectors and for serpentine them across the ducts.
i.
G.I trunking/ G.I Trays with GI supports wherever more than 3 Nos. conduits/cables are to
be terminated at any point. More than 3 Nos. Armoured cables should not be saddled
directly in to wall /ceiling and cable tray/trunking should be used for the same.
j.
Supply and installation of valves and valve actuators associated with the BAS.
k.
Supply a 2-dimensional schematic and information page graphic for all systems controlled
by or monitored on the BAS. Allowance shall be made for any necessary site
modifications in graphics to incorporate any revised locations, presentation of
dynamic information and Architect / Consultants / Engineer-in-charge’s comments.
l.
Supply and fit an engraved “traffolite” label for all controls items, equipment and plant
associated with the control system, incorporating the appropriate controller and
regulator identification reference number as detailed on the Motor Control Panel
Equipment Schedules. All labels shall be fixed with bright finish instrument head screws
or plastic flat header push-in rivets of the same colour as the label. Where no flat
surfaces are available on valves, labels shall be hung from brass chains.
m.
Fine tune all temperature, humidity and pressure control loops with a suitable building
load. If necessary, an artificial building load shall be generated by the Engineer.
n.
Provide documentary evidence to the Architect/ Engineer-in-charge prior to offering the
system for testing & commissioning.
80
2.2Fire Detection & Alarm System
a.
The contractor shall supply, install, test, commission and maintain the Fire Alarm System
(FAS) including provision of all necessary hardware, software and relevant spares.
b.
The FAS contractor shall provide all interface components to interface with other
mechanical & electrical equipment unless otherwise specified in this contract. The dry
contacts shall be made available.
c.
It shall be the responsibility of FAS contractor to perform all checks on wiring for troublefree operation of the System.
d.
Proper operation and maintenance of the system shall be responsibility of the
contractor and shall include debugging and proper calibration of each component in the
entire system.
e.
No claim for extra items shall be entertained for installation / commissioning of the
system. All works in connection with completion of the system shall be in scope of this
tender. The tenderer shall take into its scope, price for all works and approvals in
connection with installation of the FAS System.
f.All necessary Audio interface cards shall be supplied along with the FAS panel for
emergency voice evacuation message incase of fire through P A speakers.
g.External box with minimum 2 Hour fire rated to be supplied along with PA.Speaker for wall /
ceiling mounting application.
Besides the above, general scope of work shall also include the following :
a.
Supply of all drawings produced using latest editing of Computer Aided Design (CAD) and
drafting package.
b.Supply and installation of all necessary FAS control and monitoring outstations.
c.
Supply and installation of all FAS field controls cabling including local area networks.
d.
Supply and installation of field interface cabling between all equipment and the FAS
System.
e.
Supply and fitting of necessary clips, hangers and supports for all detectors.
f.
Supply a 2-dimensional schematic and information page graphic for all systems
controlled by or monitored on the FAS. Allowance shall be made for any necessary
site modifications to graphics to incorporate any revised locations, presentation of
dynamic information and Architect / Consultants / Owner’s site representatives
comments.
3.QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN
81
The system shall be installed by competent technicians & workers, approved by the
manufacturer/supplier of the control equipment. The successful contractor shall furnish a list of
workers/ technicians approved by the manufacturer/ supplier of the system prior to
commencement of work.
The complete IBMS installation shall be in strict accordance with the national and local
electrical codes.
Contractor shall ensure that software used, shall carry a certificate from the supplier and
shall be original software procured for this particular project. This is to ensure that the Owner
is provided with regular updated revisions. All third party software shall also be the original
version.
All system components shall be designed and manufactured to the following fault tolerances:
a.
All components shall withstand and give satisfactory operation without damage at
110% and 90% of rated voltage and at ± 3 Hertz variation in line frequency.
b.
All inputs and outputs shall have static and short circuit protection.
c.
Communication lines shall be protected against static, transient and induced magnetic
interference.
d.
Bus connected devices shall be A.C. coupled or equivalent, and single
shall not disrupt bus communication in any way.
device failure
4.PROJECT EXECUTION AND MANAGEMENT :
One senior planning and erection personnel from the organization with whom the contractor has
technical collaboration shall be assigned to the project. He shall have a minimum of 5 years
experience in this type of installation and shall be required to be present on site as and when
desired by the Architect / Consultant / Engineer-in-charge during the initial stage of the project
and full time during the final stage. The final stage of the project shall be identified by the
Architect / Consultant / Engineer-in-charge.
The Contractor shall also assign to the project a Senior Manager who shall be assisted by a
minimum of one erection engineer & one supervisor. The project execution shall be carried out
using modern techniques. All senior site managers shall be provided with mobile communication
means.
The contractor shall also ensure that all the design work and shop drawings for the project are
made in co-ordination and complete knowledge of their principal organization. All the shop
drawings for the project and design calculations etc. shall be certified by senior planning and
erection personnel assigned for the project from the principal organization, before being
presented to the Architect/Consultant/ Engineer-in-charge for their approval. If any change are
made in drawings the certified revision shall be again submitted.
82
5.BYE-LAWS AND REGULATIONS :
The installation shall be in conformity with the Bye-laws, Regulations and Standards of the local
authorities concerned, in so far as these become applicable to the installation. Any
Modifications if suggested by local security agencies like Police or intelligence authorities must be
incorporated in the system.
Following codes shall be referred while finalizing the scheme :
A.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) - USA :
1.No. 70-90 or 70-93National Electric Code (NEC)
2.No. 72-1993National Fire Alarm Code
3.No. 101-91Life Safety Code
B.Underwriters laboratories Inc. (UL) - USA :
1.UL 50 Cabinets and Boxes
2.UL 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
3.UL 864 Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
4.UL 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications
5.UL 521 Thermal Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
6.UL 228 Door Closers-Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
7.UL 464 Audible Signaling Appliances
8.UL 38 Manually Activated Signaling Boxes
9.UL 346 Water flow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
10.UL 1481 Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
11.UL 1076 Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units and Systems
12.UL 1971 Visual Notification Appliances
Equivalent European standards shall be acceptable in lieu of UL standards.
C.ANSI A17.1 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators
D.National Building Code
6.APPROVALS & CLEARANCES
The contractor shall obtain all permits / licenses and pay for any all fees required for the
inspection, approval and commissioning of their installation.
83
7.DRAWINGS
The IBMS Drawings are to be prepared by the expert agency and to be enclosed with tender and
give arrangement of various systems and the extent of work covered in the system. These
Drawings indicate the arrangement of equipments, highlight various services and broadly suggest
the routes to be followed. Under no circumstances shall dimensions be scaled from these
Drawings.
The contractor shall follow the proposal drawings in preparation of his shop drawings, and for
subsequent installation work after the approval of the Architect / Consultant / Owner’s Site
representative . He shall check the drawings of other services to verify spaces in which his work
will be installed. The shop drawings prepared by IBMS Contractor shall clearly show equipment
size, configuration, capacity & location.
Maximum headroom and space conditions shall be maintained at all points. Where headroom
appears inadequate, the contractor shall notify the Architect / Consultant / Owner’s Engineer-incharge and take approval before proceeding with the installation.
The contractor shall examine all architectural, structural, HVAC, plumbing, electrical and other
services drawings before starting the work, and shall report to the Architect / Consultant /
Engineer-in-charge any discrepancy and obtain clarification. Any changes found essential to
co-ordinate installation of this work with other services and trades, shall be made with prior
approval of the Architect / Consultant / Engineer-in-charge and without additional cost to the
Owner. The data given in the drawings and specifications is for contractor’s guidance only.
8.ACCESSIBILITY
The contractor shall confirm adequacy of the size of the openings and clearances for proper
installation of his equipment. The contractor shall locate all equipments which must be
serviced, operated or maintained, in fully accessible positions. The exact location and size of all
access panels, required for each concealed control equipment, valve or other devices, shall be
finalized and got approved from Engineer well in advance of the site installation.
9.SHOP DRAWINGS
a.
All the shop drawings shall be prepared on computer and on a system compatible with
the kind of system being followed by the Architect . Within four weeks after the award
of the contract, the Contractor shall furnish, for the approval of the Architect /
Consultant / Engineer-in-charge two sets of detailed shop drawings of all controllers
and sensors layouts for Plant room, AHU rooms, fan rooms, cooling towers, ventilation
fans; ducting drawings showing exact location of sensors; piping drawings showing exact
location of supports, valves, fittings, etc; electrical panels drawings with inside/outside
views, power and control wiring schematics, cable trays, supports and terminations. Fire
alarm & security system if indicated in BOQ shall also be shown & coordinated with
various other services in the shop drawings.
These shop drawings shall contain all information required to complete the Project as
per specifications and as required by the Architect / Consultant / Engineer-in-charge.
These drawings shall contain details of construction, size, arrangement, operating
84
clearances, performance characteristics and capacity of all items of equipment, also the
details of all related items of work by other contractors. Each shop drawing shall contain
tabulation of all measurable items of equipment/ materials/ works and progressive
cumulative totals from other related drawings to arrive at a variation-in-quantity
statement at the completion of all shop drawings. Each item of equipment /material
proposed shall be a standard catalogue product of an established manufacturer strictly
from the approved list of the manufacturers listed in the tender.
When the Architect/Consultant/ Engineer-in-charge makes any amendments in the
above drawings, the contractor shall supply two fresh sets of drawings with the
amendments duly incorporated, alongwith the drawings on which corrections were
indicated. After final approval is obtained from the Architect / Consultant / Engineer-incharge the contractor shall submit further twelve sets of shop drawings to the
Architect /Consultant / Engineer-in-charge for the exclusive use by the Architect /
Consultant / Engineer-in-charge and other contracting agencies. No material or
equipment may be delivered or installed at the job site until the contractor has in his
possession, approved shop drawings for the particular material/ equipment installation.
b.
Shop drawing submittals to include sufficient data to indicate complete compliance with
Contract Documents. Submissions in form of drawings, brochures, bulletins, catalog data,
and/or narrative descriptions. As a minimum requirement submit:
1. Symbol and abbreviation lists.
2.
System block diagram showing quantity and location of Operator’s Work Station
(OWS), printer and all Work Station Equipment, DDCPs, Field Equipment Panels,
physical communication cable routing between system components, sources for
all power to each device (other than final control devices) and coordinated
location of all major system components.
3.
Network riser and communication map indicating all network resident devises
(OWS, DDCP controllers, intelligent sensors & actuators, routers, repeaters,
gateways, connectivity to packaged systems, etc.
4.
A network map clearly depicting the actual routing of all network wiring and
location of all network resident devices.
5.
Control diagrams for all systems controlled, including panel layouts and internal
wiring details. Controls shall be shown on system flow diagrams, with sources of
power for each device. Arrange all sub systems on the same set or series of
drawings. Include associated wiring diagrams, bills of material, and DDC panel
wiring and mounting details in the same section. It is the intent of this
requirement that it is not necessary to page through the submittal to locate
associated sub systems.
6.
Interfaces (software and hardware) with equipment provided in other sections of
specifications. Show connection details based upon the approved submittals of
the equipment being interfaced with. Comment such as “information to be
completed with As Built Documentation” will not be acceptable.
7.
Narrative description of operation for each system, enumerating and describing
the function of each component. Include alarm and emergency sequences, and
equipment interlocks.
85
8.
Description of manual override capabilities.
9.
Complete input output point schedule. Identify point function, type and location.
10. Spare capacity provisions.
11. Detailed bill of materials.
12.
Valve and Damper Schedule: Provide identification numbers, location, system,
dimensions and performance data. Damper schedule shall be based upon
approved sheet metal shop drawings. Schedule shall show damper leakage rates.
Valve sizing shall be based on approved equipment cut sheets and approved
piping shop drawings.
13. Device mounting details. Include as a minimum :
i. Sensing elements in ducts or casings.
ii.Sensing elements in piping.
iii. Variable volume inlet vane damper operator.
14. Ladder wiring diagrams.
15.
Data maps for network integrated components, indicating parameters and data
being shared amongst systems.
16. Other information as requested herein.
17.
Complete full size drawings, 11 in. x 17 in. minimum. Each system shall be
submitted separately. Do not submit “typical” system as one drawing unless the
systems depicted are identical with the exception of DDCP point addresses. In
such cases, provide a schedule on the drawing with rows and columns for each
device in each system detailing part numbers, point addresses, etc.
18. Programming
i.Point identification code.
ii.System advisory messages, printouts, logging formats.
iii.Drawings of system graphics showing monitored points.
iv.Software flow charts for application and DDCP programs.
v.
Person machine interface program, include
annunciation, logs and programming capabilities.
commands,
alarm
vi.
Listing of all alarm messages (with their text) to be programmed for each
alarm specified. Messages shall require system operator’s or owner’s
representative’s approval.
vii.
Description of system operation under failure conditions, including
restart sequences and hierarchy for all systems.
19. Samples
i.
Thermostats, temperature sensors, Humidistat and humidity sensors.
ii. All devices mounted on finished surfaces.
20. Quality Control Submittals
86
i. U.L., FM, CSA listing compliance certificates.
ii. Final calibration, commissioning and testing reports.
c.
Shop drawings shall be submitted for approval sufficiently in advance of planned
delivery and installation of any materials to allow Architect / Consultant / Engineer-incharge ample time for scrutiny. No claims for extension of time shall be entertained
because of any delay in the work due to his failure to produce shop drawings at the
right time, in accordance with the approved program.
d.
Manufactures drawings, catalogues, pamphlets and other documents submitted for
approval shall be in two sets. Each item in each set shall be properly labeled, indicating
the specific services for which material or equipment is to be used, giving reference to
the governing section and clause number and clearly identifying in ink the items and
the operating characteristics. Data of general nature shall not be accepted.
e.
Approval of shop drawings shall not be considered as a guarantee of measurements or of
building dimensions. Where drawings are approved, said approval does not mean that
the drawings supersede the contract requirements, nor does it in any way relieve the
contractor of the responsibility or requirement to furnish material and perform work as
required by the contract.
f.
Where the contractor proposes to use an item of equipment, other than that specified
or detailed on the drawings, which requires any re-design of any part of the mechanical,
electrical or architectural layouts; all such re-design, and all new drawings and detailing
required thereof, shall be prepared by the contractor at his own expense and gotten
approved by the Architect / Consultant / Engineer-in-charge
Where the work of the contractor has to be installed in close proximity to, or will
interfere with work of other trades, he shall assist in working out space conditions to
make a satisfactory adjustment. If so directed by the Architect / Consultant /
Engineer-in-charge, the contractor shall prepare composite working drawings and
sections at a suitable scale not less than 1:50, clearly showing how his work is to be
installed in relation to the work of other trades. If the contractor installs his work before
coordinating with other trades, or so as to cause any interference with work of other
trades, he shall make all the necessary changes without extra cost to the Owner.
g.
h.
Within four weeks of approval of all the relevant shop drawings, the contractor shall
submit four copies of a comprehensive variation in quantity statement, and itemized
price list of recommended (by manufacturers) imported and local spare parts and tools
covering all equipment and materials in this contract. The Architect / Consultant/
Engineer-in-charge shall make recommendation to Owner for acceptance of anticipated
variation in contract amounts and also advise Owner to initiate action for
procurement of spare parts and tools at the completion of project.
10.ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION :
The electrical work related to Integrated Building Management System works in various panels,
shall be carried out in full knowledge of, and with the complete co-ordination of the respective
services contractor. Such electrical work shall be in total conformity with the control wiring
drawings prepared by the respective contractor and approved by the Architect / Consultant /
Engineer-in-charge. All equipment other than those in the scope of this
87
tender shall be connected and tested in the presence of an authorized representative of the
respective contractor, whose equipment is being tested. The Architect / Consultant / Owner’s site
representative decision shall be binding on all parties in case of any dispute.
11.MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
All materials and equipment shall conform to the relevant Standards and shall be of the
approved make listed in Appendix II. Deviation , if any will be highlighted by the tenderer at the
time of submission of tenders.
12.MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS :
Specific instructions, from manufacturers of the materials and equipment used in this project,
and not specifically mentioned in these documents, shall be followed in all cases.
13.INSTALLATION
1.
The electrical work related to automation system, in various panels, shall be carried out
by the IBMS Contractor, in full knowledge of, and with the complete co-ordination of
the respective services contractor. Such electrical work shall be in total conformity with
the control wiring drawings prepared by the respective services contractor and approved
by the Architect / Consultant /Engineer-in-charge . All equipment other than those in
the scope of this tender, shall be connected and tested in the presence of an
authorized representative of the respective contractor. The decision by Architect /
Consultant / Owner’s site representative shall be binding on all parties, in case of
dispute.
2.
All wiring and conduiting shall be properly supported. Cable routing must be approved
by Architect / Consultant / Engineer-in-charge before being installed. All field wiring shall
run parallel to or at right angles to the walls. Wiring running within enclosures shall be
neatly clamped and anchored.
3.
Loading of all the computer programs and data files including control programs,
initial parameters, settings, English descriptors etc shall be the responsibility of the IBMS
Contractor.
14.TESTING :
The installed system shall be tested as per relevant codes as applicable. The results for these
shall be submitted in quadruplicate for scrutiny.
The contractor shall pay for and arrange, without any extra cost to the Owner, all necessary
testing equipment, instruments, materials, accessories, and the requisite labour. Any defects
in materials and / or in workmanship detected in the course of testing shall be rectified by the
contractor, entirely at his own cost, to the satisfaction of the Architect / Consultant /
Engineer-in-charge.
14.1Building Automation System
88
For every analog input point tested, the system shall be capable of simulating any value of
input, independent of the actual field condition. This shall be accomplished either through
software or a discrete field mounted potentiometer for each analog input.
For every digital input point tested, the system shall be capable of simulating either an open
or closed status, independent of the actual field condition. This shall be accomplished either
through software or a discrete field mounted input switch for each digital input.
Handover acceptance procedures shall include but not be restricted to the following :




Display and printout of all points
Verification for control for all output points
Concurrent point history of all points
Display of all graphic screens including historical and Real time graphs for all analog points
14.2Fire Detection & Alarm System
Each circuit in the fire alarm system shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of NFPA
72 Guide for Testing Procedures for Local, Auxiliary, Remote Station, and Proprietary Protective
Signaling Systems.
Each smoke detector shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 72.
The Integrated Building Management System (IBMS) shall be commissioned only after the
contractor has certified in writing that the electrical installation work for automation services
has been thoroughly checked, tested and found to be totally satisfactory and in full conformity
with the approved shop drawings, specifications and manufacturers instructions. It is to be clearly
understood that the final responsibility for the sufficiency, adequacy and conformity to the
contract requirements, of the electrical installation work relating to IBMS interaction, lies solely
with the BAS contractor in so far as the functioning of the IBMS system is concerned.
15.ACCEPTANCE TESTING
As part of Acceptance Testing, following shall be submitted as minimum by the contractor:
a.
Submit a detailed acceptance test procedure designed to demonstrate compliance with
contract requirements at least 4 weeks before the start of testing. This procedure to be
approved prior to the start of the testing.
b.
During acceptance testing provide services of a fully qualified building automation
technician who is knowledgeable of the project.
c.
Using the commissioning test data the Owner / Engineer-in-charge shall select, at
random, functions to be demonstrated. These functions shall be demonstrated by the
Contractor in accordance with the acceptance test procedure. At least 15 percent of the
systems functions as selected by the Owner, or engineer shall be demonstrated. At least
95% of the functions demonstrated must perform as specified and documented on
commissioning data sheets or the system must be retested.
89
d.
Furnish instruments required for testing. Submit catalog data on all instruments for
approval prior to performance of tests.
Instrument Accuracy
Temperature: ¼°F or 1/2% of full scale, whichever is less
Pressure: ½% PSI or 1/2% of full scale, whichever is less
Humidity: 2% RH
Electrical: ¼° of full scale
e.
After the above acceptance tests are complete and the system is demonstrated to be
functioning as specified, a thirty-day endurance test period shall begin. If the system
functions as specified throughout the endurance test period requiring only routine
maintenance and adjustment, the system shall be accepted. If during the endurance test
period the system fails to perform as specified and cannot be corrected within eight
hours, the Owner may request that the endurance tests be repeated after problems have
been corrected.
16.COMMISSIONING
The contractor shall indicate to the Architect / Consultants / Engineer-in-charge his readiness for
commissioning of the system and shall commission the system only upon obtaining written
approval for the same.
Upon completion, devices subject to manual operation shall be operated in presence of
Architect / Consultant / Engineer-in-charge to demonstrate satisfactory operation.
17. CALIBRATION AND COMMISSIONING
As part of Calibration & Commissioning exercise, contractor shall be required to carry out the
following:
a.
Perform a three-phase commissioning procedure consisting of field I/O calibration and
commissioning, system commissioning and integrated system program commissioning.
Document all commissioning information on commissioning data sheets that shall be
submitted prior to acceptance testing. Notify the Owner in writing of the testing schedule
so that operating personnel may observe calibration and commissioning.
b. Field I/O Calibration and Commissioning
c.
Prior to system program commissioning, verify that each control panel has been installed
according to the shop drawings and test, calibrate, and bring on-line each control device.
Commissioning to include but not be limited to:
i. Sensor accuracy at 10, 50 and 90% of range.
ii. Sensor range.
iii. Verify analog limit and binary alarm reporting.
iv. Point value reporting.
v. Binary alarm and switch settings.
vi. Actuator spring ranges.
vii. Failsafe position on loss of control signal or electric supply.
90
e.
Record calibration and test data on commissioning data sheets and submit. Data sheets
shall include the device designation, the date of commissioning and the name of person
who performed commissioning.
f. Fan Speed Control With Out Air Flow Sensors
g.
The BMCS Contractor shall work closely with the Balancing Contractor to setup fan
tracking per the following procedure.
i.
With return fan at minimum speed, set supply fan to produce volume equal to
system differential. Record SF output signal.
ii.
Increase supply fan output signal 20% and raise return fan speed until differential
is once again obtained. Record return fan output signal.
iii.
Continue this procedure until the supply fan is at full speed. Set all values in a
look-up table so fans will track accordingly.
iv.
Vary the speed of the supply fan and verify fans are tracking with the proper
differential.
h. System Program Commissioning
After control devices have been commissioned, each DDCP program shall be put on-line
and commissioned. The contractor shall confirm that the DDCP program logic follows the
approved software flow chart and sequence of operation. Each control loop shall be
adjusted to provide stable control and control within the specified accuracies. System
program test results and loop adjustments shall be recorded on commissioning data
sheets and submitted.
i. Integrated System Commissioning
After all DDCP programs have been commissioned, the contractor shall verify the overall
system performs as specified. Tests shall include but not be limited to:
i. Data communication, both normal and failure modes
ii. Fully loaded system response time
iii. Impact of component failures on system operation
iv. Time/date changes
v. End of month/end of year operation
vi. Global application programs
vii. System backup and reloading
viii. System status displays
ix. Diagnostics
x. Power fail/restart
xi. Battery backup
xii. Non-DDC Subsystems
xiii. Subsystems not controlled by DDC shall also be tested and commissioned
18.COMPLETION CERTIFICATES
91
On completion of the installation, a certificate shall be furnished by the contractor, counter
signed by the licensed supervisor, under whose direct supervision the installation was carried
out. This certificate shall be in the prescribed form as required by the local authority.
The contractor shall be responsible for getting the entire installation duly approved by the
authorities concerned as required, and shall bear all expenses in connection with the same.
However, any receipted fees paid shall be reimbursed by the Owner on production of proof of
payment.
19.COMPLETION DRAWINGS
On completion of the work in all respects, the contractor shall supply two sets of CDs and
four portfolios (300x450mm) each, containing complete set of “As Built Drawings” on
approved scale. These drawings shall clearly indicate system architecture with complete
equipment layout, location of wiring and sequencing of automatic controls. Each portfolio shall
also contain consolidated control diagrams and technical literature of the entire system.
20.OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL :
The Contractor shall submit a draft copy of comprehensive operating instructions &
maintenance schedule for all systems and equipment included in this contract. Upon approval of
the draft, the contractor shall submit four (4) complete bound sets of printed operating
instructions and maintenance manuals.
The contractor shall also submit a preventive maintenance schedule for the hardware
components supplied and flowchart of each DDC program showing interrelationship between
inputs, PID functions, other functions, outputs etc.
21.OWNER’S MANUALS
The Operation & Maintenance Manuals shall contain the following
A. General
1.
Submit 2 draft copies of owner's manuals for review. After review by authorized
representative, the contractor shall incorporate review comments and submit 6
final copies.
2.
Update manuals with modifications made to system during guarantee period.
Provide replacement pages or supplements in quantity stated above.
3.
Assemble owner's manuals into multi-volume sets as necessary and required by
the Owner.
4.
Protect each volume with a heavy-duty vinyl plastic binder. Volumes to have
plastic printed dividers between major sections and have oversized binders to
accommodate up to ½ inch thick set of additional information.
92
B.
5.
Each binder to be silk-screened with project name and volume title on front cover
and binder.
6.
On the first page of each manual identify with project name, manual title, owner's
name, engineer's name, contractor's name, address and service phone number,
and person who prepared manual.
Operating manual to serve as training and reference manual for all aspects of day-to-day
operation of the system. As a minimum include the following:
1. Control flow diagrams.
2.
Sequence of operation for automatic and manual operating modes. The
sequences shall cross-reference the system point names.
3. Description of manual override operation of control points.
4. System manufacturer's complete operating manuals.
C.
Provide maintenance manual to serve as training and reference manual for all aspects of
day-to-day maintenance and major system repairs. As a minimum include the following:
1. Complete as-built installation drawings for each system.
2.
Overall system electrical power supply scheme indicating source of electrical
power for each system component. Indicate which components are on
emergency power and indicate all battery backup provisions.
3.
Overall system shielding and grounding scheme indicating all major components
and ground paths.
4.
Photographs and drawings showing installation details and locations of
equipment.
5.
Charts showing normal operating conditions at significant points such as electrical
test points.
6.
Routine preventive maintenance procedures, corrective
troubleshooting procedures, and calibration procedures.
diagnostic
7. Parts lists with manufacturer's catalog numbers and ordering information.
8.
Lists of ordinary and special tools, operating materials supplies and test
equipment recommended for operation and servicing.
9.
Manufacturer's operating set up, maintenance and catalog literature for each
piece of equipment.
10. Maintenance and repair instructions.
11. Recommended spare parts.
12. Field test reports.
D.
Provide Programming Manual to serve as training and reference manual for all aspects of
system programming. As a minimum include the following:
93
1. Complete programming manuals, and reference guides.
2.
Details of any special software packages and compilers supplied with system.
3. Information required for independent programming of system.
4.
Documentation on application and DDCP programs: Flow charts, equations, and
parameters.
5. Point schedule; include all points, real and virtual.
6. Software troubleshooting procedures.
22.TRAINING
A.
Two training sessions shall be provided by the contractor to the Owners personnel free of
cost, which shall be suitable to the type of system installed. The first training session
shall be imparted in IBMS contractors local office in India. All the travelling and living
expenses shall be borne by the Owner.
These sessions shall include, but not be limited to:
a)Written training material
b)Hands-on Lab exercise
c)Quiz Test
The following duration of training schedules shall be offered :
Operators Supervisors Managers Super User -
80 Hours
70 Hours
60 Hours
50 Hours
Second training session shall be conducted at site partly during system installation and
partly after system completion/testing /commissioning.
B.
The Contractor shall furnish the services of competent instructors who will give
instruction in the adjustment, operation and maintenance, including pertinent safety
requirements, of the equipment and system specified. The training shall be oriented
toward the system installed rather than being a general training course. Each instructor
shall be thoroughly familiar with all aspects of the subject matter they are to teach. All
equipment and material required for classroom training shall be provided by the
Contractor.
. The training program shall be accomplished in two phases for the time interval specified for
each phase :
1.
The first phase shall be given prior to the acceptance test period at a time mutually
agreeable between the Contractor and the Owner, and shall be at least five (5) days (8
hours/day) in length. Operating personnel to be trained in the functional operations of
the BMCS installed and the procedures that the operators will employ for system
operation. The training shall include but not be limited to:
a.
b.
General BMCS Configuration
Operation of Computer and Peripherals
94
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
2.
Command Line Mnemonics
Report Generation
Operator Control Functions
Graphics Generation
General equipment layout
Troubleshooting procedures
Preventive Maintenance procedures
Sensor maintenance and calibration
Proper use of service kit.
The second phase shall be conducted after system acceptance testing for a period
of three (3) days. The training shall include but not be limited to:
a. DDCP Programming
b. Data Base Generation
c. Supervisory Level Operator Commands
d. Topics requested by Owner.
23.MAINTENANCE DURING DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD :
It shall be responsibility of the contractor to carry out the Maintenance of the complete
system during the Defect Liability Period(Maintenance Visits) at no extra cost. The contractor shall
receive calls for any and all problems experienced in the operation of the system under this
contract, attend to these within 24 hours of receiving the complaints and shall take steps to
immediately correct any deficiency that may exist.
All components, system software, parts and assemblies supplied by the IBMS Contractor shall be
guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for two years from the date of
handing over to the Owner.
Labor, repair or replacement of system components shall be the responsibility of contractor at no
extra cost to the Owner.
All equipment that require repairing shall be immediately serviced and repaired. All
replacement parts and labour shall be supplied promptly & free-of-charge to the Owner.
24.UPTIME GUARANTEE
The contractor shall guarantee for the installed system an uptime of 99%. In case of shortfall in
any month during the defects liability period, the Defects Liability Period shall get extended by a
month for every month having shortfall. In case of shortfall beyond the defects liability period,
the contract for Operation and Maintenance shall get extended by a month for every month
having the shortfall and no reimbursement shall be made for the extended period.
The tenderer shall submit along with the tender, a detailed operation assistance proposal for the
Architect / Consultant / Owner’s site representative’s review. This shall include the type of service
planned to be offered during Defects Liability Period and beyond. The operation assistance
proposal shall give the details of the proposed monthly reports to the Management.
95
The tenderer shall include a list of other projects where such an Operation Assistance has been
provided.
25.OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
Contractor may be required to carry out the operation of the installation for a period of ONE
YEAR from the date of commissioning and handing over the entire system, i.e. during the defects
liability period. Further, he may also be required to carry out operation and all inclusive
maintenance of the entire system for a period of four years beyond the defects liability period.
25.1 Operation contract
i.16 hours a day, year round during working office hours for full load.
ii.
All stand-by equipment to be operated as per mutually agreed program..
iii.Proper entry and upkeep of relevant log books.
iv.Maintain complaints register. Submit weekly report.
v.Proper housekeeping of all areas under the contract.
vi.Prepare daily consumption report and summary of operation.
25.2
All Inclusive Maintenance Contract
aScope
The AMC shall cover all the items installed by the Contractor including
consumable like gas, Proximity Cards, etc.
b.Routine Preventive Maintenance Schedule to be submitted
i.
Schedule to cover manufacturer’s recommendation and/or common
engineering practice (for all plant and machinery under contract).
ii.
Monthly status report.
c.Uptime during maintenance contract
i.98% uptime of all systems under contract.
ii.
Up time shall be assessed every month and in case of shortfall during any
month the contract shall be extended by a month.
iii.
There shall be no reimbursement for the extended period.
iv.
Break-downs shall be attended to within ten hours of reporting.
d.Manpower
i.
Adequate number of persons to the satisfaction of the Owner’s site
representative shall be provided including relievers.
96
ii.
Statutory requirements of EPF, ESIC and other applicable labour
legislations to be complied with; and monthly certification to that effect
to be submitted.
iii.
Duty allocation and Roaster control shall be contractor’s responsibility.
iv.
No overtime shall be payable by Owner for any reason whatsoever.
97
e.Shut Downs
f.
i.
Routine shut downs shall be permitted in consultation with Owner.
ii.
Contractor shall be at liberty to carry out routine maintenance as and
when required but with prior permission of the Owner.
Payment Terms
i.
Quarterly payment or as per the main contractors payment schedule as
per G.C.C. based on measurement and pro-rata basis.
26.PARTIAL ORDERING :
The Owner through the Architect / Consultant / Engineer-in-charge reserve the right to order
equipment and materials or parts thereof from one or more tenderers.
27.POWER REQUIREMENT :
The contractor shall identify and submit with their tender, their requirement of power at
each of their major power consuming equipment.
28.COMPLIANCE LIST AND TECHNICAL DATA :
The contractor shall submit paragraph-by-paragraph listing of strict word-for-word compliance
or non-compliance of specifications. In case of any item of conditional compliance or noncompliance , the tenderer shall spell out the substitute to the feature.
At the time of tender, all tenderers shall include a detailed compliance statement, listing each
clause of the specifications and highlighting :
a.Exceed specification requirements (explanation required)
b.Meet specification requirements
c.Meet intent of specification (explanation required)
d.Deviation from specification
Each tenderer must also submit alongwith his tender the technical data for all items listed in
schedule of quantities. Failure to furnish technical data with tenders may result in summary
rejection of the tender.
The contractor shall also submit the following documents and details at the time of submission of
the tender. These shall be from the system which contractor is offering for this project.
i.
Available services for full system maintenance, software updates and
modifications,
hardware spare parts, adds and changes, system changes and training classes.
ii.
Technical data for all hardware components as asked for in the tender as per Appendix III.
98
iii.
Manufacturers, Test Certificate for each device/ sensor / equipment, clearly highlighting
the conforming standards.
29.EXCLUSIONS
1)
Services contractor shall provide potential free contacts for digital points, wherever
required, to ensure compatibility with the BAS system. The responsibility for providing the
above rest entirely with the respective services contractor.
2)
All theequipment’s whose start/stop is being governed by the IBMS shall be provided
with STOP/MANUAL/AUTO two pole selector switch in the panel by the respective
services contractor. Necessary modifications required in the panel for this shall be
carried out by the respective services contractor.
3)
The electrical terminations in the other services panels shall be done by respective
services contractors.
4)
Provision of power supply wherever required to power the BAS equipment shall be
provided by the electrical contractor within 2 meters distance of the BAS equipment.
5)
Breaking and making good of openings for cable crossings shall be in scope of Civil
Contractor.
6)
a)
For sensors, transmitters which are installed on pipes, the respective services
contractor shall provide a nipple/socket and an isolation valve duly installed.
b)
For control valves, the services contractor shall provide counter flanges
wherever counter flanges not come as a part of the valves/couplings(150 lbs
rating) welded/threaded on the pipes drilled and machined as per standards.
Control valves / Butterfly valves shall be installed by HVAC Contractor. BAS
contractor will provide power supply and necessary control signal and associated
wiring for controlling the valves.
All switching relays and transducers shall be mounted in a separate cabinet and shall be
designed, supplied, installed & commissioned by the BAS contractor. Cabling between
the relay/transducers panel and the local panel shall be supplied and laid by the BAS
contractor. Termination on the relay panel shall be carried out by the IBMS Contractor.
Terminations on the local panel shall be done by the respective services contractor.
All structural supports for panels & instruments shall be in the scope of IBMS Contractor.
7.
Provision of space in all panels for mounting transducers and power supply arrangement to
the transducers shall be provided by the respective services contractor.
30.LIST OF ITEMS AGAINST DUTY BENEFIT
Following items shall be imported against duty benefit :
a.Sensors, transmitters, controllers and system integration units.
b.Detectors, devices and Fire Alarm Control Panel
99
c.CCTV cameras, multiplexers, video switches and video monitor.
d.Card reader and field device controller
e.Agent for gas suppression system.
Owner shall open 5 Nos. letter of credit for equipment identified above. Associated local items
like wires, conduits, pipes, sensors, devices etc. shall not be entitled for duty benefit.
In case the contractor requires more than 5 Nos letter of credits, then same shall be identified at
the time of submission of bid.
31.
SPECIAL CONDITION
Audiovisual system, Networking system, BMS System etc. are all specialized works which involve acute and
precision electronic works. Contractors should engage special agencies with reputation of completing similar
type of work successfully and with adequate infrastructure to take up the work. Contractors should submit
the name of such agencies with their credentials and infrastructure details of their firm to the Engineer-incharge/Employer and gets his approval before engaging the agency in the work. Name of some of the
agencies who can undertake such works on turnkey basis is listed below. The intending contractors are to
entrust the works to any of the following firms.
i)
ii)
M/s. ACE Acoustics and Audio Video Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Dihang Arcade, 1st floor (opposite Dona planet)
G.S. Road, Guwahati – 781005, Assam
Ph : (0361) 2466601/02/03/04/06, Mob : 9864091093.
M/s. Sterling and Wilson Security System Pvt. Ltd.
(Associates of M/s. Shapoorji & Palonji and Co. Ltd.)
IT Building (3rd floor) Benfish,
31, G.N. Block, Sector – V, Salt Lake City, Kolkata – 700 091.
Tele : (033)3011-8182, FAX : 3011-8249, Mob : 9903387814.
iii)
M/s. Godrej Security. & Surveillance System,
Godrej & Boyce Mfg. Co. Ltd.,
Sector – V, Salt Lake City, Kolkata – 700 091.
Tele : (033)6601-3960, FAX : (033)23578271, Mob : 9836882727.
iv)
M/s. Siemens Ltd.,
Infrastructure & Cities , Sector SAS RC-IN-IC-BT REM ERS
43, Shantipally. Rashbehari Bypass connector, Kolkata – 700 042
Tele : (033)3093-9526, FAX : (033)2444-9667, Mob : 94322-54665
v)
M/s. Voltas Limited,
Gillander House,
8, N. S. Road, Kolkata – 700 001
Tele : (033) 6626 6200.
vi)
M/s. Blue Star Limited,
7, Hare Street, Kolkata – 700 001
Tele : (033) 2213 4000.
100
APPENDIX – I
LIST OF DRAWINGS
Sl.
No.
Drawing No.
Title
To be submitted by specialized sub contractor alongwith tender under main contractor.
All vendors are encouraged to visit the office of Architect / Consultants for any clarification /
details.
101
APPENDIX – II
GUARANTEE PROFORMA
GUARANTEE FOR IBMS INSTALLATION
We hereby guarantee the year round IBMS System which we have installed in the
Complex described below :
Building:
The New State Legislative Assembly building at Dispur, Guwahati,
Assam.
Location:
Dispur, Guwahati, Assam.
Owner :
Govt. of Assam (P.W.D)
For a period of 5 Years from the date of acceptance/commissioning of the total
installation, WE AGREE TO repair or replace to the satisfaction of the Owner, any or all
such work that may prove defective in workmanship, equipment or materials within that
period, ordinary wear and tear and unusual abuse or neglect excluded, together with any
other work, which may be damaged or displaced in so doing. In the event of our failure to
comply with the above mentioned conditions within a reasonable time, after being
notified in writing, we collectively and separately, do hereby authorise the Owner to
proceed to have the defects repaired and made good at our expense, and we shall pay the
cost and charges thereof, immediately upon demand.
WE ALSO HEREBY UNDERTAKE to test the entire installation on following the completion
of the installation, to check and do everything necessary to ensure that the specified
indoor conditions in all spaces are maintained, that all water and air systems are
properly monitored, that all controls are calibrated accurately, and that all units are
functioning satisfactorily.
SIGNATURE OF CONTRACTOR
for IBMS NSTALLATION
DATE
SEAL
102
APPENDIX – III
TECHNICAL DATA SUBMITTAL
The contractor shall submit details of installed system and instruments detailed dates for record to
the owner for future reference and maintenance. The details to be submitted in the following format.
Name of the instrument and installation :a.
Manufacturer
:
b.
Country of Origin
:
c.
Local Agent
:
d.
Model
:
e.
Processor
:
f
Minimum ROM (K Bytes)
:
g
Clock Frequency
:
h
RAM Capacity Installed
:
i
Ram Capacity Expandable
:
j
Cache Memory (K Bytes)
:
k
Hard Disk Capacity (M Bytes)
:
l
CD Drive Capacity (M Bytes)
:
m
CD Drive Size
:
n
Split Screen Capacity
:
o
Dimension Overall (mm)
:
p
Ambient Operating Temperature (deg.C)
:
q
Ambient Operating R.H (%)
:
r
Power Supply
:
s
Power Consumption (Watts)
:
t
UL Listing
:
103
GENERAL NOTES ON BOQ:
MISCELLANEOUS
Notes:
Items 292 & 293 of BOQ are very specialized item and the work is to be got done from any of the
following specialised agencies with due approval from Engineer-in-Charge/Architect
1. M/s. Constro Art Engineering Company.
Sl. No. 50/4,5 Narhe - Ambegaon Road, Narhe,
Pune – 411041
Tel. : 91 20 24426797 / 4446
[email protected]
2.
M/S Construction Catalyser Pvt. Ltd
483/37, Mitramandal Colony
Opposite House of Jagtap, Paravati
Pune-411009
Tel-912024426797/4446
[email protected]
3. Saksi Engineering Projects
Harthala Railway Station Road, Vidyanagar, Harthala (Sonakpur)
Moradabad-244001 (U.P.)
09897622006/09307123456
[email protected]
FURNITURE AND ARTEFACTS
Notes:
All the furniture are very much descriptive as per the picture given and the finishing should be factory
made of International standard.
LIGHTING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM
Notes :
Supply of items Like Enclosures, with ELCB and MCB protection for Dimmers for site basis are in Client's
scope.
AUDIO VIDEO SYSTEM
Notes :
Audio video system including design and project management, programming as required, design and as
built drawings (reproducible), operation and maintenance manuals - including equipment manuals,
training - operation and maintenance, warranty - 24 months extended manufacturer's warranty at same
terms and conditions.
Telephone & networking System
PART - I : ACTIVE COMPONENTS
Notes :
i)
Bidder shall provide OEM authorisation certificate in
104
original certifying the bidder to participate in the tender.
The name of the project should be clearly mentioned in
the certificate
ii)
Bidder shall provide schedule of all items and shall give
in the format indicating the make & listing of the
components.
Quantities shall be checked at site and approval shall be
taken from the Engineer In charge before procuring the
materials.
iii)
iv)
Quantity of materials shall be supplied after approval of
shop drawings and as per instructions of Engineer-incharge only.
PART II: PASSIVE COMPONENTS
Notes :
Bidder shall provide OEM authorisation certificate in original certifying the bidder to participate
in the tender. The name of the project should be clearly mentioned in the certificate.
1
2
Bidder shall provide schedule of all items and shall give in the format indicating the make &
listing of the components.
Quantities shall be checked at site and approval shall be taken from the Engineer In charge
before procuring the materials.
3
4
Quantity of materials shall be supplied after approval of shop drawings and as per instructions of
Engineer-in-charge only.
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
i) Bidder shall provide OEM authorization certificate in original certifying the bidder to participate
in the tender. The name of the project should be clearly mentioned in the certificate.
ii) Bidder shall provide schedule of all items and shall give in the format indicating the make & listing
of the components.
iii) Quantities shall be checked at site and approval shall be taken from the Engineer In charge before
procuring the materials.
iv) Quantity of materials shall be supplied after approval of shop drawings and as per instructions of
Engineer-in-charge only.
BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Notes:
i
All data historical log shall be saved to hard disk before the
expiry of 50 days.
ii
All controllers shall be UL listed.
105
iii
Catalogues for all controllers shall be submitted with bid.
iv
Contractor shall provide schedule of all items in a format indicating the make & listing of the
component (UL) & Indian/Imported.
v
Quantities shall be checked at site and approval shall be taken from the Engineer Incharge
before procuring the materials.
The Quantity of cable/wire/conduits are tentative. The contactor has to provide the DDC
controllers as per manufacturer selected from list of approved makes and the qty. of
cables/wires/conduits etc. will depend on the selection of controllers.
vi
vii
viii
Procurement shall be done after the approval of shop drawing and material data sheets.
Other details shall be as per the technical specification.
CHILLER/ PUMPS/ COOLING /TOWER SYSTEM :
i)
All data historical log shall be maintained for
minimum 50 days.
AHU/TFA/VENT./EXHAUST FANS :
NOTE:
i)
All data historical log shall be maintained for minimum 50 days.
PLUMBING/FIRE FIGHTING/STP/WTP/RO/ELECTRICAL :
NOTE:
The Bidder must submit OEM authorisation certificate along with submission of the Bid document. The
name of the project should be clearly mentioned in the certificate.
All data historical log shall be maintained for minimum 50 days.
106
H. Joint Ventures.
Para’s for joint Ventures
Bidders willing to participate in a Joint Venture (JV) must submit their JV agreement in sealed
envelop along with the Technical Bid at ……………………….. (Address) and clearly marked
………………….. (Name of project)
Joint Ventures
2.6.1 Joint venture partners would be limited to three (including the lead partner but excluding the
financial partner).
2.6.2A) One of the partners, who is responsible for performing a key function in contract management or
is executing a major component of the proposed contract, shall be nominated as being in charge
during the bidding periods and, in the event of a successful bid, during contract execution. The
partner in charge shall be authorized to incur liabilities and receive instructions for and on behalf
of the partner(s) of the joint venture; this authorization shall be evidenced by submitting a power
of attorney signed by legally authorized signatories of all the partners.
B) All the partners of the joint venture shall be, jointly and severally liable, during the bidding process
and for the execution of the contract in accordance with the contract terms, and a statement to
this effect shall be included in the authorization mentioned under sub clause 2.6.2(A) above. The
bid shall be signed so as to legally bind all the partners, jointly and severally.
Bid security and the performance guarantee as required will be furnished by the Lead partner and
joint venture partner(s), out of their account in proportion to their participation in joint venture.
Qualifying criteria for joint ventures
2.6.3 General Experience:
The Applications shall meet the minimum qualification criteria as defined in Clause No.4.5 of
Section-1(Instructions to bidders) except 4.5A(c), the lead partner must fulfill criteria of similar
nature of single work as indicated in 4.5A(c) however a successfully or 90% completed similar
nature of single work by the same JV partners will be considered as qualifying criteria.
2.6.4 Personnel Capabilities.
The applicant must have available key personnel for this work as defined in Clause No.4.5 of
Section-1(Instructions to bidders)
2.6.5
Availability of key and critical equipments as defined in Clause No.4.5 of Section-1(Instructions to
bidders)
107
2.6.6 Financial position.
The applicant should demonstrate that he access to or has available liquid assets ( working capital
each in hand and bank guarantees) and / or credit facilities of not less than 10% of the contract /
contracts applied for, construction cash – flow may be taken as 10% of the estimated value of
contract / contracts. (See Clause No 4.3(vii) and 4.5 of Section-1(Instructions to bidders)
2.6.7 The audited balance sheet for the last five years should be submitted, which must demonstrate the
soundness of the applicant’s financial position showing long – term profitability including an
estimated financial projection for the next two years. Where necessary, the employer will make
inquires with the applicant’s bankers. (See Clause No.4.3 (vi) of Section-1(Instructions to bidders)
2.6.8 Litigation History.
The applicant should provide accurate information on any litigation or arbitration resulting from
contracts completed or under execution by him over the last five years. A consistent history of
awards against the applicant or any partner of a joint venture may result in failure of the applicant.
2.6.9 Bid capacity : Applicant should fulfilled the clause No.4.8 of Section-1 (Instructions to bidders).
Note : In case of a joint venture, the available bid capacity will be applied for each partner to the extent of
his proposed participation in the execution of the works and combined.
2.6.10 Disqualification: This should be as per clause No.4.9 of Section-1(Instructions to
bidders).
2.7 Joint Ventures must comply with the following requirements:
Refer to Clause No.4.6 of Section-1 of ITB.
2.7.2 Refer to Clause No. 4.6.2 of Section-1 of ITB.
.
2.8 Deleted.
2.9 Conflict of interest
2.9.1
The Applicant (including all members of a joint venture) must not be associated, nor have been
associated in the past, with the consultant (M/S Dulal Mukherjee & Associates, Kolkata ) or any
other entity that has prepared the design, specifications and bidding documents for the project,
or what was proposed as Engineer for the contract, over the last five years
Any such association may result in the disqualification of the Applicant.
2.10 General:
2.10.1 A firm or a member of a joint venture may participate in only one bid for the contract. If a firm
submits more than one bid singly or in joint venture all bids including that party will be rejected.
This rule will not apply in respect of bids which include specialist subcontractors who are used by
more than one bidder.
108
2.10.2 Bidders will be required to provide bid security in the form of a bankers cheque/bank guaranties
or / other security acceptable to employer about 1% of the estimated cost and the successful
bidder will be required to provide performance security. Example of acceptable forms will be
supplied with the bidding documents.
2.10.3 The employer reserves the right to :
a) amend the scope and value of any contract (s) to bid.
b) Reject or accept any application, and
c) The employer shall neither be liable for any such actions nor be under any obligation to inform
the applicant of the grounds for them.
ADDITIONAL SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR JV
A copy of the Joint Venture (JV) entered into by the partners shall be submitted with the application.
Alternatively, a letter of intent to execute a JVA in the event of a successful bid shall be signed by all
partners and submitted with the Application together with a copy of the proposed Agreement. Pursuant
to sub-clause 2.6.2(A) & 2.6.2(B) above, the JV shall include among other things, the Joint Venture’s
objectives, the proposed management structure, the contribution of each partner to the Joint Venture
operation, the commitment of the partners to joint and several liability for due performance,
recourse/sanctions within the Joint Venture in the event of default or withdrawal of any partner and
arrangements for providing the required indemnities.
In case of withdrawal of any partner from the Joint Venture the following shall be applicable:
i)
Stepping into the shoes of the existing partners of Joint Venture with all the liabilities of the
existing partners from the beginning of the contract.
ii)
With prior approval of Assam PWD.
iii)
Not withstanding demarcation or allotment of work between two JV
partners JV shall liable for non-performance of the whole contract
irrespective of their demarcation or share of work.
iv)
In case of successful bid being accepted by Assam PWD, the payments under the contract will
only be made to the JV and not to the individual partners.
2) Joint venture agreement shall contain a clause to the effect that there shall be a separate JV Bank
Account (distinct from the bank accounts of the individual partners) to which the individual partners shall
contribute their share capital and/or working capital.
Joint Venture agreement shall contain a clause to the effect that the financial obligations of the JV shall be
discharged through the said JV Bank account only and also all the payments received or paid by the
Govt.of Assam or by the JV shall be through that account alone.
4) Joint Venture is applicable to the project costing Rs.15.00 Crore or above
109
5) Inclusion of a financial partner in the JV is permitted who need not have any technical qualification but
may offer financial support to the JV. Member(s) of the JV , other than the Financial member should
collectively meet all the experience requirements.
ANNEXURE FOR JOINT VENTURE (application format)
Letter of Application.
[ letterhead paper of the Applicant, or partner responsible for a joint venture, including full postal
address, telephone no , fax no, telex no, and cable address]
Date ___________________________
To
____________________________
____________________________
____________________________
[ Name & Address of the Employer}
Sir,
Being duly authorized to represent and act on behalf of ______________________
(hereinafter “the Applicant”), and having reviewed and fully understood all the qualification
information provided for JV the undersigned hereby apply to be qualified by yourselves as a bidder for the
work of____________________________(Name of work)
2.Attached to this letter are copies of original documents defining: (A)
the Applicant’s legal status;
the principal place of business; and
the place of incorporation (for applicants who are corporations) ; or the place of registration and the
nationality of the owners (for applicants who are partnerships or the individually-owned firms)
authority letter(s) for signatory (ies).
A.For applications by joint ventures, all the information requested in the qualification documents is to be
provided for the joint venture, if it already exists, and for each party to the joint venture separately. The
lead partner should be clearly identified. Each partner in the joint venture shall sign the letter
3. Your agencies and its authorized representatives are hereby authorized to conduct any inquiries or
investigations to verify the statements, documents, and information submitted in connection with this
application, and to seek clarification from our bankers and client regarding any financial and technical
aspects. This Letter of Application will also serve as authorization to any individual or authorized
representative of any institution referred to in the supporting information, to provide such information
deemed necessary and requested by yourselves to verify statements and information provided in this ap
plication, or with regard to the resources, experiences, and competence of the Applicant.
4.Your Agency and its authorized representatives may contact the following
persons for further information : (B)
General and managerial inquiries
Contact 1
Telephone 1
110
Contact 2
Telephone 2
Personal inquiries
Contact 1
Contact 2
Telephone 1
Telephone 2
Technical inquiries
Contact 1
Contact 2
Telephone 1
Telephone 2
Financial inquiries
Contact 1
Contact 2
Telephone 1
Telephone 2
5.
This application is made in the full understanding that :
(a)
bids by pre-qualified applicants will be subject to verification of all information
submitted for pre-qualification at the time of bidding ;
(b)
your Agency reserves the right to :
amend the scope and value of any contracts/bids under this project,
and
reject or accept any application
and
( c) your Agency shall not be liable for any such actions and shall be under no obligation to inform the
applicant of the grounds for them.
_______________________________________________________________________________
B. Applications by joint ventures should provide on a separate sheet equivalent information for each
party to the application .
6. Appended to this application, we give details of the participation of each party, including capital
contribution and profit/loss agreements, to the joint venture or association. We also specify the financial
commitment in terms of the percentage of the value of the (each) contract, and the responsibilities for
execution of the (each) contract.
7.We confirm that in the event that we bid, that bid as well as any resulting contract will be ;
(a)signed so as to legally bind all partners, jointly and severally; and
(b)
submitted with a joint venture agreement providing the joint and several liability of all partners
in the event the contract is awarded to us.
8.The undersigned declare that the statements made and the information provided in the duly completed
application are complete, true and correct in every detail.
Signed
Name
For and on behalf of {name of the Applicant of a
joint venture}
Signed
Name
For and on behalf of {name of partner}
111
Signed
Name
For and on behalf of {name of the partner}
Signed
Name
For and on behalf of {name of partner}
Signed
Name
For and on behalf of {name of the partner}
Signed
Name
For and on behalf of {name of partner}
APPLICATION FORM (I)
General Information
All individual firms and each partner of a joint venture applying for pre-qualification are requested to
complete the information in this form. Nationality information to be provided for all owners or applicants
who are partnerships or individually-owned firms
Where the Applicant proposes to use named subcontractors for critical components of the works, or for
work contents in excess of 10 percent of the value of the whole works, the following information should
also be supplied for the specialist subcontractor(s)
1.
2.
Name of Firm
Head office address
3.
4.
5.
Telephone
Fax
Place of incorporation / registration
Contract
Telex
Year of incorporation /
registration
112
APPLICATION FORM (IA)
Structure and Organisation
1. The applicant is
(a) an individual
(b) a proprietor firm
(c ) a firm in partnership
(d) a limited company or corporation
(e) a group of firms / joint venture
( If yes, give complete information
in respect of each partner)
2.Attach the organization Chart showing ______________________
the structure of organization, including
the names of the Director and position
of officers.
3.Number of years of experience :
(a) as a Prime contractor (contractor
shouldering major responsibility)
(i) in own country ______________________
(ii) other countries (specify country) ______________________
(b) in a joint Venture
(i) in own country ______________________
(ii) other countries (specify country)
______________________
(c ) as sub-contractor in (specify main contractor)
(i) in own country
(ii) other countries (specify country)
______________________
______________________
4.For how many years has your organization
______________________
been in business of similar work under its
______________________
present name ? What were your fields when
______________________
your organization was established ? Whether______________________
any new fields were added in your organization?
_____________________
And if so, when?______________________
5.Were you ever required to suspend
______________________
construction for a period of more than six
______________________
months continuously after you started?______________________
If so , give name of project & give reasons
______________________
113
thereof.
6.Have you ever left the work awarded to ______________________
you incomplete? ( If so, give name of
______________________
project & reasons for not completing work)
______________________
7.In which field of civil engineering ______________________
construction do you claim specialization ______________________
and interest. ______________________
8.Give details of your experience in ______________________
Sanitary & Water Supply Works ______________________
In Building
9.Give details of your experience in ______________________
Electrical Works in Building Works
______________________
10. Give details of your experience in ______________________
Audio Visual System
______________________
IBMS ________________________
Access control System ________________________
IPTV ________________________
Telephone networking system ________________________
Fire Alarm System ________________________
Security & surveillance System ________________________
C.These are sample illustration to be modified as appropriate.
114
APPLICATION FORM (2)
General Experience Record
Name of Applicant or partner of a joint Venture
All individual firms and all partners of a joint venture are requested to complete the information in this
form. The information supplied should be annual turnover of the Applicant (or each member of the joint
venture) in terms of the amount billed to clients for each year for work in progress or completed.
Use a separate sheet for each partner of a joint venture.
Annual turnover data (construction works only)
S.No.
Year
1.
2009-10
2.
2010-11
3.
2011-12
4.
2012-13
5.
2013-14
Turnover
Indian Rupees
115
APPLICATION FORM (2A)
Joint Venture Summary
Sl. No.
1.
Name of all partners of a joint venture
Lead partner
2
3.
Partner
Partner
Total value of annual construction turnover, in terms of work billed to clients, in Indian Rupees, converted
at the rate of exchange at the end of the period reported.
Annual turnover data (construction works only, Indian Currency)
Sl.
No.
1.
Partner
Lead partner
Form 2
Page No.
Year 1
Year 2
Year 3
Year 4
Year 5
2.
Partner
3.
Partner
TOTAL
Indicate responsibility in case of planning, finance, construction equipment, key. Personal and execution
of the work of the lead firm of the joint venture and each of the Joint Venture partners:
Details regarding financial responsibility and participation (percentage share in the total) of each firm in
the Joint Venture. Attach a Memorandum of Understanding for the Proposed Agreement of Joint Venture
which should lay down responsibility regarding work and financial arrangements in respect of each of the
firms in the Joint Venture.
(Refer para 2.7)
Details of participation in the Joint Venture
[Indicate responsibility and extent of participation in respect of finance, planning, construction
equipment, key personnel and execution of the work of the major/lead partner of the joint venture and
other partner of JV]
Participation details
Financial
Planning
Construction
equipment
Key personnel
Execution of work
(give details on
construction of each)
(Major/lead partner)
Partner
Partner
116
APPLICATION FORM (3)
Particular Experience Record
Name of Applicant or Partner of a joint venture
APPLICATION FORM (3A)
Details of Contracts of Similar Nature Works
Name of Applicant or partner of a joint venture
Use a separate sheet for each contract.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5
6.
7.
8.
9.
10
11
12
Number of contract
Name of contract
Country
Name of Employer
Employer’s Address
Name of works and special features relevant to the contract for which the Applicant
wishes to pre-qualify.
Contract role (check one)
*Sole contract
* sub-contract
* Partner in a joint venture
(Percentage participation)
Value of total contract *(at completion, or at date of award for current contracts)
Date of award
Date of completion
Contract duration ( years and months)
Years
Months
Specified requirements ( as in ……………..)
Name and professional qualification of applicant’s Engineer-in-charge of the work
Were there any penalties/ fines/ stop-notice/ compensation/ liquidated damages
imposed? (Yes or No) If yes, give amount and explanation
Insert any specified criteria required for particular operations, such as annual volume of earthmoving,
underground excavation, or placing concrete, as applicable.
_________________________________________________________________________
*In case of contracts in foreign currency, the value of the contract in that currency should be stated.
A certificate of completion from the Employer / Engineer must be enclosed.
117
APPLICATION FORM (4)
Summary Sheet: Current Contract Commitments / Works in Progress.
Name of Applicant or partner of a joint venture
Applicants and each partner to an application should provide information on their current commitments
on all contracts that have been awarded, or for which a letter of intent or acceptance has been received,
or for contracts approaching completion, but for which an unqualified, full completion certificate has yet
to be issued.
Sl.
No
Name of Contract
Name of
Client
1.
2.
3.
Contract
value
Stipulated
date of
completion
Value of
Estimated
outstanding Completion
work
APPLICATION FORM (5)
Personal Capabilities
Name of Applicant
For specific positions essential to contract implementation, applicants should provide the names of at
least two candidates qualified to meet the specified requirements stated for each position. The data on
their experience should be supplied in separate sheets using one Form (5A) for each candidate.
1.
Title of position
Name of prime candidate
2.
Name of alternate candidate
Title of position
Name of prime candidate
3.
Name of alternate candidate
Title of position
Name of prime candidate
4.
Name of alternate candidate
Title of position
Name of prime candidate
Name of alternate candidate
118
APPLICATION FORM (5A)
Candidate Summary
Name of Applicant
Position
Candidate
information
1.Name of the Candidate
Present
Employment
4. Name of the Employer
Address of the Employer
Candidate
* Prime
* Alternate
2. Date of birth
3. Professional Qualification
Telephone
Contact (Manager/ personal Officer)
Fax
Job title of Candidate
Telex
Years with present Employer
Summarize professional experience over the last 20 years, in reverse chronological order.
Indicate particular technical and managerial experience relevant to the Project.
From
To
Company/Project/Position/relevant technical & managerial experience
119
APPLICATION FORM (6)
Equipment Capabilities
Name of Applicant
The applicant shall provide adequate information to demonstrate clearly that it has the capability to meet
the requirements for each and all items of equipment listed in the Instruction to Applicants. A separate
Form (6) shall be prepared for each item of equipment listed in para 2.6.5 of the Instruction to Applicants,
or for alternative equipments proposed by the Applicant.
Item of Equipment
Equipment
Current
status
Source
1. Name of manufacture
3. Capacity
5. Current location
6. Details of current commitments
7. Indicate source of the equipment
* Owned * Rented * Leased
2. Model and power rating
4.Year of manufacture
* Specially manufactured
Omit the following information for equipment owned by the Applicant or partner.
Owner
Agreements
8. Name of owner
9. Address of owner
Telephone
Contact name and title
Fax
Telex
Details of rental/ lease/ manufactured agreements specific to the Project.
120
APPLICATION FORM (7)
Financial Capability
Name of Applicant or partner of a joint venture
Applicants, including each partner of a joint venture, should provide financial information to demonstrate
that they meet the requirements stated in the Instructions to the Applicants. Each applicant or partner
of a joint venture must fill in this form. If necessary, use separate sheets to provide complete banker
information . A copy of the audited balance sheets should be attached.
Banker
Name of Banker
Address of banker
Telephone
Contact name and title
Fax
Telex
Summarise actual assets and liabilities in Indian Rupees (INR) (at the exchange current at the end of each
year) for the previous five years. Based upon known commitments, summarize projected assets and
liabilities in INR equivalent for the next two years.
Financial
Information in Indian
Rupees
1. Total Assets
2.Current Assets
3. Total liabilities
4.Current liabilities
5. Profit before taxes
6. Profit after taxes
Actual:
Previous five years
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Projected:
Next two years
6.
7.
Specify proposed sources of financing to meet the cash flow demands of the Project, net of current
commitments (Instructions to Applicants, para 3.5)
Sl. No
1.
2.
3.
4.
Sources of financing
Amount in Indian Rupees
Attach audited financial statements for the last five years ( for the individual applicant or each partner of
a joint venture)
Firms owned by individuals, and partnership, may submit their balance sheets certified by a registered
accountant, and supported by copies of tax returns, if audits are not required.
121
APPLICATION FORM (8)
Litigation History
Applicants, including each partners of a joint venture, should provide information on any history of
litigation or arbitration resulting from contracts executed in the last five years or currently under
execution ( Instructions to the Applicants, para 2.6.8 ). A separate sheets should be used for each partner
of a joint venture.
Year
Award
for or
against
applicants
Name of Clients, cause of litigation, and
matter in dispute
Disputed
Amount
(current value
in Indian Rs)
Actual
awarded
amount in
Indian Rs
122
APPLICATION FORM (9)
INFORMATION REGARDING CURRENT LITIGATION, DEBARRING/ EXPELLING OF TENDERER OR
ABANDONMENT OF WORK BY TENDERER
1
2.
3.
(a)
Has the Applicant or its constituent partners consistent history of
litigation awarded against him
(b)
If yes, give details
(a)
Has the Applicant or its constituent partners being
debarred/expelled by any Agency in India, during the last 5 years,
excepting on account of reasons other than non-performance,
such as rescinding of joint venture pulling out, court directions
leading to breaking up of a joint venture before start of work.
(b)
If yes, give details
(a)
Has the Applicant or its constituent partners abandoned any
contract work in India, during the last 5 years
If yes, give details
YES/NO
(a)
Has the Applicant or its constituent partners been declared
bankrupt during the last 5 years.
YES/NO
(b)
If yes, give details, including present status.
(b)
4.
YES/NO
YES/NO
Note :If any information in this schedule is found to be incorrect or concealed, prequalification application
will be summarily rejected
123
APPLICATION FORM (10)
AFFIDAVIT
(To be given separately by each partner of Joint venture)
1.I, the undersigned do hereby certify that all the statements made in the required attachments are true
and correct.
2.The undersigned also hereby certifies that neither out firm M/s ______________________
nor any of its constituent partners have abandoned any work on Building works in India nor any contract
awarded to us for such works have been rescinded during last five years prior to the date of this bid.
The undersigned hereby authorize(s) and request(s) any bank, person, firm or corporation to furnish
pertinent information deemed necessary and requested by the Department to verify this statement or
regarding my (our) competence and general reputation.
The undersigned understand and agrees that further qualifying information may be requested, and agrees
to furnish any such information at the request of the Department/ Project implementing agency.
____________________________________
(Signed by an Authorised Officer of the Firm)
________________
Title of Officer
______________________
Name of Firm
DATE
124
SECTION - 4
CONTRACT DATA
125
CONTRACT DATA
Clause Reference
with respect to
Section - 3
Items marked “N/A” do not apply in this contract
1.
The Employer is the Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Assam, Chandmari,
Guwahati – 3.
( Cl. 1.1 )
Name of authorized Representative: Addl. Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.)
O/o the Chief Engineer,PWD,Assam, Guwahati – 3.
2.
The Engineer is the Executive Engineer, PWD, PCC Division, Dispur,
Guwahati-06
( Cl. 1.1 )
3.
The Dispute Review Expert appointed by the Employer is :
( Cl. 1.1 )
* Name
:
* Address
:
4.
The Defects Liability Period is 365 days from the date of completion.
( Cl. 1.1 & 3 )
5.
(a) The Start date shall be 15 days from the date of issue of the Notice to
proceed with the work.
( Cl. 1.1 )
6.
The Intended Completion Date for the whole of the works 9 months after
start of work with the following milestones: (Buildings to be operationally
ready within nine months).
(Cl. 1.1, 17 & 28)
7.
Milestone dates :
( Cl. 2.2 & 9.1)
Milestone
Physical works to be completed
Within the time
Milestone - 1
25% of contract value
3 months
Milestone - 2
60% of contract value
6 months
Milestone – 3
100 % of contract value
9 months
8.
The Site is located at : Dispur, Guwahati-6, Assam.
( Cl. 1.1 )
9.
The name and Identification number of the Contract is :
NO:CS/T/BD/8/2013/46 , Dated Guwahati, the 17/03/2015
( Cl. 1.1)
10.
The works consist of the following: : " Construction work of the proposed
( Cl. 1.1)
126
New Assam Legislative Assembly Building at Dispur with Budgetary cost
estimate & revised Design proposal (Interior works for Assembly Main
Building)”
A.
Flooring.
B.
Wall cladding, partition walls, paneling & false ceiling.
C.
Door shutters & other civil works including painting and polishing.
D.
Stage Craft.
E.
Acoustic treatment.
F.
Loose furniture /built in furniture.
G.
Kitchen equipments.
H.
Sanitary fittings & testing.
J.
Light fittings for interior illumination with connected works.
11.
The law, which applies to the contract, is the law of Union of India and
Govt. of Assam. Indian Contract Act 1872 and Indian Council of
Arbitration and Reconciliation Act. 1996.
12.
The languages of the Contract documents is English.
( Cl. 3.1)
13.
Limit of subcontracting 20% of the Initial Contract Price. It is made clear that
the balance 80% of the work cannot be sublet/subcontracted to any other
company, firm of individual.
( Cl. 7.1)
14.
The Schedule of other contractors
15.
The Schedule of Key Personnel : As per Appendix – II to Section - I
( Cl. 9)
16.
The minimum insurance cover for physical property, injury and death is Rs. 5
lakhs per occurrence with the number of occurrence limited to four. After
each occurrence, contractor will pay additional premium necessary to make
Insurance valid for four occurrences always.
( Cl. 13)
17.
Site Investigation report.
( Cl. 14)
18.
The Site Possession Dates shall be within 7 (seven) days from the date of
Notice to proceed with the work.
( Cl. 21)
19.
Fees and types of reimbursable expenses to be paid to the Dispute Review
( Cl. 25)
-
NIL
( Cl. 3.1)
( Cl. 8)
127
Board
20.
- 50% by the Employer
- 50% by the Contractor.
Appointing Authority for the Dispute Review Expert is the Employer
( Cl. 26)
21.
The period for submission of the programme for approval of Engineer
Shall be 21 days from the issue of Letter of acceptance.
( Cl. 27.1)
22.
The period between programme updates shall be 30 days.
( Cl. 27.3)
23.
The amount to be withheld for late submission of an updated programme
shall be Rs.30 Lakh.
( Cl. 27.3)
24.0
The defect liability period shall be 365 days from completion.
However, guarantee for furniture items shall be for 10 years
from the date of completion.
25.
The following events shall also be Compensation Events :
( Cl. 35 )
( Cl. 44)
Substantially adverse ground conditions encountered during the course of
execution of work not provided for in the bidding document.
i.
Removal of Underground utilities detected subsequently.
26.
The currency of the Contract is Indian Rupees (INR)
( Cl. 46)
27.
Deleted
( Cl. 47)
28.
The proportion of payments retained (retention money) shall be 6%
from each bill subject to a maximum of 5% of final contract price.
( Cl. 48)
29.
Amount of liquidated
Damages for delay in
completion of works.
( Cl. 49 )
i) For Milestone - 1
Rs. 0.50 lakh per day
ii) For Milestone - 2
Rs.1.2 lakh per day
iii) For Milestone - 3
Rs.2.0 lakh per day
30.
Maximum limit of Liquidated
damages for delay in completion
of work.
31.
Deleted.
32.
Deleted.
10% of the Initial Contract Price
rounded off to the nearest thousand
( Cl. 49)
128
33.
The amounts of the advance payment are :
Nature of Advance
(Cl. 51 & 52)
Amount (Rs.) Conditions to be fulfilled
i)
Mobilization
5% of Tender value
On submission of unconditional Bank
Guarantee, (to be drawn before the end of 20%
of contract period). The contractor may furnish
four equal bank guarantees, valid for full
period.
ii)
Secured advance for
non-perishable
materials brought to
site
75% of Invoice value
i) The materials are in accordance with the
specification for works; Samples of
materials have been approved by Engineerin-charge.
ii)
Such materials have been delivered to site,
and are properly stored and protected
against damage or deterioration to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. The contractor
shall store the bulk material in measurable
stacks;
iii) The contractor’s records of the requirements,
orders, receipt and use of materials are
kept in a form approved by the Engineer
and such records shall be available for
inspection by the Engineer.
iv) The contractor has submitted with his
monthly statement the estimated value of
the materials on site together with such
documents as may be required by the
Engineer for the purpose of valuation of the
materials and providing evidence of
ownership and payment thereof;
v) Ownership such materials shall be deemed to
vest in the Employer for which the
contractor has submitted an Indemnity
Bond in an acceptable format; and
vi) The quantities of materials are not excessive
and shall be used within a reasonable time
as determined by the Engineer.
34.
Deleted.
35.0
Repayment of secured advance
:
The advance shall be repaid from each succeeding monthly payments
to the extent materials (for which advance was previously paid
pursuant to Clause 51.4 of G.C.C.) have been incorporated into the
(Cl. 51.4)
129
Works.
36.
The securities shall be for following minimum amounts equivalent as a
percentage of the Contract Price.
(Cl. 52)
Performance Security for 5 per cent of contract price plus Rs………… (to be
decided after evaluation of the bid) as additional security in terms of ITB
Clause 29.5.
The standard form of Performance Security acceptable to the Employer
shall be an unconditional Bank Guarantee of the type as presented in
Section 8 of the Bidding Documents.
37.
The Schedule of Operating and Maintenance Manuals at the time of
installation.
(Cl. 58)
38.
The date by which “as-built” drawings (in scale as directed) in 4 sets are
required before the issue of certificate of completion of whole or section of
the work, as the case may be.
(Cl. 58)
39.
The amount to be withheld for falling to supply “as-build” drawings by
The date required is Rs. 25 lakh (Rupees twenty five lakh ) only.
(Cl. 58)
40.
The following events shall also be fundamental breach of contract :
(Cl. 59.2)
“The Contractor has contravened Sub-clause 7.1 and Clause 9
of GCC”.
41.
The percentage to apply to the value of the work not completed
representing the Employer’s additional cost for completing the Works shall
be 20 percent.
42.0
No price escalation is intended in the contract. The contractor’s quoted
rate shall be unchanged during the currency of the contract including
extended period of contracts.
(Cl. 3, 60)
130
SECTION: 5
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
131
Technical Specification :
1.
The Technical Specification as stated in APWD Schedule of Rates for Buildings (Civil works)
for 2013-14 and latest relevant I.S. Codes will be followed.
2.
The Technical Specification as stated in APWD Schedule of Rates for Buildings (Sanitary &
Water supply works) for 2013-14 and latest relevant I.S. Codes will be followed.
3.
The Technical Specification as stated in APWD Schedule of Rates for Buildings (Electrical
works) for 2013-14 and latest relevant I.S. Codes will be followed.
4.
The Technical Specification as stated in APWD General Specification of Buildings & Electrical
works.
5.
The Technical Specification of items of work.
6.
Other Specifications for Civil, Sanitary and Water Supply works :All works will be carried out as per details of provisions and specifications mentioned in the
items of BOQ as well as specifications mentioned above unless and otherwise specified in the
bid documents. All materials used shall be of best quality and must conform the details and
brand mentioned in the BOQ and above mentioned schedule as well as tested for strength
and quality as per relevant IS code. Samples of materials to be used must be approved well in
advance by the Engineer.
132
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR INTERIOR WORKS
FOR
ASSAM LEGISLATIVE ASSEMBLY
PREAMBLES
1.0
The work shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the particular specifications and
drawings. The drawing and specification shall be taken complimentary and also supplementary to
each other and shall from part of this contract. Any work or material shown on drawing and not
specifically included in specification or vice versa shall be executed and deemed to have been
included in the scope of work for rate or items. If any item required for requirement for its
functional utility and not specifically included in either BOQ or in drawings, the same is supposed
to be included in the rates of items of BOQ.
2.0
Wherever no specification is included in the specifications but item shown on drawing, the same
are to be specified by the approved manufacturer of the product and manufacturer’s specification
should be followed.
3.0
The tenderer shall inspect the site and ascertain all the conditions impediments and facilities
available there and shall cater for all contingencies expenses to complete the work in all respects.
4.0
The items in the BOQs shall briefly cover the specifications and in drawings. The technical
specifications given hereinafter will be supplementary to the description given in BOQ.
5.0
The specification of earth work, PCC, brickwork and R.C.C. etc. shuttering, reinforcements and
steel work wherever required should be as specified on the Assam PWD Specifications. No
separate specification for these items have been specified in this tender. In case of valuation of
the items APWD schedule 2013 shall be followed.
6.0
The built in furniture and loose furniture articles where specification are not exhaustively given
either in the description of BOQ, these shall be carried out as per approved manufacturers’
specifications. The quality of steel, timber, plywood and block boards are to be as per
specification in the latest ISS Specifications. Timber used shall be well seasoned and within the
specified quality and density. No immature or unseasoned timber should be used in the work.
Contractor will have to produce sample of the species of timber for approval from Engineer-incharge.
7.0
All fittings, fixtures and accessories for furniture, doors windows and panellings shall be of
approved make from Hafele, Hettich, Hilti or DORMA. List of vendors are also included in the
vendors list.
8.0
Contractor have to produce the samples of all items of work and get the approval of Engineer-incharge or Architect before actual work on ground start. Standard of acceptance should be
obtained and the samples shall be maintained till completion of work.
9.0
Wherever manufactured loose furniture is shown on drawing with manufacturer’s trade marking,
the said articles are to be got approved from Engineer-in-charge before ordering the bulk
quantity. However, it will not absolve contractor’s responsibility for any defective material
133
supplied by the manufacturer. Manufacturer’s guarantee also to be handed over to the Engineerin-charge before completion of the work. For all furniture items guarantee of minimum 10 years
should be given by contractor.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR INTERIOR WORKS
1.
MATERIALS :
All materials used in the work shall be of respective kind and quality as specified in the schedule
of quantities, obtained from approved source/manufacturer and shall be subjected to prior
approval of the Engineer-in-Charge/Interior Designer. Samples of materials shall be got approved
before placement of order and approved samples shall be deposited with the Engineer-inCharge/Interior Designer’s office. Specification of all building materials, dismantling, redoing etc.
will be as specified in APWD Schedule.
2.
WORKMANSHIP
:
All works shall be of best workmanship and shall be carried out in proper manner and in
accordance with sound engineering practice to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge/
Interior Designer. No work shall be considered complete until the Engineer-in-Charge / Interior
Designer’s certificate in writing that it has been completed.
Levels of finish and quality of workmanship should be of international standards. Contractor
should deploy the Craftsman who can produce that type of finish in the interior works. Neat and
superior finish is the essence of the contract.
3.
APPLICATION OF WHITE CEMENT BASED WALL CARE PUTTY :
Surface at wall / ceiling where specified shall be treated with white cement base wall care putty
of minimum thickness 1.5 mm. The particular brand of the special plaster and its composition
must be previously approved by the Engineer-in-Charge/Interior Designer. The basic materials for
the putty shall be white cement. The entire surface must be very smooth and unevenness must
be removed.
Before application of wall care putty, the surface to be treated shall be thoroughly cleaned,
brushed and scrapped properly and then all holes, cracks, and patches shall be made good with
approved materials.
4.
APPLICATION OF PLASTER OF PARIS
Surface of walls / ceilings where specified shall be treated with Plaster of Paris of minimum
thickness 1.5mm. The particular brand of this special plaster and its composition must be
previously approved by the E.I.C. The basic materials for the plaster shall be either Calcium
Sulphate or Gypsum. The entire surface must be very smooth and unevenness must be removed.
Special trained and skilled artisans with previous experience of this work will have to be employed
for the purpose of achieving high grade finish.
Before application of Plaster of Paris the surface to be treated shall be thoroughly cleaned,
brushed and patching must be scraped properly, and then all holes, cracks, and patches shall be
made good with approved materials..
5.
ARTIFICIAL STONE/PATENT STONE FLOORING / PCC FLOORING
134
It shall consists of an underbed and a topping; laid on matured concrete base.
a)
b)
c)
Thickness :
I)
Underbed
:
Unless otherwise specified the underbed thickness shall be of 22
mm to 32 mm.
ii)
Topping
:
The top finish thickness shall be of 3 mm
MiX :
i)
Underbed
:
1 part by Volume of cement : 2 parts by Vol. of course sand : 4
parts by volume of stone chips.
ii)
Topping
:
The top finish thickness shall be of 3 mm.
Laying :
The toppings including the underbed shall be laid in alternated bays or in chequred board
pattern. No panel shall be cast in contact with another already laid till the contraction of
the letter has already taken place. The maximum area of each panel shall be 3 sq.m of
which no side shall be more than 2 M long. A cement grout shall be applied and worked
into the surface to receive the finish, the underbed then laid, compacted and levelled to
proper grade with a screed or float. The topping shall be applied evenly on the underbed
while it is not fully set but firm enough and rolled and pressed to get full bond. The topping
shall trowelled to a dense finish to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All trowel marks shall
be mopped out with a soft cloth to give a clean smooth surface.
d)
Curing :
After the surface is sufficiently set, the finished floor shall be kept moist for a minimum
period of 7 (seven) days. If desired the finish shall be polished as directed.
6.0
GRANITE STONE IN FACIA, DADO FLOOR
6.1
Materials :
Shall be of selected quality, hard, sound, dense and homogeneous texture, free from cracks,
decay, weathering of flaws. Stone slabs shall be of uniform colours and as approved by the
Architect/Employer. They shall be machine cut and machine polished / honed finish / leather
finished where specified and shall conform to the required sizes. Thickness shall be as specified
in the respective items. Source of all granite stone shall be from South India.
6.2.
Workmanship :
Stone or stone slab shall be of size as shown on drawings or as directed by Consultants.
Exposed faces, full beds and joints shall be dressed/finished as directed. Joints shall be cut
square to the face and shall be at right angles to each other or as directed. The facing
shall be fixed truly in plumb and in perfect place straight or curved as shown on drawing,
the bed being fully flushed with mortar. The joints shall be exactly vertical and horizontal. The
joints shall be exactly vertical and machine polished/fine tooled/clear punched and chisel
135
dressed work. The stones shall break joins for about half height of the coarse. Courses shall be
shown on the drawing or as directed. Gap between the facing stone and the wall shall be filled
with 1:4 cement mortar. Small pieces of stone to be fixed with approved epoxy based adhesive
at the back of each stone pieces and kept at least 48 hours for curing prior fixing. Gun metal,
wrought iron/copper pins and hold fasts shall be used as and wherever directed. Lead
caulking shall be used for fixing holdfasts. The surface shall be protected from sun and rain
and cured for ten days. Face shall be finished as specified or directed after pointing the joints
with approved joint filler.
7.0
PRE-POLISHED KOTA STONE FLOORING/WALL CLADDING
It shall be hard, sound, dense and homogenous in texture with crystalline and coarse grains. It
shall be free from stains, cracks, decay and weathering, flaws, defects or damages.
7.1.
Materials :
7.1.1
Kota Stone slabs - The slabs shall be of selected quality of approved sizes, as shown on
drawings, hard, sound, dense and homogenous in texture, free from cracks, decay, weathering
and flaws. They should be of the colour indicated in the drawings or as instructed by the
Architect/Employer. The slabs shall have the top (exposed) face polished before being brought
to site.
The slabs shall conform to the size required. Before starting the work, the contractor shall get
the samples of slabs approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
7.2
Workmanship :
7.2.1.
Dressing of Slabs - Each slab shall be cut to the required size and shape and fine chisel dressed
at all the edges to the full depth. The sides thus dressed shall have a full contact if a
straight edge is laid along. The sides shall be table rubbed with coarse sand or machine rubbed
before paving. All angles and edges of the slabs shall be in true square and free from
chippings giving a plane surface.
7.2.2.
Thickness - Thickness shall be 25 to 37.5 mm or as specified in the item. Tolerance allowed
shall be as under :The thickness should be as specified with a tolerance of +/- 2 mm.
7.2.3.
Preparation of Surface - The surface shall be clean and wetted thoroughly before commencing
the fixing work.
7.2.4
Kota stone fixing arrangement on walls :At the back of all the stone slab small piece of stone chips to be fixed with epoxy based
adhesive and kept for 48 hrs. for curing. The entire back surface of the stone slab to be
covered with non-skid adhesive prior pressing it over the (20mm thick minimum) green mortar
(1 cement: 4 coarse sand) Gunmetals / copper pins and hold fasts shall be used for fixing of
stone on wall. Pins will be fixed by lead caulking. The stone slabs thus fixed are to be properly
supported till it fixed with the bed mortar rigidly. Proper tools should be used while fixing the
slab. Care should be taken that no cavity is formed behind the stone slab with the wall. The
joints should be filled up with approved joint filler.
7.2.5.
Laying for flooring -
136
Sub-grade shall be cleared, wetted and mopped, bedding for kota stone shall be of 1:4 cement
sand mortar of minimum thickness at any place not be less than 10mm. The slab shall be
washed clean before laying. It shall be laid on top, pressed, tapped gently to bring it in level
with the other slabs. It shall then be lifted and laid aside. Top surface of the mortar shall then
be corrected by adding fresh mortar at hollows or depressions. The mortar is then allowed to
harden a bit. Over this surface is bid a cement slurry of honey like consistency at 4.4 kg of
cement per square metre. The edges of the slabs already paved shall be buttered with gray or
white cement with or without pigment to match the shade of the kota slabs as given in the
description of item. The slab shall then be gently placed in position and taped with wooden
mallet till it is properly bedded, in level with and close to the adjoining slab. The joint shall be
as fine as possible and surplus cement on the surface of the slab shall be removed. The slabs
fixed in the floor adjoining the walls shall enter not less than 10 mm under the plaster, skirting
or dado. The junction between the wall and floor shall be finished neatly. The finished surface
shall be true to lines, levels and slopes as specified in the drawing and or instructed by
Architect/Employer.
7.2.6
Curing - The floor shall be cured for a minimum period of seven days/or as per direction of
E.I.C.
7.2.7.
Rates to Include - Apart from other factors mentioned elsewhere in this contract, the
rates for item of kota stone flooring/cladding shall include for the following :-
7.2.8.
i)
All labour, materials and equipment, consumables, including preparing/ treating the
surface of the base or structural member to the required line and level or slope, cutting
to the required configuration cleaning the sub-base, laying mortar bed and cement grout
and fixing kota stone slab as specified above, and making up the joints.
ii)
Any cutting and waste if required.
iii)
Curing (wherever necessary).
iv)
Cleaning the surface from all stains etc.
v)
Forming coves at junctions of well and rounding or nosing at the edges, including butting
or making holes in slabs for providing opening in floor wherever required and finishing of
the same with the adjoining surface.
vi)
Work at all positions/ heights/depths line and level and with all lead and lift.
Mode of Measurement :
The measurement shall be in square metres for the actual kota stone flooring/wall cladding
provided.
137
8.0
CERAMIC TILE FLOOR
8.1.
Materials :
Ceramic tiles should conform to I.S. 770, B.S. 6431, E.N. 777 of the latest editions. Sizes may be
600x600 mm / 450 x 450 mm / 300 x 300 mm. The thickness of the tiles shall vary from 7.3
mm to 9.5 mm. The colours and brand shall be approved by E.I.C.
8.2.
Workmanship :
8.2.1
Sub-floor preparation - The floor should be structurally sound and rigid and cleared off waxy /
oily films and curing compounds. Surface must be free from rising dampness and hydrostatic
pressure. If required, the floor should be levelled with screed concrete as per directions of the
E.I.C.
8.2.2.
Floor layout - The room should be squared off, measured and chalk lines are snapped. Once in
place, lay loose tiles across the slope in both directions to balance the room so that the cut
lines are of the same size on each wall.
8.2.3.
Fixing - Tile fixing adhesive shall be applied on the entire back surface of the tiles and
pressed rigidly on the levelelled subbase firmly and pitted with wooden mallet etc. The joints
should be filled with approved tile joint filler.
9.0
CERAMIC TILES IN DADO/SKIRTING
9.1.
Materials :Ceramic tiles - Sizes may 200 x 200mm / 200 x 300mm / 300x450mm, the thickness of tiles
shall vary from 5mm to 9.5mm. The colours and brand or design shall be approved by the
Architect/E.I.C.
9.2.
Mortar Backing :All joints in the face work shall be racked out to a depth equal to not less than the width of the
joints or as directed by the Architect/E.I.C. Concrete surfaces shall be properly backed to the
lines and levels. All dirt, oil, dust or any other loose materials that might interfere with
satisfactory bond shall be removed. The surface shall be cleaned and scrubbed with fresh
water and kept wet for 6 hours prior to applying backing mortar. The dado/skirting work shall
not be commenced unless the preparatory work is approved by the Architect/E.I.C. The
proportion of mortar for backing shall be 1:4 cement mortar (1 cement : 4 coarse sand). The
thickness of mortar backing shall not be less than 15mm.
9.3.
Workmanship :a)
Fixing of Tiles :Tile fixing adhesive shall be applied on the entire back surface of the tiles and pressed
rigidly on the levelling sub-base firmly and pitted with wooden mallet etc. The joints
should be filled with approved tile joint filler.
138
b)
9.4.
After the tiles have been fixed the surplus mortar that may have been come out of the
joints shall be cleared off before it sets. After the complete curing, the dado or skirting
work shall be washed thoroughly clean.
Rates to include :Apart from other factors mentioned elsewhere in this contract, the rates for the items of dado
or skirting shall include the following :i)
Preparing/tracing the surface of the base or structural member to the required line, level
or slope to the specified configuration with all bye works.
ii)
Backing mortar.
iii)
Providing and fixing tiles including all specials, like round edges, angles, copings etc. in
neat cement float over backing mortar including cutting of tiles and wastage of tiles etc.
iv)
Jointing of the tiles with approved tile joint filler.
v)
Curing.
vi)
Cleaning the wall, dado, skirting surface and flooring from all stairs and removal of all
debris.
vii)
All labours, material, use of tools and equipments and consumables for carrying out the
items as specified above including all bye-works for achieving the required surface finish.
viii)
Work at all positions, heights depths, line, and level, with all lead and lift.
Mode of Measurement :Measurement shall be in Sq.m. as provided.
10.0
MARBLES & GRANITES :
Marbles to be used shall be hard, dense and durable and of selective quality. These shall be
obtained from the approved supplier. The shades of marble to be used shall be approved by
the Interior Designer / Engineer-in-Charge before laying the same. These shall be free from any
cracks or other defects developed during sawing
Pre-polished granite shall be of approved shades and colour and of selective quality. These
shall be hard, dense and shall be obtained from the approved supplier. These shall be free
from any sorts of cracks.
11.0
MARBLE FLOORING / GRANITE STONE FLOORING
11.1.
Materials :
11.1.1
Marble Slab The marble shall be approved shade/texture and sources as mentioned in the schedule of
quantities and their size and the thickness shall be as shown on the drawings and as
139
approved by the Architect/Employer. They shall be of selected quality, hard, dense, uniform
and homogeneous in texture and free from flaws, cracks or other structural defects. It shall
have even and crystalline grains. The surface shall be machine polish to an even and perfectly
plain surface and edges machine cut true and square. The rear face shall be rough enough to
provide a key for the mortar. No slab shall be thinner than the specified thickness at its
thinnest part. A few approved samples of finished slabs to be used shall be deposited by the
contractor in the office of the Architect/Employer. Unless otherwise mentioned the
thickness of the marble shall be of not less than 18 mm.
11.1.2.
Granite slabs shall not be less than 18 mm thick and will conform to all physical characteristics
as stated in above para. Thickness of flamed granites shall not be less than 25mm or as
specified in the item.
Concrete Base & Mortar Bedding
The base of cement concrete shall be laid and compacted to a true plain surface and to
the required slopes and below the level of the finished floors to the extent of the
thickness of the slabs and mortar bedding. Cement mortar for bedding may be mixed
manually or by a mechanical mixer as directed. The amount of water added shall be the
minimum necessary to give just sufficient plasticity for laying and satisfactory bedding. Care
shall be taken in preparing the mortar to ensure that there are no hard lumps that
would interfere with the even bedding of the stones. Before spreading the mortar subfloor or base shall be prepared/ treated exactly to the lines, levels and slopes, cleaned of all
dirt, scum, or loose materials and then well wetted without forming any pool of water on the
surface. In case of R.C.C floors, the top shall be left a little dry. All point of level for the finished
paving surface shall be marked out. The mortar shall then be evenly and smoothly spread
over the base by the use of screed battens only over so much area as will be covered with
slabs within half an hour. The thickness of the mortar bedding shall not be less than 20 mm.
For laying granite flooring above procedure should be followed.
11.1.3
Workmanship (For marble stones slabs and granite stone slab)
11.1.4
Laying Marble slabs / granite stone slab - Before laying , the marble shall be thoroughly wetted
with clean water. Neat cement grout of honey like consistency shall be spread on the mortar
bed over as much area as could be covered with the slabs within half an hour. The specified
type of marble slabs shall be laid to pattern as directed on the neat cement float and shall
be evenly and firmly laid to pattern as directed to the required level and slope in the mortar
bed Each slab shall be gently tapped with a wooden mallet, till it is firmly and properly
bedded. There shall be no hollows left. If there is a hollow sound gently tapping on the slabs,
such slabs shall be removed and rested properly.
The edges of the slabs shall be buttered with slurry of gray/white cement mixed with pigment
matching the colour of stone slab and joint shall be hair fine in width and straight line grouted
with neat coloured cement slurry to match the colour of the marble. The Joints shall be struck
smooth but there shall be no smearing over the mortar of the slabs. The edges of the adjoining
slabs shall be in one plan. All surplus cement slurry Shall be removed and the surface wiped
out clean with wet soft cloth.
The flooring shall be kept undistrubed for at least 7 days, and wet of fourteen days. Marble
flooring shall be finished as specified by the Architect/Consultant.
The same procedure shall be followed while laying granite stone slabs.
140
Rates to include :
11.1.5
Apart from other factors mentioned elsewhere in this contract, the rates for item of marble
flooring shall include for the following :
11.1.6
i)
Preparing/treating the sub-floor or base.
ii)
All labour, materials and equipments and consumables, sub-base, laying mortar bed and
cement grout and fixing marble slabs, as specified above and making up the joints
including grinding and finishing to the satisfaction of Architect/Employer, polishing and
all bye works.
iii)
Any cutting and wastages, if required, to make it in required size/shape and configuration
as specified in the drawing.
iv)
Curing and removal of muck.
v)
Cleaning the floor from all stains etc.
vi)
Forming coves at junctions of wall, rounding or nosing at the edge and making holes or
opening wherever required and finishing with the adjoining surface and machine
polishing wherever required.
vii)
At all positions, heights, depths, line and level, with all lead and lift.
Mode of Measurement :
The measurement shall be in sq. metres for the actual marble / granite stone flooring provided.
12.0
ARTIFICIAL STONE FLOORING WITH HARDENER
12.1.
Flooring with Non-metallic floor hardner
It shall consist of an underbed and a topping laid on an already laid and matured concrete
base.
a)
Thickness
b)
Mix
:
:
i) Underbed :
c)
Unless otherwise specified, the underbed thickness shall be of 40mm
and topping shall be of 12 MM.
1 part by vol. of cement +
2 parts by vol. of course sand +
4 parts by vol. of 10mm graded stone chips.
Materials :
The material should be ready to use, high abrasion and wear resistant. Bonds
monolithically to the base concrete. It must be resistant to oils and grease and should not
shrink or crack. The materials should conforms to IS-1237 and ASTM-E97. The material
should be single component and have compressive strength of 70N/Sq.mm. after 28 days
curing.
d)
Application :
141
The material should be evenly spread on the freshly laid concrete surface when it has set
initially but still green enough to react with the floor hardener. Wooden floats or power
trowel with disc may be used to make the surface uniformly finished smooth. the
procedure of application and finishing as laid down by the manufacturers may be
followed. The rate of application shall be 5 kg. of Hardener per sq. metre of area.
e)
Curing
:
The floor with non-metallic hardener finish should be cured for 28 days before putting it
on to traffic.
13.0
WOODEN FLOORING
i)
Seasoning and preservations
All timber used for under floor members i.e. joists and battens shall be thoroughly
seasoned in accordance with IS : 1141. After seasoning of timber shall be treated with
approved preservative in accordance with IS : 401.
ii)
Supporting joists and battens
Main beam and joists of the class of wood sections specified in the description of item or
as specified/directed by Engineer-in-charge shall be fixed in position to dead levels. The
width of joints of the members shall not be less than 50mm. The arrangement of joists
and battens shall be as per the design furnished by contractor or sub vendors whose
products are approved.
iii)
Boards
It shall be of class of timber and type as specified in schedule only selected boards and
uniform width shall be used and shall conform to perfect geometrics. Edges clean. The
width of boards shall not be less than 100mm and more than 150mm width. The same
width of boards shall be maintained throughout the length of the room unless the width
of the room is not in exact multiple of width of board. The length of board shall not be
more than 2.40m in length. The length of board should be chosen such a way that the
board do get at least 3 supports and supporting joists/battens should not be more than
600mm apart.
The boards shall be planed true to its surface and longitudinal joints of the planks/boards
should be tongued and grooved and end joints may be rebated. The bottom surface of
the boards should also be planed where it is exposed.
The boards shall be fixed with the joists/battens with stainless steel screws. The joists on
which the planks/boards are to be fixed should be perfectly in level and true to line. The
end planks/boards shall be accurately fixed and tightened in position. The screw holes
should be filled with approved filler/stops. Each adjacent board shall be carefully jointed
and tightened. For fixing the boards to the joists two screws shall be used at each end of
the board and one screws at each of the intermediate joist in a zig zag manner.
In case of parquete or other type of special type of flooring where components (top) are
142
factory manufactured and thin in section, they will be fixed on a plywood board of
adequate thickness to be fixed on joists and battens, over which the specialized floor
tiles shall be fixed with approved adhesive and headless pins. The surface shall be
finished as per manufacturer’s specifications.
Wherever branded floors are indicated in the schedule the said branded flooring system
should be done as per the manufacturer’s specification. Preferably with their authorised
applicators.
15.0
PLYWOOD :
It shall be of the type specified in the drawing and shall conform to relevant I.S. Code and shall
be obtained from approved manufacturer. All plywood / veneered surface shall be of matching
type and as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge/ Interior Designer.
16.0
PHENOL BONDED PLYWOOD (BWR) :
Commercial plywood, conforming to I.S : 303/1989 bonded with Phenol Formaldehyde Synthetic
Resin of B.W.R. Type specified in I.S : 848/1974, of any approved make.
17.0 PHENOL BONDED BLOCK BOARD (BWR) :
Commercial Solid core Board conforming to I.S : 1659/1990 boded with Phenol Formaldehyde
Synthetic Resin of B.W.R. Type specified in I.S : 848/1974 of any approved make.
18.0
PANEL DOOR :
Unless otherwise specified, factory made Panel Door shutter conforming to I.S : 1003 (Part - ) /
1999 made of best wood and treated with preservative with 100mm. width styles and top rail and
175mm. width lock and bottom rail having panel insert of 9mm/12mm. thick plywood conforming
to I.S : 303/1989 bonded with Phenol formaldehyde Synthetic Resin of B.W.R. type specified in I.S :
848/1974 of any approved make.
19.0
PHENOL BONDED WOODEN FLUSH DOOR :
Unless otherwise specified commercial wooden flush door shutter (40mm or above) with Solid
Block Board Core consisting of wooden strips less than 25mm. width encased in a frame
constructed of styles and rails of 65mm. width conforming to I.S : 2202 (Part - /1999) bonded with
Phenol Formaldehyde Synthetic Resin of B.W.R. type specified in I.S : 848/1974 of any approved
make.
20.0 DECORATIVE LAMINATES / VEENERS :
Laminate sheets /Veeners shall be laminated 1mm to 1.5mm. and veneers 3mm to 4mm thick with
tolerances as specified by the manufacturers and shall be obtained from the approved source.
Samples must have prior approval of the Engineer-in-Charge/ Interior Designer.
21.0 BRASS MONGERIES :
143
Samples of all fittings, fixtures, nails, screws, hinges, etc. shall be of approved make and shall
conform to specifications laid down in the schedule or in absence thereof to the directions of the
Engineer-in-Charge/Interior Designer.
22.0 WOOD & WOOD WORK :
It shall be of good quality and well seasoned and shall have uniform colour, reasonably straight
grains and shall be free from large, loose, dead knots, cracks, shakes, wrap, twists bends, sapwood
or defects of any kind. Before using the wood, prior approval of the Engineer-in-Charge/Interior
Designer shall be obtained and wood is to be chemically treated as per direction of the Engineer-inCharge. Timber shall be termite/wood borer proof and guaranteed against such damages for a
period of 5 (five) years to be provided.
The scantlings shall be sawn in the direction of grained. All wood work shall be neatly and truly
finished to the exact dimensions required. No patching or plugging of any kind will be allowed. All
joints shall be simple, neat and strong, truly and accurately fitted and coated with white lead before
being fitted together. Dimension of the wood specified in the schedule should be treated as raw
dimension, unless otherwise specified.
The kind of nails and screws shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge/ Interior
Designer and the heads of the same shall be sunk and putted or dealt with as the Engineer-inCharge / Interior Designer may direct.
All timber surfaces unless otherwise specified in the Schedule of Quantities are to be finished in
approved/natural colour with N.C. Lacquer in matt satin finish or as directed by the Engineer-inCharge.
All plywood veneered surface should be matching type and should be upto the full satisfaction
of the Engineer-in-Charge / Interior Designer. Glue used shall be of approved quality of the
approved manufacturer..
23.0
BAMBOO ARTICLES
The following articles of bamboo origin products are proposed to be used.
23.1.
Bamboo Strip Boards (BSB) :
a)
Supply of Prefinished Bamboo Strip Boards for Flooring/Cladding made out of treated and
seasoned all four sides planed bamboo strip to be supplied in standard Size – 960 X 96 X
15mm, Type Vertical Carbonated, Finish – Gloss, coated with 5 layers of transparent, UV –
Cured Polyurethane coatings on the top and one layer base coat at the back, Tongued and
Grooved on all four sides matched for each laying. (Dimensional Tolerance +/-0.1mm).
b)
Supply of Prefinished Bamboo Strip Boards for Skirting made out of treated and seasoned
all four sides planed bamboo strip to be supplied in standard Size – 960 X 96 X 15mm, Type
Vertical Carbonated, Finish – Gloss, coated with 5 layers of transparent, UV – Cured
Polyurethane coatings on the top and one layer base coat at the back, machined and milled
on all four sides quarter round on top edge and 18mm wide 8mm deep grove at the back
for (Dimensional tolerance (Dimensional Tolerance +/-0.1mm).
144
23.2.
c)
Supply of Raw Bamboo Strip Boards for Handrails/Architrave/Beads/Lipings/ Moldings
made out of treated and seasoned all four sides planed bamboo strips in standard
1000mm length, machined at right angle on all four sides as per DMA approved design.
(Dimensional Tolerance +/-0.2mm);
(Standard Section : 75 X 75, 75 X 60mm, 60 X 60mm, 60 X 50mm, 30 X 15mm, 25 X 15mm,
20 X 12mm, 12 X 12mm, 12 X 8mm).
d)
Supply of Raw Bamboo Strip Board Sections for furniture making made out of treated and
seasoned all four sides planed bamboo strips in standard 1000mm length, machined at right
angle on all four sides. (Dimensional Tolerance +/- 0.2mm), 33(Standard Section : 60 X
60mm, 50 X 60mm, 50 X 50mm, 50 X 40mm, 40 X 40mm, 40 X 30mm, 40 X 20mm and 20 X
20mm).
Bamboo Flat Boards (BFB) :
Supply of Raw Bamboo Flat Boards for sub-floor having multiple cross-grained layers of treated
and seasoned flattened bamboo strips with the top layers having unshaven bamboo skin, duly
trimmed in all four sides, Size : 2140 X 1220mm, Thickness : 20mm, (Dimensional Tolerance : +/1mm).
23.3.
Bamboo Composite Boards (BCB) :
a)
Dimensional Tolerance : +/ - 1%).
Supply of Raw Bamboo Composite board sections for door frames made of treated and
seasoned flattened bamboo strips as inner core and four side squared bamboo strips in top
line having not more than one tight joint to gain length, duly machined and rebated as per
requirement, with 8mm flat lipping on both side edges, in Sizes :
3050 X 150 X 50mm with 30/35/40mm wide rebate;
2450 X 150 X 50mm with 30/35/40mm wide rebate.
23.4.
Bamboo Mat Boards (BMB) :
Supply of Raw Bamboo Mat Boards for partitions, paneling, cladding etc. made of multiple layers
of treated and seasoned woven bamboo mats, duly trimmed and sanded in standard sizes and
thickness (as specified by DMA) (Standard Thicknes : 4/6/8/12/18mm) (Dimensional : Tolerance
: +/-1mm).
23.5.
Installation and fixing of Articles of Bamboo :
i)
Laying and fixing of Bamboo Flat Boards as Sub-floor at dead level to be nailed or glued to
concrete floor. (Charges to include costs of necessary hardware and adhesive).
ii)
Laying and fixing of Prefinished Bamboo Strip Boards as flooring on Sub-floor with tongue
and groove structure at edges and ends tightly joined and floated freely over a combination
of polyethylene and thermorex foam following free floating installation guideline of the
board manufacturer. (Charges to include costs of polyethylene, thermorex foam and
necessary hardware, adhesive and PU coating for touch ups).
iii)
Laying and fixing of Prefinished Bamboo Strip Boards as wall base to be glued and nailed to
145
cemented walls following installation guideline of the board manufacturer. (Charges to
include costs of necessary hardware and adhesive).
24.0
N.C. LACOUER :
N.C. Lacquer should be of “CI” or similar equivalent. Approval of Engineer-in-Charge / Interior
Designer is obligatory. Application of N.C. Lacquer would be guided by the manufacturer’s
specification.
25.0
MELAMINE POLISH :
The surface to be prepared as per approved shade and texture with French Polish coating.
Necessary water paper to be applied for preparation of smoothen surface before applying Sealer
coat. After drying of first coat of Melamine polish water paper to be applied before second and
third coat of final polishing. The work has to be carried out to the satisfaction of the Engineer-inCharge / Interior Designer.
26.0
PREPARATORY WORKS FOR PAINTING ETC. :
Painting, polishing, plaster of Paris work etc. shall not be taken up unless the surfaces to be so
treated are made ready with all related preliminary works and the approval of the Engineer-inCharge / Interior Designer is obtained.
27.0
GYPBOARD CEILING :
Gypbaord ceiling shall be obtained either from the manufacturer or of their authorized
dealers.(M/s. Gyproc of St. Gobain, M/s. Lloyd Insulation or of M/s. India Gypsum Ltd. etc.
The entire installation work is to be carried out in conformity with manufacturer’s specification
and as per detail drawing of the Interior Designer.
28.0
CEILING LININGS :
28.1.1.
M/F suspended ceiling regular (single layer) (GS-MFSC-4.1).
28.1.2.
M/F suspended ceiling which includes G.I. perimeter channels of size 0.55mm thick having one
flange of 20mm and another flange of 30mm and a web of 27mm alongwith perimeter of ceiling,
screw fixed to brick wall/partition with the help of nylon sleeves and screws, at 610mm centers.
Then suspending G.I. having hologram intermediate channels of size 45mm, 0.9mm thick with two
flanges of 15mm each from the soffit at 1220mm centers with ceiling angle of width 25mm x
10mm x 0.55mm thick fixed to soffit with G.I. cleat and steel expansion fasteners. Ceiling section of
0.55mm thickness having knurled wed of 51.5nn and two flange of 26mm each with lips of 10.5mm
are then fixed to the intermediate channel with the help of connecting clip and in direction
perpendicular to the intermediate channel at 457mm centers, 12.5mm tapered edge Gypboard
(confirming to IS: 2095-1982 & 2542-1981) is then screw fixed to ceiling section with 25mm drywall
screws at 230mm centers. Screw fixing is done mechanically either with screwdriver or drilling
machine with suitable attachment.
28.1.3.
Finally the boards are then jointed and finished so as to have flush look which includes filling and
finishing the tapered and square edges of the boards with jointing compound, joint paper tape and
two coats of drywall top coat suitable for Gypboard (as per recommended practices of India
146
Gypsum or equivalent).
Note : For light fittings, grill diffusers & cutouts etc. have to be made with frame of perimeter
channels of size 20mm x 27mm x 30mm x 0.55mm thick, supported suitably.
28.1.4.
Metal stud partition (Single layer) (GS-MSP-975-1.2)
28.1.5.
97mm thick Metal stud partition which includes one layer of tapered edge 12.5mm thick
Gypboard (conforming to IS :2095-1982 & 2542-1981) Screw fixed with 25mm drywall screw at
300mm centers to either side of 70mm studs (0.55mm thick having one flange of 34mm and
another flange of 36mm made of G.I. Steel having hologram) placed at 610mm center to center in
72mm floor and ceiling channel (0.55mm thick having two equal flanges of 32mm made of G.I.
steel) with joints staggered to avoid through joints. Finally square and tapered edges of the boards
are to be jointed and finished so as to have a flush book which includes filling and finishing with
jointing compound, joint paper tape and two coats of drywall top coat suitable for Gypboard (as
per recommended practices of India Gypsum or equivalent).
28.1.6.
Specification of Luxalon Unperforated Linear Aluminium False Ceiling System – 84C/300C
a) Specification of Luxalon® UnPerforated Linear Aluminium
False Ceiling System – 84C./300C
Luxalon 84C Unperforated Linear aluminum panel false ceiling system as manufactured by
Hunter Douglas India Pvt. Ltd. or any other similar equivalent (shade as per Luxalon® Colour
chart). The system shall consist of Panel 84mm wide X 12.5mm deep X 0.5mm thick with
square edges andRecess Flange of 24mm in standard length of 1 meter – 6 meters. The Panels
shall be coil coated on a continuous paint line, double baked & roll formed from stove
enameled corrosion resistant aluminum alloy AA5050 (Al.Mg.) for higher strength & good roll
forming characteristics. Panels shall be clipped to an enameled & roll formed Aluminum panel
carrier of 32mm wide X 39mm deep X 0.90mm thick in standard length of 5 meters. The panel
carrier shall be double baked & roll formed from enameled corrosion resistant aluminum alloy
AA5050/5052 (Al.Mg.) in Black colour with cut outs to hold the panels in modules of 100mm
& provide a 16mm closed gap between 2 panels.
The carriers shall be fixed at a distance of 1.3 meters c/c. The carriers shall be suspended from
the roof by 4mm diameter G.I. suspension rod with special height adjustment clips made from
spring steel. The rod hangers shall be fixed at a distance of 1.2 meters c/c. The G.I. rod
hangers shall be fixed to the roof by ‘J’ hooks & nylon inserts.
Wherever required, two panels will be coupled horizontally with panel splice & similarly for
carriers, carrier splice shall be used. At the perimeter, where the panels & wall meets ‘L’ Edge
profile Powder coated shall be used.
b) Specification of Luxalon® UnPerforated Linear Aluminium False Ceiling System – 300C.
Luxalon 300C Unperforated Linear aluminum panel false ceiling system as manufactured by
Hunter Douglas India Pvt. Ltd. or any other similar equivalent (shade as per Luxalon® Colour
chart). The system shall consist of Panel 300mm wide X 29mm deep X 0.7mm thick. The
panels to feature 5mm bevel edge to form a visually closed ‘V’ grove joint between 2 panels.
The panels shall be in standard length of 1 meter – 6 meters. The Panels shall be coil coated
147
on a continuous paint line, double baked & roll formed from stove enameled corrosion
resistant aluminum alloy AA3005 for higher strength & good roll forming characteristics.
Panels shall be clipped to an enameled & roll formed Aluminum panel carrier of 41.5mm wide
X 62mm deep X 0.95mm thick in standard length of 5 meters. The panel carrier shall be
double baked & roll formed from enameled corrosion resistant aluminum alloy AA5052
(Al.Mg.) in Black colour with cut outs to hold the panels in modules of 300mm. The Carrier
shall be provided with special Lock In Clips to lock the panels if desired. The first carriers shall
be fixed at a distance of 300mm from the wall & thereafter at 1.3 meters c/c. The carriers
shall be suspended from the roof by 4mm diameter G.I. suspension rod with special height
adjustment clips made from spring steel. The rod hangers shall be fixed at a distance of 1.2
meters c/c. The G.I. rod hangers shall be fixed to the roof by ‘J’ hooks & nylon inserts.
Wherever required, two panels will be coupled horizontally with pressure clips & similarly for
carriers, carrier splice shall be used. At the perimeter, where the panels & wall meets ‘L’ Edge
profile Powder coated shall be used.
c) Paint Finish: The panels shall be chromatised for maximum bond between metal & paint &
enameled twice under high temperature, visible side with full primer & finish coat & inner
side with primer coat & skin coat in a continuous paint line.
28.1.7.
G.I. FRAME WORK (600 X 600) CLADDED WITH 12MM PLY (BWR) BOARD FOR FALSE CEILING WORK
28.1.8.
G.I. frame work (600 x 600) shall be consist of G.I. perimeter channels of size 0.55mm thick having
one flange of 20mm and another flange of 30mm and a web of 27mm alongwith perimeter of
ceiling, screw fixed to brick wall/partition with the help of nylon sleeves and screws at 600mm
centers. Then suspending G.I. having hologram intermediate channels of size 45mm, 0.9mm thick
with two flanges of 15mm each from the soffit at 1200mm centers with ceiling angle of width
25mm x 10mm x 0.5mm thick fixed to soffit with G.I. cleat and steel expansion fasteners. The
ceiling section 0.5mm thick having knurled web of 51.5mm and two flanges of 26mm each with lips
of 10.5mm are then fixed to the intermediate channels with the help of connecting clip and in the
direction perpendicular to the intermediate channels at 457mm centers. 12mm BWR ply board as
per IS : 740/1996 is then screw fixed to ceiling section with 25mm dry wall screws at 230mm
centers. Screw fixing is done mechanically either with screwdriver or drilling machine with suitable
attachment.
28.1.9.
Plywood : Plywood shall be 12mm thick marine ply (WBP) as per IS 710/1996.
148
149
9.0
GLASS & MIRROR :
Glasses and mirrors shall be free from waves, scratches and any other defects and shall be of
superior quality available in the market. Before using, samples to be got approved from the
Engineer-in-Charge / Interior Designer.
30.0
HARDWARE :
All hardware materials should be of approved variety. Before using samples to be got approved
from the Engineer-in-Charge / Interior Designer.
31.0
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOORS :
Specification Text for Sliding Door Operator
Product :
DORMA ES200 Sliding Operator system or its equivalent system
Automatic sliding door operator
Automatic sliding door operator, modular design, including internal cover.
1/2 - panel sliding door
Operator Dimensions (H x T): 100 x 180 mm.
Microprocessor control, self-learning, reverses when obstruction is encountered.
Clear Passage Width :
2-panel = 900 – 2,000 mm (for 4,150mm Operator length)
2-panel = 900 – 3,000 mm (for 6,250mm Operator length)
Clear Passage Height :
LH = 2,100 mm – 3,000 mm
Door weight :
Bi-Parting Door Panel, max. 2 x 160 kg.
Single-Parting Door Panel, max. 1 x 200 kg
Function programs :
Program modes :
Off, Automatic, Permanent open, Partial opening, Exit only, Self-regulating partial open, Exit only
partial opening, Night-bank facility. Compliant with future European standards and specifications
as per EN 12650.
150
Microprocessor-controlled control unit. Self-learning, with adjustable parameters for opening and
closing speed, hold-open time and opening and closing force. With pulse expansion for cheque
card or code card reader or key switch. Class of protection IP 20.
Produced according to the guidelines for power-operated windows, doors and gates BGR 232, the
UVV and the VDE regulations. TÜV design tested, tested according to the low voltage guidelines,
production according to ISO 9001:2000 certification. Fulfils the DIN V18650 (EN 12650).
DORMA ES200 Operators are of very sturdy design with Self balancing Panel suspension system
and with Anti-Jump fitting.
 Operator System Section: 100 mm (Ht) X 180 mm (Depth).
 With clip-on Cover Profile for easy installation and Service.
 With separate Track Profile with Rubber lining with ‘Noise Reduction’ and Smooth-ride quality.
 Program Function: Off, Automatic, Permanent open, Exit only, Partial open.
Night-bank switch (Optional) – Additional External Operation Switch incase Operator has been
Locked.
Adjustable Hold Open Time: Hold Open is easily adjustable at module as per client’s requirement.
Hold Open Range: 0.5 Sec – 30 Sec.
 Adjustable Parameters Via parameter display and selection key at electronic module.

Adjustable closing Speed: 10 -50 Cm/S.

Adjustable Opening Speed: 10 – 70 Cm/S

Hold Open time: 0.5 – 60 Sec

Night Bank Opening time: 0.5 – 30 Sec

Auto Error Display, with Error Code Display for error correction.

Read-out error store with error codes
Additional Equipment Integration:
Connection for External 24V DC supply: Operator can be integrated and also supply operating
voltage of 24V DC for one external device e.g. Smoke Detector, alarm system.
Carrier-head assembly designed for:
a.Frameless Glass Sliding Panels.
b.Aluminum / Wooden Framed Panels.
151
Emergency off – Connection for Emergency Off Button, On activation Operator will Open Fully and
Stop all functions, enabling passenger to pass through in case of Panic.
Fail Safe / Fail Secure: Choice between emergency opening(Fail Safe) and emergency closing (Fail
Secure) in the event of a power cut (with battery pack).
Connections for Air-Lock Control.
Safety devices :
Inbuilt Obstruction detection feature with automatic reversing cycle on obstruction, dynamic and
static force limitation, emergency control unit (emergency stop).
Safety Photo Cells: 1 / 2 Pair of Photo Cells are provided for safety of passenger standing in line of
motion of Moving Panel and for through-passage monitoring.
Operator can be also be integrated with following Systems.
Access Control System with Proximity Card system / Codic Card Reader.
Keypad System.
Biometric sensor system.
Push Buttons.
Connection :
230 V, 50/60 Hz, Stabilized-UPS Supply.
Activators :
(√) Radar system: 02 Nos, with 24 GHz, Mandatory as Int’Nat Standards.
(
-01 Pair
Locking :
(√ ) Electro-mechanical locking, Bi-stable.
Color light alloy parts :
(√) silver, Anodised E6/C0 - standard
32.0
PAINTING :
a)
Ready mixed synthetic enamel paints and primer shall be of approved quality, colour and
shall be obtained from approved ,manufacturer’s. These shall be in sealed containers.
Surface to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned sand papered and/or rubbed with
emery cloth. In case of rusted steel surface, it shall be ensured all corroded rust is
152
removed. In case of timber, the knots and nail hole shall be filled with knotting and
stopping materials. The prepared surface shall be allowed to dry and sand papered
smooth. The paint shall be applied with brushes of type and size suitable for the job and
subsequent coat shall be applied on the previous coat and care shall be taken so that
dust or other foreign materials do not settle.
b)
32.1.
Textured paints shall be of approved quality, colour and shall be obtained from approved
manufacturers. These shall be applied with foam roller or brush as per discretion of
Interior Designer/Engineer-in-Charge. These shall be applied one or more coats as per
the item described in B.O.Q.
MATERIAL :
The paint and primers in general shall be of approved quality, colour and shade.
32.2.
SCAFFOLDING :
This shall be strong and stout, rigidly tied, catering to the safety needs and shall be double
or single scaffolding as required and directed. If ladders are used, pieces of gunny bags or
cloths bags shall be tied on their tops to avoid damage of scratches to the plastered surfaces.
Proper stage scaffolding shall be erected when painting the ceiling.
32.3.
PREPARATION OF THE SURFACE :
a)
New Surface :
The surface to be painted shall be cleaned and all cracks, holes and surface defects shall be
repaired with plaster of paris for spot fillings, and with filler prepared with whiting, water
and a little quantity paint for filling and levelling the wider areas.
b)
Old Surface :
i)
The surfaces, which had been previously painted with emulsion paint, shall be
lightly rubbed down and washed with clean water.
ii)
The surface, which had been painted with oil bound distemper or oil
paint, shall be cleaned, washed and sand papered.
iii)
The surface, finished with lime colour wash, powdered distemper, etc.
shall be completely scrapped off to the bare surfaces.
iv)
In case, after scrapping the surface, any cracks, holes or other surface defects
are noted, the same shall be repaired, before applying priming coat, with plaster
of paris for spot filling and with filler prepared with whiting, water and a little
quantity of paint for filling and levelling the wider areas.
153
32.4.
PRIMING COAT :
The priming coat of the approved shade shall be applied over the completely dry surface in
the manner as recommended by the paint manufacturers. The emulsion paint in the priming
coat may be thinned down with 20% water or as recommended by the paint manufacturer.
Tarpentine or any other solvent shall not be used for thinning the paint.
32.5.
APPLICATION OF PAINT :
The recommendation of approved paint manufacturer, whose product is used, shall be
followed regarding the preparation of the surface and the application of the priming and
finishing coats. The Contractor shall arrange for technical assistance and supervision from the
paint manufacturer during the execution of the painting work. After the priming coat has been
applied and perfectly dried, all holes, scratches, if any, shall be repaired as mentioned in
preparation of surface and then the second coat of paint of shade of approved shade and
manufacture shall be evenly applied and allowed to dry.
The third coat shall be carefully applied to achieve smooth and even surface after the previous
coats have dried. Minimum 3 coats shall be applied inclusive of primer coat. All paint are to
be applied with good quality brushes and finished with spongy roller so that no impressions of
hair line remains on the surface. This is to be approved by Architects/Employer. If a proper
and even surface is not obtained to the satisfaction of the Architect/Employer in coats, the
Contractor shall carry out additional coats of painting for the approval of Architects/
Employer at Contractor's expenses. Care shall be taken so that dust or other foreign materials
do not settle or disfigure the various coats.
32.6.
RATES TO INCLUDE :
Apart from other factors mentioned elsewhere in the contract the rates for the item of paint
shall include for the following :i)
All labour, materials, consumables and equipment necessary to carry out the work.
ii)
Supplying the approved emulsion paint for priming and finishing coats.
iii)
Preparing the surface for receiving the primer and finishing coats.
iv)
Providing scaffolding/ladder/platform/staging including its erections and dismantling.
v)
Application of one primer coat and minimum two coats of finishing. If a proper and
even surface is not obtained to the satisfaction of Architects/ Employer, coats of
painting to be done for the approval of Architects/ Employer at Contractor's expense.
vi)
Protection of painted surface when they have dried and being handed over.
vii)
Expenses, if any, for supervision and technical assistance supplied by the approved
paint manufacturers.
viii)
Cleaning the floor of droppings and splashes.
154
32.7.
MODE OF MEASUREMENT :
The measurement shall be in square metre. The mode of measurement shall be applicable
similar to that for white washing.
33.0
SYNTHETIC ENAMEL PAINT :
33.1.
Material :
Synthetic enamel paints and primers, in general, shall be of approved quality, colour and of
approved manufacturer. These materials shall be in sealed tins and shall be opened in the
presence of the Architects/Employer.
33.2.
Preparation of Surface :
33.2.1.
Iron and Steel Works :
Surface to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned, sand papered and/or rubbed with
emery cloth, if necessary, to remove grease, mortar or any other foreign materials. In case
of rusted surface, it shall be first cleaned with wire brush till the corroded rust is removed.
The prepared surface shall be shiny and free from brush marks, patches, blisters and other
irregularities. The surface thus finished shall be got approved for painting.
33.2.2
Wood Work :
All surface to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned, sand papered and free from all
foreign materials. In case of surfaces having knots and nail holes, this shall be filled
knotting and stopping materials. The materials shall consist of pure shellac dissolved in
methylated spirit. Stopping materials shall consist of putty. The surface thus treated shall be
allowed to dry and then sand paper smooth (for veneered surface, a surface film or french
chalk shall be provided to give a smooth surface prior to application of primer).
33. 2.3.
Application :
After preparing the surface, a primer coat shall be applied. The primer coat shall be ready
mixed of approved make and manufacturer. After the primer coat is applied and perfectly
dried, all holes, cracks etc. still remaining shall be filled in with putty and the surface sand
papered smooth. Then a second coat of paint of approved shade and manufacturer
shall be evenly applied and allowed to dry.
The third coat shall be carefully applied to achieve smooth and even surface after the
previous coat has dried up. Minimum 3 coats of paint shall be applied inclusive of a primer
coat. If a proper and even surface is not obtained to the satisfaction of the
Architects/Employer in 3 coats, Contractor shall carry out additional coats of painting for
the approval at Contractor's own expenses. Care shall be taken to see that dust or other
foreign materials do not settle or otherwise disfigure the various coats.
33.4.
Rates to Include :
155
Apart from other factors mentioned elsewhere in this contract, the rate for the item of
painting shall include for the following :-
32.5.
i)
All labour, materials, consumables, equipment etc. necessary to carry out the work.
ii)
Supplying the approved paint for priming and finishing coats.
iii)
Preparing the surface including knotting and stopping for receiving the priming and
finishing coats.
iv)
Providing strong and stout, catering to safety needs (wherever required),
single or double scaffolding including its erection and dismantling.
v)
Application of a minimum of one primer coat and two coats of finishing, to the
required finish line and level, at all heights, with all lead and lift and adopting all
safety measures. If a proper and even surface is not obtained to the satisfaction of
the Architects/Employer in 3 coats, Contractor shall carry out additional coats of painting
to the approval of Architects/Employer at Contractor's own expenses.
vi)
Protection to painted surface till dried and handed over.
vii)
Cleaning walls, floor, etc. of dropping and splashes.
Mode of Measurement :
Painting to wood work, steel etc. shall be measured separately, as per I.S. 1200 (Part - XV) 1968.
33.
WOOD & STEEL PRIMER :
a)
Wood primer
Wood primer of approved brand and manufacturer is to be applied on the wooden surface
which would be free from moisture and loose particles.
b)
Steel primer
For steel surface red oxide zinc chromate primer of approved brand and manufacture and
as per direction of the Engineer-in-charge is to be applied on the surface. The surface
should be made free of grease, rust, moisture and loose particles.
34.0
SPECIAL TYPE OF PAINTING :
34.1
Polyurethene wood finish painting for Interior works. The finished painted surface produce wood
texture finish.
The process would involve minimum 3 coat application, if proper finish not achieved more coats
would be necessary. All the stages of application shall be with spray painting with a pressure of
2.2 to 2.8 kg./Cum. inclusive of the primer application. The process should preferably be done by
the authorized applicator of the approved manufacturer of the paint.
After application of primer on the prepared surface, the surface will be sand paper with Emery
paper 320 or 400 and wipe clean. Then apply the 2nd coat after 8 to 10 hours with 15 to 30%
dilution with viscosity limit of 15 to 20. After 2nd coat surface to be Emery papered (300 to 400
grade) and wiped clean. Then apply the 3rd coat after waiting 8 to 10 hrs. If staining is required,
156
approved strainer of the same manufacturer should be used.
Safety precautions as specified by manufacturer should be followed.
34.2
Polyurethene painting with Palette finish for Interiors & Exteriors
PU palette finish paint should be from an approved manufacturer. In order to achieve the best
finish it is advisable to get the work done by the authorized applicator oh the manufacturer.
Otherwise a skilled painter may apply the said paint with manufacturer’s supervision.
For optimum performance the paint should be applied at a temperature of 200 C to 400 C
And humidity not above 70%.
The PU palette finish paint should be applied on solid wooden base duly treated with Emery
paper 320 and applying the primer with spray at 2.20 to 2.80 kg./Cum pressure. In case to be
applied on previously painted surface, the existing painting must be scraped clean. The dilution of
paint shall be 25 to 35% and viscosity level between 17 to 21. 4-5 hours gap should be given for
subsequent coating. The final coating should be finished with shine paper till it achieve the
desired sheen in the surface.
Safety precaution as directed in the manufacturer’s specification should be followed.
35.0
ALUMINIUM PARTITION :
35.1.
All aluminium partition or others shall be procured from the reputed manufacturers, subject to
the approval of Architect/Employer. Aluminium sections for fabricating frame work of doors,
windows, etc. shall be of extruded sections conforming to I.S.: 1948 & 1949 of latest edition
or as manufactured by Indian Aluminium Co. Ltd. or approved equivalent. The alloy used shall
conform to I.S. Designation H.E.9 - WP of I.S. 733.
Extruded section shall have a minimum 3mm thickness. All sections shall be approved by
Architect/Employer before fabrication is taken up. Door frames, mullions, transoms etc. shall
be anodised to 20 Micron thickness in a bath of sulphuric acid to provide a uniform coating.
A protective transparent coating shall be applied to the sections before shipment from the
factory. All works for doors, windows and frames etc. shall be fitted and shop assembled to
a first class job, and ready for erection. Shop joints shall be made to hair lines and then
welded or braced. Work on the above, other than these described shall be carefully fitted
and assembled with neat in concealed location and on edges of doors. Field connections of all
work may be made with concealed screws or other approved type of fasteners. All fasteners
connecting aluminium members should be of stainless steel. Glazing beads shall be of snap fit
type without visible screw and shall be of sizes to accommodate upto 5.5mm or 6mm thick
glazing and or as specified.
35.2.
HANDLING & STORAGE OF FABRICATING MATERIALS :
All aluminum doors, windows, jallies, etc. shall be packed and created properly, before
despatch, to ensure that there will be no damage to the fabricated materials. Loading into
'Wagons'/'Trucks' shall be done with all care to ensure safe arrival of materials at site in
undamaged condition. All the fabricated materials at site shall be stored under cover in such a
way to prevent damage or distortion. Special care shall be taken to prevent staining of
aluminum products by mortar, etc. after erection at site.
157
36.0
STRUCTURAL GLAZING / CURTAIN WALL AND GLASS PARTITION WALLS
36.1.
Scope
This specification only broadly describes the proposed requirements for structural glazing/ curtain
walls and glass partitions.
36.2.
Applicable Codes and Specifications
The following Indian Standards and Codes are made part of this Specification. all the Standards
and Codes of Practice referred to herein are references to the latest editions including any and
all official amendments and revisions.
36.3.
36.3.1
IS 419
Specification for putty for use on window frames.
IS 1081
Code of Practice for fixing and glazing of metal, (steel and aluminium) doors,
windows and ventilators.
IS 2553
Specification for safety glass.
IS 2835
Specification for flat transparent sheet glass.
IS 3548
Code of Practice for glazing in building.
IS 5437
Specification for wire and figured glass.
Materials
Glass
All glasses unless otherwise stated shall be atleast 6mm thick best quality flat, transparent and
clear free form cracks, blisters, specks, flaws, waves, blemishes, bubbles, stones, scratches and
other defects that can interfere with the vision and service of the glass with square corners and
straight edges and shall not show any distortion of light when tested in accordance with the
relevant Standard and shall confirm to relevant IS/BIS/ASTM standards and be of approved
make quality size shade etc. and shall not have defects greater than those given in the table of
IS 2835 and tests shall be conducted in accordance with IS 2835-Appendices A, B and C.
a)
Tint. Sheet/Reflective Glass
Tint. Sheet/Reflective Glass shall be flat transparent/reflective and clear when judged by
the unaided eye and when tested shall not show any distortion of light greater than in
accordance with the relevant Standard.
b)
Plate Glass
Plate glass shall be flat glass formed by a rolling process, ground and polished on both
sides with plane and parallel surfaces.
158
c)
Rough cast wired and figured Glass
Wired and figured glass shall be in sheet form 6.4mm thick +/- 0.4mm thick form and shall
not contain and stones or cracks. Wire mesh shall be steel wire 0.46mm to 0.56mm in
diameter, the pattern of mesh being square or diamond with wires welded or hexagonal
with wires twisted. Wire mesh shall be completely embedded minimum 1mm from either
of glass surfaces and shall not contain more than 3 broken wires per square metre. Wired
and wired figured glass shall satisfy fireproof tests as prescribed by IS 5437 - Appendix A.
d)
Toughened or Laminated Safety Glass
Transparent, translucent or coloured, toughened or laminated safety glass shall conform
to IS : 2553 and be made of sheet glass of selected best quality in accordance with IS 2835.
Toughened or laminated glass shall be subject to uniformity, fragmentation, humidity,
fracture and adhesion tests as prescribed in IS 2553-Appendixes A,B,C and D respectively.
e)
Frosted or obscured Glass
Frosted or obscured glass shall be best quality sheet glass ground to achieves frosting and
obscuring effect. Grinding shall be done uniformly and glass cleaned thoroughly to avoid
stain formations on surfaces. Obscuring with sand blasting method shall be preferred.
Sand blasting should be factory made and level of obscurity should be got approved from
the sample. Abrasive sand blasting can be done to from pattern or murals in the surfaces.
The pattern and murals will be as shown on drawings.
f)
Approved Imported Glass for single and double Glazing.
All imported glasses for single and double glazing unless otherwise stated shall be atleast
6mm thick best quality flat, transparent and clear free from form cracks, blisters, specks,
flaws, waves, blemishes, bubbles, stones, scratches, and other defects that can interfere
with the vision and service of the glass with square corners and straight edges and shall
confirm to relevant IS/BIS/ASTM standards and be of approved make quality size shade
etc.
g)
Stained glass
The stained glass wherever specified and shown on drawing shall be factory manufactured
by adding oxides to the glass. The pattern and usage of stained glass shall be as shown on
drawing. Designs should be got approved before fixing the stained glass in the skeleton
shutters.
36.3.2
Structural Glazing :
a)
Single Glazing
All glasses for single glazing shall be imported in the specified thickness and shall be float
159
quality tempered clear transparent, tinted or approved solar reflective glass of approved
make such as Glaverbel Belgium or Glaverbas, Singapore or Saint Gobain, France with the
following characteristics :
b)
Coated face
.....
2
Daylight reflection
.....
27%
Daylight transmission
.....
45%
Solar energy reflection
.....
21%
Solar energy absorption
.....
27%
Solar energy transmission
.....
53%
Solar factor
.....
0.6
Shading Co-efficient
.....
0.69
U Values (ISO) W/sqm. Deg C
.....
5.8
Double Glazing
Double glazing units shall comprise in outer faces imported 6mm thick flat quality
tempered, reflective of approved colour shade (such as Glaverbel, Belgium or Glaverbas,
Singapore or Saint Gobain, France) with Indian Manufactured 6mm thick clear float glass
of approved colour shade in inner surfaces (such as Modifloat or Asahi or approved other
equal) and fixed on at least 12mm wide aluminium perforated spacer members.
Aluminium spacer members shall be filled with best quality silica gel and complete units
hermetically sealed with Silicon Sealant of approved make as manufactured by GE
silicones/wackier Silicones/ Dow coring or approved equal as shall be directed by
Architect. All the norms laid down by silicone manufacturer will be adhered to the full
satisfaction of Architect.
c)
Frame Work
i)
Material :
Approved aluminium extruded sections made of aluminium alloy conforming to
I.S. : 63400 artificially aged or precipitation heat treated/ hermally sheathed with
minimum ultimate tensile strength of 21 KG/Cum. hard coated anodised of 20-25
micron shall only be used as shall be directed and to the entire satisfaction of the
Architect.
ii)
Putty :
Approved putty shall consist of a homogenous paste, free from dust, grit and
other visible impurities and conforming to I.S. 419.
160
iii)
Gasket :
All structural gaskets shall be of high resistance of organic, prolong compressive
material with ability to recover from compression or deformation and shall have
the property to allow joint movement.
iv)
Fire & Smoke Resistance :
The system should include approved fire & smoke seals at all required places as
per approved design.
v)
Thermal and acoustic insulation :
The structural glazing system should conform to the relevant standards for
thermal and acoustic performance
vi)
Air & Water tightness
The structural glazing system shall be designed to prevent Air and water
penetration as per relevant IS/BIS/ASTM standards.
vii)
Load :
The structural glazing system shall be capable of accommodating dead load, wind
load, seismic force, thermal movement and any other forces without reducing its
performance or causing permanent damages.
However maximum permissible deflection should not exceed 1/200 and no
permanent deformation for 1.5 times the design load shall be permitted.
viii)
Static/Structural performance :
The system shall be strong enough to withstand a positive and negative pressure
for any particular designated section.
36.3.3
Curtain Wall :
a)
Sections for the curtain wall
: For the main structure Indal Section No. 9303
weighing 1.879 kg./m.
For the top cover section No. 7557 weighing
0.317 kg./m.
For pressure plate section No. 7559, weighing
0.515 kg./m.
161
b)
36.4.
Suitable E.P.D.M. Gaskets are to be used on both sides of the glass.
Workmanship :
General :
The contractor upon approval by Architect to his initial scheme with detailed specifications
covering all factors for the entire works of structural glazing/curtain wall shall before taking up
any portion of the work shall submit to the Architect all shop drawings for initial approval as
also shop drawings from time to time or as may be directed for execution of all relevant
portions of the works only after specific approvals thereto. The contractor shall however
remain solely responsible for designing procurement manufacture fixing and installation or
otherwise for the entire works and for its due performance and to the entire satisfaction of the
Employer.
The entire works of structural glazing/curtain wall shall conform to relevant building
codes/safety regulations. The contractor shall take special care for Load, Static/ Structural
performance, Air and Water tightness, Fire & Smoke Resistance, Thermal and acoustic
insulation etc.
Structural glazing system with glazed panels would be factory made to the unit size as per
design.
Fixing of the structure shall be all round by approved suitable fasteners and supporting
brackets of Aluminium/Stainless Steel fixed with stainless steel bolt and nuts.
Glazing work shall be executed strictly in accordance with IS 3548 for glazing to timber frames
and IS 1081 for metal frames where applicable. Glass for glazing shall have a clearance of not
less than 2.5mm between the edges and the surrounding wood or metal frames.
Aluminium frame work shall be either colour anodized / power coatd / MRF Vapouring as shall
be decided by the Architect whose approval therefore shall also be taken before
commencement of the work.
Sufficient compound shall be applied to rebates such that when glass is pressed into the rebate
a bed of compound not less than 1.5mm thick remains between glass and rebate. Beads shall
then be bedded with compound against glass and rebate.
Beads shall be as detailed in the relevant Standard and/or as approved by the
Architect/Engineer-in-Charge/ E.I.C. and shall be secured with panel pins or screwed as
approved, care being taken to ensure that no voids are left between glass and beads.
36.5
Glass Thickness and Tolerances shall be as specified and as indicated in the relevant codes of
BIS/ASTM standards.
36.6.
RATES TO INCLUDE
Apart from other factors mentioned elsewhere herein, the rates of items of structural
glazing/curtain wall in the schedule of quantities shall include besides for all stages and scope of
162
work and all things incidental thereto besides for all labour, material, consumables, supply,
fabrication, fixing/installing, use of plant machinery, tools tackles etc. including for the wastages
etc. all lead and lift work at all levels, all bye works for the completed finished work and no
extra whatsoever on this account will be entertained.
36.7.
37.0.
Payments for single and or double glazing system shall be made for actual finished approved
area measured in sq. metre. from one side only.
WALL PANELLING :
Wherever wall paneling is specified and shown on drawings, the same will be done in two
stages. The primary stage and top finishing stage. The primary surface will be the base for the
decorative finishes as specified in the schedule of works.
Primary surface shall be prepared with plywood or gypsum board fixed on timber battening
work fixed to wall surface with timber or nylon plugs driven on wall. Battens will be 40m to
50mm wide and 25mm thick or as shown on drawing. Battens are placed generally 500mm to
600mm c/c both ways or as shown on drawing. Plywood, commercial finish will be fixed on
the battens with nails to form the base primary surface. The battens should be treated with
wood preservatives before fixing. The edges of the primary surface to be finished with
wooden beads as shown on drawing. Wherever gypsum board are forming the primary
surface the 12.50mm thick gypboards will be fixed on the wall battens with screws and
finished the gypsum board surface with paper tape and gypsum powder.
37.1
GLASS PANELLING ON WALL
Glass sheets 6mm thick plain or obscured glass or stained glass sheet will be fixed on the
primary surface with SS studs or patch fittings as directed and as shown on drawing by
interior designers. The variety of glass sheet must be toughened glass sheets for glass
paneling works and must have machine finished edges.
37.2
WALL PANELLING WITH SELECTIVE VENEERS
The selective veneers (either teakwood, rosewood or burl, etc.) not less than 3mm to 4mm
thick should be fixed on a 6mm thick BWR commercial plywood with phenol formaldehyde
adhesive. The 6mm thick plywood with veneer facings shall then be fixed to the primary
surface of wall paneling with SS studs or otherwise as shown on drawing. The edges of the
veneered toping over the plywood should be finished with teak wood beads at the edges and
melamine finish the surface upto the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge.
37.3
WALL PANELLING WITH WOODEN OR BAMBOO SLATS
Wherever wall paneling with wooden slats or bamboo composite laminate slats are shown on
drawing the said paneling work should be done with wooden slats of selective timber species
size ranging from 50mm to 75mm wide and 12mm thick shall be fixed on the 12mm thick
BWR commercial plywood base with phenol formal dehyde adhesive pressed hard to have
good grip. The edges should be finished with teakwood beads 25mm to 40mm wide as shown
on drawing. The bamboo composite slats also shall be pasted in similar manner and edges
163
finished. The plywood board then be fixed over the primary surface with either with stainless
steel studs or to be screwed with stainless steel screws. Louvered paneling shall be done in
similar manner. Edges finished with wooden moulding.
37.4
WALL PANELLING WITH CARPETS
Wall paneling with the carpets shall be done with the carpet directly fixed on the primary
surface plywood with nails (preferably stainless steel) and edge moulding done wherever
catered for in the item. It should be ensured that the carpet is flattened and fixed tight and
wriggle nowhere formed. The carpet preferably be ironed and planed before fixing.
37.5
CLOTH OR FABRIC PANELLING ON WALL
Approved cloth either silken or cotton or decorative fabric cloth shall be fixed on a 6mm thick
BWR plywood boards with stainless steel nails or screws with identical cloth washers tightly
spread on the plywood wriggle free as per the direction of Engineer-in-charge or interior
designer. It is advisable to iron the cloth or fabric before fixing and a thin layer of foam is
backed below the cloth / fabric for proper surface appearance. The edges of the board should
be finished with appropriate moulding either PVC or wooden as per the description in the
schedule.
37.6
WALL PANELLING WITH CANE OR BAMBOO WORKS
Cane paneling on wall shall be done with finely wooven cane work with 2mm to 3mm wide
cane strips, woven in a pattern as shown by the interior designer. The woven cane mat then
be fixed on a 6mm thick BWR commercial plywood board and edges finished with wooden
moulding as per direction of interior designer. The completed board then be erected and
fixed on the primary surface. The surface shall be coated with 2 to 3 coats of melamine polish
upto the satisfaction of Engineer-in-charge.
Wherever decorative art work is done with half round matured canes the same shall be done
on a 6mm thick or 12mm thick BWR plywood boards. The half round matured and dried canes
should be used for the said work. The half round cane sticks shall be laid over the plywood
board and fixed with nails as per the design pre=approved by the interior designer. For this
type of work, it shall be ensured that the size of half round cane sticks are reasonably of the
uniform size. The art work after completion, the board is to be finished with teak wood
moulding and finished. The completed board should then be fixed on the primary surface
either with SS studs or can be directly screwed. The surface to be treated with 2 to 3 coats of
melamine polish.
Wherever cane work is to be placed on ceiling panels, the same system should be followed
and the completed board be fixed directly on the ceiling frame work. All as shown on drawing
and as directed by the Engineer-in-charge / Interior designer.
38.0.
TIMBER : (for Built in and Loose Furniture)
i)
Unless otherwise specified, all timber for frames and shutters for doors, windows,
ventilators, cupboards, etc. shall be first class, sound, well matured teak wood
and shall be free from knots, shakes, fissures, flaws, sub-cracks and other
defects. The planned surface shall be smooth and free from blemishes and
discolourations. Wherever in B.O.Q. Sal wood is specified, it shall be Siliguri Sal.
164
ii)
All timber for carpentry and joinery in touch with masonry or concrete shall
be creosoted before fixing.
iii)
All full fabricated timber in general shall be air seasoned (except teak wood) on site of
work for a period of not less than two months to allow for any shrinkage that may take
place. The preparation of timber for joinery is to commence simultaneously with the
beginning of the project work and should generally proceed continuously until all
the wood work is prepared and fixed/stacked on or near the site as the case may
be.
iv)
Each member of all frames, transoms, mullions, etc. of doors and windows
shall be made out of single piece of timber only.
v)
Unless otherwise specified all joints shall be through toned having thickness not less
than 1.25 cm. and close fitted truly and fully without filling into the mortice of the
adjoining member of the frame to the full width of the latter and pinned with
corrosion resisting metal pins or wooden dowels not less than 8mm and 10mm
respectively, as approved by the Architect/Employer. The surfaces in contact with
tendon and mortises shall be treated with an approved adhesive before joining
together.
Door and window frames shall be held and ensured square and flat at the time of
delivery and while fitting and fixing in position, shrinkage if any in any direction shall
not impair the appearance and strength of the finished work.
39.0
WORKMANSHIP & CONSTRUCTORS :
i)
The workmanship shall be first class and to the approval of the Architect/ Employer.
Scantlings and boarding shall be accurately sawn and shall be of required finished width
and thickness. All carpenter's work shall be wrought except where otherwise
described.
The workmanship and joinery shall be accurately set out in strict conformity according
to the drawings and shall be framed together and securely fixed in approved
manner and with properly made joints. All work is to be properly tennoned,
shouldered, wedged, pinned, braced, etc. and properly glued with approved quality
glue to the satisfaction of the Architect/ Employer.
ii)
Screws :
Unless otherwise specified all screws to be used in wood work and joinery shall be of
stainless steel and of approved quality and manufacturer. The size (diameter and
length) should conform to those specified in hardware schedule.
iii)
Tolerance :
1.5 mm (1/6") tolerance will be allowed for each wrought face of sizes specified
except where described as finished in which case they shall hold to the full
dimensions.
165
iv)
Protection :
All edges of timber frames etc. shall be protected from being damaged during
construction by providing rough timber casing securely fixed and other adequate
protective measures.
40.0
40.1
v)
If it is decided by the Employer to provide anti-termite treatment, the buildings
Contractor shall co-ordinate his work suitably as directed by the Architect/ Employer.
vi)
Where door frames are fixed flush with plaster to wall teak wood cover mould 20 mm
x 12 mm ,35 mm x 15 mm specified as per drawings shall be provided all round where
the plaster is flush with the frame painted or finished as in doors. (This will be paid as
a separate item as described in schedule of quantities).
LOOSE FURNITURE
TABLE - GENERAL
TOP
All four sides with Burma Teak wood finished mouldings out of 75 X 38 sections with 18mm
thick BWR plywood surface with secondary species. Timber frame with teak veneer surface duly
polished and melamine finish. Top measuring approx. 6’-0” X 3’-0” or as shown on drawing,
wherever glass top has been specified in item 12mm thick plain toughened glass shall be
placed over veneered table top fixed with side clips or studs at shown on drawings.
40.2
DRAWER & CUPBOARD UNITS
Catered for in BOQ
Carcass made out of 18mm BWR plywood with veneer finish all sides with a drawer and
cupboard unit and a fixed panel to be fixed with a decorative M.S. frame out of hollow sections
(25mm) with two flanges with circular plate in one side only of the table with bottom support
on both faces of the cup-board. The unit is provided with necessary grooves, provide best
quality Burma Teak wood moulds, lipping, etc. M.S. frame should be provided as foot rest and
fixed to the right side bottom of the cup-board. All drawers to be fixed on best quality slides. All
drawers with 12mm plywood construction finished with polish to desired shade. Set Lock to be
provided for the drawer and lockers.
40.3
SIDE UNIT
Basic structure with 12mm thick BWR plywood with best quality lipping, moulding with one
drawer and cup-board unit and one of semi open type drawer with teak wood front. All exterior
surface to be finished in polish and melamined on decorative veneer surface. Note : For
necessary embellishment to add value to the table and side units. Set lock to be provided for all
the side units.
166
40.4
WORK STATIONS
Work station may be of 4 units compact or double unit compact comprising of the following
elements :-
40.5
i)
Partitions.
ii)
Work Top.
iii)
Drawer Units.
iv)
Key Board Tray.
v)
Hard Disc Carrier.
vi)
Locker Unit.
PARTITIONS
Frame work with seasoned teakwood frame work with 6mm thick BWR plywood skin on both
side upto approx. 1,350mm height partition upto 2 ft. high with either decorative veneer / or
laminate on both sides. Above 2 ft. one 150mm thick timber band to receive all plugs and
switches. Provide for running electrical and low line conduits. Above 3ft. high partition is
provided with partly frosted / clear glass and partly pin up board panel on both sides fixed with
Burma Teak wood beads /Mouldings etc. duly polished and melamine finish top and side runs
provided with Burma Teak Wood beads/Mouldings with grooves etc. out of 80 X 25 sections.
Partition on smaller sides should also be considered. All partition etc. will have 100mm wooden
skirting both sides.
40.6
WORK TOP
Made of 18m of BWR plywood with decorative veneer with polish and melamine finish of
appropriate finished thickness, necessary Burma Teak wood lipping / mouldings etc. as per
layout plan (L shaped) provide for side run on left or right hand side.
40.7
DRAWER UNIT & KEYBOARD TRAY
Made of 18m of BWR plywood with decorative veneer finish exterior surface with necessary
mouldings, lipping, drawers made of 12mm thick plywood structure and 6mm plywood bottom
duly polished with lipping as necessary. Each unit to have one drawers and cup-boards with
shutters locking arrangements. With all best quality drawer slides etc. Key board tray front with
Burma Teak wood timber as per sketch and the Tray is polished on 6mm veneer finish surface.
40.8
METAL HARD DISC holder with approximately of standard size and finishes matching with the
workstation finish. Wooden foot rest shall be provided with 1st class hard wood and finishes
with French polish and PVC coating.
40.9
LOCKER UNIT
Locker unit shall have 2 tired cupboard shelves shall be made with 12mm thick BWR plywood
supported with 2 wooden beads fixed on cupboard wall. Shelves and inside of locker finished
167
with polish and PU finish complete. The locker door made of 18mm thick BWR plywood with
commercial finish, exposed surface shall be provided with approved veneer finish edges
provided with hardwood lipping complete Locks should be of Hafele or Hettic as approved by
Architect.
Guaranteed period of the work station shall be 10 years. Contractor shall submit the written
guarantee to the Engineer-in-charge.
41.
SOFA SETS - STANDARD & BRANDED
Sofa sets wherever indicated in the drawings to be provided as per the model and make from
reputed classic furniture manufacturers. The basic specifications of those articles shall be as per
approved manufacturer’s specifications. The leather and fabric upholstery should be specified
while placing order. The skeleton timber frame work should be with seasoned hardwood. The
base support may be on swiveled wheeled or with compressed nylon shoes, hard enough to
withstand the wear and tear. While selecting the model of furniture these points may be
examined. Manufacturer’s guarantee for each article to be obtained from supplier and contractor
to hand over the same to the Engineer-in-charge. Guarantee period should be minimum 10 years.
42.0
SOFA SETS - NON STANDARD / CUSTOMISED
Basic structure of the sofa frame shall be with seasoned hardwood. The wooden structure should
be stout enough to withstand the vagaries of use of sofas.
The springs shall be copper coated steel to be fixed as per standard carpentry practice. Padding
for back and sides shall be with medium density foam and bottom seat shall be with high density
foam, cotton and coir packing and cushioning should be done as per direction of Engineer-incharge or as per design.
Workmanship for upholstery should be of high precision and quality, finish, samples of
workmanship to be got approved. Upholstery shall be either with leather or fabric as approved by
the Engineer-in-charge. Where leather or synthetic leather (leatherite) upholstery is specified the
quality and cost of the leather and shall be not less than Rs. 500.00 per Sqft. for normal
leather, for synthetic leather or leatherite it should be Rs. 200.00 per Sq.ft. and fabric shall be
minimum Rs. 1,000.00 per R.M. Samples of cloth and leather should be got approved from the
Engineer-in-charge before starting the upholstery works.
The whole unit of sofa can either be mounted on swiveled roller wheels or on compressed nylon
studs as directed by the Engineer-in-charge or as per BOQ.
It is imperative that the contractor shall get the drawings/sketch of the sofas to be got approved
from Engineer-in-charge or Architect. Guarantee of the article should be given by the contractor.
The guarantee period shall be minimum 10 years.
43.0
SPECIFICATION FOR CENTRE TABLES AND SIDE TABLES
Centre tables and side tables may be of the following types as specified in the BOQs.
i)
Centre table with glass table top and stainless steel support frame work (single or two
tired).
168
43.1
ii)
Wooden Centre tables and side tables with glass or laminated top.
iii)
Wooden Centre table or side tables with BWR plywood base, top and side with veneered
finish.
Centre tables with glass top and stainless steel tubular support structure. Tubular support
structure may be either 20mm dia. or 25mm dia. With seamless finished bright polished. The
joints in the tubes should be soldered/welded/polished to match the tubuler finishes. The lugs to
hold the glass top or bottom tires also welded to main frame.
Holders will be screwed with stainless steel screws. Design of the table with drawings/ sketches
should be got approved from Engineer-in-charge/Architect. Side units shall also be of matching
specification.
43.2
Wooden centre tables shall be made with 1st class teakwood (Burma teak or C.P. teak) with high
precision finish. Table top shall be either of glass or with laminated top. Wherever glass top is
specified, the glass thickness shall be 10mm thick toughened glass. The supporting plywood (BWR
grade with commercial finish shall be with P.U finish. All timber surfaces shall be French polished
and with a P.U. coating. Side units shall also match the specification of centre table. The centre
table may be mounted on swiveled wheels specifically ordered. Otherwise all the supporting legs
should be fitted with highly compressed nylon shoes.
43.3
Centre tables with complete plywood structure with BWR grade high quality plywood. The top
and sides of the units may be with classical selected veneers. Edge mouldings will be provided
with 1st class teak wood beads. The joints should be neatly finished with proper filling and sand
papering joints shall be dovetailed joints with approved glue. Screwing should be done with
stainless steel screws. The screw position should be properly sealed with putty. The entire unit is
to be treated with 1st class French polish with P.U. finish. The whole system shall be mounted on
wheeled system (swiveled wheel) to facilitate shifting position as required. Otherwise highly
compressed nylon studs may be fixed at bottom for support.
44.0
SEATING SYSTEM
Executive Chairs (Revolving type) wheeled and reclining with high back and head rest .
Officers chair (revolving) low height cushioned and headrest wheeled.
Conference Chairs – revolving low height or mid height cushioned backrest.
Chairs for Ministerial staff
Chairs for visitors
Assembly hall chairs and desks
Auditorium Chairs (tip up type) – fabric cushioned
VIPs’ Chairs and Sofa sets.
44.1
EXECUTIVE CHAIRS
Chairs for Ministers, Dy. Speakers and high officials.
169
Chairs should have stout metal framed 5 prong support (either highly polished alluminium or
epoxy coated or stainless steel) with swiveled wheels for free mobility. Highly compressed nylon
wheels mounted on appropriate ball bearing for hastle free movement. With telescopic height
adjustment mechanism and bearing revolving system for the castor. Back rest shall be high with
headrest facilities. Adjustable reclining facility , hand rest shall be 1st quality, teakwood with polish
and melamine finish, upholstered with superior quality, leather, synthetic leather or high quality
fabric duly padded with cotton coir and hessian cloth cover and medium density foam for back
and sides and high density foam for seat. Design and curvature for utmost comfort of the person
as per latest design available in the market of reputed furniture manufacturers. Contractor should
get the model approved from Engineer-in-charge. Colour and design of upholstery should be got
approved before ordering the model. Contractor should submit a guarantee for the product for a
period of 10 years to the Engineer-in-charge. Tentative design of the chair is shown on the
drawings. (Basic rate of leather Rs. 500.00/Sq.ft., Synthetic leather 200.00 / Sq.ft., and fabric Rs.
1,000.00/Rm.
44.2
CHAIRS FOR OFFICERS
Chairs for officer, section heads, visiting officers etc.
Chairs should have stout metal frames on 5 prong support with swiveleld wheels for free mobility
. Metal frame should be nickelled and polished or of stainless steel. Telescopic height adjustment
mechanism and bearing revolving system castors. Reclining system with adjustable reclining
position. Back rest will be low height cushioned. Cushioning shall be with high quality coir and
cotton and padded with medium density foam at back and high density foam on seat. Back rest
will be of low height with no separate head rest. The upholstery shall be with synthetic leather or
fabric as approved. The model of chair conforming to above specifications should be chosen from
the approved manufacturer’s model available in the market. Sample shall be got approved before
ordering the same. Contractor to give written guarantee for smooth functioning of the chairs
at least for 10 years.
44.3
CHAIRS FOR MINISTERIAL STAFF
Chairs for ministerial staff shall be either fixed type or swiveled revolving type. Back rest will be
either metal encapsulated with PVC net or with plastic caned net. Bottom shall be cushioned with
high density foam and synthetic leather upholstery. The bottom support shall be with epoxy
powder coated metal frame with nylon shoes at bottom. The model of furniture should be chosen
from the range of products available in the market from approved manufacturers. Model should
be got approved from Engineer-in-charge before ordering the same. The contractor should submit
a written guarantee for the performance of the chair for a period of at least 10 years.
170
44.4
CHAIRS FOR VISITORS
Visitors chairs in speakers office, chief minster office and deputy speakers office should also
conform to the specification of Executive chairs. Models of chairs be chosen form the products
available in the market of slightly at a lesser costs. As regards the visitors chairs in other offices
and other officers room shall be as specified below. The chairs shall be revolving type mounted on
5 prong stout metal frame of stainless steel and height adjustable castors. The 5 prong pedestals
shall be mounted on stout bearing swiveling compressed nylon wheels for trouble free mobility.
The hand rest shall be of high polished stainless steel. The seats shall be cushioned and padded
with high density foam, Selected quality synthetic leather quality upholstery. ( Basic cost of
synthetic leather Rs. 200.00/Sq.ft.
44.5
CONFERENCE CHAIRS
Revolving chairs mounted on 5 prong stout metal epoxy coated base with matching bearing
castors and telescoping lockable height adjuster for the under carriage system. Seating with
synthetic leather upholstered foam seats duly padded with cotton and coir and high density foam
and back rest with adjustable recline system and upholstered with synthetic leather in approved
colour and medium density foam cushion duly padded with coir and cotton completed all as per
model no……………….. complete and as directed by Architect and Engineer-in-charge.
44.6
STACKABLE BANQUET CHIARS
Under carriage (legs) shall be either circular or rectangular / square hollow sections ranging from
20mm to 25mm and made of stainless steel or stainless steel with epoxy powder coating. The
steel tubing may be finished in silver epoxy in approved pattern and colour.
The seat is made of moulded in tough recyclable polypropylene in approved colour. The colour
should be uniform and should not fade away during passage of time. Chairs should conform to
model no……… of M/s AMBER Mumbai or its similar equivalent.
44.7
WAITING AREA
Beam seating – legs, arms rest and frame compound of the seating shall be of cast alluminium
polished to mirror finished or stainless steel of reputed manufacturers. The legs should have
compressed nylon shoes.
Body shapes – formed out of 2mm cold rolled steel plates the back rest is supported by cast
alluminium finised in epoxy powder coating. Wherever back rest is specified with cusion as per
the models, the back rest cusion shall be made with medium density foam, upholstered with
synthetic leather. Bottom cusion shall be with high density foam upholstered with synthetic
leather and back rest shall be of nylon encapsulated metal mesh complete as per model
no………… as shown on drawings.
171
45.0
SPECIFIED SPECIFICATIONS FOR VIP CHAIRS
45.1
SPEAKERS AND CHIEF MINISTER OFFICE CHAIRS
These chairs shall be with stout metal skeleton frame and the 5 prong support system with stout
metal castors. It shall be encased in highly precision carved teak or mehagony wood finely joined
……………….. and polished with 1st class French polish two or more coat with melamine coating. The
hand rests in th chair also shall be in similar manner carved and finished with teak or mahogany
timber finely jointed and finished with 2 or more coats of French polish in approved tint and
melamined finish. The upholstery should be with imported leather and high density foam for
padding of and base of seat and for back rest, hand rest and head rest shall be with medium
density foam. Stitch and allied sewing works with high precision craftsman. The contractor has to
submit a written guaranteed for 10 years for its good performance.
45.2
DEPUTY SPEAKERS, PRINCIPAL SECRETARY CONFERENCE AND PRESENTATION OFFICE.
These chairs shall broadly conform to the specifications as stated in para 45.1 above. The
upholstery shall be either of leather or synthetic leather. Colour pattern etc. to be chosen and
approved by Engineer–in-Charge. Model of chairs shall be as per no. 9 of attached drawing.
46.0
SEAT AND DESK FOR SPEAKER IN ASSEMBLY HALL
Seat of the speaker shall be with high back seat as per the dimension shown on drawing. The chair
shall be made with teak wood crafted as per the design which comprises of partly lathe work and
partly fine carpentry work with intricate finish. Back rest will be cushioned with high quality
imported leather of approved shade upholstered with proper padding and medium density foam.
The seat will be upholstered with high density foam on plywood base and imported leather. The
entire system to be intricately finished and polished with 1st class French polish and melamine
coating in approved shade complete.
The desk should be made with seasoned Burma teak frame as per drawing side and front panels
should be with 12mm thick BWR Commercial Plywood forming partially raised and sunk panels
and topped with approved veneers. Necessary teak wood beads fixed as per approved design
and finished intricately. Table top will be with 19mm thick BWR plywood with approved veneer
finish on plywood top. Necessary edge moulding with approved teak wood beads moulded as
per design. The table shall be finished with 1st class French polish in approved tint and finished
with melamine coating.
47.0
SPEAKER’S AND CHIEF MINISTER’S REST ROOM CHAIR (SOFA) :
172
The skeleton structure and main body shall be built with seasoned 1st quality Burma Teak or
Mehogany wood as shown on drawing. The curved work in the sofa type chair shall be intricately
designed and meticulously carved. Bottom, sides and back panels shall be with 12mm thick BWR
plywood fixed with selected veneer. The bottom upholstery shall be with fine imported leather
and high density foam cushion and cotton and coir padding as per design. Backrest and sides shall
be upholstered with medium density foam and coir and cotton padded covered with superior
quality imported leather not less than Rs. 500.00/Sq.ft. The exposed veneer and timber surface
should be finished with 1st class French polish and melamine coating. Drawing for the chair/(sofa)
is given.
Wherever cloth upholstery shall be done cloth quality shall be Rs. 1,000.00/R.M.
48.0
SEAT AND DESK FOR MEMBERS OF ASSEMBLY HALL :
The seat of the members in the Assembly hall shall be as per the design and drawing and to be
built in Burma Teak with fine carpentry work, involving partly with lathe finished elements. Back
and side panels shall be with 12mm thick BWR commercial plywood panels topped with selective
decorative veneers finished with precision work as shown on drawing and as directed by
Engineer-in-charge. Upholstery shall be with superior quality synthetic leather and cushion for
back and side with medium density foam and seat cushion will be with high density foam. Pattern
of padding and upholstered cushion shall be as shown drawing. (Refer the picture of the finished
model).
The desk of the members shall be made with teak wood frame work side and front panels will be
with 12mm thick commercial plywood finished with veneer topping, edges finished with
teakwood moulding. The top of table shall be with 19mm thick plywood finished with selective
veneer finish on top and sides to be finished with approved teak wood moulding.
The side and front panels may be done with partly raised and sunk surface. Sample to be got
approved from Engineer-in-charge and then the other units will be made. Approved sample shall
be preserved till completion. The entire seat should be finished with 1 st class French polish and 2
or 3 coats of melamine finish.
49.0
COMPACT LAMINATED BOARDS :
Compact laminated boards wherever shown should conform to ISO 4586, and will satisfy at
the requirement or tests as per EN438-4.
(Merino, BESCO standard grade compact laminates or its similar equivalent shall be used –
manufacturer’s test certificate is must for approval of sample)
The boards should be hard durable scratch free and will be true to geometrics. No warped or
scratched or edge damaged boards will be accepted. The colour of the boards shall be chosen
by the Engineer-in-charge or Architect. Necessary fixing arrangements, hinges for doors and
173
locking systems shall be as per standard manufacturer’s specification. Studs and patch fittings
and all other allied fitting shall be of stainless steel and as per the recommendations of the
board manufacturer’s.
The rates of the item shall be inclusive of all and fittings and fixtures as per approved
manufacturer’s specification.
50.
PARTITION :
50.1
Supply and installation of 138 mm thick dry wall partition system which includes Two layers of 15
mm thick Gypsum Plaster Board on either side of 72mm stud partition system in combination of
3mm thick Visco elastic polymer material .Dry wall partition are finished with acrylic based emulsion
paint of approved shade.
50.2
Construction (Frame work)
Framework consists two sets of 72mm Floor/ Head galvanised channels having thickness 0.5mm,
length 3600mm, equal flanges of 32mm and web of 50mm fixed to floor and ceiling with suitable
fasteners at 300mm centres staggered. Noise and fire rated caulking compound to be caulked along
the perimeter of the partition frame before fixing channels. Then 70mm Stud channel having
thickness 0.5 mm, length 3600mm, unequal flanges of 34/36 mm and web of 70 mm should be
placed into the floor/head channel positioned vertically at 610mm centres. Extra reinforcement to
be provided at openings (doors, windows, etc.,) all the steel studs used shall have high quality
galvanising and must be fully knurled. Ensure studs are firmly fixed and no undulations before
boarding
Note
: All services related works to be completed before fixing Visco elastic polymer. Frequent
removing of visco elastic polymer is not recommended
50.3
Cavity Filling
Stud to be filled with polyester fibre having density of 1000 GSM and thickness of 50 mm. Polyester
fibres is held in position by using galvanised cross wire braces or by using adhesive tapes.
50.4
Boarding
72mm Channels are first lined by using 3mm thick visco elastic polymer material having a surface
density of minimum 4.88kg/m2. Visco elastic layer used shall of UV resistant, resistance to mold ,
water, heat, and shall be 100% recyclable. Visco Elastic polymer material used should have noise
isolating properties and are screw fixed to channels by using self tapping pan head screws of 25mm
174
at 450mm centres. Joints of visco elastic polymer sheets are lined by using special jointing tapes.
Two layers of 15 mm thick gypsum plaster boards are then fixed on visco elastic layer, on either side
of stud partition system by using 3.5mm x 35mm/50mm Corrosion resistant self-tapping zinc plated
steel screws with countersunk cross-head drywall screws. Gypsum plaster boards joints to be
staggered to each other. Joints are lined by using fiber tape and jointing compound recommended by
manufacturer.
50.5
Finishing
Dry wall partitions to be finished with acrylic emulsion paint of approved colour.
Note
• Suitable metal corner profiles to be used for finishing external and internal corners of the
partition system.
• All partitions are upto full height.
• All service openings to be sealed by using jointing compound.
• Switch boxes between rooms to be staggered with a backing of noise isolating material
50.6
Tender item
Supply and installation of 200mm thick dry wall partition system which includes Two layers of
12mm thick BWP FR Grade marine ply on one side side of double stud partition system and 2 layers
of 12.5mm thick Gypsum plaster board on other side in combination of 3mm thick Visco elastic
polymer material .Dry wall partition finished with wooden veneer approved shade on one side and
paint finished on other side.
50.7
Construction (Frame work)
Framework consists two sets of 72mm Floor/ Head galvanised channels (placed next to each other
with gap off 3mm) having thickness 0.5mm, length 3600mm, equal flanges of 32mm and web of
50mm fixed to floor and ceiling with suitable fasteners at 300mm centres staggered. Noise and fire
rated caulking compound to be caulked along the perimeter of the
partition frame . Then 70mm Stud channel having thickness 0.5 mm, length 3600mm, unequal
flanges of 34/36 mm and web of 70 mm should be placed into the floor/head channel positioned
vertically at 610mm centres. Extra reinforcement to be provided at openings (doors, windows, etc.,)
all the steel studs used shall have high quality galvanising and must be fully knurled. Ensure studs are
firmly fixed and no undulations before boarding.
Note –all services related work to be completed before fixing visco elastic polymer. Frequent
removing and repairing of visco elastic polymer layer reduces overall performance of the partition .
175
50.8
Cavity Filling
Both studs are to be filled with polyester fibre having density of 1000 GSM and thickness of 50 mm.
Polyester fibres is held in position by using galvanised cross wire braces or by using adhesive tapes.
50.9
Boarding
Both sets of the channels are first lined by using one layer of 12mm thick FR Grade Marine ply
wood & other side by using one layer of 12.5mm thick gypsum plaster board, then 3mm thick visco
elastic polymer sheets having a surface density of minimum 4.88kg/m2. UV resistant, resistance to
mold , water and heat, and shall be 100% recyclable and has noise isolating properties. Visco elastic
polymer sheets are screw fixed to 12mm thick FR Grade marine ply/ 12.5mm thick gypsum plaster
board by using self tapping pan head screws of 25mm at 450mm centre. Joints of visco elastic
polymer sheets are lined by using special jointing tapes.
Again layer of 12 mm thick FR Grade marine ply boards / 12.5mm thick gypsum plaster board are
than fixed on visco elastic layer, on either side of double stud partition system by using 3.5mm x
35/50mm Corrosion resistant self-tapping zinc plated steel screws with countersunk cross-head
screws. Marine ply boards joints to be staggered to each other. Marine board used shall be of BWP
grade, resistance to moisture and density of minimum 800Kg/m3 .
50.10
Finishing
Marine ply board partitions to be finished with 4mm thick veneer of approved shade and finished
with polish and gypsum plaster board partitions are finished by using acrylic emulsion of approved
colour.
Note
• Door and window frames are to suitably reinforced by using wooden members.
• All partitions are upto full height .
• All service openings to be sealed by using jointing compound .
• Switch boxes between rooms to be staggered with a backing of noise isolating material .
50.11
Tender item
Supply and installation of 200mm thick dry wall partition system which includes Two layers of
12.5mm thick Gypsum Plaster Board on either side of double stud partition system in combination
of 3mm thick Visco elastic polymer material .Dry wall partition are finished with acrylic based
emulsion paint of approved shade on one side and the plywood surface to be finished with 4mm
thick approved veneers and polishing and melamine finish etc. all as specified and shown on drawing
and as directed.
50.12
Construction (Frame work)
Framework consists two sets of 72mm Floor/ Head galvanised channels (placed next to each other
with gap off 6mm) having thickness 0.5mm, length 3600mm, equal flanges of 32mm and web of
50mm fixed to floor and ceiling with suitable fasteners at 300mm centres staggered.Noise and fire
rated caulking compound to be caulked along the perimeter of the partition frame Then 70mm Stud
channel having thickness 0.5 mm, length 3600mm, unequal flanges of 34/36 mm and web of 70 mm
should be placed into the floor/head channel positioned vertically at 610mm centres.Extra
reinforcement to be provided at openings (doors, windows, etc.,) all the steel studs used shall have
high quality galvanising and must be fully knurled. Ensure studs are firmly fixed and no undulations
176
before boarding.
Note – All services related work to be completed before fixing visco elastic polymer. Frequent
removing and repairing of visco elastic polymer layer reduces overall performance of the partition .
50.13
Cavity Filling
Both studs are to be filled with polyester fibre having density of 1000 GSM and thickness of 50 mm.
Polyester fibres is held in position by using galvanised cross wire braces or by using adhesive tapes.
50.14
Boarding
Both sets of the channels are first lined by using 3mm thick visco elastic polymer material having a
surface density of minimum 4.88kg/m2. Visco elastic layer used shall of UV resistant, resistance to
mold , water and heat, and shall be 100% recyclable. Visco Elastic polymer material used should have
noise isolating properties. Visco elastic polymer sheets are screw fixed to channels by using self
tapping pan head screws of 25mm at 450mm centres. Joints of visco elastic polymer sheets are lined
by using special jointing tapes.
Two layers of 12.5 mm thick gypsum plaster boards are than fixed on visco elastic layer, on either
side of double stud partition system by using 3.5mm x 35/50mm Corrosion resistant self-tapping zinc
plated steel screws with countersunk cross-head drywall screws. Gypsum plaster boards joints to be
staggered to each other. Joints are lined by using fiber tape and jointing compound recommended by
manufacturer.
50.15
Finishing
Dry wall partitions to be finished with acrylic emulsion paint of approved colour.
Note
•
•
•
•
•
50.16
Suitable metal corner profiles to be used for finishing external and internal corners of the
partition system .
Door and window frames are to suitably reinforced by using wooden members.
All partitions are upto full height .
All service openings to be sealed by using jointing compound .
Switch boxes between rooms to be staggered with a backing of noise isolating material.
Tender item
Supply and installation of 200mm thick dry wall partition system which includes Two layers of
12mm thick BWP FR Grade marine ply on either side of double stud partition system in
combination of 3mm thick Visco elastic polymer material .Dry wall partition finished with 4mm thick
wooden veneer approved shade and finishing both sides surfaces with French polish and melamine
finish complete as specified and as directed by Architect and Engineer-in-charge.
50.17
Construction (Frame work)
Framework consists two sets of 72mm Floor/ Head galvanised channels (placed next to each other
with gap off 3mm) having thickness 0.5mm, length 3600mm, equal flanges of 32mm and web of
50mm fixed to floor and ceiling with suitable fasteners at 300mm centres staggered. Noise and fire
rated caulking compound to be caulked along the perimeter of the partition frame . Then 70mm
Stud channel having thickness 0.5 mm, length 3600mm, unequal flanges of 34/36 mm and web of 70
177
mm should be placed into the floor/head channel positioned vertically at 610mm centres. Extra
reinforcement to be provided at openings (doors, windows, etc.,) all the steel studs used shall have
high quality galvanising and must be fully knurled. Ensure studs are firmly fixed and no undulations
before boarding.
Note – All services related work to be completed before fixing visco elastic polymer. Frequent
removing and repairing of visco elastic polymer layer reduces overall performance of the partition.
50.18
Cavity Filling
Both studs are to be filled with polyester fibre having density of 1000 GSM and thickness of 50 mm.
Polyester fibres is held in position by using galvanised cross wire braces or by using adhesive tapes
50.19
Boarding
Both sets of the channels are first lined by using one layer of 12mm thick FR Grade Marine ply
wood on either side of channel, then 3mm thick visco elastic polymer sheets having a surface
density of minimum 4.88kg/m2. UV resistant, resistance to mold , water and heat, and shall be 100%
recyclable and has noise isolating properties .Visco elastic polymer sheets are screw fixed to 12mm
thick FR Grade marine ply by using self tapping pan head screws of 25mm at 450mm centres. Joints
of visco elastic polymer sheets are lined by using special jointing tapes.
Again layer of 12 mm thick FR Grade marine ply boards are than fixed on visco elastic layer, on either
side of double stud partition system by using 3.5mm x 35/50mm Corrosion resistant self-tapping zinc
plated steel screws with countersunk cross-head screws. Marine ply boards joints to be staggered
to each other. Marine board used shall be of BWP grade, resistance to moisture and density of
minimum 800Kg/m3.
50.20
Finishing
Marine ply board partitions to be finished with 4mm thick veneer of approved shade and finished
with polish .
Note
•
•
•
•
50.21
Door and window frames are to suitably reinforced by using wooden members.
All partitions are upto full height
All service openings to be sealed by using jointing compound
Switch boxes between rooms to be staggered with a backing of noise isolating material.
Tender item
Supply and installation DGU fabricated by using 13.52mm thick laminated glass in combination of
9.56mm thick laminated glass with 24mm airspace.
50.22
Construction
DGU Units are fabricated by using 13.52 laminated glass in combination of 6mm toughened glass
+1.56 PVB +6mm toughened glass and other glass in combination 6mm toughened glass +1.56
+4mm toughened glass placed 24mm apart by using metal spacer . Assembly is then sealed by
removing air traps and create vacuum.
178
50.23
Framework
47mm thick DGU units are then placed in solid timber frame work fabricated by using 150x 150mm
thick wooden frame. Perimeter of wooden frames to be embaded with neoprene sheets of 3mm to
achieve desired air tightness of the assembly.
50.24
Framework
47mm thick DGU units are then placed in solid timber frame work fabricated by using 150x 150mm
thick wooden frame. Perimeter of wooden frames to be embedded with neoprene sheets of 3mm to
achieve desired air tightness of the assembly.
50.25
Finishing
All joints between wooden frame & masonry are to be lined with noise and fire rated caulking
compound.
51.0
Panelling :
51.1
Tender item
Supply and Installation of GFR grade micro perforated (3 x 3mm square) gypsum plaster board of size
1200x 2400x 12.5mm thick back lined with acoustical fleece. Gypsum boards used shall have tapered
edge along the length having base density of minimum 800Kgs/m3, and lined with paintable glass
fabrics.
51.2
Construction Frame work
Frame work consists of Galvanised Cross channel(CC25) having thickness 0.5mm, length 3600mm,
knurled web 80mm, depth of 25mm and equal flanges 10.5mm is fastened to the drywall at 450mm
centre perpendicular to Micro perforated gypsum plaster board .
51.3
Cavity Filling
Ceiling frame work shall be backlined by using polyester fiber rolls of size 600mm width having a
density of 1000 GSM and 25mm thick.
51.4
Boarding
1200x 2400x 12.5 mm glass fiber reinforced gypsum plaster board, having long edges tapered is than
screw fixed to frame work by using 25mm dry wall screws every 300mm centres. Ensure board is in
plumb level and fix glass woven fabrics to the gypsum ceiling. Joints of the plaster boards to be
finished with fiber tape and jointing compound as per manufacturers recommendation. Screw heads
to be covered with compound and sand the surface.
Note : (use of glass fabrics)
• Use products with same serial number of glass fabrics on adjacent surfaces.
179
• Allow 10-12hrs to dry it is advised to paint immediately after adhering.
• Follow marking backside before gluing wall paneling.
Gypsum, Brand : Danogips, Model Micro Perforated, Glass Fabric : Brand Systex.
52.5
Tender item
Supply and installation of non combustible magnesite bonded wood wool board on 50mm thick
glavansied channels and finished with proprietary traditional fabric at site.Wood wool boards are
fixed directly on masonry brick wall lined by using visco elastic polymer material of 6mm thick .
Fixing of Visco elastic polymer layer along the perimeter of assembly hall Supply and installation of 3
mm thick visco elastic polymer sheets having a surface density of minimum 4.88kg/m2. UV resistant,
resistance to mold , water and heat, and shall be 100% recyclable and has noise isolating properties.
Visco elastic polymer sheets are screw fixed to wall by using adhesive recommended by
manufacturer ,Joints of visco elastic polymer sheets are lined by using special jointing tapes.
52.6
Construction of Frame work
Frame work consists of 25mm thick GI wall channels with fully knurled surface of 0.55mm thick
80mm width, having two equal flanges of 26mm is anchored to wooden studs of 25mm thick x 100
wide. Wooden studs of 25mm thick is first grouted to wall at 600mm centres, 25mm thick channels
are than fixed to wooden studs to achieve overall airgap of 50mm from the wall.To achieve
sturdiness of the system channels are to be fixed perpendicular to wood wool boards.
52.7
Cavity Filling
Resultant air gap between wall and channel to be lined by using polyester fiber rolls of size 600mm
width having a density of 1000 GSM and 50mm thick, held in position by using adhesive or G.I
binding wires.
52.8
Boarding
Non combustible magnesite bonded square edge wood wool board having density of minimum 450
Kg/m3 of size 1200x 600x 25mm thick manufactured by using superfine fibres having width of 1mm
and meeting fire requirements as per EN 13501-1 A2,S1 d0 is than fixed on to metal channels by
using rust protected metal fasteners of size 4.5mm Ø x 50mm length . Each panel should receive
minimum 6nos fasteners. Wood wool boards to be butt jointed and ensure boards are in plumb level
to adhere proprietary fabric above wood wool board.
Note
• Screw head to be countersunk
• Adhesive used shall be of spray grade to adhere proprietary Fabric
• Cost of fabric not taken. Considered seperately.
Brand : Magnasite Bonded Woodwool board : Heradesign Super Fine A2 , Visco elastic polymer :
coustiblok
53.0
False ceiling :
180
53.1
Tender item
Supply and Installation of GFR grade micro perforated (3 x 3mm square) gypsum plaster board of size
1200x 2400x 12.5mm thick back lined with acoustical fleece. Gypsum boards used shall have tapered
edge along the length having base density of minimum 800Kgs/m3, and lined with paintable glass
fabrics.
53.2
Construction Frame work
Frame work consists of Galvanised Wall channel 25mm width having thickness 0.5mm, length
3600mm, unequal flanges of 20 & 30mm and web of 25mm should be fixed along the perimeters of
the wall (Brick/Block/partition ) with nylon sleeves and suitable fasteners at every 300mm centers.
Then suspend Main channels (MC45) having thickness 0.9mm, length 3600mm, equal flanges of
15mm and web 45mm from the soffit at every 900mm centers with Suspender angle25mm having
thickness 0.45mm, unequal flanges of 25 & 10mm. GI Cross channel(CC25) having thickness 0.5mm,
length 3600mm, knurled web 80mm, depth of 25mm and equal flanges 10.5mm is fastened to the
Main channel in the direction perpendicular to the Main Channel at every 450mm centers. All metal
to metal screws must be self drilling wafer thin head 4.2mmx 13mm length.
53.3
Cavity Filling
Ceiling frame work shall be backlined by using polyester fiber rolls of size 600mm width having a
density of 1000 GSM and 50mm thick.
53.4
Boarding
1200x 2400x 12.5 mm glass fiber reinforced gypsum plaster board, having long edges tapered is than
screw fixed to frame work by using 25mm dry wall screws every 300mm centers. Ensure board is in
plumb level and fix glass woven fabrics to the gypsum ceiling. Joints of the plaster boards to be
finished with fiber tape and jointing compound as per manufacturers recommendation. Screw heads
to be covered with compound and sand the surface.
Note
• Use products with same serial number on adjacent surfaces.
• Allow 10-12hrs to dry it is advised to paint immediately after adhering.
• Follow marking backside before gluing.
54.
Door Shutter :
Tender item
Acoustical Door Seals (Single shutter with door closures)
Perimeter seals
181
Supply and installation of medium duty acoustic door seals manufactured by using silver anodised
aluminium with grey silicone rubber gasket Tested in accordance with BS EN ISO 10140-2: 2010 fixed
to wooden doors on predrilled holes . Assembly shall also consist of PVC cover strips to conceal
fixings .Door set pack should consists of 3nos seals (1no for door top &other for 2 sides ) Door seal
assembly shall have valid test certificate and shall have STC of minimum 33-35 .
Drop down seals
Supply and installation of medium duty automatic concealed door bottom seal manufactured by
using silver anodised aluminium with grey silicone rubber gasket Tested in accordance with AS
1428/1 having polypropylene fins incorporated within the gasket housing to provide additional
sealing properties.
Tested for reliability, completing over 1,000,000 open and close cycles. fixed to bottom wooden
doors by using hardware's supplied with seals Door seal assembly shall have valid test certificate and
shall have STC of minimum 33-35 . seal is mortised into a 15mm x 35mm groove in the door bottom
and supported by end plates,(refer seal manufacturer guidelines for groove cutting).
55.
Tender item
Acoustical Door Seals (Double shutter with door closers)
Perimeter seals
Supply and installation of medium duty acoustic door seals manufactured by using silver anodised
aluminium ( powder coated to match colour of door) with Co-extruded elastomeric with flexible
curved fins Tested in accordance with BS EN ISO 10140-2: 2010 fixed to wooden doors on predrilled
holes . Door seal assembly shall have valid test certificate and shall have STC of minimum 33-35 .
Drop down seals
Supply and installation of medium duty automatic concealed door bottom seal manufactured by
using silver anodised aluminium with grey silicone rubber gasket Tested in accordance with AS
1428/1 having polypropylene fins incorporated within the gasket housing to provide additional
sealing properties.
Tested for reliability, completing over 1,000,000 open and close cycles. fixed to bottom wooden
doors by using hardware's supplied with seals Door seal assembly shall have valid test certificate and
shall have STC of minimum 33-35 . seal is mortised into a 15mm x 35mm groove in the door bottom
and supported by end plates, (refer seal manufacturer guidelines for groove cutting).
182
MATERIALS OF FOLLOWING MANUFACTURERS OR BRAND ARE TO BE USED IN THE WORK. TENDERER MUST
QUOTE THEIR RATES ACCORDINGLY
Commercial ply
:
Phenol Formaldehyde resin bonded ply of Century
Plywood/Green Ply
3.5mm / 4mm thick teak veneers
:
Green ply/Century
18mm / 19mm thick block board
:
Phenol Formaldehyde resin bonded Boards/
Kitply/Green ply/Century
35mm / 38mm thick flush door shutter
:
Phenol Formaldehyde resin bonded Solid core
doors of /Green ply/ Century ply
High Compressed Laminate Board
:
Merino-Besco or similar equivalent.
Particle Board/
:
Green ply wood/ Century ply wood
MDF Boards- Green ply.
Mat N.C. Lacquer (Nitro-Cellulosse)
:
I.C.I.
Melamine Polish
:
I.C.I./Asian Paints/ICCI Paints
Texture Paint.
:
Heritage / Specturm/Asian/Berger.
Synthetic Enamel Paint.
:
Berger paint/ ICI/ Asian Paints.
Plaster of paris
:
Materials are to be of approved quality (Druk or
similar equivalent).
Putty
:
Birla / JK/ Berger.
Patch /Spider fittings
:
Dormer/Geze Hafele/ Hettick
Frosted film
:
Garware or equivalent.
Adhesive (for timber work).
:
Pidilite / Bal Endura.
183
Glazed Tiles /Ceramic /Vitrified tiles.
:
Kajaria / Somany / Johnson./NIITCO
Locks with Security latch
:
Godrej / Dorma / Hardwyn / Hafele/Geze.
Door Closer
:
Rolex / Dorma /Hardwyn/ Hafele/Geze/Godrej
Door fittings
:
Hafele / Hettic./Geze /Godrej.
Brass hinges / handles
:
Best quality as approved by Interior Designer,
Hafele / Hettic or similar equivalent/Godrej..
Stainless steel fasteners
:
Hillti / Hettic.
Glass / Mirror
:
Modifloat/Saint Gobain, Wherever required
etching/ Bevelling should be done with machine
finish and edge polished.
Stained glass
:
Saint Gobain,, Pilkingson.
Floor spring
:
Garnish / Rolex / Dorma/Hafele./Geze.
Marble (Indian & Italian)
:
Best quality to be approved by the Engineer-incharge / Interior Designer.
Granite (Indian & Imported)
:
Krishna Transnational Marbles
(Bangalore / Kolkata), IES make
Pvt.
Ltd.
Radha Rani Marbles or Marudhar Marbles Kolkata.
Bamboo Composite product
:
Emmbee Forest Products Private Limited / Similar
approved Agency.
Roller Blind/ Duette Blind/ Vertical Blind/
Venetian blind.
:
Hunter Douglas / Mac Décor Ltd./ Packman /
Stellar.
Sand stone for cladding
:
Krishna Transnational Marbles Pvt. Ltd. (Bangalore
/ Kolkata), Radha Rani Marbles (Kolkata) and
Marudhar Marbles & Granite, Kolkata
Cane works
:
Assam Cane Industries Ltd. or other local best
184
quality cane products.
Furniture (Branded)
:
Merryfare/Monarch Ergonomics India Ltd.
Secundrabad/ Amber Design Tech Pvt. Ltd.
Mumbai/ Featherlite / Wipro Furniture system.
Sofas - Giani’s / Natuzl/
specification.
Wooden Furniture (Customised)
:
Wooden flooring
:
Ceiling / Acoustic Ceiling system
:
Stainless steel sections and architectural products. :
Stainless steel rope for bracer assembly with
anchorage system.
:
Customised as per
Wooden Furniture to be crafted with best quality
cabinet makers with the specified timber species
and best furniture makers to produce
International Standard Furniture.
Square foot/ Ego Wooden Floor Mumbai/
Monarch Ergonomies Bangalore/ Armstrong
Flooring System.
Armstrong Ceiling System /LLyod Insulation and
ceiling system./Anutone Ceiling system
M/s. Jindal Architectural Ltd.,(arc)
Aesthetic.
M/s. Jindal Architectural Ltd.,
M/s. Usha Martins, Kolkata.
M/s. Hemkul, Mumbai
185
Project
Assembly
:
Assam Legislative
System
:
Clock System
Reference No :
A-1& A-3
Item Description PoE, 12" Round, SAP Series, Metal Case - 1 Side& Monitoring
Software
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering
any product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a
specific item is to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that
they meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate
what their product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification
The unit shall be a professional PoE, 12" Round, SAP Series, Metal Case - 1
Side& Monitoring So
.
have the minimum specification as shown below:
Detail Specification:A-1:
Time Base:
50/60 Hz
Voltage Input:
48 VDC (PoE
model) Average Current
70mA @ 48 VDC PoE
Consumption:
12 hour standard (24 hour dials
available) Display:
Standard black or white
(custom color available) Color:
12.81” (32.54
cm) diameter, 1.2” (3.05 cm) depth
Clock Siz.e:
16.81” (42.7 cm) diameter, 1.6” (4.06 cm) depth
Dial:
Durable polystyrene material
Case:
Shallow profile, smooth surface metal case
Crystal:
(optional ABS case available)
Hand tolerance:
Shatter-proof, side molded polycarbonate crystal
Hour and minute hand:
+/1/4 minute Second hand:
+/- 1/2 minute Temperature
range:
0°C - 45°C
Operating:
-15°
186
- 75°C
Shelf:
Mounting Bracket
.
Dimensions: (LxWxD)
12” (30.48 cm) - 12.56” x 3” x .04” (31.9 cm x
7.62 cm x .10 cm)
16” (40.64 cm) - 16.38” x 3
A3 :IP Monitoring Software
.
Acceptable :
Saplingor Approved Equivalents
187
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Clock System
A-2
Double Mount Clock, 12” Housing , Black
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet or
exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product offers
as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification
The unit shall be a professional Double Mount Clock, 12” Housing, Black and shall have the minimum
specification as shown below:
Detail Specification:
 Double Mount Clock
 4” Pole Length
 Black 12” Housing
Battery type/size: 1.5 volts /
“AA” Quartz
frequency:
32.768 KHz
Operating range: 1.2 - 1.7 Volts
Current
consumption:
0.110 mA
Accuracy:
+/- 0.8 sec./day @ 1.5 V
Temperature
range:
Operating:
-20°C - 60° C
Storage:
-20°C - 70° C
Display:
Color:
Clock Size:
Case:
Crystal:
Movemen
t
dimensions:
(LxWxD)
12 or 24 hour dials available
Standard black or white (custom colors available)
12.81” (32.54 cm) diameter, 1.2” (3.05 cm) depth
16.81” (42.7 cm) diameter, 1.6” (4.06 cm) depth
Shallow profile, smooth surface metal case (optional ABS plastic
cases available)
Shatterproof, side molded polycarbonate crystal (optional
polystyrene plastic crystals available)
2.286” x 2.174” x 0.648” (5.81 cm x 5.52 cm x 1.65 cm)
12” (30.48 cm) Clock - 4 lbs. (1.81kg)
188
Shipping weight:
Acceptable:
16” (40.64 cm) Clock - 6 lbs. (2.72kg)
Sapling or Approved Equivalents
189
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Clock System
A-4&A-6
Master Clock, with NTP Server Upgrade & Web Interface, Rack Mount, no
GPS&Server Software Upgrade & Web interface
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their
product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification
The unit shall be a professional Master Clock, with NTP Server Upgrade & Web Interface, Rack
Mount, and no GPS Server Software Upgrade & Web interfaceand shall have the minimum
specification as shown below :
Detail Specification:A-4
Time base:
Voltage input:
Current Consumption:
Power Consumption:
Display:
Color:
Housing
Temperature range
Operating:
Shelf:
Calendar:
Inputs:
Crystal
85 VAC - 264 VAC, 50/60 Hz
0.2A at 120V and 0.1A at 230V
20 Watts
.56” (1.42 cm) LED display
Black
Smooth surface metal case
0°C - 45°C
-15° - 70°C
Built-in calendar with leap years
GPS (optional), SNTP, Wireless repeater,
RS485, 58 minute correction, 59
Standby time keeping:
minute correction, National Time and
Memory:
Rauland, Dukane digital
Outputs:
Ten (10) years Optional
outputs:
Non-volatile EEPROM Housing
dimensions
RS485 and 2 clock circuits
(LxWxD):
Sapling Wireless Communication (with
Mounting:
transmitter option)
Weight:
11” x 17.5” x 1.75” (27.94 cm x 44.45
A-6Server Software Upgrade & Web interface
Acceptable:
Saplingor Approved Equivalents
190
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Zones
Clock System
A-5
4 Zones, Surface Mount Field Programmable Master Clock with GPS and 4
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their
product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification
The unit shall be a professional 4 Zones, Surface Mount Field Programmable Master Clock with
GPS and 4 Zoneand shall have the minimum specification as shown below :
Detail Specification:
Operating Temperature (Maximum) : 45 C
Operating Temperature (Maximum) : 113 F
Operating Temperature (Minimum) : 0 C
Operating Temperature (Minimum) : 32 F
Maximum Frequency Response (Bandwidth) : 928000 kHz
Maximum Frequency Response (Bandwidth) : 928000000 Hz
Minimum Frequency Response (Bandwidth) : 915000 kHz
Minimum Frequency Response (Bandwidth) : 915000000 Hz
AC Voltage (Maximum) : 240 Volts
AC Voltage (Minimum) : 100 Volts
Depth : 11 in
Depth : 279.40 mm
Height : 1.75 in
Height : 44.45 mm
Width : 17.50 in
Width : 444.50 mm
Product Weight : 2.95 kg
Product Weight : 6.50 lbs
Color : Black
Regulatory Compliance : FCC, CE, UL
Digit Height : 0.56 in



two line LCD display and LED display with 2X8 rubber keypad
Up to 800 events can be programmed
Automatic bi-annual daylight savings time
191



Two pre-programmed relays for correction of synchronous systems
Optional GPS and/or transmitter option for increase system flexibility
Optional web interface for complete control of the master clock from any computer via
LAN connection or through a crossover cable

Available in rack mount or wall mount
192
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Display
Reference No:
A-1
Item Description: 40" LED Display with built in DS player, HDMI, DVI-D & Display Port
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their
product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
This unit shall be a 40" LED Display built in DS player, HDMI, DVI-D & Display Portand shall
have the minimum specification as shown below…
Detail Specification:
Display
Screen Size
Panel Technology
Resolution
Brightness
Contrast Ratio
Viewing Angle
(Horizontal/Vertical
Orientation
Response Time (G-to-G)
Connectivity
Input
Output
External Control
External Sensor
Power
Power Supply
Power Consumption
(Typical/Max)
Power Consumption
(Standby)
Internal Media Player
40"
60Hz Slim D-LED BLU
1920x1080 (16:9)
450 nits
208.3340278
178° / 178°
Landscape / Portrait
8ms
Video: VGA (D-Sub 15 Pin), DVI-D, Display Port
1.2, Component/Composite, HDMI,
Audio: Stereo Mini Jack
Video: Display Port 1.2 (Loop-Out), Audio:
Stereo Mini Jack
RS232C (In/Out) thru Stereo Jack, RJ45
IR, Ambient Light
AC 100 - 240 V~ (+/- 10 %), 50/60 Hz
86W/121w
< 0.5W
Cortex-A9 1GHz Quad Core, 1.5GB DDR3, 4GB
FDM, USB 2.0, Linux OS
193
Project:
Assembly
System:
Display
Reference No:
2
Item Description:
Component
Assam Legislative
A55" LED Display with
built in DS player, HDMI &
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation
General Specification :
The unit shall be a 55" LED Display with built in DS player, HDMI & Componentand shall have
the minimum specification as shown below…
Screen Size
139.7cm (55)
Panel Type
120Hz D-LED BLU
Resolution
1920 x 1080 (16:9) Pixel
Pitch (HxV)
0.21 (H) x 0.63 (V Active
Display Size (HxV)
1,209.6 (H) x 680.4 (V) Contrast
Ratio
5,000:1
Viewing Angle (H/V)
178:178
Response Time
8ms
Display Color
10 bit Dithering - 1.07 Billion
Color Gamut
0.72
H-Scanning Frequency
30 ~ 81kHz
Maximum Pixel Frequency
148.5MHz
V-Scanning Frequency
48 ~ 75Hz
Brightness
450nit
RGB In
Analog D-SUB, DVI-D, Display Port 1.2
Video In
HDMI1, Component (CVBS Common)
Audio In
Stereo Jack
RGB Out
DP1.2 (Loop-out)
Audio Out
Stereo Jack
Stand Type
Acceptable:
Foot Stand (Optional)
Samsung ,LG,Panasonic or Approved
Equivalent
194
Project:
System:
Reference No :
Item
Description:
Assam Legislative Assembly
Display
A-3
46" Interactive Display with 2 HDMI, USB Interface along with Pedestal
Stand
195
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering
any product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific
item is to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that
they meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate
what their product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification
:
This unit shall be a 46" Interactive Display with 2 HDMI, USB Interface along with
Pedestal
Standand shall have the minimum specification as shown
below :
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what
their product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
Detail Specification
: Display
H-Scanning Frequency
Maximum
Pixel
148.5MHz
V-Scanning Frequency
Panel
Diagonal Size
Type
46''
S-PVA ( B-DID)
Resolution
Pixel Pitch(mm)
Active Display Area
Brightness
1920 x 1080 (16:9)
0.53025 (H) x 0.53025 (V)
1,018.08 (H) x 572.67 (V)
450cd/m²
Contrast
Ratio
6,000:1
Viewing
Angle
(Horizontal/Vertical)
178° Response Time (G-to-G)
30kHz ~ 81kHz
Frequency
56Hz ~ 85Hz
(Dynamic)
178° /
8ms
Display Colour
Colour Gamut
8 bit - 16.7M
0.72
Contrast Ratio
Connectivity
Input RGB
3,000:1
Analog D-SUB, DVI-D, Display Port Video
CVBS, HDMI1, HDMI2, Component (D-sub 15pin) Audio
196
Output Audio
External Control
RCA (L / R) , Stereo mini Jack
Stereo mini Jack
Power
Out
5V (for SBB)
RJ45, RS232C (in / out) , USB B type (touch screen)
197
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Display
Reference No:
A-5& A-6
Item Description: HDMI Cable 3.6& 0.9 Meters
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their
product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
The unit shall be a HDMI Cable 3.6 & 0.9 Meter sand shall have the min. spec as shown below
Detail Specification:
A-5:HDMI Cable 3.6 Meters
A-6: HDMI Cable 0.9 Meters
TYPE
High Speed and Standard Speed HDMI cables
480i, 480p, 720p, 1080i,
1080p. CONDUCTOR AWG
28 AWG (7/0.127)
SHIELD
Dual shield against EMI/RFI interference
(a) Al− Mylar
(b) Tinned Copper
CABLE OD (MM)
MOLDED
CONNECTORS
GOLD PLATED
CONNECTORS:
HDCP COMPLIANT:
Acceptable:
7.3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Extron, Kramer or Approved Equivalent
198
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Installation Equipment
C-1
Wall / ceiling mount bracket for the display
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their
product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
Detail Specifications :
The Wall/Ceiling Bracket for Display shall be made from mild steel or Stainless steel, can be custom
made based on submitted drawings and shall be of a laser etched, matte black powder coat finish.
Please note, all fixings shall be invisible from the front and all cable management shall be
incorporated in the design of the unit.
All Bracket designs are to be approved by the AV consultant before fabrication, sample of
finish and detailed
Drawings are to be provided.
199
Project:
Assembly
System:
Equipment
Reference No:
2
Item Description:
Power
Assam Legislative
Installation
C42U Closed rack or to Suit,/w Vent & Blank Panels, Shelves,
Distributor 3 No’s
Plus ID panel as Required.
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their
product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
Detail Specifications :
Equipment racks shall be constructed of 16 gauge (minimum) cold rolled steel and shall have rear
doors andsquare front vertical corners. Rack dimensions shall not exceed 22 ½” wide by 22” deep by
42 U high. Finishshall be as approved by the AV Consultant/Employer. The front door shall be a clear
lockable (minimum5mm thick) perspex panel with minimum dimension opening at strategic
location to enable the operator to bypass faulty equipment as necessary.
Each rack shall be equipped with permanently mounted AC power 3 conductor grounded strip
line rated for10amps with outlets on 6” centers, extending the height of the rack and with
interior incandescent illuminationconnected thereto, for ease in servicing and connecting the
installed components. Any unused panelmounting space in the racks or enclosure shall be filled in
with blank or ventilating panels. Racks andenclosures shall mount standard 19” wide panels and
shelves.
If a tenderer wishes to offer any other brand then fully specifications will be
required.
Proprietary Nonproprietary manufactured units are considered.
200
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
IPTV & Digital Signage Management System
B-1
Chassis with 9 slots for the Encoders & Processor Modules
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their
product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification
The unit shall be a professional Chassis with 9 slots for the Encoders & Processor Modulesand
shall have the minimum specification as shown below:
Detail specification
Power Input
Enclosure Power
Dissipation
100 – 240 VAC maximum 2.2 – 1A
47 - 63 Hz
200 watts via IEC Mains connector
130 watts (typical)
200 watts (maximum)
External LNB power drain
(from 774 DVB-S2
modules)
3A total
450mA per 774 DVB-S2 module
Any combination of up to 9 Processor Modules can be fitted in a single rack
Acceptable:
Media Star, AMX or Approved Equivalents
201
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
IPTV & Digital Signage Management System
B-2& B-3
MPEG 2–H264 Encoder, Single Channel HDMI Input, LAN port , SD Output
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering
any product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific
item is to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what
their product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification
The unit shall be a professional MPEG 2–H264 Encoder, Single Channel HDMI Input, LAN port,
SD
output, and specification as shown below:
Detail Specification:
B-2 - MPEG 2–H264 Encoder, Single Channel HDMI Input, 720p output
System Inputs
Video Inputs
• HDMI 1.3 Digital - Resolutions: All YPbPr/RGB
(SoG) and VGA resolutions listed below
• YPbPr/RGB (SoG), via phono connectors Resolutions 480i, 576i, 480p, 576p, 720p50,
720p60, 1080i50, 1080i60,1080p25, 1080p30,
1080p50, 1080p60
• VGA, via female HD-15 connector - Resolutions:
[email protected], [email protected], [email protected],
[email protected], [email protected], [email protected],
[email protected], [email protected], [email protected],
[email protected], [email protected],
[email protected](RB)
• S-Video: via 2 x phono connector
• CVBS: via 1 x phono connector, PAL/NTSC
Audio Inputs
• HDMI socket, PCM digital stereo audio
Encoding & Stream
Protocols
Video Encoding
• 3.5mm jack socket, analogue stereo audio, 2.2V
pk-pk into 10k Ohms
• MPEG 4-10/H.264 [email protected], CBR/VBR encoding,
supported bit rates 1.5 Mbps to 12 Mbps
• MPEG-2 [email protected] HL, CBR/VBR encoding, supported
bit rates 1.5 Mbps to 15 Mbps
202
Detail Specification:
Audio Encoding
• MPEG-1 Layer 2- 32, 44.1, 48 KHz sampling, 64 448 Kbps Stereo
• AAC LC encoding - 16, 32, 44.1, 48, 88.2, 96 KHz
sampling, 40 - 576 Kbps Stereo
203
Output Streams:
Video Resolutions
• Multicast/Unicast UDP MPEG2-TS
• Multicast RTP video and audio streams (for use
with Quicktime via onboard RTSP server)
• HLS - HTTP Live Streaming
• Model 778-S-SD: 480i, 576i
• Model 778-S-720p: 480i, 576i, 720p50, 720p60
• Model 778-S-HD: 480i, 576i, 720p50, 720p60,
1080i50, 1080i60, 1080p25, 1080p30
• Model 778-S-HLS: All UDP stream resolutions as
Model 778-S-HD (shown above) plus HLS only
resolutions: [email protected], [email protected],
[email protected], [email protected], [email protected],
[email protected]
Network & Interfaces
LAN
• RJ45 802.3 10/100/1000 Base-T Auto MDIX
• Static or DHCP IP Address
• DSCP stream tagging for QoS
Network Protocols
• UDP, TCP, ARP, DHCP, ICMP, IGMP V2, HTTP, Telnet,
SNMP, Syslog, SAP/SDP, SMTP, DSCP, HLS
USB Comms
• USB 2.0, type A: Host port for software upgrades
• USB 1.1, type B: Serial Comms for external
configuration and/or control
RS232 Port
• Rx, Tx, CTS, RTS up to 115,200 Baud Configured for
SIPI external configuration/control or IP to RS232
bidirectional pass through for external
device control
• 2 separate outputs supporting Sky, Sky+, SkyHD
IR formats with web page or IP command
remote activation.
• Remote IP command generates any IR remote
control keypress
• RS232, USB 1.1 serial interface
• Telnet for third part connectivity via TCP
control such as touch panel interfaces
Infra-Red Blasters
Control Interface
B-3 - MPEG 2–H264 Encoder, Single Channel HDMI Input, 720p output
Acceptable:
Media Star, AMX or Approved Equivalents
204
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
IPTV & Digital Signage Management System
B-4& B-5
Digital Media Decoder & IPTV Receiver with LAN Port and HDMI Output, Display
Controller, 8GB Memory& Remote Control for the Decoder
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet or
exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product offers
as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification
The unit shall be a professional Digital Media Decoder & IPTV Receiver with LAN Port and HDMI Output,
Display
Controller, 8GB Memory& Remote control for the decoder specification as shown below:
Detail Specification:
B4: Digital Media Decoder
Communications and Control
Network
• Ethernet 10/100 Base T. RJ-45
modular jack with integrated
LEDs
Mode of Operation
• Standalone or in
conjunction with the
MediaStar Evolution
Administration Software.
IP Setup and Control
• Configuration via OnBoard Browser/ Remote
status monitoring
information.
• IP/RS232 control protocol to operate
with 3rd party Touch
Panel Controllers.
Video Input
Live Network Streams
• Multicast/Unicast UDP based AV
streams.
• H.264 and MPEG-2
video/audio contained in
an MP1E9
G-02 TS.
205
(480i, 480p, 576i, 576p, 720p, 1080i,
1080p60 formats).
206
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
IPTV & Digital Signage Management System
B-6
Wired IR Sensor for above Decoder for digital signage system
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet or
exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product offers
as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
This unit shall be a Wired IR Sensor for above Decoder for digital signage systemnand shall have the
minimum specification as shown below…
Detail Specification:
IR Sensor Module fitted with 3.5mm Jack for connection to Mediastar
Pro Micro Set topUnit to allow the small IR sensor to be located in a
convenient location and the larger receiver unit housed discreetly
behind a screen.
Acceptable:
Media star , AMX or Approved Equivalent
207
Project:
Assembly
System:
System
Reference No:
5
Item Description:
Assam Legislative
IPTV & Digital Signage Management
B-4& BDigital Media Decoder & IPTV Receiver with LAN Port and HDMI
Output, Display Controller, 8GB Memory& Remote Control for the
Decoder
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their
product offers as an alternative
General Specification
The unit shall be a professional Digital Media Decoder & IPTV Receiver with LAN Port and
HDMI Output, Display Controller, 8GB Memory& Remote control for the decoder
specification as shown below :Detail Specification :
B4 : Digital Media Decoder
Communications and
Control
Network
Mode of Operation
IP Setup and Control
• Ethernet 10/100 Base T. RJ-45 modular
jack with integrated LEDs
• Standalone or in conjunction with the
MediaStar Evolution Administration
Software.
• Configuration via On-Board Browser/
Remote status monitoring
information.
• IP/RS232 control protocol to operate
with 3rd party Touch
Panel Controllers.
Video Input
Live Network Streams
• Multicast/Unicast UDP based AV
streams.
• H.264 and MPEG-2 video/audio
contained in an MPEG-2 TS.
208
(480i, 480p, 576i, 576p, 720p, 1080i,
1080p60 formats).
• Locally Stored Files (on-board memory
of 4GB to 128 GB by option)
Detail Specification:
Digital Terrestrial and Satellite TV
• DVB-T2 and DVB-S2 compliant
209
Audio
Audio Decoding
• MPEG-1/2 Audio Layers I, II
• MPEG-2/4
AAC LC
IR Control
• Channel, volume and setup control via
MediaStar Remote
Control Unit.
• Control through on-board IR
receiver or using an IR extender
RS232
• Serial port, up to 115200
baud for screen
on/standby/input control.
Software Updates
• Latest software can
be loaded either through an
IP connection to an HTTP
server or by inserting a
USB key
Video Output
HDMI Digital
• SD 480i, 480p, 576i, 576p
• HD 720p (60fps), 1080i
(50/60) Phono Analogue
(YPbPr)
• HD 720p(60fps), 1080i
(50/60)
• SD CVBS - NTSC,
PAL
Audio Out - Connectors
• HDMI - Digital Stereo Audio
• 3.5mm Jack - Analogue
Stereo Audio
B5: Remote Control for the above decoder
Acceptable:
Media Star, AMX or Approved Equivalents
210
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
IPTV & Digital Signage Management System
B-6
Wired IR Sensor for above Decoder for digital signage system
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet or
exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product offers
as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
This unit shall be a Wired IR Sensor for above Decoder for digital signage systemnand shall have the
minimum specification as shown below…
Detail Specification:
IR Sensor Module fitted with 3.5mm Jack for connection to Mediastar
Pro Micro Set topUnit to allow the small IR sensor to be located in a
convenient location and the larger receiver unit housed discreetly
behind a screen.
Acceptable:
Media star , AMX or Approved Equivalent
211
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
IPTV & Digital Signage Management System
B-7
1U Rack mount Server with pre-installed media Manager 200 Media Player License
& “Live” streaming server Software for digital signage
system
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet or
exceed each
General Specification
The unit shall be a professional 1U Rack mount Server with pre-installed media Manager 200 Media
Player License
& “Live” streaming server Softwarefor digital signage system& shall have minimum specification as
shown below:
Detail Specification:
Rack Mount Server
- Intel Core i3processor - (3.4Ghz, 3M Cache, No Turbo, 2C, 54W).
- Motherboard
- Chassis with up to 2 Cabled Hard Drives (2.5" or 3.5").
- Riser with Single x16 Gen3 PCIe Slot.
- Electronic System Documentation and Open Manage DVD Kit
- Bezel
-1600 Mhz UDIMMs.
- 4GB UDIMM, 1600 MT/s, Low Volt, Single Rank, x4 Data Width.
- 256GB SSD.
- No Controller.
- Cable for SATA Optical Drive.
- SATA 8X DVD +/- RW Drive.
- C13 to C14, PDU Style, 10 AMP, 2m Power Cord.
- SATA Cable for 2.5/3.5 HDD, R220.
- 1U/2U Static rails for 2-Post and 4-Post Racks.
- Baseboard Management Controller (12G).
Preinstalled Management software, delivering a fully integrated content management system from
a single interface which schedules all media sources and monitors every aspect of the distribution
network, from the head-end to multiple screen locations.
With a GUI interface, enriched functionality and improved ease of use.Central control function,
users can also remotely control the system via an iPhone, iPad or smartphone, and estate floor
plans will be integral to the application aiding with the location of units, screens and DMD.
Acceptable:
Media Star, AMX or Approved Equivalents
212
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
IPTV & Digital Signage Management System
B-8
1U Rackmount Server with pre-installed iVod Server Software with 60 Mbps
Streaming Bandwidth , for digital signage system
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet or
exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product offers
as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification
The unit shall be a professional 1U Rackmount Server with pre-installed iVod Server Software with 60
Mbps
Streaming Bandwidth, for digital signage system& shall have minimum specification as shown below:
Detail Specification:
iVod server requirements
Debian or Redhat Linux distribution 32/64 bit, based on libc6
Central iVod Server Hardware Requirements
60 or 200Mbit/sec streaming: 2-core processor, 2GB RAM, single
SATA drive (or 2 in RAID-1 for redundancy)
500Mbit/sec streaming: 4-core processor, 4GB RAM, 4 * SATA
drive in RAID-5 or RAID-0+1
Off-air SD content (6Mbps MPEG2) typically requires storage of
45MB/s = 2.7GB/hr
High Quality HD content (10 Mbps H264) typically requires
storage of 75 MB/minute = 4.5GB/hr
iVod operation with a central video server or ‘distributed iVod’ content model
Easy viewing of iVod server content on PCs and portable iOS and
Android devices using the Media Portal web page
Media Manager timed playlists and user selection lists,
containing iVod file content
Full play/pause/skip iVod file viewing with on-screen controls
Acceptable:
Media Star, AMX or Approved Equivalents
213
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item
Description:
IPTV & Digital Signage Management System
B-10
Software license for 30 displays - LOT , for digital signage system
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet or
exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product offers
as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification
The unit shall be a professional Software license for 30 displays - LOT, for digital signage systemand
shall have the minimum specification as shown below:
Detail Specification:
Client OS/ browser
requirements
Acceptable:
iOS V4 onwards, Safari browsers
Android V4.2 Jellybean onwards, Chrome and
Firefox V27 browsers
Windows XP onwards, Internet Explorer 8 and
above
Media Star, AMX or Approved Equivalents
214
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
IPTV & Digital Signage Management System
B-10
Software license for 30 displays - LOT , for digital signage system
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet or
exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product offers
as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification
The unit shall be a professional Software license for 30 displays - LOT, for digital signage system and
shall have the minimum specification as shown below :
Detail Specification:
 Software license for 30 displays-LOT, for digital signage System
Acceptable:
Samsung ,Sony or Approved Equivalent
215
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
IPTV & Digital Signage Management System
B-11
48Port POE Switch with mini GBIC
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet or
exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product offers
as
General Specification
The unit shall be a professional 48Port POE Switch with mini GBIC specification as shown below:
Detail
Specification:
External I/O ports
Rack mounting
Memory and Processor
Latency
Address Table size
routing/switching
capacity
Throughput
Management Features
48 10/100 ports (IEEE 802.3 Type 10Base-T, IEEE 02.3u Type
100Base-TX); 1 RS-232C DB-9 console port; 2 dual-personality ports each port can be used as either an RJ-45 10/100/1000 port (IEEE
802.3 Type 10Base-T; IEEE 802.3u Type 100Base-TX; IEEE 802.3ab
1000Base-T Gigabit Ethernet) or an open mini-GBIC slot (for use with
mini-GBIC transceivers)
Mounts in an EIA-standard 19 in. telco rack or equipment cabinet
(hardware included); horizontal surface mounting only
Processor type and speed: Power PC MPC8245, 266 MHz; Flash
capacity: 8 MB; SDRAM: 32 MB
<13.3 µs (LIFO)
8,000
13.6 Gbps
up to 10.1 million pps
command line interface; Web browser; configuration menu; outof- band management (serial RS-232C)
Detail Specification:
Communications
RFC 783 TFTP; RFC 951 BootP; RFC 1542 BootP; RFC 854
Telnet; RFC 768 UDP; RFC 792 ICMP; RFC 793 TCP; RFC 826
ARP; RFC 2030 SNTP; IEEE 802.3x Flow Control; DHCP Relay; RFC
3046 DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82; RFC 2236
IGMP v1/v2/v3; IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree; IEEE 802.1w Rapid
Convergence Spanning Tree; IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation
216
Power consumption
Control Protocol; IEEE 802.1AB Link Layer Discovery Protocol;
ANSI/TIA-1057 LLDP Media Endpoint Discovery (MED); RFC
1492 TACACS+; SSHv1/SSHv2 Secure Shell
100W
217
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Audio
A-1
3" Full Range Recessed Ceiling Speaker 20 watts @ 8 Ohms
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet or
exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product offers
as
General Specification
The unit shall be a professional recessed ceiling speakers providing full, high quality sound for music
and speech and shall have the minimum specification as shown below:
Detail Specification:
Frequency Range
Power Capacity
:
:
Nominal Sensitivity
:
Nominal Coverage Angle :
Rated Maximum SPL
:
Full Range Driver
:
Acceptable:
68 Hz - 17 kHz
40 Watts Continuous Program Power
20 Watts Continuous Pink Noise
84 dB
130° conical coverage
97 dB @ 1 m (3.3 ft)
76mm
JBL, EV, Tannoy or Approved Equivalents
218
Project
:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System
: Audio
Reference No
: A-2
Item Description : Digitally Steerable slim line powered line array speakers 4" x 14 Full
Range & 4x1" horn loaded dome tweeters
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet or
exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product offers
as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification
The unit shall be a Digitally Steerable slim line powered line array speakers 4" x 14 Full Range & 4x1"
horn loaded dome tweeters shall have the minimum specification as shown below :
Detail Specification :
Frequency Range
Max SPL
Coverage
Dynamic range
Typical Throw
Input
Power
Acceptable:
:
:
:
:
:
:
130-18k Hz(+/-3Db)
94Db SPL
Horizontal 130 deg
>100Db
35 m
Nominal level-0 Dbv(RMS, line input)
: Maximum level-+19 dbv(Peak, line input)
: Type: dual line input, transformer balanced
: 8x40Wrms
JBL, Tannoy, Renkus-Heinz or Approved Equivalents
219
Project
:
System
:
Reference No
:
Item Description :
Assam Legislative Assembly
Audio
A-3
Surface mount two way full range speakers 100 watts @ 8 ohm with
necessary mounting bracket.
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet or
exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product offers
as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification
The unit shall be a Surface mount two way full range speakers 100 watts @ 8 ohm with necessary
mounting bracket shall have the minimum specification as shown below :
Detail Specification :
Freq. Range
Midrange
100 Hr Power Capacity3
:
Nominal Coverage
Nominal Sensitivity4
Nominal Coverage
:
:
:
(-10 dB)1: 70 Hz - 23 kHz
(±1.5 dB, typical)2: 130 Hz - 14 kHz
200 Watts Continuous Program Power
100 Watts Continuous Pink Noise
100° x 100°
87 dB SPL, 1W @ 1 m (3.3ft)
100° x 100°
:
Maximum SPL @ 1m
:
113 dB continuous peak pink noise
Directivity Factor (Q)
:
4.9, averaged 500 Hz to 4 kHz
Directivity Index (DI)
:
6.9 dB, averaged 500 Hz to 4 kHz
Nominal Impedance
:
8 ohms
Acceptable :
JBL, EV, Tannoy or Approved
Equivalents
Minimum Impedance
:
6.7 ohms at 230
Hz
220
Project
:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System
: Audio
Reference No : A-4
Item Description: 35 Watts Active Control Room Speaker
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet or
exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product offers
as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification
The unit shall be a 35 Watts Active Control Room Speaker and shall have the minimum specification
as shown below:
Detail Specification:
Frequency Range:
Transducer:
Amplifier Power:
Maximum SPL per pair:
Crossover Frequency:
Sensitivity:
Acceptable:
80 Hz - 20 kHz
LF:135mm
HF:19mm
35 watts per channel
115 dB
4.2kHz Input
+4dBu XLR
JBL, EV, Tannoy or Approved Equivalents
221
Project
: Assam Legislative Assembly
System
: Audio
Reference No
: A-5
Item Description : UHF Wireless Handheld Microphone with receiver - 30mw power output
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet or
exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product offers
as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification :
The unit shall be UHF Wireless Handheld Microphone with receiver -30mw power output and shall
have the minimum specification as shown below…
Detail Specifications
Microphone
Polar patternTransducer type Frequency responseMax Input Sound
Level(SPL)
Hyper cardioid
Electret Condenser (dynamic)
55Hz to 18kHz
Max. SPL 146db
Receiver
Operating principle
Switching bandwidth
Sensitivity
Antenna connection
Nominal deviation
Output level
Compander system
Signal-to-noise ratio
< 0.5% at 1 kHz Squelch
mV, adjustable
Power supply
Acceptable:
True diversity receiver (UHF)
24 MHz
2 μV
2 x TNC
± 40 kHz
1.2 V
NE572
> 110 dB(A) T.H.D
2 μV - 1
12 V - 15 V DC
Beyer Dynamic, AKG, Audio Technical or Approved Equivalent
222
Project
System
Reference No.
Item Description
: Assam Legislative Assembly.
: Audio.
: A-7.
: Active Antenna Set including Booster.
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering
any product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific
item is to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their
product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
The unit shall be a antenna extension system with booster to allow the antenna to be remote
from the base station. The antenna shall be matched to the exact requirement of the offered
wireless microphone systems to ensure correct operation and an active booster shall be provided
to lift the signal level by a minimum of +6dB. The unit shall be a ground plane system
specific to the manufacturer of the wireless units supplied.
Specifications
UHF antenna set (620 - 960 MHz) consisting of 2 x TNC booster antenna and 2 x wall
mounting kit.
Acceptable
:
Beyer Dynamic, AKG, Shure or Approved Equivalent
223
Project
System
Reference No.
Item Description
: Assam Legislative Assembly
: Audio
: A-8
: Antenna Splitter (each splitter can take care of 4 receivers).
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet or
exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product offers
as
General Specification :
The unit shall be Antenna Splitter (each splitter can take care of 4 receivers)and shall have the minimum
specification as shown below.
Specifications
-
Active UHF wideband antenna divider
Frequency range 480-800 MHz
4-way
19" housing
1U
for wireless systems with TNC connector.
Acceptable
:
Beyer Dynamic, Shure, AKG or Approved Equivalent.
224
Project
:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System
: Audio
Reference No : A-9
Item Description: Digital Desktop Delegate unit with built in Microphone array, loudspeaker,
voting and card reader (with facility to start and stop voting), priority panel, LCD
display, Interpreted language channel selector and intercom facility.
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet or
exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product offers
as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification :
The unit shall beDigital Desktop Delegate unit with built in Microphone array, loudspeaker , voting
and card reader (with facility to start and stop voting), priority panel, LCD display, Interpreted
language channel selector and intercom facility..and shall have the minimum specification as shown
below…
Specifications
Digital desktop discussion microphone unit with microphone array technology as a delegate
version for use with Conference network. Button for switching on/off and signalling a talk
request, with a green LED indicating the microphone is on and a red LED indicating a talk request. 17
microphone capsules in Line-Array set-up with corridor characteristic, two red LED illuminating bars at
the side to indicate that the speaker is ready to talk. Headphone output with 3.5mm jack and twoway extended base loud speaker system. Microphone unit addressing via network and storage on
unit. Two push- pull system-quick plug connection system for the conference network. LC-Display,
language selector and 5 Voting Buttons. Optional expansion of microphone unit with chip card reader.
Design: Profiled aluminium housing with anthracite-coloured, non-glare and scratch-resistant Nextel
surface coating.
Technical specifications Frequency response
Microphone: line array Recording characteristic
Current consumption: 67 mA (microphone
on)
Distortion factor
Headphone socket
System connections: 2 x push-pull
Minimum impedance
Acceptable:
:
:
:
:
130 Hz to 17,000 Hz
corridor
< 0.1%
3.5 mm mono jack socket
: 8O
Beyerdynamic , Shure, AKG or Approved Equivalent
Project
:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System
:
Audio
Reference No :
A-10
225
Item Description:
209
Digital Desktop Chairman unit with built in Microphone array, loudspeaker ,
voting and card reader (with facility to start and stop voting), priority panel, LCD
display,
226
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet or
exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product offers
General Specification :
The unit shall be Digital Desktop Chairman Unit with built in Microphone array, loudspeaker,
voting and card reader (with facility to start and stop voting), priority panel, LCD display,
Interpreted language channel selector and intercom facility... and shall have the minimum
specification as shown below…
Specifications
Digital desktop discussion microphone unit with microphone array technology as a chairperson
version for use with Conference network. Three buttons for switching on microphone with green
LED to indicate microphone on, priority switching and clearing. 17 microphone capsules in LineArray set- up with corridor characteristic, two red LED illuminating bars at the side to indicate that
the speaker is ready to talk. Headphone output with 3.5mm jack and two-way extended base
loud speaker system. Microphone unit addressing via network and storage on unit. Two push-pull
system-quick plug connections for the conference network.LC-Display, language selector and 5
Voting Buttons. Optional expansion of microphone unit with chip card reader. Design: Profiled
aluminium housing with anthracite-coloured, non-glare and scratch-resistant Nextel surface coating.
Technical specifications
Frequency response
Microphone
Recording characteristic
Current consumption
Distortion factor
Headphone socket
Acceptable
:
:
:
130 Hz to 17,000 Hz
line array
: corridor
: 67 mA (microphone on)
: < 0.1%
: 3.5 mm mono jack socket
Beyerdynamic , Shure, AKG or Approved Equivalent.
227
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Audio
Reference No:
A-11
Item Description:
Digital Desktop Secretary unit with built in Microphone array, loudspeaker,
voting and card reader (with facility to start and stop voting), priority panel, LCD
display, Interpreted language channel selector and intercom facility.
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet or
exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product offers
as
an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
The unit shall beDigital Desktop Secretary unit with built in Microphone array, loudspeaker, voting
and card reader (with facility to start and stop voting), priority panel, LCD display, Interpreted
language channel selector and intercom facility..and shall have the minimum specification as shown
below…
Specifications:
Digital desktop discussion microphone unit with microphone array technology as a chairperson
version for use with Conference network. Three buttons for switching on microphone with green
LED to indicate microphone on, priority switching and clearing. 17 microphone capsules in LineArray set- up with corridor characteristic, two red LED illuminating bars at the side to indicate that
the speaker is ready to talk. Headphone output with 3.5mm jack and two-way extended base
loud speaker system. Microphone unit addressing via network and storage on unit. Two push-pull
system-quick plug connections for the conference network.LC-Display, language selector and 5
Voting Buttons. Optional expansion of microphone unit with chip card reader. Design: Profiled
aluminium housing with anthracite-coloured, non-glare and scratch-resistant Nextel surface coating.
Technical specifications
Frequency response: 130 Hz to 17,000 Hz
Microphone:
line
array
Recording characteristic: corridor
Current consumption: 67 mA (microphone
on) Distortion factor: < 0.1%
Headphone socket: 3.5 mm mono jack socket
System connections: 2 x push-pull
Minimum impedance: 8 O
Temperature range: 0 °C to +40 °C
Acceptable:
Beyerdynamic , Shure, AKG or Approved Equivalent
228
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Audio
A-12
Power supply for up to 45 microphone units, conference network, 4 x
Push-Pull connection, 19" housing, 2 U
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet or
exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product offers
as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
The unit shall be Power supply for up to 45 microphone units, conference network, 4 x Push-Pull
connection, 19" housing, 2 U. and shall have the minimum specification as shown below…
Specifications:
The power supply unit shall supply a maximum of 45 microphone units in the conference network
via Conference network. An LED shall indicate the power on status. The unit shall provide four pushpull connectors to connect to the conference network and two phoenix terminals for external DC
supply. The data transfer of the conference network shall be possible in the standby mode. The
power shall be 6 A. The housing shall be 19“, 2 U. On the rear shall be venting slots and a fan.
Specifications:
Mains voltage: 100 - 240 V AC 47 - 63 Hz
Fuse: 6.3 AT (H)
Power consumption: 330
W Output current: max.
6 A DC
System connections: 2 x push pull, 6-pin, type Lemo/ODU
Extension connections: 2 x push pull, 6-pin, type Lemo/ODU
Acceptable:
Beyerdynamic , Shure, AKG or Approved Equivalent
229
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Audio
A-13
Digital Opto Coupler for conference network,
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet or
exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product offers
as an alternative and
General Specification:
The unit shall beDigital Opto Coupler for conference network,,.and shall have the minimum
specification as shown below…
Specifications
Conference Network
Power consumption
Max. DC current
2x push-pull 6-pin,
Phoenix, 2-pin, 5.08 mm
6A
(GI) Type 50/125 μm, 820 nm
multimode
Fibre
type
Fibre connection
2x
Type ST Maximum fibre length
2000 m
Acceptable:
Beyerdynamic , Shure, AKG or Approved Equivalent
230
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item
Description:
Audio
A-14,A-15
Connecting cable for " conference network, Push-Pull connector, 2 m (7 with
ft.)
necessary connector to complete entire system
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
General Specification:
The unit shall beConnecting cable for " conference network, Push-Pull connector, 2 m (7 ft.) with
necessary connector to complete entire system and shall have the minimum specification as
shown below…
Specifications
The network cable shall provide a Lemo push-pull
connector system for the conference network. The
length shall be 2 m. A-15Connecting cable for "
conference network, Push-Pull connector, 2 m (7 ft.)
with necessary connector to complete entire system
Acceptable:
Beyerdynamic , Shure, AKG or Approved Equivalent
231
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Audio
A-16
Headphones, 2 x 32 Ω, with cable 1.6 m (5 ft.), stereo mini-jack
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet or
exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product offers
as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
The unit shall beHeadphones, 2 x 32 Ω, with cable 1.6 m (5 ft.), stereo mini-jack
minimum specification as shown below…
Specifications
Transducer type
Dynamic
Operating principle
Open
Frequency response
40 20,000 Hz Nominal impedance
2 x 32
104 Db
Nominal SPL
Power handling capacity
100 mW
Stereo jack plug 3.5 mm
Connection
Acceptable:
Beyerdynamic , Shure, AKG or Approved Equivalent
and shall have the
232
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Audio
A-17
Digital T-adapter for conference network,3 x Push-Pull connection
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet or
exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product offers
as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
The unit shall be Digital T-adapter for conference network, 3 x Push-Pull connection and shall have the
minimum specification as shown below…
Specifications:
Digital 3-way adapter. Compact, rugged metal housing with three push-pull connectors for the
conference network. Power supply via network.
Acceptable:
Beyerdynamic , Shure, AKG or Approved Equivalent
233
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Audio
A-18
Configuration and controller software for Digital Conference Network
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet or
exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product offers
as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
The unit shall beConfiguration and controller software for Digital Conference Networkand shall have the
minimum specification as shown below…
Specifications
Control- and configuration Software for digital Conference network System
Complete Software package, ICNS modules activated by license key in Central Unit
Acceptable:
Beyerdynamic , Shure, AKG or Approved Equivalent
234
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Audio
A-20
Central Processing unit
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet or
exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product offers
as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
The unit shall beCentral Processing unit.and shall have the minimum specification as shown below…
Specifications:
Central control unit with computer processor as the core of a fully digital discussion network for
controlling up to
1,400 units with 54 audio channels in the conference network. Integrated simultaneous interpreting
function for up to
53 target languages. Mains adapter for supplying power to the conference network for up to 15
microphone units, can be optionally extended to 30 positions. Network connection suitable for hot
plugging, integral digital-analogue audio interface, each with 2 controllable, transformer-balanced XLR
inputs and outputs. Multifunction keys, 4-key navigator and LC display for menu-guided system
operation and configuration. RS232 interface at the rear for operation with
PC software or media control unit. System check when the control unit is switched on. Selectable
operating modes such
as "request", once activated, use enabled by the president; "free", each participant can switch his/her
microphone unit on and off individually, up to a maximum of 16 microphones are on at the same time;
"Fifo", each participant can switch his/her microphone unit on and off individually, up to a maximum of
16 microphones are on at the same time, positions which are switched on over the limit switch off the
microphones which have been on the longest; "Auto", each participant can switch his/her microphone
unit on and off individually, up to a maximum of 16 microphones are on at the same time, positions
which are switched on over the limit are automatically switched off once one of the active microphones
has been switched off; The following parameters can be set in the system configuration: Number and
address of the president monitoring units, monitoring unit address assignment, operating mode
including limits, level
of the signal inputs and outputs, designation of the channels for interpreting mode. Optional controlunit redundancy in connection with control software and monitor switch for disaster mode, as well as
optional multi-session mode for controlling several conferences via a control unit in combination with
control software. A push-pull system-quick plug connection for the conference network Two 3-pin XLR
built-in plugs for transformer-balanced output –28.5 dB up to
+18 dB and two 3-pin XLR built-in sockets for transformer-balanced input xxdB. Stand-alone table
housing, suitable for 19" installation. 2HU. Ventilation slots at the front and rear:
Acceptable:
Beyerdynamic , Shure, AKG or Approved Equivalent
235
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Audio
A-21
Analogue Audio Interface unit 6 in, 6 out , 3 x sterio - AS / EBU out , 2 push
pull connector
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their
product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
The unit shall beAnalogue Audio Interface unit 6 in, 6 out , 3 x sterio - AS / EBU out , 2 push pull
connector.and shall have the minimum specification as shown below…
Specifications
Analogue inputs
Connector
Level
Range
Frequency response
Input impedance
Analogue outputs
Connector
Level
Range
Output impedance
Analogue outputs
Connector
Sample rate
Acceptable:
12-pin Phoenix socket (RM 5.08 mm)
6 dBu
maxima
l
0 dB ...
+22.5 dB
20 Hz to 20 kHz (±
1.5
dB)
47
kΩ
12-pin Phoenix socket (RM 5.08 mm)
6 dBu
maxima
l
-18 dB ... 0 dB
100
3-pin XLR
socket
48
kHz
Beyerdynamic , Shure, AKG or Approved Equivalent
236
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Audio
A-22
Interpreter desk with LCD display, Pluggable extended stem
microphone, Interpreter head phone, Intercom etc.
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering
any product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific
item is to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their
product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
The unit shall be Interpreter desk with LCD display, Pluggable extended stem microphone, Interpreter
head phone, Intercom etc. and shall have the minimum specification as shown below…
Specifications:
Digital interpreter microphone unit for 1 interpreter as a single desk, up to 53 target languages for
operation in the conference network. Two separate LC displays for relay channels and microphone
output channels, connection for the headphone/microphone set or headphones and microphone
separate, menu-controlled channel pre-selection field and listening monitor field for up to three relay
channels and two microphone output channels, can be programmed for direct access. Two-band sound
control for headphones and controllable monitor speakers. Service call button, president call button
and cough button. Integration at any position in the conference network with integrated power supply
via bus. Complies with the requirements of the AIIC (Association International des Interprets de
Conference – International Association of Interpreters) and the corresponding standards (ISO 4043, ISO
2603, DIN 56924). Two
push-pull system-quick plug connections for the conference network.
Acceptable:
Beyerdynamic , Shure, AKG or Approved Equivalent
237
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Audio
A-23
Control Unit for Portable Conference Units
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet or
exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product offers
as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
The unit shall be Control Unit for Portable Conference Units and shall have the minimum specification as
shown below…
Specifications
The control unit shall be the core of a discussion system with media control system. It shall be
equipped with an integrated power supply unit and processor to control a maximum of 64
microphone units. The control unit shall have 2 multifunction buttons and an LC-Display with 2
lines/16 digits for menu-driven system operation and configuration. The RS 232 interface port
on the front shall be used for a system configuration via PC. After switching on the control
unit a system check shall be performed. The master reset shall be accessible for
manufacturer’s default settings. The serial RS 232 interface shall connect to an operator’s PC or
external console. The control unit shall have two inputs for sound signals 250 mV (balanced) and
1.55 V (unbalanced). The following three operation modes shall be available: Request-to-Talk
(the chairman shall release the microphone of the participant who wants to talk), Autonomy
(each participant shall switch on and off his microphone unit), Override (each switched on
microphone unit shall switch off the previously activated microphone unit). ”Next” function
control (first in - first out) in the Request-to-Talk mode. In each operation mode the talk time and
warning time for the illuminated ring shall be pre-set to indicate that the talk time has elapsed.
The following parameters shall be adjusted within the system configuration: number and address
of the chairman microphone units, function of the priority button, number of the open
microphones, number and address of the loudspeakers to be muted in the microphone units,
input level of the signals and volume and sound control of the master signal. For the
microphone lines 2 connections shall be available. The control unit shall have a recording output
(RCA, 250 mV) and a 3-pin XLR socket for transformer balanced line level output (+6 dBm).
The recording output shall be independent from the output volume adjustment. The desktop
housing shall be 2 rack units high, for 19" rack mounting. The control unit shall have ventilation
louvres on top and bottom.
Acceptable:
Beyerdynamic , Shure, AKG or Approved Equivalent
238
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Audio
A-24
Chairman Microphone Unit with channel selector - Portable with standard Loop
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet
or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product
offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General
Specification:
The unit shall beChairman Microphone Unit with channel selector - Portable with standard Loop and
shall have the minimum specification as shown below…
Specifications
The digitally controlled chairman microphone unit shall provide three buttons for microphone
on/off, priority and clearing. The priority functions such as switching on or switching on and
clearing or muting the activated delegate units shall be programmable. The green LED shall
indicate the activated microphone status. The fixed condenser gooseneck microphone (back
electret) shall provide a cardioid polar pattern. The total length of the gooseneck shall be 400
mm and the diameter shall be 8 mm. The illuminated ring below the microphone capsule shall
indicate the ready to talk status. The microphone unit shall provide a 15-pin Sub-D female
connector. The system connecting cable shall be 3 m long with a 15-pin Sub-D male connector.
The mini jack (3.5 mm) shall be used for connecting recorders. The microphone unit shall have
an integrated loudspeaker with volume control. The microphone unit shall be equipped with
DIP-switches to set the microphone address. The plastic housing shall be coated with a charcoalgrey, non-glare Nextel® finish.
Acceptable:
Beyerdynamic , Shure, AKG or Approved Equivalent
239
Project:
Assembly
System:
Audio
Reference No:
25
Item Description:
Portable
Assam Legislative
ADelegate Microphone Unit -
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their
product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General
Specification:
The unit shall beDelegate Microphone Unit – Portableand shall have the minimum specification as
shown below…
Specifications
The digitally controlled delegate microphone unit shall provide one button for switching
on/off or request-to-talk. The dual-colour LED shall indicate the microphone on (green) or
request- to-talk (red) status. The fixed condenser gooseneck microphone (back electret) shall
provide a cardioid polar pattern. The total length of the gooseneck shall be 400 mm and
the diameter shall be 8 mm. The illuminated ring below the microphone capsule shall
indicate the ready to talk status. The microphone unit shall provide a 15-pin Sub-D female
connection. The system connecting cable shall be 3 m long with a 15-pin Sub-D male
connector. The microphone unit shall provide a mini jack for connecting recorders. The
microphone unit shall have an integrated loudspeaker with volume control. The microphone
unit shall be equipped with DIP- switches to adjust the microphone address. The plastic
housing shall be coated with a charcoal-grey, non-glare and scratch-resistant Nextel® finish.
Acceptable:
Beyerdynamic , Shure, AKG or Approved Equivalent
240
Project
:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System
Reference No
Item Description
:
:
:
Audio
A-26
Connecting cable length 20 mtr length
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their
product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General
Specification :
The unit shall be Connecting cable length 20 mtr length and shall have the minimum specification as
shown below…
Specifications
Connecting cable length 20 mtr length
Acceptable:
Beyerdynamic , Shure, AKG or Approved Equivalent
241
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Audio
A-27
Dual Channel Amplifier 100 Watts @ 4 Ohms
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their
product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification
The unit shall be a Dual Channel Amplifier 100 Watts @ 4 Ohmsand shall have the minimum
specification as shown below:
Detail Specification:
Audio
Voltage gain
Stereo channel separation
CMRR
Audio Input
Number/signal
type Connectors
Impedance
Nominal level
Maximum level
Input sensitivity
Input signal detection
threshold
Audio output
Number/signal type
Connectors
Load impedance
Amplifier type
Output power
16x (24
DB)
>75 dB @ 1 kHz
75 dB @ 1 kHz
(typical)
1 stereo or 2 mono,
balanced/unbalanced
(1) 3.5 mm captive screw connector,
5 pole
>10k ohms unbalanced/balanced,
DC coupled
+4 dBu (1.23 Vrms),
balanced
+20 dBu (7.75 Vrms),
balanced
+4 dBu (1.23
Vrms)
-40 dBu ±3 dB, balanced
1 stereo, 4/8
ohm direct
(1) 5 mm screw lock captive screw connector, 4 pole
4 ohms minimum
Class
D
60 watts rms per channel, 8 ohms, 1 kHz, <0.05% THD
100 watts rms per channel, 4 ohms, 1 kHz, <0.05%
THD
242
Control/remote — amplifier
Control port
Pin configurations
DC volume control
(analog)
Volume control
voltage range
Standby power control
(contact closure)
Power Consumption
Standby
Acceptable:
>1 watts
(1) 3.5 mm captive screw
connector, 5 pole
Pin 1 = +10 VDC, 50 mA (max.), pin 2 = volume/mute
(variable voltage), pin 3 = GND
0 V (mute) to 10 V (maximum
volume)
Pin 4 = GND, pin 5 =
standby
43 watts
(4 ohms
(x2)) ,8
ohms(x2)
30 watts
Extron, Crown, EV, Behringer or Approved Equivalents
243
Project:
Assembly
System:
Audio
Reference No:
28
Item Description:
70.7V
Assam Legislative
A8 Channel Amplifier with 160 Watts @ 8 ohm & 200 watts @ 4 ohm &
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to
be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the Supplier must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their
product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
This unit shall be 8 Channel Amplifier with 160 Watts @ 8 ohm & 200 watts @ 4 ohm & 70.7Vand
shall have the following minimum specification.
Detail Specification:
Sensitivity
: 1.4V
Frequency Response
: 20 Hz 20 kHz Signal to Noise Ratio below rated power
:
100 dB unweighted Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) at 1 watt
: < 0.05%
Crosstalk (below rated power, 20 Hz to 1 kHz)
: > 80 dB
Common Mode Rejection (CMR) (20
: 50 dB
hz to 1 kHz)
: 20 kohms, 10 kohms
Input Impedance nominally
balanced,
nominally unbalanced
Maximum Input Level
: + 20 dBu
Voltage Gain, 1.4V sensitivity
4/8 Ohm Operation
: 20:1 (26 dB)
70V Operation
: 50:1 (34 dB)
100V Operation
: 71.4:1 (37 dB)
Acceptable:
Crown, LabGruppen, Dynacord or Approved Equivalent
244
Biamp
: Assam Legislative Assembly.
System
: Audio
Reference No.
: A-29, A-30, A-31, A-32
Item Description : Digital Audio Platform DSP Charsi with Cobra Net to accommodate up to
24 Channels of I/O
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their
product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification
The unit shall be aDigital Audio Platform DSP Charsiwith CobraNet to accommodate up to 24
Channels of
I/Oand shall have the minimum specification as shown below:
Detail Specification:
Chassis
space) Custom I/O (card based)
Analog Inputs
Digital Inputs
AEC Inputs
Analog Outputs
Digital Outputs
Telephone Connection
Max Inputs/Outputs
Config
Signal Processing (MHz)
SWL Digital Audio Bus
19" (single rack
Yes
up to 16
up to 16
up to 16
up to 16
up to 16
up to 4
16
Software
800
256
A-30Four Channel Mic/ Line Input Card
A-31Four Wide-Band Acoustic Echo Cancellation Input Cards
A-32 Four Channel Mic/ Line Output
Card
Acceptable:
BSS, Biamp ,Peavey or Approved Equivalent
245
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Audio
A-33
CobraNet to 8 Analog Line output expander
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet or
exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product offers
as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification
The unit shall be a Cobra Net to 8 Analog line output Expander and shall have the minimum
specification as shown below:
Detail Specification:
Analog Outputs:
Maximum Output Level:
Frequency Response:
THD:
Dynamic Range:
Crosstalk:
D/A Latency:
Digital Audio Bus:
Connectors:
Maximum Cable Length:
Maximum Number of Nodes:
Latency Per Node:
Acceptable:
8 electronically balanced on Phoenix/Combicon removable screw
connectors
+19dBu
20Hz-20KHz (+0.5dB/-1dB)
<0.01% 20Hz to 20KHz, +10dBu output
108dB typical, 22Hz-22KHz unweighted
<-75dB
28/Fs [[email protected], [email protected]]
2 x RJ45 Ethernet connectors
100m/300ft on Category 5e cable between devices
60
4/Fs [[email protected], [email protected]]
BSS , Biamp or Approved Equivalents
246
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Audio
A-34
CobraNet to 8 Analog Line Input expander
Net to
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their
product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification
The unit shall be a Cobra Net to 8 Analog line input expander and shall have the minimum
specification as shown below :
Detail
Specification:
Analog Inputs:
Mic/Line Inputs:
up to +48dB, in 6dB
8 electronically balanced on
Phoenix/Combicon removable screw connectors
Nominal gain 0dB, electronically switchable
step
s
Input Impedance:
Maximum Input Level:
gain
CMRR:
3.0kOhm
20dBu with 0dB input gain,8dBu with 12dB
Input Noise (E.I.N.):
Phantom Power:
<-123dBu typical with 150 Ohms source
48V nominal,
>40dB at 1kHz
selectable per input A/D Latency 37/Fs [[email protected], [email protected]]
37/Fs [[email protected], [email protected]] Digital Audio Bus:
Connectors:
Maximum Cable Length:
devices
2 x RJ45 Ethernet connectors
100m/300ft on Category 5e cable between
Maximum Number of Nodes:
Latency Per Node:
Power and Dimensions:
AC Power Input to Adapter:
60
4/Fs [[email protected], [email protected]]
BTU Rating:
<65 BTU/hr
Acceptable:
19W
BSS,Biamp ,Peavey or approved equivalent
247
Project:
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Assam Legislative Assembly
Audio
A-35
5 Channel Mic / Line Mixer
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet
or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product
offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General
Specification
The unit shall be a5 Channel Mic / Line Mixer and shall have the minimum specification as
shown below :
Detail Specification:
Inputs
: 4 selectable mic or line level
1 line level
1 direct MIX; detachable terminal block
Input Impedance
: Mic: >1.2 kΩ balanced; Line: >10 kΩ balanced
Maximum Input Level : Mic: -20 dBu; Line: +24 dBu
Phantom
: Switch-selectable 24 V
Gain
: Mic: Off to 65 dB; Line: Off
to 15 dB Outputs
: Mic: -45 dBu
balanced
Line: +4 dBu balanced; detachable terminal block
Output Impedance
: 150 Ω balanced
Frequency Response
: Mic: 80 Hz to 40 kHz
Line: 10 Hz to 35 kHz
THD+N
: Mic: < 0.03%; Line:
<0.003% Headroom
: 20 dB
(above +4 dBu output)
CMRR
: Mic: > -65 dB (10 Hz to 10 kHz); Line: > -45 dB
Noise
: < -70 dB below +4 dBu output (20 Hz to 20 kHz, all mic channels at 50 dB
gain; or one mic channel active at 60 dB gain); < -90 dB below +4 dBu (20
Hz to 20 kHz, all channels off)
Acceptable:
RDL, Kramer, Extronor Approved Equivalents
248
Project:
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Assam Legislative Assembly
Audio
A-36
1:8 Balanced Stereo Audio Distribution Amplifier
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet or
exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product offers
as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification
The unit shall be a 1:8 Balanced Stereo Audio Distribution Amplifier shall have the minimum
specification as shown below.
Detail Specification:
INPUTS
: 2 balanced stereo audio
+4dBu, 100kΩ OUTPUTS
: 8 (or 2 x 4)
balanced stereo audio, +4dBu, 50Ω MAX. AUDIO OUTPUT
: 20Vpp.
AUDIO BANDWIDTH (-3DB)
GAIN
RANGE
S/N RATIO
: 100dB/1V.
CROSSTALK
CONTRO
LS
AUDIO THD + NOISE
Acceptable:
: 20kHz.
: 0.2 to 5.8dB (4 trimmers, 2 for each input
channel).
: −[email protected]
: Front selector switches for 1:8 or 2x1:4
operation,
4 front accessible gain trimmers
: 0.02%.
Kramer ,Extron, Geffen or approved equivalent
249
Project:
System:
Reference No:
Item
Description
:
Assam Legislative Assembly
Audio
A-38
Dual Channel Stereo Power Amplifier 40 Watts @ 8 Ohm
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet
or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product
offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General
Specification
The unit shall be a Dual Channel Stereo Power Amplifier 40 Watts @ 8 Ohm shall have the minimum
specification as shown below.
Detail
INPUT
: Balanced stereo audio on a terminal block connector.
OUTPUT
: Balanced stereo audio (speakers) on a terminal block
connector. OUTPUT POWER
: 19W RMS per channel into 8Ω.
OUTPUT MUSIC
POWER
: 75W per
channel. BANDWIDTH (-3dB)
:
20kHz.
S/N RATIO
:
60.2dB. COUPLING
: DC. AUDIO THD + NOISE
:
1.9%. AUDIO 2nd
HARMONIC
: 0.3%.
POWER SOURCE
: 24V DC, 5A.
DIMENSIONS
: 10.7cm x 10.4cm x 4.0cm (4.2" x 4.1" x 1.6") W, D, H.
Acceptable:
Kramer ,Extron, Geffen or approved equivalent
250
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Camera ( AV
System) Reference No:
C-1
Item Description:
High Definition DVI/HDMI Pan/Tilt/Zoom Camera with 20x Zoom
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet
or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product
offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
The unit shall be a High Definition DVI/HDMI Pan/Tilt/Zoom Camera with 20x Zoomand shall
have the minimum specification as shown below…
Detailed Specification:
Image Device
Picture Elements
HD Resolutions
and 1080/25p
Lens
Glass, F1.6
:
:
:
:
6.49mm diagonal
3.27 pixels
1080i/59.94/60, 1080/50i, 720p/59.94/60, 720/50p 1080/30p
20x Optical Zoom Lens with HiLD™ (High Index Low Dispersion)
Wide to F3.5 Tele, 11-Elements in 9-Groups
Focal Length
: F=4.7mm wide to
94mm tele Horizontal View Angle
: 2.9 to 55.2
degrees - 16:9 Format Video S/N Ratio
:
>50 dB
Invertible
: Yes - Without Frame Delay
Minimum Illumination
: 1.6 LUX (F1.6,
50IRE) Serial Control Protocol
: RS-232
Pan Range
degrees
Min. Object Distance
Image Control
HD Video Select
Output
Acceptable:
:
Pan: +170 degrees to -170 degrees, Tilt: +90 degrees to -30
: Wide End: .01m wide end, Tele end: 1.0m
: Red & Blue Gain, Detail, Chroma, Gamma, Pedestal, Iris,
and Gain (available through RS-232 control)
: 16-Position Rotary Switch: Used to set HD Video Resolution
Vaddio, Sony or Approved Equivalent
251
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Camera ( AV
System) Reference No:
C-2
Item Description:
Camera Control Console for controlling up to 7 PTZ camera's via RS232 ,
External RS232
Control, 14 pre-sets per camera
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their
product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
The unit shall be a Camera Control Console for controlling up to 7 PTZ camera's via RS232 , External
RS232 Control, 14 presets per cameraand shall have the minimum specification as shown below…
Detailed Specification:
System I/O:
Seven (7) RS-232 Camera Control Ports on RJ-45 Connectors
Two (2) Link Ports (In and Out) on RJ-45
One (1) RS-232 Control Port on DB-9F
Seven (7) Tally Outputs - Group A, Seven (7) Tally Outputs - Group B
One (1) Power Connector (Coaxial, Positive Center, 5.5mm OD x 2.5mm ID)
Joystick:
3-Axis, Hall-Effect, Non-contacting Type with Single Button
Internally Stored Presets 98:
(14 per PTZ camera attached)
Camera Control Parameters:
Iris, Gain, Detail, Red Gain, Blue
Gain, Focus (for compatible cameras) Pan, Tilt
and Zoom on Joystick
Pan, Tilt and Zoom speed (for Joystick PTZ functions)
Acceptable:
Vaddio, Sony or Approved Equivalent
252
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Control
D-1,D-2
10.1" wired Touch Panel
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet
or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product
offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General
Specification:
This unit shall be a10.1" wired Touch Panelshall have the minimum specification
as shown below…
Detail
Specification:
Touch Screen Display
Display Type
TFT Active
matrix color LCD Size
10.1 inch (257 mm) diagonal Aspect Ratio
16:10 WXGA
Resolution
1280 x 800 pixels Brightness
400 nits (cd/m²) Contrast
800:01:00
Color Depth
24-bit, 16.7M colors
Illumination
Edgelit LED
Viewing Angle
±80° horizontal, ±80° vertical
Touch Screen
Projected Capacitive
Memory
LPDDR2 RAM
1 GB Flash
4 GB Maximum Project Size
512 MB
Video
Streaming Formats
H.264 (MPEG-4
253
part 10 AVC), MJPEG Audio
Features
Audio Feedback Formats
Built-in microphone and speakers, Rava™ SIP Intercom,
multi-language voice [1]
recognition
MP3
Connectors
(1) 8-wire RJ45 with 2 LED indicators;
10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet port, Power over
Ethernet compliant;
Green and yellow LEDs indicate Ethernet port status
D-2 TABLE TOP KIT FOR ABOVE TOUCH PANEL
LAN
PoE
Acceptable:
Crestron, AMX or Approved Equivalent
254
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Control
D-3
POE injector for the touch panel
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to
be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet or
exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product offers as
an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
The device shall be a POE injector for the touch panel. The device shall have the minimum specification as
shown below:
Detail Specification:
Connectors
LAN
Ethernet LAN
:
(1) 8-wire RJ45, female;10BaseT/100BaseTX Ethernet port; Connects to
LAN PoE
and IEEE 802.3af Class 0
:
(1) 8-wire RJ45, female; 10BaseT/100BaseTX Ethernet pass-thru port
PoE Power Sourcing Equipment output
Main Power Input
LED Indicators
POWER
connected;
Power Requirements
Acceptable:
:
:
(1) IEC 320 C14 socket; Mates with removable power cord, included
(1) Tri-colour LED; Amber indicates power is available but no device is
Green indicates a PoE device is connected and drawing power; Red
(flashing) indicates a non- PoE device is connected
:
100-250 Volts AC, 50/60 Hz
Crestron, AMX ,CUE or Approved Equivalent
255
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
4
Item Description:
Control
DIntegrated Control processor 6 RS232/ 8 I/R/Serial ports,8 I/O Versi
isolated relays/ 10/100 Ethernet port
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet or
exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product offers
as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
This unit shall be aIntegrated Control processor 6 RS232/ 8 I/R/Serial ports,8 I/O Versi isolated relays/
10/100 Ethernet port shall have the minimum specification as shown below…
Detail Specification:
MEMORY
SDRAM
1 GB Flash
4 GB
Memory Card
supports SD™ and
SDHC™ cards up to 32 GB External Storage
support USB mass storage devices up to 1 TB
Communications
Ethern
et
Control Subnet
USB
RS232/422/48
5
IR/Serial
or serial TTL/RS-232 (0-5
10/100/1000 Mbps; auto-switching; auto-negotiating; autodiscovery; full/half duplex; industry-standard TCP/IP stack;
UDP/IP; CIP; DHCP; SSL; IEEE 802.1X; SNMP; BACnet®/IP[2]; IPv4
or IPv6; Active Directory authentication; IIS v.6.0 Web Server;
SMTP e-mail client; installer setup via Crestron Toolbox™ or
MSIE[3]
10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet, auto-switching, autonegotiating, auto-discovery, full/half duplex, DHCP server,
DNS Server, port forwarding, Isolation Mode
Supports USB HID and USB mass storage class devices via rear
panel USB 2.0 host port, supports computer console via front
panel USB 2.0 device port
For 2-way device control and monitoring, all ports support RS-232 up
to 115.2k bau
with software handshaking, two ports also support hardware
handshaking, RS-422, and RS-485
Supports 1-way device control via infrared up to 1.2 MHz
Volts) up to 115.2k
baud
256
Detail Specification:
100-240V~2.4A
50/60HZ
G
COMPUTER
(front)
(1) IEC 60320 C14 main power inlet;
Mates with removable power cord, included
(1) 6-32 screw, chassis ground lug
(1) USB Type B
female;
USB 2.0 computer console port (6 ft
cable included); For setup only
LCD Display
Display Type
TFT active
matrix color LCD Size
2.8 inch (72 mm) diagonal Resolution
320 x 240 pixels
Functions
other system information
Power Requirements
Main Power
Displays configuration menus, control port activity, and
2.4 A2m3p8
s @ 100-240 Volts AC, 50/60 Hz
257
Detail Specification:
CONNECTORS & CARD SLOTS
S1 – S3
COM 1
–2
COM 3
–6
(3) Control card expansion slots
(2) 5-pin 3.5mm detachable terminal blocks;
Bidirectional RS-232/422/485 ports[4];
Up to 115.2k baud; hardware and software handshaking support
(4) 3-pin 3.5mm detachable
terminal blocks; Bidirectional RS232 ports[4];
Up to 115.2k baud; software handshaking support
(2) 8-pin 3.5mm detachable terminal block comprising (8)
IR - SERIAL OUTPUT
1–8
RELAY OUTPUT 1 –
8
IR/Serial output ports; IR output up to 1.2 MHz;
1-way serial TTL/RS-232 (0-5 Volts) up to 115.2k baud
(2) 8-pin 3.5mm detachable terminal blocks comprising (8)
normally open, isolated relays;
Rated 1 Amp, 30 Volts AC/DC;
MOV arc suppression across contacts
(1) 8-wire RJ45 jack;
10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T
LAN
Ethernet port[4]; Connects to the
customer's LAN
CONTROL
(1) 8-wire RJ45 jack;
10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T
SUBNET USB
Ethernet port[4]; Provides a dedicated
MEMORY
local network for Crestron devices (1) USB
Type A female;
USB 2.0 port for storage devices
(1) SD memory card slot;
I/O 1 – 8
NET
Accepts one SD or SDHC card up to 32 GB for memory expansion
(1) 9-pin 3.5mm detachable terminal block comprising (8)
"Versiport" digital input/output or analog input ports
(referenced to GND) [4];
Digital Input: Rated for 0-24 Volts DC, input impedance 20k
Ohms, logic threshold
>3.125V low/0 and <1.875V high/1;
Digital Output: 250mA sink from maximum 24 Volts DC, catch
diodes for use with
"real world" loads;
Analog Input: Rated for 0-10 Volts DC, protected to 24 Volts
DC maximum, input impedance 21k ohms with pull-up
resistor disabled;
Programmable 5 Volts, 2k ohms pull-up resistor per pin
(1) 4-pin 3.5mm detachable terminal block;
258
Acceptable:
Crestron, AMX or Approved Equivalent
259
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Control
D-5
External Power -300Watt NET Power Supply
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be
provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet
or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product
offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General
Specification:
This unit shall be a External Power supply -300Watt NET Power Supply shall have the minimum
specification as shown below…
Detail
Specification:
CONNECTIONS
1–8
(16) 4-pin 5mm detachable terminal blocks
comprising (2) paralleled Control Net ports per each of (8)
output channels;
24 Volt DC power outputs with Control NET data pass-thru from
NET port
NET
(1) 4-pin 5mm detachable terminal block;
Applying 24 Volts DC to the ‘24’ and ‘G’ terminals enables the
power supply system when in “SLAVE” mode
(1) attached input power cable (~1 ft long) with inline
AC Line
IEC320 socket;
Controls
PWR ON, PWR
OFF/SLAVE
Connects to grounded AC power source using 3-prong power
cable or pigtail cable, both provided
(1) rocker switch; enables/disables the power supply system if no
external DC voltage is applied to the NET port, or selects “SLAVE”
mode to allow enabling the power supply system remotely by
applying an external 24V DC signal to the NET port
(8) miniature pushbuttons; each resets its respective
output channel, or momentarily disables the channel while held
(1) miniature pushbutton; resets all output channels
SYSTEM RESET
sequentially, or momentarily disables all channels while held
SETUP
(1) miniature pushbutton; used for
touch-settable ID (TSID) Power Requirements
4 Amps,
100-240 Volts AC, 50/60 Hz
RESET 1 – 8
Acceptable:
Crestron, AMX or Approved Equivalent
260
Project
Assembly
:
System
Control
Reference No
:
6
Item Description:
Processor
Assam Legislative
:
D3Port RS-232/422/485 card for the Control
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be
provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet
or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product
offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General
Specification:
The device shall be a 3 Port RS-232/422/485 Card for Control Processor. The device shall have the
minimum specification as shown below :
Detail Specification:
COM A-C
:
(3) DB9 male bidirectional RS232/RS422/485 ports
Up to 115.2 k baud, hardware and software handshaking
support
Net power usage
:
3 watts (0.125 [email protected] volts DC)
Temp.
:
41° to 113°F (5° to 45°C)
Humidity
:
10% to 90% RH (non-condensing)
Dimension
:
24.9x27.0x172.1 (H x W x D)
Acceptable:
Crestron, AMX or Approved Equivalent
261
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Control
D-7
Infrared (IR) Emitter probe
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet or
exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product offers
as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
This unit shall be an Infrared (IR) Emitter probe and should have minimum specification as indicated
below…
Detail Specification:
Infrared OUTPUT
5mm detachable terminal blocks comprising Infrared output
IR output up to 1.2 MHz
Temperature : 41° to 113°F (5° to 45°C)
Humidity : 10% to 90% RH (non-condensing
Acceptable:
Crestron,AMX or Approved Equivalent
262
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Installation Equipment
E-1
Wall Plate
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet or
exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product offers
as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
Detail Specifications:
All plates shall be made from stainless steel or equal approved, minimum thickness is to be 1.6mm.
Finish is to be brushed in non-public areas and finish to ID requirements in all public areas. Plate is
to be clearly marked by engraving and black filled in paint, no other form of making will be
acceptable. All connectors used in constructing plates shall be D series. All plates are to be mounted
flush with surface and are to be aligned correctly.
All plate designs are to be approved by the AV consultant before fabrication, sample of finish and
detailed
Drawings are to be provided.
263
Project:
Assembly
System:
Equipment
Reference No:
2
Item Description:
Plate
Assam Legislative
Installation
ETable
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what
their product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
Detail
Specifications:
All plates shall be made from stainless steel or equal approved, minimum thickness is to be
1.6mm. Finish is to be brushed in non-public areas and finish to ID requirements in all
public areas. Plate is to be clearly marked by engraving and black filled in paint, no other
form of making will be acceptable. All connectors used in constructing plates shall be D series.
All plates are to be mounted flush with surface and are to be aligned correctly.
All plate designs are to be approved by the AV consultant before fabrication, sample of
finish and detailed
Drawings are to be
provided.
264
Project:
Assembly
System:
Equipment
Reference No:
3
Item Description:
display
Assam Legislative
Installation
EWall / Ceiling mount bracket for Flat panel
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet
or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product
offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
Detail
Specifications:
The Wall/Ceiling Bracket for Display shall be made from mild steel or Stainless steel, can be
custom made based on submitted drawings and shall be of a laser etched, matte black
powder coat finish. Please note, all fixings shall be invisible from the front and all cable
management shall be incorporated in the design of the unit.
All Bracket designs are to be approved by the AV consultant before fabrication, sample of
finish and detailed
Drawings are to be
provided.
265
Project:
Assembly
System:
Equipment
Reference No:
5
Item Description:
Plate
Assam Legislative
Installation
E-4,ERack Plate / Credenza
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that
they meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what
their product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
Detail
Specifications:
Rack / Credenza plates shall be made from stainless steel or equal approved, minimum
thickness is to be 1.6mm. Finish is to be brushed in non-public areas and finish to ID
requirements in all public areas. Plate is to be clearly marked by engraving and black filled in
paint, no other form of making will be acceptable. All connectors used in constructing plates
shall be D series. All plates are to be mounted flush with surface and are to be aligned correctly.
All plate designs are to be approved by the AV consultant before fabrication, sample of
finish and detailed drawings are to be provided.
266
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
-3
Installation Equipment
E-6
42U Closed Rack or to suit /w Vent & Blank Panels, Shelves, Power Distributors
No's plus ID panel as required
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their
product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
Equipment racks shall be constructed of 16 gauge (minimum) cold rolled steel & shall have rear doors
& square front vertical corners. Rack dimensions shall not exceed 22 ½ “Wide by 15 “Deep by 42 U
high. Finish shall be approved by the AV consultant /Employer. The front Door shall have clear
lockable (Minimum
5mm Thick) Perspex panel with minimum dimensions opening at strategic location to enable the
operator to by
Pass faulty equipment as necessary.
Each rack shall be equipped with permanently mounted AC power 3 Conductor grounded Strip line rated
for
10 Amps with outlets on 6’ Centers, Extending the height of the rack & with interior
incandescent illumination
Connected there to for ease in servicing & connecting the installed components .Any
unused panels mounting
Space in the racks or enclosure shall be filled in with blank or ventilating Panels & Shelves.
If tenderer wishes to offer any other brand then fully specifications will be
required. Nonproprietary manufactured units will be considered
267
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Installation Equipment
E-7
12 U Closed Rack or to suit, /w Vent & Blank Panels, Shelves,
Power distributor 3 No's .plus ID panel as required
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their
product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
Equipment racks shall be constructed of 16 gauge (minimum) cold rolled steel & shall have rear doors
& square front vertical corners. Rack dimensions shall not exceed 22 ½ “Wide by 15 “Deep by 12 U
high. Finish shall be approved by the AV consultant /Employer. The front Door shall have clear
lockable (Minimum
5mm Thick) Perspex panel with minimum dimensions opening at strategic location to enable the
operator to by
Pass faulty equipment as necessary.
Each rack shall be equipped with permanently mounted AC power 3 Conductor grounded Strip line
rated for
10 Amps with outlets on 6’ Centers, Extending the height of the rack & with interior
incandescent illumination
Connected there to for ease in servicing & connecting the installed components .Any
unused panels mounting
Space in the racks or enclosure shall be filled in with blank or ventilating Panels & Shelves.
If tenderer wishes to offer any other brand then fully specifications will be
required. Nonproprietary manufactured units will be considered
268
Project:
Assembly
System:
Equipment
Reference No:
8
Item Description:
plates
Assam Legislative
Installation
EBroadcasting enclosure box (outdoor rated ) with necessary
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet
or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product
offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
Detail Specifications:
The Broadcasting enclosure madeof mild steel can be custom made based on submitted drawings
and shallbe of a matte black powder coat finish.Please note,
Acceptable : Custom, Proprietary from OEM manufacturer or approved equivalent.
269
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item
Description
:
Video
B-1
5500 ANSI Lumens WXGA Projector with Standard Lens
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to
be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the Supplier must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their
product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
This unit shall be 5500 ANSI Lumens WXGA Projector with Standard Lens and shall have the
following minimum specification.
Detail Specification:
Display Technology
:  3 x LCD
 Native WXGA 1280 x 800 resolution
Resolution
: 1280 x 800
WXGA Brightness
: 5,500 Lumens
Contrast
: 800:1
Lamp
:  330W
 Normal mode 2000 hours, eco mode 3000 hours
Signal Compatibility
:  Up to
UXGA/SXGA+/SXGA/WXGA(Native)/XGA/SVGA/VGA/MAC
 Accepts current HDTV/DTV formats (720p-1080p)
 NTSC, NTSC 4.43, PAL, PAL M, SECAM, PAL-N, PAL 60
Pixel Clock
: 140 MHz (Analog input)/162MHz (digital)
Scan Rates
:  Horizontal frequency 15-100kHz
 Vertical frequency 48100Hz
Inputs, Control and Networking
:  Input 1: HDMI (Version 1.3 with deep color) x 1; DSub 15x1
 Input 2: BNC x 5 (R, G, B, H, V & Y, Pb/Cb, Pr/Cr &
Composite)
 Input 3: S-Video (Mini DIN 4-pin), RCA x 3 (Video/Y,
Pb/Cb, Pr/Cr)
 Audio In - Mini jack x 2 (1,2)(stereo) and RCA x 2 (R, Lmono)
 Outputs: D-Sub15 (Monitor out) x 1, Audio out - Mini jack
x 1 (stereo)
270
 RJ45 LAN
x1
 Control port - Dsub9 x1
Acceptable:
Christie, Panasonic, Projection Design or Approved Equivalent
271
Project:
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
drop.
Assam Legislative Assembly
Video
B-2
164" Diagonal Motorised screen 16:10 Format with 800mm additional
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their
product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification :
This unit shall be a 164" Diagonal Motorised screen 16:10 Format with 800mm additional
drop.The unit shall have the minimum specification as shown below…
ceiling with a built in housing case along with control switch. The unit shall have the minimum
specification as shown below:
Detail Specification
Screen Size
:
164” 16:10 format
Screen Type
:
Motorised
Surface material :
Matt white
Motor shall be UL Certified with 220 -240 Volts AC 50 HZ,
Three wire Instantly Reversible, Life time lubricated with Pre-set. Accessible Limit Switches.
MultipleStation Control rated 220 Volts AC 50 Hz with 3 Position rocker switches with cover plates to
stop Screen at
Any point. Automatic Override allows only one signal to reach to motor when operates simultaneously
Additional Drop – 800mm
Acceptable :
Dalite, Draper, Stewart or Approved Equivalent
272
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Video
B-3,B-5
3100 Ansi Lumens WXGA ultra short throw Projector ( Native :
16:10)&Pole mount bracket for the projector
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what
their product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
The unit shall be a 3100 Ansi Lumens WXGA ultra short throw Projector(Native: 16:10) and Pole
mount bracket for above projectorshall have the minimum specification as shown below…
General Specification:
Brightness:
Contrast(Full On/Off):
Native Resolution:
3,100 Lumens
8,000:1
1280x800
Aspect Ratio:
16:10 (WXGA)
Video Modes:
3D Modes:
3D Glasses Type:
Shutter Digital Inputs:
HDMI HDBaseT:
No
Max Power:
Voltage:
720p, 1080i, 1080p/60
1080p/24, 1080p/50, 525i
525p, 576p,
625i
625p, 1125i,
480p
480i
PC 3D Ready
340 Watts
100V - 240V
B-5 - Pole mount bracket for the projector
Acceptable:
Panasonic ,LG ,Samsung or Approved Equivalent
273
Project:
Assembly
System:
Video
Reference No:
4
Item Description:
Assam Legislative
B76" Diagonal motorised projection Screen ( 16:10 format ) with 500mm
additional drop
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet
or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product
offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
This unit shall be a 76" Diagonal projection Screen (16:10format)and the unit shall have the
minimum specification as shown below…
ceiling with a built in housing case along with control switch. The unit shall have the minimum
specification as shown below:
Detail
Specification:
Screen Size
format
Screen Type
Projection Screen
Surface material
white
:
76” 16:10
:
Tensioned Electric
: Matt
Motor shall be UL Certified with 220 -240 Volts
AC 50 HZ,
Three wire Instantly Reversible, Life time lubricated with Pre-set. Accessible
Limit Switches.
Multiple Station Control rated 220 Volts AC 50 Hz with 3 Position rocker switches with cover
plates to stop Screen at
Any point. Automatic Override allows only one signal to reach to motor when
operates simultaneously
Operating: LVC Module operating with 3 button dry contact
Momentary closure
Acceptable:
Dalite, Draper or Approved Equivalent
274
Project:
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Assam Legislative Assembly
Video
B-6
22" LCD Display with HDMI(2), CV input with necessary mounting bracket
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet
or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product
offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General
Specification:
This unit shall be 22" LCD Display with HDMI(2), CV input with necessary mounting bracket. The
unit shall have the minimum specification as shown below…
DetailSpecification:
Display
Screen Size
55.88cm (22)
Resolution
1920 x 1080
Video
Clear Motion Rate
100Hz
Dynamic Contrast Ratio
Mega Contrast
Video
Sound Output(RMS)
3.0 watts x 2
Dolb
Dolby Digital Plus/Dolby Pulse
y
dts 2.0 + Digital Out / DTS Premium Audio
DTS Premium Sound
System
DTV Tuner
Ready
Input&Output
Component In (Y/Pb/Pr)
1
Composite In (AV
1 (Common Use for Component Y)
HDMI
2
USB
2
Headphone
1
Power
Power Supply
AC 100 - 240V 50/60Hz
Power Consumption (Max)
Acceptable:
Samsung,LG,Panasonic or approved equivalent
275
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Video
B-7
55" LED LCD Display with 1 HDMI, 1 DVI, 1 Display Port with RS232 control
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what
their product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
The unit shall be a 55" LED LCD Display with 1 HDMI, 1 DVI, 1 Display Port with RS232 control
and shall have the minimum specification as shown below…
Detail Specification
Screen Size
139.7cm
(55) Panel Type
120Hz D-LED BLU Resolution
1920 x 1080 (16:9) Pixel Pitch (HxV)
0.21 (H) x 0.63 (V Active Display Size (HxV)
1,209.6 (H) x 680.4 (V) Contrast Ratio
5,000:1
Viewing Angle (H/V)
178:178
Response Time
8ms
Display Color
10 bit Dithering - 1.07 Billion
Color Gamut
0.72
H-Scanning Frequency
30 ~ 81kHz Maximum Pixel Frequency
148.5MHz V-Scanning Frequency
48 ~ 75Hz Brightness
450nit
RGB In
Analog D-SUB, DVI-D, Display Port 1.2
Video In
HDMI1, Component
(CVBS Common) Audio In
Stereo Jack
RGB Out
DP1.2 (Loop-out) Audio Out
276
Stereo Jack
Stand Type
Acceptable :
Foot Stand (Optional)
Samsung ,LG,Panasonic or Approved Equivalent
277
Project
:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System
: Video
Reference No : B-8 & B-9
Item Description: 55" LED LCD with 5.7mm Bezel
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their
product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
The unit shall be a 55” Professional LED Monitor with 2 HDMI Input, 1 VGA Input, 1 DVI-D , 1 DP , 1
RS232 with Native
HD Resolution and shall have the minimum specification as shown below…
Detail Specification:
Screen Size
:
55” Aspect Ratio
:
16:9
:
Brightness
Max 700 cd/m²
:
Contrast Ratio (Dynamic)
3500 : 1
Resolution
:
1920 x 1080
Pixel pitch
:
0.63mm (H) x
:
0.63mm (V) Response Time
8ms
Connectivity
Input
RGB
:
Analog D-SUB, DVI-D, Display Port 1.2
Video
:
Component(CVBS Common), HDMI1, HDMI 2
Audio
Output
:
Stereo mini Jack
RGB
:
Display Port
:
1.2(Loop-out) Audio
Stereo Mini Jack
Power Supply
Power Consumption
:
:
Off Mode & Sleep Mode
On Mode
/713 (BTU) Dimension
96.6mm
AC 100 - 240 V ~ (+/- 10%), 50/60Hz
:
Less than 0.5 watts
290W (Max), 175W (Typical),
:
1,213.5 x 684.3 x
278
Viewing Angle(Horizontal/Vertical)
:
178˚/178˚
B-9 -Specialised video wall bracket for the above display
Acceptable:
Samsung ,LG,Panasonic or Approved Equivalent
279
Project
System
Reference No.
Item Description
:
:
:
:
Assam Legislative Assembly
Video
B-10
32" LCD TV with wall mounting bracket
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what
their product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
This unit shall be a 32” LCD TV with wall mounting bracket and shall have the minimum specification
as shown below…
Detail Specification:
Screen Size
Resolution
Sound Output(RMS)
Speaker Type
Vide
o
Audi
o
: 81.28cm (32)
: 1920 x 1080
: 10 watts x 2
: Down Firing + Full Range
Connectivity
HDMI
: 3
USB
: 2
Headphone
: 1
Component In (Y/Pb/Pr)
: 1
Composite In (AV)
: 1 (Common Use for
Component Y) Digital Audio Out (Optical)
: 1
RF In (Terrestrial/Cable Input)
: 1
DVI Audio In (Mini Jack)
: 1 (Common Use for PC
Audio in) Ethernet (LAN)
: 1
Tuner/Broadcast
ing
DTV Tuner
:
Ready Analog Tuner
: Yes Auto Channel Search
: Yes
Acceptable:
Samsung, Panasonic, Sony or Approved Equivalent
280
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Video
B-11
HDMI Twisted Pair Transmitter & Receiver to handle true HD resolution
with deep colour up to 100 Mtr ( HDMI TX RX )
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their
product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
The unit shall be a HDMI Twisted Pair Transmitter & Receiver to handle true HD resolution with
deep colour up to
100 Mtr ( HDMI TX RX )and shall have the minimum specification as shown below…
Detail Specification:
Transmitter
INPUTS:
1 HDMI connector.
OUTPUTS:
1 HDBaseT twisted pair RJ−45 connector.
PORTS:
D−sub connector.
1 IR on a 3.5mm mini jack, 1 RS−232 on a 9−pin
BANDWIDTH:
10.2Gbps (3.4Gbps
per graphic channel). RS-232 BAUD RATE:
115200
COMPLIANCE WITH HDMI STANDARD:
Supports HDMI and HDCP.
POWER CONSUMPTION:
12V
DC,275mA. OPERATING TEMPERATURE:
0° to 40°C (32° to 104°F). STORAGE TEMPERATURE:
−40° to +70°C (−40° to 158°F).
HUMIDITY:
Detail Specification:
Receiver
10% to 90%, RHL non−condensing.
INPUTS:
1 HDMI connector.
OUTPUTS:
1 HDBaseT twisted pair RJ−45 connector.
PORTS:
connector.
1 IR on a 3.5mm mini jack, 1 RS−232 on a 9−pin D−sub
MAX. DATA RATE:
10.2Gbps (3.4Gbps per
graphic channel). RS-232 BAUD RATE:
115200
281
COMPLIANCE WITH HDMI
STANDARD:
POWER CONSUMPTION:
Supports HDMI and HDCP.
12V DC,
295mA. OPERATING TEMPERATURE:
0° to
40°C (32° to 104°F). STORAGE TEMPERATURE:
−40° to +70°C (−40° to 158°F)
HUMIDITY:
Acceptable:
10% to 90%, RHL non−condensing.
Kramer,Extron or Approved Equivalent
282
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Video
B-12
4 x 1 HDMI Switcher
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with
no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what
their product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
This unit shall be a4 x 1 HDMI Switcher and shall have the minimum specification as shown
below…
Detail Specification:
INPUTS
OUTPUTS
BANDWIDTH
COMPLIANCE
RESOLUTION
POWER CONSUMPTION
CONTROLS
Acceptable:
: 4 HDMI connectors
: 1 HDMI connector
: Supports up to 2.25Gbps per graphic channel
: HDCP& HDMI
: Up to UXGA; 1080p , Deep Color
: 100−240V AC, 50/60Hz, 10VA
: Front panel buttons, infrared control, RS−232, Ethernet
Extron ,Kramer or Approved Equivalent
283
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Video
B-13
8 x 1HDMI Switcher
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their
product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
This unit shall be a8 x 1 HDMI Switcher and shall have the minimum specification as shown
below…
Detail Specification:
INPUTS
OUTPUTS
BANDWIDTH
channel
COMPLIANCE WITH HDMI STANDARD
HDCP RESOLUTION
color POWER CONSUMPTION
CONTROLS
Ethernet
Acceptable
:
:
:
:
:
:
8 HDMI connectors
1 HDMI connectors
Supports up to 2.25Gbps bandwidth per graphic
Supports HDMI and
Up to UXGA; 1080p, deep
: 12VA
: Front panel buttons, infrared control , RS−232,
Extron ,Kramer or Approved Equivalent
284
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Video
B-14
HDMI 1 IN 2 out Distribution Amplifier ( 1x2 HDMI DA )
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their
product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
This unit shall be a HDMI 1 IN 2 out Distribution Amplifier ( 1x2 HDMI DA )and shall
have the minimum specification as shown below…
Detail Specification:
INPUT:
1 HDMI
connector. OUTPUTS:
2 HDMI
connectors.
MAX. DATA RATE:
6.75Gbps (2.25Gbps
per graphic channel). COMPLIANCE WITH HDMI STANDARD :
Supports HDMI and HDCP.
CONTROLS:
EDID SETUP button,
input select button. INDICATOR LEDS:
INPUT , OUT 1, OUT 2, and ON LEDs. POWER CONSUMPTION:
5V DC, 910mA.
DIMENSIONS:
Acceptable:
12cm x 7.2cm x 2.4cm (4.7" x 2.8" 1.0") W, D, H.
Extron ,Kramer or Approved Equivalent
285
Project:
Assembly
System:
Video
Reference No:
15
Item Description:
Switcher
Assam Legislative
B16 x 16 Digital Media
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet
or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product
offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General
Specification :
This unit shall be a16 x 16 Digital Media Switcher and shall have the minimum specification
as shown below…
Detail
Specification:
VIDEO
16x16 digital matrix, modular input cards and factorySwitcher
configurable outputs, Crestron Quick
Switch HD®
Input Signal
Types
Configurable via modular plug-in cards supporting HDMI®, Display Port
Multimode[11], DVI, HDBaseT®, SDI, RGB/VGA, component, S-Video,
composite, DM® CAT, DM Fiber, DM 8G+™, DM 8G® Fiber, DM 8G SM
Fiber, & H.264 streaming
Output Signal
Types
Configurable via factory-installed output cards supporting DM CAT, DM
Fiber, DM 8G+, DM
8G Fiber, DM 8G SM Fiber, HDBaseT, HDMI, DVI[12], & H.264 streaming
(All input cards also
include HDMI pass-thru outputs)
Forma
ts
HDMI, HDBaseT, or DM 8G w/Deep Color, 3D, & 4K[3]; DM (1st
generation) w/Deep Color &
3D; DVI; HDCP content protection support; SD-SDI, HD-SDI, & 3G-SDI;
RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, YPbPr, Y/C, NTSC, & PAL; H.264 (MPEG-4 part 10
286
AVC)
Input Resolutions
for each input card Output Resolutions
Refer to the specifications
Refer to
the specifications for each output card Backplane Data Rate
12.5 Gbps
287
Detail Specification :
AUDIO
Switcher
switching, plus independent
Input Signal
Types
Output Signal
Types
Formats
card
16x16 digital multichannel audio-follow-video matrix
16x16 stereo matrix for audio
breakaway
Configurable via modular plug-in cards supporting HDMI,
Display Port Multimode[11], HDBaseT, SDI, Analog (stereo 2-
channel), SPDIF, DM CAT, DM Fiber, DM 8G+, DM 8G Fiber, DM
8G SM Fiber, & H.264 streaming
Configurable via factory-installed output cards supporting DM
CAT, DM Fiber, DM
8G+, DM 8G Fiber, DM 8G SM Fiber, HDBaseT, HDMI, Analog
(stereo 2-channel), &
H.264 streaming; (All input cards also include HDMI pass-thru
outputs, and most digital audio input cards also include
Analog stereo pass-thru audio outputs)
Refer to the specifications for each input and output
Communications
Ethernet
USB
Digital Media
10/100/1000 Mbps, auto-switching, auto-negotiating, autodiscovery, full/half duplex, DHCP
USB signal routing via select input cards,
transmitters, receivers, and extenders
USB computer console port
for setup
DM 8G+, DM 8G Fiber, DM 8G SM Fiber, DM Fiber, DM
CAT, DMNet®, HDCP, EDID, CEC, PoDM, Ethernet
HDBaseT
HDCP, EDID, PoH, Ethernet
HDMI
HDCP, EDID, CEC
Ethernet Switch
USB SWITCH
Card Slots
1 – 16
[14]
;
34-port switch with Private Network Mode;
provides (1) rear panel 10Base- T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T
LAN port, (1) internal 100 Mbps port for the switcher, and (32)
internal 100 Mbps ports for the I/O cards
16x16 matrix, follow video or breakaway
288
DM OUTPUTS (SLOT
1 – 2)
(16) DM switcher input card slots;
Each slot accepts (1) DMC-series
input card; Input cards are fieldinstallable
(2) DM switcher output card slots;
Each slot accepts (1) DMCO-series
output card; Output cards require
factory installation
289
Detail Specification:
CONNECT
ORS
(1) 8-wire RJ45 female;
10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T Ethernet port
LAN
(16) sets of (1) 4-pin and (1) 3-pin 3.5mm detachable terminal
blocks;
Comprises (16) DMNet ports with “EIG” power selection ports,
each set associated with a corresponding DM CAT output port
on the output card in either output slot;
Each DMNet port provides power and communications for
a DM CAT device connected via DM cable;
24ABG / EIG 1 – 8
(SLOT 1 – 2)
Each EIG port connects to an external power supply[15], or to the
internal power source via a jumper, to power the DM CAT device
connected to the corresponding DMNet port;
Maximum Load: 40 Watts (1.66 Amps @ 24 Volts DC) per port,
limited to available DMNet power from internal power supply
(see "Power Requirements" below) or external power
supply[15]
(1) IEC 60320 C14 main power inlet;
Mates with removable power cord, included
100-250V~7.0A
50/60Hz
G
(1) 6-32 screw, chassis ground lug
(1) USB Type B female;
COMPUTER
(front)
USB computer console port (6 ft cable included)
Green LCD dot matrix, 128 x 64 resolution, adjustable LED backlight;
LCD
Display
Displays inputs/outputs by name, video & audio signal
information, Ethernet configuration and setup menus
Power Requirements
Main Power
550 Watts @ 100-240 Volts AC, 50/60 Hz
Available DMNet Power
supply
110 Watts (4.6 Amps @ 24 Volts DC) from internal power
Available PoDM/PoH Power
output card
Refer to the specifications for each DM 8G+ input and
Acceptable:
Crestron, AMX or Approved Equivalent.
290
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Video
B-16
Digital media (Cat) Input Card for Digital media Switchers
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering
any product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific
item is to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what
their product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
This unit shall be aDigital media (Cat) Input Card for Digital media Switchers shall have the
minimum specification as shown below…
Detail Specification :
Video
Input Signal Types: (Digital Media over one
CAT5e twisted-pair copper wire), HDBaseT
[1]
Output Signal Types: HDMI or DVI[5] to switcher backplane and HDMI OUT
connector
Formats: HDBaseT, & HDMI with Deep Color
& 3D; HDCP content protection support
Input Resolutions, Progressive: [email protected], [email protected]
(480p), [email protected] (576p), [email protected], [email protected],
[email protected], [email protected], [email protected], [email protected],
[email protected], [email protected] (720p50), [email protected]
(720p60), [email protected], [email protected], [email protected],
[email protected], [email protected], [email protected],
[email protected], [email protected], [email protected], [email protected],
[email protected], [email protected], [email protected] (1080p24),
[email protected] (1080p25), [email protected] (1080p50),
[email protected] (1080p60), [email protected], [email protected],
[email protected], plus any other resolution allowed by HDMI up to
165MHz pixel clock
291
Input Resolutions, Interlaced: [email protected]
(480i), [email protected] (576i),
[email protected] (1080i25), [email protected]
(1080i30), plus any other resolution allowed by
HDMI up to 165MHz pixel clock Output
Resolutions: Matched to input
292
Detail
Specification:
Audio
Input Signal Types: Cat , HDBaseT
Output Signal Types: HDMI (multi-channel) to
switcher backplane and HDMI OUT connector,
Analog stereo 2-channel[3], allows audio
breakaway Digital Formats: Dolby Digital, Dolby
Digital EX, Dolby Digital Plus,
Dolby® TrueHD, DTS®, DTS-ES, DTS 96/24, DTS-HD High Res,
DTS-HD Master Audio™, up
to 8ch PCM Analog
Formats: Stereo 2-channel
Digital-To-Analog Conversion: 24-bit 48 kHz
Performance (Analog): Frequency Response:
20Hz to 20kHz ±0.5dB; S/N Ratio: >95dB, 20Hz
to 20kHz A-weighted;
THD+N: <0.005%
@ 1kHz; Stereo
Separation:
>90dB
Volume Gain Range (Analog): -80dB to 0dB
Connectors
HDMI OUT: (1) 19-pin Type A
HDMI female; HDMI digital
video/audio output;
Also supports DVI[5]
DM IN: (1) 8-pin RJ45
female, shielded; Cat
input, HDBaseT compliant;
PoDM and PoH PSE (Power Sourcing
Equipment) port[2]; Cable
POE IN: (1) 8-pin RJ45 female, PoE input;
AUDIO OUT: (2) RCA female;
293
Unbalanced stereo line-level
audio output[3]; Output
Impedance: 100 Ohms
nominal;
Maximum Output Level: 2 Vrms
Acceptable:
Crestron, AMX or Approved Equivalent
294
Project:
Assembly
System:
Video
Reference No:
17
Item Description:
Switchers
Assam Legislative
BHDMI Input Card suitable for Digital media
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering
any product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific
item is to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that
they meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate
what their product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
Detail
Specification:
Input Signal Types:
HDMI, DVI, Display Port Multimode
Output Signal Types:
HDMI or DVIto switcher backplane andHDMI OUT connector
Formats:
HDMI w/Deep Color & 3D, DVI, HDCP content protection support
Input Resolutions, Progressive:
[email protected], [email protected]
(480p), [email protected] (576p), [email protected], [email protected],
[email protected], [email protected], [email protected], [email protected],
[email protected], [email protected] (720p50), [email protected]
(720p60), [email protected], [email protected], [email protected],
[email protected], [email protected], [email protected],
[email protected], [email protected], [email protected], [email protected],
[email protected], [email protected], [email protected] (1080p24),
[email protected] (1080p25), [email protected] (1080p50),
[email protected] (1080p60), [email protected], [email protected],
[email protected], plus any other resolution allowed by HDMI up to
165MHz pixel clock
295
Detail
Specification:
Input Resolutions, Interlaced:
[email protected] (480i), [email protected]
(576i), [email protected] (1080i25),
[email protected] (1080i30), plus any other
resolution allowed by HDMI up to 165MHz pixel
clock Output Resolutions:
Matched to inputs
Audio
Input Signal Types:
HDMI or Display Port
Multimode supporting
HD
lossless multi-channel up to 7.1
Output Signal Types:
HDMI (multi-channel) to switcher backplane and
HDMI OUT connector, Analog stereo 2-channel
, allows audio breakaway
Formats:
Dolby
Digital
, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby
Digital Plus, Dolby
True HD, DTS
, DTS-ES, DTS 96/24, DTSHD High Res, DTS-HD
Master Audio
, Up to 8ch PCM
Digital-To-Analog Conversion:
24-bit 48 kHz
Performance (Analog):
Frequency Response: 20Hz to
20kHz ±0.5dB; S/N Ratio:
>95dB, 20Hz to 20kHz A-
296
weighted; THD+N: <0.005% @
1kHz;
Stereo Separation:
>90dB Volume Gain
Range (Analog):
-80dB to 0dB, adjustable
from 0% to 100% USB
Protocols:
Supports USB HID class devices
Connectors
HDMI OUT:
(1) 19-pin Type A
HDMI female; HDMI
digital video/audio
output; Also supports
DVI
297
General Specification :
This unit shall be a HDMI Input Card suitable for Digital media Switchers shall have the
minimum specification as shown below…
Detail Specification:
HDMI IN:
(1) 19-pin Type A
HDMI female; HDMI
digital video/audio
input;
Also supports DVI and Display Port Multimode
USB HID:
(1) USB Type B female, USB device port for connection to the
USB host interface of a computer or other USB HID-compliant host
AUDIO OUT:
(2) RCA female;
Unbalanced stereo line-level audio output with level control
Maximum Output Level: 2
Vrms; Output Impedance:
100 Ohms nominal
Acceptable
:
Crestron, AMX or Approved Equivalent
298
Project
:
System
Reference No
Item Description
:
:
:
Assam Legislative Assembly
B-18,B-19
2Digital media cat output w/1 HDMI & 6 HDMI w/6 Stereo Analog Audio
Output Card suitable for 16 x 16 Digital media
switcher
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their
product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
This unit shall be a2Digital media cat output w/1 HDMI & 6 HDMI w/6 Stereo Analog Audio Output Card
suitable for
16 x 16 Digital media switchershould have minimum specification as indicated below…
Detail Specification:
Output Signal
Types:
Video Formats:
Audio Formats:
Output
Resolutions,
Progressive:
Output
Resolutions,
Interlaced:
(Digital Media over one single-mode fibre optic strand), HDMI,
SMF & HDMI with Deep Color & 3D, HDCP content protection support;
Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS, DTS-ES, DTS
96/24, DTS-HD High Res, DTS-HD Master Audio, Up to 8ch PCM;
[email protected], [email protected] (480p), [email protected] (576p), [email protected],
[email protected]
[email protected], [email protected], [email protected], [email protected],
[email protected], 1280x
[email protected] (720p50), [email protected] (720p60), [email protected],
[email protected], 1280x960
@60Hz, [email protected], [email protected], [email protected],
[email protected], 1400x1050
@60Hz, [email protected], [email protected], [email protected],
[email protected], 1920x1080
@24Hz (1080p24), [email protected] (1080p25), [email protected] (1080p50),
1920x1080
@60Hz (1080p60), [email protected], [email protected],
[email protected], plus any other resolution allowed by HDMI up to
165MHz pixel clock;
[email protected] (480i), [email protected] (576i), [email protected] (1080i25),
[email protected]
(1080i30), plus any other resolution allowed by HDMI up to 165MHz pixel clock
299
Output Signal Types:
Video Formats:
Audio
Formats:
DM CAT (Digital Media over shielded twisted-pair copper wire),
HDMI®, DVI[2];
DM CAT & HDMI with Deep Color & 3D, HDCP content
protection support;
Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS, DTS-ES,
DTS 96/24,
DTS-HD High Res, DTS-HD Master Audio, Up to 8ch PCM;
300
Output
Resolutions,
Progressive:
Output
Resolutions,
Interlaced:
[email protected],
[email protected]
(480p),
[email protected]
(576p),
[email protected],
[email protected],
[email protected],
[email protected],
[email protected],
[email protected],
[email protected],
[email protected]
(720p50),
[email protected]
(720p60),
[email protected],
[email protected],
[email protected],
[email protected],
[email protected],
[email protected],
[email protected],
[email protected],
[email protected],
[email protected],
[email protected],
[email protected],
[email protected]
(1080p24),
[email protected]
(1080p25),
[email protected]
(1080p50),
[email protected] (1080p60), [email protected], [email protected],
[email protected], plus any other resolution allowed by HDMI up to
165MHz pixel clock;
[email protected]
(480i), [email protected]
(576i), [email protected]
(1080i25),
[email protected] (1080i30), plus any other resolution allowed by
HDMI up to
165MHz
pixel
clock
B-19 - 2 Digital media
output with 4
HDMI
output
card
Acceptable
:
SM Fiber w/1 HDMI & 6 Digital media cat
Crestron, Extron, AMX or Approved Equivalent
301
Project:
Assembly
System:
System
Reference No:
20
Item Description:
Controller
Assam Legislative
Video
BDigital Media
Single mode fibre
Receiver & Room
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering
any product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific
item is to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that
they meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate
what their product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General
Specification:
This unit shall be a Digital Media Single mode fibre Receiver & Room Controller and
should have minimum specification as indicated below…
Detail
Specification:
Vide
o
Scaler
HD video scaler, motion-adaptive deinterlacer, interlacer, intelligent
frame rate
conversion, Deep Color support, 3D to 2D
, content-adaptive
noise
conversion[3]
reduction, widescreen format selection (zoom, stretch, maintain
aspect-ratio, or
1:1), video wall processing (2x2, 3x2, 3x3, 4x3, or 4x4)[6]
Input Signal Type
SM Fiber (Digital Media over one single-mode fibre optic strand)
Output Signal Types
HDMI, DVI
Formats
support
Input
Resolutions,
Progressive
DM Fiber & HDMI w/Deep Color & 3D[3], DVI, HDCP content protection
[email protected], [email protected] (480p), [email protected] (576p),
[email protected],
[email protected],
[email protected],
[email protected],
[email protected],
[email protected], [email protected], [email protected] (720p50),
[email protected]
(720p60), [email protected], [email protected], [email protected],
[email protected],
[email protected],
[email protected],
[email protected],
302
[email protected],
[email protected],
[email protected],
[email protected],
[email protected],
Input
Resolutions,
Interlaced
Scaler
Output
Resolutions,
Progressive
Scaler Output
Resolutions,
Interlaced
[email protected]
(1080p24),
[email protected]
(1080p25),
[email protected]
(1080p50),
[email protected]
(1080p60),
[email protected], plus any other resolution allowed by HDMI up to
165MHz pixel clock
[email protected] (480i), [email protected] (576i), [email protected]
(1080i25),
[email protected] (1080i30), plus any other resolution allowed by
HDMI up to
165MHz pixel clock
[email protected], [email protected] (480p), [email protected] (576p),
[email protected],
[email protected], [email protected][7], [email protected] (720p50),
[email protected]
(720p60),
[email protected],
[email protected][7],
[email protected],
[email protected], [email protected], [email protected][7],
[email protected][7],
[email protected][7], [email protected][8], [email protected],
[email protected][7],
[email protected] (1080p50), [email protected] (1080p60),
[email protected][8],
[email protected][8]
[email protected] (480i), [email protected] (576i), [email protected]
(1080i25),
[email protected] (1080i30)
303
Audio
Input Signal
Type
Output Signal
Type
SM Fiber
HDMI
Dolby Digital®, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby® TrueHD, DTS®, DTS-
Formats
ES, DTS
96/24, DTS-HD High Res, DTS-HD Master Audio™, up to 8ch PCM
Communications
Ethernet
duplex, DHCP
10/100 Mbps, auto-switching, auto-negotiating, auto-discovery, full/half
2-way device control and monitoring up to 115.2k baud with hardware
and software handshaking
1-way device control via infrared up to 1.1 MHz or serial TTL/RS-232 (0-5 Volts)
RS-232
IR/Serial
up to
Digital Media
19.2k baud
SM Fiber, HDCP, EDID, CEC, Ethernet
HDMI
HDCP, EDID, CEC
Acceptable:
Crestron ,Extron, AMX or Approved Equivalent
304
Project:
Assembly
System:
System
Reference No:
21
Item Description:
201
Assam Legislative
Video
BDigital Media Transmitter
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their
product offers as an
alternative and the level of deviation must be
indicated.
General
Specification:
This unit shall be anDigital Media Transmitter 201should have minimum specification as
indicated below…
Detail
Specification:
Switcher:
2x1 combination digital/Analog switch, Crestron Quick Switch HD
Input Signal Types:
HDMI , DVI[2], Display Port Multimode[2], RGB, component
(YPbPr)[3], S-Video (Y/C)[3], composite[3]
Output Signal Types:
(Digital Media over one CAT5e twisted-pair copper wire)[1], HDBaseT, HDMI, DVI[2]
Formats:
HDMI, DVI, HDCP content protection support, computer up to
UXGA/WUXGA, HD up to 1080p60, NTSC or PAL
Input Resolutions, HDMI & DVI, Progressive:
[email protected],
[email protected] (480p), [email protected] (576p), [email protected],
[email protected], [email protected], [email protected], [email protected],
[email protected], [email protected], [email protected] (720p50),
[email protected] (720p60), [email protected], [email protected],
[email protected], [email protected], [email protected],
[email protected], [email protected], [email protected],
[email protected], [email protected], [email protected],
305
[email protected], [email protected] (1080p24), [email protected]
(1080p25), [email protected] (1080p50), [email protected] (1080p60),
[email protected], [email protected],
[email protected], plus any other resolution
allowed by HDMI up to 165MHz pixel clock
Input Resolutions, HDMI & DVI, Interlaced:
[email protected] (480i),
[email protected] (576i), [email protected] (1080i25),
[email protected] (1080i30), plus any other resolution
allowed by HDMI up to 165MHz pixel clock
Input Resolutions, RGB:
[email protected], [email protected]
(480p), [email protected] (576p), [email protected], [email protected],
[email protected], [email protected] (720p50), [email protected] (720p60),
[email protected], [email protected], [email protected], [email protected],
[email protected], [email protected], [email protected], [email protected],
306
Connectors
LAN: (1) 8-wire RJ45 female, shielded;
10BaseT/100BaseTX Ethernet port
DM OUT: (1) 8-pin RJ45 female,
shielded; DM output, HDBaseT
compliant;
PoDM and PoH PD (Powered Device) port[4];
Connects to the cat input of a Digital Media switcher,
receiver/room controller, HDMI OUT: (1) 19-pin Type A HDMI
female;
HDMI digital video/audio
output; Also supports
DVI[2]
PWR 24VDC 0.75A: (1) 2.1 x 5.5 mm DC power connector;
24 Volt DC power input;
Ground: (1) 6-32 screw, chassis ground lug
USB HID: (1) USB Type B female;
USB 2.0 device port for connection to the USB host
interface of a computer or other USB HID-compliant host
HDMI IN: (1) 19-pin Type A HDMI female;
HDMI digital video/audio input;
Also supports DVI and Display Port
Multimode[2] RGB IN: (1) DB15HD
female;
RGB (VGA), component, S-Video, or composite video input[3];
Formats: RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, YPbPr, Y/C,
NTSC, PAL; Input Levels: 0.5 to 1.5 Vp-p
with built-in DC restoration; Input
Impedance: 75 Ohms;
Sync Input Type: AutoDetect RGBHV, RGBS,
RGsB, YPbPr; Sync Input Level: 3 to 5 Vp-p;
Sync Input Impedance: 1k Ohms
AUDIO IN: (1) 3.5mm TRS mini
phone jack; Unbalanced stereo
line-level audio input;
Acceptable
:
Crestron ,Extron, AMX or Approved Equivalent.
307
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Video
B-22
Quad-Window High-Definition Digital Video Processor - 2 DVI-I & 2
HDMI® video inputs
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that
they meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what
their product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General
Specification:
This unit shall be aQuad-Window High-Definition Digital Video Processor - 2 DVI-I & 2
HDMI® video inputs shall have the minimum specification as shown below…
Detail
Specification:
VIDEO
Scaling/Windowing Processor: VXP® video
processing, eight channel image processing,
resolution management, HD technology
Input Signal Types[1]: HDMI®, DVI, Display Port
Multimode[2], SDI, RGB, component (YPbPr), S-Video
(Y/C), composite,
Input Formats: HDMI w/Deep Color, DVI, HDCP content
protection support, SDI, HD-SDI, computer up to
UXGA/WUXGA, HD up to 1080i and 1080p60, NTSC or PAL
Input Resolutions, Progressive: 640x400 to 1920x1200, 480p, 576p,
720p, 1080p[6]
Input Resolutions, Interlaced: 480i, 487i (SDI), 576i, 1080i
Output Signal Types: DVI, HDMI, RGB
Output Formats: DVI, HDMI w/Deep Color, HDCP
content protection support, computer up to
UXGA/WUXGA, HD progressive up to 1080p60, HD
308
interlaced @ 1080i only
Output Resolutions, Progressive: 640x400 to 1920x1200, 480p, 576p,
720p, 1080p[6]
Output Resolution, Interlaced: 1080i via DVI or HDMI only
Color Depth: 24-bit, 16.7M
colours Analog Gain: 0dB (75
ohms terminated) Analog
Bandwidth: 400MHz
309
Detail
Specification:
MEMORY
DDR RAM: 256
MB Flash: 64
MB
Memory Card: Accepts up to 4 GB (1 GB
CompactFlash® card included) Maximum Project Size:
200 MB
Communications
Ethernet: 10/100 Mbps, auto-switching, autonegotiating, auto-discovery, full/half duplex, DHCP, for
control and console
Control Net slave port for control and console
USB: Rear panel host ports for mouse/touch screen
input, front panel client port for console
RS-232: Bidirectional, up to 115.2k baud, hardware and software
handshaking, for console and mouse/touch screen input
Connectors
INPUT – HDMI IN: Up to (4) 19-pin Type A
HDMI female[1]; HDMI digital video/audio
inputs[7];
Signal Types: HDMI, DVI, or Display Port Multimode[2];
Input Resolution, Progressive: 640x400 to 1920x1200, 480p, 576p,
720p, 1080p[6];
Input Resolution, Interlaced: 480i, 576i, 1080i
INPUT – HDMI OUT: Up to (4) 19-pin Type A HDMI female;
HDMI digital video/audio outputs (pass-thru from
corresponding HDMI IN)[2]; Signal Types: HDMI, DVI[2]
INPUT – DVI/RGB/YPBPR: Up to (4) DVI-I female (or
DB15HD female via adapter included)[1];
DVI, RGB, or component video inputs;
Signal Types: DVI, HDMI, Display Port Multimode,
RGB (VGA), or component[2];
INPUT – VIDEO: UP TO (8) SETS OF (3) BNC FEMALE, EACH SET COMPRISING (1)
auto-detecting multi-format Analog
video input[1]; Signal Types:
310
Component, S-Video, or composite;
Formats: YPbPr, Y/C, NTSC or PAL;
Input Resolution: 480i, 576i, 480p, 576p,
720p, 1080i; Horizontal Frequency: 15 to
67.5 kHz;
Vertical Frequency: 25 to 60 Hz;
INPUT LEVELS: 0.5 TO 1.5 VP-P WITH BUILT-IN DC
RESTORATION; Input Impedance: 75 Ohms
nominal
311
Detail Specification:
INPUT – SDI/HD-SDI: UP TO (4) BNC FEMALE, SDI
VIDEO INPUTS[1]; Signal Types: SDI (SMPTE 125M),
HD-SDI (SMPTE 274M, 295M, 296M); Formats: SDI and
HD-SDI interlaced 487i, 576i, 1080i25, 1080i30;
HD-SDI progressive 720p24, 720p25, 720p30, 720p50, 720p60, 1080p24,
1080p25, 1080p30
INPUT – QM: Up to (4) 8-wire RJ45 female
Input Resolution, Progressive: 640x400 to 1920x1200, 480p, 576p,
720p, 1080p[6];
Input resolution, interlaced: 480i,
576i, 1080i; Horizontal Frequency:
15 to 91 kHz;
Vertical Frequency: 25 to 85 Hz;
Delay Skew Compensation: 0
to 22 ns; Maximum Cable
Length: 450 ft
OUTPUT – DVI/RGBHV: (1) DVI-I female (or DB15HD
female via adapter included);
DVI or RGB video output[10];
Signal Types: DVI, HDMI, or RGB (VGA)[2];
Digital Formats: DVI, HDMI w/Deep Color, HDCP content
protection support, EDID;
Analog Formats: RGBHV;
Output Resolution, Progressive: 640x400 to 1920x1200, 480p, 576p,
720p, 1080p[6];
Output Resolution, Interlaced: 1080i
(digital only); Horizontal Frequency: 30
to 91 kHz;
Vertical Frequency: 50 to 85 Hz;
Analog Sync Output Type:
RGBHV; Analog Sync Output
Level: TTL, 5Vp-p FORMAT:
RGBHV;
Output Resolution: Same as RGBHV OUTPUT;
RS-232: (1) DB9 female, bidirectional
RS-232 port; Computer console and
312
mouse/touch screen input;
Up to 115.2k baud; hardware and software handshaking support
LAN: (1) 8-wire RJ45 female;
10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet port for console and control
USB A – B: (2) USB Type A female host ports for mouse or touch
Acceptable
: Crestron, AMX or Approved
Equivalent.
313
Project
:
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Assam Legislative Assembly
Video System
B-23
Digital Media Cat5 Receiver & Room Controller w/Scaler
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet or
exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product offers
as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
This unit shall be anDigital MediaCat5 Receiver& Room Controller w/Scaler and should have
minimum specification as indicated below…
Detail
Specification:
Video
Scaler: HD video scaler, motion-adaptive deinterlacer, interlacer, intelligent
HD video scaler, motion-adaptive deinterlacer, interlacer, intelligent
frame rate conversion, Deep Color support, 3D to 2D
conversion [2] , content- adaptive noise reduction,
widescreen format selection (zoom, stretch, maintain
aspect-ratio, or 1:1), video wall processing (2x2, 3x2,
3x3, 4x3)
Input Signal Types:
Digital Mediaover one CAT5e twisted-pair
copper wire), HDBaseT Output Signal Types:
HDMI, DVI [3]
Formats:
HDMI w/Deep Color & 3D [2]
, DVI, HDCP content protection support
Input Resolutions, Progressive:
[email protected], [email protected]
(480p), [email protected] (576p), [email protected], [email protected],
[email protected], [email protected], [email protected], [email protected],
[email protected], [email protected] (720p50), [email protected]
(720p60), [email protected], [email protected], [email protected],
314
[email protected], [email protected], [email protected],
[email protected], [email protected], [email protected], [email protected],
[email protected], [email protected], [email protected] (1080p24),
[email protected] (1080p25), [email protected] (1080p50),
[email protected] (1080p60), 1920x120[email protected], plus any other
315
Input Resolutions, Interlaced:
[email protected] (480i), [email protected]
(576i), [email protected] (1080i25),
[email protected] (1080i30), plus any other
resolution allowed by HDMI up to 165MHz pixel
clock
Scaler Output Resolutions, Progressive:
[email protected],
Scaler Output Resolutions, Interlaced:
[email protected] (480i),
[email protected] (576i), [email protected] (1080i25), [email protected]
(1080i30)
Audio
Input Signal Types: CAT
, HDBaseT Output
Signal Type: HDMI
Formats: Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX,
Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby® TrueHD, DTS®,
DTS-ES, DTS 96/24, DTS-HD High Res,
DTS-HD Master Audio™, Up to 8ch PCM
Communications
Digital Media: CAT, HDCP management, EDID
format management, CEC, HDBaseT compliant
Ethernet: 10/100 Mbps, auto-switching, autonegotiating, auto-discovery, full/half duplex, DHCP
Connectors – Bottom
HDMI OUT:
(1) 19-pin Type A
HDMI female; HDMI
digital video/audio
output; Also supports
DVI[3]
USB HID:
(1) USB Type A female;
316
USB 2.0 host port for connection of a
mouse/keyboard or other USB HID- compliant
device
COM:
(1) 5-pin 3.5mm detachable
terminal block; Bidirectional
RS-232 port;
Up to 115.2k baud, hardware and software handshaking support
IR 1 – 2:
(1) 4-pin 3.5mm detachable terminal
block comprising (2) IR/ Serial ports;
IR output up to 1.1 MHz;
1-way serial TTL/RS-232 (0-5 Volts) up to 19200 baud
Acceptable:
Crestron ,Extron, AMX or Approved Equivalent
317
Project:
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Assam Legislative Assembly
Video
B-24
4−Channel 3G HD−SDI over Single multi Fiber Optic Transmitter & Receiver
to carry signal up to 1000 mtr
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet or
exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product offers
as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
The unit shall be a 4−Channel 3G HD−SDI over Single mulƟ Fiber OpƟc TransmiƩ er & Receiver to carry
signal up to 1000 mtr and shall have the min. spec as shown below
Detail Specification:
4 SD/HD/3G HD−SDI and dual−link, 75Ω on BNC
INPUTS:
connectors (673T); 1
multi−mode OM3 fibre on SC connectors (673R).
OUTPUTS:
(673T); 4 SD/HD/3G HD−SDI
1 multi−mode OM3 fibre on SC connectors
and dual−link, 75Ω on BNC connectors (673R).
BANDWIDTH:
FIBER OPTIC EXTENSION:
Acceptable:
Up to 3Gbps for each SDI input.
Up to 1000m (>3200ft) for 3G HD−SDI.
Extron, Kramer or Approved Equivalent
INPUT CABLE EQUALIZATION :
140m for HD−SDI, 120m for 3G HD−SDI.
FIBER-OPTIC CONNECTION:
SC connectors for
multimode (OM3) fibre cable. INDICATOR LEDS:
VIDEO, SOURCE, FIBER and ON LEDs.
POWER CONSUMPTION:
5V DC, 520mA (673T); 5V DC, 780mA (673R).
INSERTION LOSS FROM TRANSMITTER TO RECEIVER:
Must not exceed 10dB.
318
Project:
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Assam Legislative Assembly
Video
B-25
HDMI to 3G HD−SDI Format Converter with Dual output
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet or
exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product offers
as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
The unit shall be a HDMI to 3G HD−SDI Format Converter with Dual outputand shall have the min. spec
as shown
below
Detail Specification:
NPUT:
1 HDMI connector.
OUTPUTS:
2 SD/HD/3G HD−SDI on BNC connectors.
MAX. DATA RATE:
Up to 3Gbps. STANDARD COMPLIANCE:
HDMI.
525i, 625i; 1080p
INPUT FORMATS:
@23.98/24/25/29.97/30/50/59.94/60; 1080i
@50/59.94/60; 720p
@50/59.94/60.
INDICATOR LEDS:
SD/HD, OUT, ON. POWER CONSUMPTION:
5V DC, 470mA.
Acceptable:
Extron, Kramer or Approved Equivalent
319
Project:
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Assam Legislative Assembly
Video
B-26
1:10 3G HD-SDI Distribution Amplifier
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet or
exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product offers
as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
The unit shall be a 1:10 3G HD-SDI Distribution Amplifier and shall have the min. spec as shown below
Detail Specification:
INPUTS:
1 SMPTE−259M/292M/424M serial video, 75Ω on a BNC connector.
OUTPUTS:
connectors;
10 equalized and re clocked SMPTE−259M/292M/424M outputs, 75Ω on BNC
1 looped GENLOCK 75Ω/Hi−Z on a BNC connector.
MAX. OUTPUT LEVEL:
800mVpp/75Ω. MAXIMUM DATA
RATE:
Up to 2.97Gbps.
COUPLING:
AC.
POWER CONSUMPTION:
100/240V AC, 50/60Hz,
5VA. DIMENSIONS:
19" x 7" x 1U W, D, H,
rack mountable. WEIGHT:
(3.3lbs) approx.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES:
Acceptable:
1.5kg
Power cord, rack "ears"
Extron, Kramer or Approved Equivalent
320
Project:
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Assam Legislative Assembly
Video
B-27
HD Document Camera with touch sensitive control
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet or
exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product offers
as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
The unit shall be a HD Document Camera with touch sensitive control and shall have the min. spec
as shown below
Detail
Specification:
Camera
Image
2.0M CMOS
Resolution
WXGA, 720p, 1080p
Optical
12X
Digital
10X
Motorized
Camera
Yes
Sensor
XGA, SXGA,
Zoom
Zoom
Head
Input/output
C Video IN (RCA) (1)
S Video IN (4-pin
DIN) (1) Audio IN
Input connectors
(2)
MIC IN (phone
jack) (1) PC Audio
(2)
RGB DB15FLC (2)
Output connectors
321
HDMI (1)
RGB DB15FLC (2)
C Video OUT (RCA) (1)
S Video OUT (4-pin DIN) (1)
Audio OUT (Mini Jack) (1)
322
Imaging Features
Image Storage
16
Negative
Yes
Black/white and color selection
Yes
Freeze
Yes
Split
Yes
Title
Yes
Mirror
Yes
Image
Rotate
0°90°180°270°
Vertically
Camera
330°
On
Board
Rotation
LCD
Monitor
3.5"
PC Connectivity
Driver
Plug-n-Play Frame Rate
Up to 20 fps Computer Connectivity
USB
PC, MAC
OS Support
Lighting
Lights
Arm light: 4W LED lamps
Light Box
Yes
Control
RS232 Control
Yes Remote Control
Yes Form Factor
Full Size
Shooting Area
Acceptable:
440 x 330mm
Aver, Qomo or Approved Equivalent
323
Project:
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Assam Legislative Assembly
Video
B-28
Video Production Switcher with Production software with 6 HD-SDI & 2
HDMI Input & 2 HDMI Output
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet or
exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product offers
as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
The unit shall be a Video Production Switcher with Production software with 6 HD-SDI & 2 HDMI Input
& 2 HDMI Output and shall have the min. spec as shown below
Detail Specification:
Supports 8 or 12 HD or SD Inputs in a variety of
configurations: HD Mode
1) 6 HD-SDI
2) 2 HDMI
2 HDMI outputs for multi view monitoring
Audio I/O
Input: 4 analogue balanced XLR
Output: 2 analogue balanced XLR. Supports embedded audio SDI output from 4-CH XLR Audio input
Two DSK, supports Key and Fill
enr,s Kramer or Approved Equivalent
AcCcute, pMtiaxbalned: Wipe withEbxotrde
Clock on screen
Countdown counter on multiscreen
Two PIP displays with user-defined borders
Tally, GPI interface and RJ45 for firmware upgrade
324
Project:
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Assam Legislative Assembly
Video
B-29,B-30,B-31, & B-32
HDMI Cable 0.9 ,1.8,3.6 &7.6 Meters
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what
their product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
The unit shall be a HDMI Cable 0.9, 1.8, 3.6, 7.6 Meters and shall have the min. spec as shown
below
Detail
Specification:
B29: HDMI Cable 0.9
Meters B30: HDMI
Cable 1.8 Meters B31:
HDMI Cable 3.6 Meters
B32: HDMI Cable 7.6
Meters
TYPE
CONDUCTOR AWG
High Speed and Standard Speed HDMI cables
480i, 480p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p.
28 AWG (7/0.127)
SHIELD
Dual shield against EMI/RFI interference
(a) Al− Mylar
(b) Tinned Copper
CABLE OD (MM)
7.3
Approved Equivalent
cceptable:
Extron,
Kramer
or Yes
MOLDED CONNECTORS
GOLD PLATED
CONNECTORS:
HDCP COMPLIANT:
Yes
Yes
325
Project:
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Assam Legislative Assembly
Video
B-33,B-34, & B-35
HDMI Cable 10.6 ,15,& 22.8Meters
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their
product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
The unit shall be a Standard Speed HDMI Moulded Cables - 10.6,15, &22.8 mtr and shall have
the min. spec as shown below.
Detail Specification:
TYPE:
High−speed HDMI cables.
RESOLUTIONS SUPPORTED:
480i, 480p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p.
CONDUCTOR AWG:
3
SHIELD:
tinned copper.
Dual overall shield against EMI/RFI interference, (a) Al−Mylar, (b)
MOLDED CONNECTORS:
Yes.
GOLDPLATED
CONNECT
ORS:
bles use 26 AWG (7/0.16); 35 & 50ft use 24 AWG (7/0.2).
Yes.
HDCP COMPLIANT:
Yes. FLAME TEST:
CL2.
Acceptable:
Extron, Kramer or Approved Equivalent
326
Project:
Assembly
System:
Video
Reference No:
36
Item Description:
cable
Assam Legislative
B3m HDMI to DVI
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet
or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product
offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General
Specification:
The unit shall be a 3m HDMI to DVI cable and shall have the min. spec as shown below
Detail Specification:
Data rates
:
Supports 4.95 Gbps
Vertical frequency
:
Supports up to 60 Hz
Attenuation
per 10 m Voltage
:
At 0.825MHz <10 dB
Pair impedance
Connector
Acceptable:
:
30 V
: 100ohms +/- 10 ohms
: 1 male DVI-D single link to 1 male HDMI single link
Extron, Kramer or Approved Equivalent
327
Project:
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Assam Legislative Assembly
Video
B-37
0.3m Display Port to HDMI adapter
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that
they meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate
what their product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
The unit shall be a 0.3m Display Port to HDMI adapterand shall have the min. spec as shown
below
Detail Specification:
0.3M DISPLAY PORT TO HDMI ADAPTER
Acceptable:
Extron, Kramer or Approved Equivalent
328
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Video
B-38
Component & Computer Graphics Video to HDMI ProScaleDigital Scalar
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product
that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided
with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet or
exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product offers
as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
This unit shall be a Component & Computer Graphics Video to HDMI Pro Scale Digital Scalar and shall
have the minimum specification as shown below…
Detail Specification:
:
INPUTS
OUTPUTS
OUTPUT RESOLUTION
OUTPUT REFRESH RATE
resolutions
CONTROLS
menu driven
ADDITIONAL CONTROLS
and blue;
Acceptable :
1 UXGA on a 15−pin HD (F) connector; 1 component video
on 3 RCA connectors; 1 unbalanced stereo audio on a 3.5mm
mini jack connector (for the UXGA input); 1 unbalanced
stereo audio (left and right) on RCA connectors
: 1 HDMI connector
: 480i, 480p, 576i, 576p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p, VGA, SVGA,
XGA, WXGA, SXGA, WSXGA, UXGA, WUXGA, NATIVE
: 60Hz for computer graphics resolutions, 50/60Hz for HDTV
:
:
Front panel buttons, contact closure and infrared remote for
OSD
control
Contrast, brightness, hue, saturation and sharpness; red, green
resolution, image
size
Extron ,Kramer or Approved Equivalent
329
Project:
Assembly
System:
Video
Reference No:
39
Item Description:
Control
Assam Legislative
BProfessional DVD Player with RS-232
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that
they meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what
their product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General
Specification:
This unit shall be a Professional DVD Player with RS-232 Control and shall have the
minimum specification as shown below…
Detail
Specification:
GENERAL
Power
requirements:
AC 230V, 50Hz
Power consumption: 11W (at operation) 0.2W (in standby mode)
Dimensions (W x H x D): 19" x 2" x 10.6" (482 x
51 x 269 mm) Weight: 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg)
Audio section
Analog output:
Audio out: -8
dB/1 kØ Digital
output*:
Digital out (optical): -21 dBm to -15 dBm (660 nm ± 30 nm)
* Corresponding to Linear PCM, Dolby Digital, and DTS Digital Surround (with sampling
frequency - 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz)
Detail
Specification:
330
VIDEO SECTION
Video system:
NTSC
Horizontal Resolution: 500 lines
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
64 dB Video output
level Composite: 1.0
V(p-p)/75Ø
S-video-Y: 1.0 V(p-p)/75Ø
S-video-C: 0.286 V(p-p)/75Ø
331
Component-Y: 1.0 V(p-p)/75Ø
Component-Pb/Pr: 0.7
V(p-p)/75Ø HDMI
HDMI Output (Ver. 1.1): HDMI
RS-232C
Serial command: 9-Pin D-SUB
Acceptable : Extron ,Kramer or Approved Equivalent
332
Project:
Assembly
System:
Video
Reference No:
40
Item Description:
Player
Assam Legislative
BBlu-Ray
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their
product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification
:
This unit shall be a Blu-Ray Player and shall have the minimum specification as shown
below…
Detail
Specification:
Picture Quality
24p True Cinema
:
Yes
Full
HD
1080p
:
Yes Precision Cinema HD Upscale
:
Yes
x.v.Colour
:
Yes
Deep
Color
:
Yes PhotoTV
HD
:
Yes Preset Picture Mode
:
Yes IP Content Noise Reduction
: Yes
Video Digital-to-Analog Converter
:
Component (HD: 12-Bit/148.5MHz, SD: 12Bit/108MHz), Y/C
(12bit/54M
Hz)
Audio
Audio D/A Converter
: 192kHz/24bit
DTS-HD Master Audio Decoding
: Yes
Dolby True HD decoding
: Yes
DTS-HD Master Audio Bit: Yes
Stream
Out
Dolby TrueHD bit-stream output
: Yes
333
LPCM (2ch / 6ch / 8ch) thru HDMI
: Yes /
Yes / Yes
DSD output
:
Yes
DTS
bit-stream
out
:
Yes Dolby Digital bit-stream out
: Yes
Terminals
: HDMI
Output x 1
Component Video Output x 1
Composite Video Output x 1
Digital Audio Output: Coaxial x 1
Analog Audio Output 2ch
Ethernet Port: Yes
USB Port x 2 (Front, Rear)
Acceptable :
Equivalent
Sony, Denon, Samsung, or Approved
334
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Video
B-41
HDMI Audio De-Embedder
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their
product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
This unit shall be a HDMI Audio De-Embedder and shall have the minimum specification as
shown below…
Detail Specification:
INPUT
OUTPUTS
:
1 HDMI connector
: 1 HDMI connector, 1 optical digital audio connector, 1
S/PDIF digital audio on an RCA connector, 1 unbalanced
stereo audio on a 3.5mm mini connector
: Supports up to 6.75 Gbps (2.25Gbps per graphic channel),
MAX. DATA RATE
1080p
COMPLIANCE WITH
STANDARDS
CONTROLS
INDICATOR LEDS
Acceptable:
@60Hz, 36−bit Deep
Color
Supports HDMI, HDCP 1.4
:
:
:
Audio source select button
ON, IN, OUT
Extron, Kramer or Approved Equivalent
335
Project:
Assembly
System:
Video
Reference No:
43
Item Description:
Pair
Assam Legislative
BRS-232 Range extender up to 100 mtr -
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that
they meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what
their product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General
Specification:
The unit shall be a RS-232 Range extender up to 100 mtr– Pairand shall have the min. spec
as shown below :
Detail
Specification:
PORT
S:
BAUD RATES:
1 RS−232 on a 9−pin D−sub connector, 1 twisted pair on an RJ−45
connector.
INDICATOR LED:
Up to 115200.
Green for PC, red
for device. OPERATING TEMPERATURE:
0° to
+40°C (32° to 104°F). STORAGE TEMPERATURE:
−40° to +70°C (−40° to 158°F). HUMIDITY:
10% to 90%, RHL non−condensing.
Acceptable
: Extron, Kramer or Approved Equivalent.
336
Project:
Assembly
System:
Video
Reference No:
44
Item Description:
capacity
Assam Legislative
BRecording Streaming , Webcasting up to 1TB storage
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the Supplier must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their
product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
This unit shall be a Recording Streaming; Webcasting up to 1TB storage capacity shall have the
minimum specification as shown below…
General
Specification :
Connecters
CVBS Input Standard
Captured VGA Signal
format
Output Format for
Captured CVBS
Signals Video
Processing
Functions
Audio A/D Performance
CVBS A/D Performance
Standard Accessories
: 1 DVI-I (HDMI, VGA, YPbPr), 2 BNC (Composite Video) & 1 3.5
mm Phone Jack (Audio Line In) audio signal
: PAL/NTSC, from 40 x 30 up to 2048 x 1536 pixels , FPS:1-100
Frames/sec,
YUY2/I420/RGB24/RGB32, CD disc x 1, Easy Installation Guide
CD x 1
: From 176 x 144 to 720 x 576 pixels, Number of FPS: up to 30
Frames/sec, UYVY/YUY2/I420/RGB24/RGB32
: RGB/YUV Conversion, 5-tap image Scale, Motion-adaptive deinterlacer with edge directed field interpolation, Gamma
Correction
: Audio Channel Number: 2 Channels, Sampling Frequency:
8/16/22.05/32/44.1/48/96Kh
z, Sampling Precision: 24 bit,
: 10 bit sampling precision, 4 times oversampling,5-line adaptive
comb filter
: 1 DVI-I to HDMI + YPbPr Breakout Cable
1 DVI-I to VGA Adapter
Acceptable : Wow-Vision or Approved Equivalent.
337
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
IPTV & Digital Signage Management System
B-45& B-46
Digital Media Encoder & IPTV Receiver with LAN Port & HDMI
output, Display Controller, 8GB Memory& IR Remote Control
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any
product that meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is
to be provided with no deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they
meet or exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their
product offers as an alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification
The unit shall be a professional Digital Media Encoder & IPTV Receiver with LAN Port &
HDMI output, Display Controller, 8GB Memory& IR Remote control and with specification
as shown below :
Detail Specification:
B-45:
Communications and
Control
Network
• Ethernet 10/100 Base T. RJ-45 modular jack with integrated LEDs
Mode of Operation
• Standalone or in conjunction with the Administration Software.
IP Setup and Control
information.
• Configuration via On-Board Browser/ Remote status monitoring
• IP/RS232 control protocol to operate with 3rd party Touch Panel
Controllers.
Video Input
Live Network Streams
• Multicast/Unicast UDP based AV streams.
• H.264 and MPEG-2 video/audio contained in an MPEG2 TS. (480i, 480p, 576i, 576p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p60
formats).
• Locally Stored Files (on-board memory of 4GB to 128 GB by option)
338
Detail Specification:
Digital Terrestrial and Satellite TV
• DVB-T2 and DVB-S2 compliant
Audio
Audio Decoding
• MPEG-1/2 Audio Layers I, II
• MPEG-2/4
AAC LC
IR Control
• Channel, volume and setup control via
Remote Control
Unit.
• Control through on-board IR
receiver or using an IR extender
RS232
• Serial port, up to 115200 baud for
Screen on/standby/input
control.
Software Updates
• Latest software can
be loaded either through an
IP connection to an HTTP
server or by inserting a
USB key
Video Output
HDMI Digital
• SD 480i, 480p, 576i, 576p
• HD 720p (60fps), 1080i
(50/60) Phono Analogue
(YPbPr)
• HD 720p(60fps), 1080i
(50/60)
• SD CVBS - NTSC,
PAL
Audio Out - Connectors
• HDMI - Digital Stereo Audio
• 3.5mm Jack - Analogue
Stereo Audio
B-46: IR Remote Control for the above decoder
Acceptable : Media Star, AMX or Approved Equivalents
339
Project:
Assam Legislative Assembly
System:
Reference No:
Item Description:
Video
B-47
Wired IR Sensor for TV Decoder
The following is the minimum specification for this item. The Client is open to considering any product that
meets or exceeds this specification unless the specification states a specific item is to be provided with no
deviation.
In their submission the vendor must complete the Compliance Schedule and indicate that they meet or
exceed each requirement, and where they do not comply they must indicate what their product offers as an
alternative and the level of deviation must be indicated.
General Specification:
This unit shall be a Wired IR Sensor for TV Decoder and shall have the minimum specification as shown
below…
Detail Specification:
IR Sensor Module fitted with 3.5mm Jack for connection to Mediastar Pro Micro Set top Unit to
allow the small IR sensor to be located in a convenient location and the larger receiver unit housed
discreetly behind a screen.
Acceptable : AMX, Media star or Approved Equivalent.
340
Detailed Technical Specification for Building Management
System
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and service necessary for a complete and operating Building
Management System (BMS), utilizing Direct Digital Controls as shown on the drawings, as in
attached Input/Output Summary and as described herein. Drawings are diagrammatic only.
B. All labor, material, equipment and software not specifically referred to herein or on the plans, that is
required to meet the functional intent of this specification, shall be provided without additional
cost to the Client.
C. Client shall be the named license holder of all software associated with any and all incremental
work on the project(s).
1.2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The entire Building Management System (BMS) shall be comprised of a network of interoperable,
stand- alone digital controllers communicating via LonMark/LonTalk communication protocols to
a Network Area Controller (NAC) / Router. Building Management System products shall be
manufactured as per LonWorks products must be approved in writing by the consulting
Engineer and be submitted for approval ten (10) days prior to the date of the bid submittal.
B. The entire Integrated Control and Monitor Management System (IBMS) shall be comprise of a
network of interoperable, stand-alone digital controllers communicating on an open protocol
communication network to a host computer within the facility (when specified) and
communicating via the Internet to a host computer in a remote location. The IBMS shall
communicate to third party systems such as Chillers, Boilers, Air-Handling Systems, Energy
metering systems, Lighting Management System & other energy management systems, Fire-Life
safety systems and other building management related devices with open, interoperable
communication capabilities.
C. The IBMS framework shall utilize JAVA based automation products and services with built-in Internet
connectivity to a broad range of distribution partners in the building automation, energy services,
power/utility, and industrial sectors. The Framework shall bring together the computerization of
control applications under the umbrella of single integrated system architecture. The suite of
component software applications shall support true plug-and-play, multi-vendor interoperability,
resulting in lower automation and information infrastructure costs. The Network Area
Controllers (NAC’s) shall run a JAVA Virtual Machine (JVM) platform and use a common set of
tools for accessing and integrating multiple protocols.
D.
The Building Management System (BMS) shall be comprised of Network Area Controller or
Controllers (NAC) / Routers. The NAC / Router shall connect to the local or wide area network,
depending on configuration. Access to the system, either locally in each building, or remotely
from a central site or sites, shall be accomplished through standard Web browsers, via the Internet
and/or local area network. Each NAC shall communicate to LonMark/LonTalk and/or BACnet
Direct Digital Controllers (DDC) and other open protocol systems/devices.
E. The following software packages shall be loaded into the system as minimum standard :-
341
a.
Complete system operational software
b.
Site specific data manipulation
software c.
Active graphics software
d.
Energy management system
software e.
Alarm indication software
g.
Data Visualization Package
h.
Internet Enabled Remote Monitoring Package.
1.3
SUBMITTAL
A. Eight copies of shop drawings of the components and devices for the entire control system shall be
submitted and shall consist of a complete list of equipment and materials, including
manufacturers catalog data sheets and installation instructions for all controllers, valves, dampers,
sensors, routers, etc. Shop drawings shall also contain complete wiring and schematic diagrams,
software descriptions, calculations, and any other details required to demonstrate that the system
has been coordinated and will properly function as a system. Terminal identification for all control
wiring shall be shown on the shop drawings. A complete written Sequence of Operation shall also
be included with the submittal package. BMS contractors supplying products and systems, as part of
their packages shall provide catalog data sheets, wiring diagrams and point lists to other contractors
for proper coordination of work.
B. Submittal shall also include a trunk cable schematic diagram depicting operator workstations,
control panel locations and a description of the communication type, media and protocol. BMS
contractors shall provide these diagrams for their portions of work; the Systems Integrator
shall be responsible for integrating those diagrams into the overall trunk cable schematic
diagrams for the entire Wide Area Network (WAN).
C. Submittal shall also include a complete point list of all points to be connected to the BMS.
D. Upon completion of the work, provide a complete set of ‘as-built’ drawings and application software
on compact disk. Drawings shall be provided as AutoCAD™ compatible files. Eight copies of the
‘as- built’ drawings shall be provided in addition to the documents on compact disk. BMS
contractors shall provide as-built for their portions of work. The BMS contractor shall be
responsible for as-built pertaining to overall BMS architecture and network diagrams. All asbuilt drawings shall also be installed into the BMS server in a dedicated directory.
1.4
SPECIFICATION NOMENCLATURE
A. Acronyms used in this specification are as follows:
FMCS
Facility Management and Control System
BMS
Building Management System
NAC
Network Area Controller
DDC
Direct Digital Controller
IBC
Interoperable BACnet Controller
GUI
Graphical User Interface
WBI
Web Browser Interface
PMI
Power Measurement Interface
LAN
Local Area Network
WAN
Wide Area Network
OOT
Object Oriented Technology
342
PICS
1.5
Product Interoperability Compliance Statement
DIVISION OF WORK
A. The BMS contractor shall be responsible for all controllers (DDC), control devices, control
panels, controller programming, controller programming software, controller input/output and
power wiring and controller network wiring.
B. The BMS contractor shall also be responsible for the Network Area Controller(s) (NAC), software and
programming of the NAC, graphical user interface software (GUI), development of all graphical
screens, Web browser pages, setup of schedules, logs and alarms, LonWorks network
management and connection of the NAC to the local or wide area network.
1.6
AGENCY AND CODE APPROVALS
A. All products of the BMS shall be provided with the following agency approvals. Verification that the
approvals exist for all submitted products shall be provided with the submittal package. Systems
or products not currently offering the following approvals are not acceptable.
1.7
1.
UL-916; Energy Management Systems
2.
C-UL listed to Canadian Standards Association C22.2 No. 205-M1983 “signal Equipment”
3.
CE
4.
FCC, Part 15, Subpart J, Class A Computing Devices
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
A. The CLIENT shall agree to the manufacturer's standard software and firmware licensing agreement
as a condition of this contract. Such license shall grant use of all programs and application
software to Owner as defined by the manufacturer's license agreement, but shall protect
manufacturer's rights to disclosure of trade secrets contained within such software.
B.
1.8
The CLIENT shall be the named license holder of all software associated with any and all
incremental work on the project(s). In addition, CLIENT shall receive ownership of all job specific
configuration documentation, data files, and application-level software developed for the project.
This shall include all custom, job specific software code and documentation for all configuration
and programming that is generated for a given project and/or configured for use with the NAC,
BMS Server(s), and any related LAN / WAN / Intranet and Internet connected routers and
devices. Any and all required IDs and passwords for access to any component or software
program shall be provided to the owner. The owner shall determine which organizations to be
named in the SI organization ID (“orgid”) of all software licenses. Owner shall be free to direct
the modification of the “orgid” in any software license, regardless of supplier.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Provide factory-shipping cartons for each piece of equipment and control device. Maintain
cartons through shipping, storage, and handling as required to prevent equipment damage. Store
equipment and materials inside and protected from weather.
1.9
JOB CONDITIONS
A. Cooperation with Other Contractors: Coordinate the Work of this section with that of other sections
to ensure that the Work will be carried out in an orderly fashion. It shall be this Contractor's
responsibility to check the Contract Documents for possible conflicts between his Work and
that of other crafts in
343
equipment location, pipe, duct and conduit runs, electrical outlets and fixtures, air diffusers,
and structural and architectural features.
PART 2
2.1
MATERIALS
GENERAL
A. The Building Management System (BMS) shall be comprised of a network of interoperable, standalone digital controllers, a computer system, graphical user interface software, printers,
network devices, valves, dampers, sensors, and other devices as specified herein. All systems
and software within BMS shall be Year 2000 compliant and shall be supported by
compliance documentation from the manufacturer.
B.
2.2
The installed system shall provide secure password access to all features, functions and data
contained in the overall BMS.
OPEN, INTEROPERABLE, INTEGRATED ARCHITECTURES
A. The intent of this specification is to provide a peer-to-peer networked, stand-alone, distributed
control system with the capability to integrate ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2001 BACnet,
LonWorks technology, MODBUS, OPC, and other open and proprietary communication protocols
in one open, interoperable system.
B. The supplied computer software shall employ object-oriented technology (OOT) for representation
of all data and control devices within the system. In addition, adherence to industry standards
including ANSI
/ ASHRAE™ Standard 135-2001, BACnet and LonMark to assure interoperability between all system
components is required. For each LonWorks device that does not have LonMark certification, the
device supplier must provide an XIF file and a resource file for the device. For each BACnet device,
the device supplier must provide a PICS document showing the installed device’s compliance
level.
Minimum compliance is Level 3; with the ability to support data read and write
functionality. Physical connection of BACnet devices shall be via Ethernet (BACnet Ethernet/IP,)
and/or RS-485 (BACnet MSTP) as specified.
C.
All components and controllers supplied under this Division shall be true “peer-to-peer”
communicating devices. Components or controllers requiring “polling” by a host to pass data shall
not be acceptable.
D. The supplied system must incorporate the ability to access all data using standard Web browsers
without requiring proprietary operator interface and configuration programs. An Open DataBase
Connectivity (ODBC) or Structured Query Language (SQL) compliant server database is required
for all system database parameter storage. This data shall reside on a supplier-installed server for
all database access. Systems requiring proprietary database and user interface programs shall not
be acceptable.
E.
A hierarchical topology is required to assure reasonable system response times and to manage
the flow and sharing of data without unduly burdening the customer’s internal Intranet
network. Systems employing a “flat” single tiered architecture shall not be acceptable.
1.
Maximum acceptable response time from any alarm occurrence (at the point of origin) to the
point of annunciation shall not exceed 5 seconds for network connected user interfaces.
344
2.
2.3
Maximum acceptable response time from any alarm occurrence (at the point of origin) to the
point of annunciation shall not exceed 60 seconds for remote or dial-up connected user
interfaces.
NETWORKS
A. The Local Area Network (LAN) shall be a 100 Megabits/sec Ethernet network supporting BACnet,
Java, XML, HTTP, and SOAP for maximum flexibility for integration of building data with enterprise
information systems and providing support for multiple Network Area Controllers (NACs), user
workstations and, if specified, a local server.
B. Local area network minimum physical and media access requirements:
2.4
1.
Ethernet; IEEE standard 802.3
2.
Cable; 100 Base-T, UTP-8 wire, category 5
3.
Minimum throughput; 100 Mbps.
NETWORK ACCESS A.
Remote Access.
1.
2.5
For Local Area Network installations, provide access to the LAN from a remote location, via the
Internet. The CLIENT shall provide a connection to the Internet to enable this access via
high speed cable modem, asynchronous digital subscriber line (ADSL) modem, ISDN line, T1
Line or via the customer’s Intranet to a corporate server providing access to an Internet
Service Provider (ISP). Customer agrees to pay monthly access charges for connection and ISP.
NETWORK AREA CONTROLLER (NAC) / ROUTER
A. The BMS contractor shall supply one or more Network Area Controllers (NAC) / Router as part of this
contract. Number of area controllers required is dependent on the type and quantity of devices
provided in IO Summary.
B. The Network Area Controller (NAC) / Router shall provide the interface between the LAN or WAN
and the field control devices, and provide global supervisory control functions over the control
devices connected to the NAC / Router. It shall be capable of executing application control
programs to provide:
1.
Calendar functions
2.
Scheduling
3.
Trending
4.
Alarm monitoring and routing
5.
Time synchronization
6.
Integration of LonWorks controller data and BACnet controller data
7.
Network Management functions for all LonWorks based devices
C. The Network Area Controller must provide the following hardware features as a minimum:
1.
One Ethernet Port – 10/100 Mbps
345
2.
One RS-232 port
3.
One LonWorks Interface Port – 78KB FTT-10A
4.
One RS-485 ports
346
5.
Battery Backup
6.
Flash memory for long term data backup (If battery backup or flash memory is not supplied, the
controller must contain a hard disk with at least 1 gigabyte storage capacity)
7.
The NAC / Router must be capable of operation over a temperature range of 32 to 122°F
8.
The NAC / Router must be capable of withstanding storage temperatures of between 0 and 158°F
9.
The NAC / Router must be capable of operation over a humidity range of 5 to 95% RH, noncondensing
D. The NAC / Router shall provide multiple user access to the system and support for ODBC or SQL. A database
resident on the NAC / Router shall be an ODBC-compliant database or must provide an ODBC data access
mechanism to read and write data stored within it.
E. The NAC / Router shall support standard Web browser access via the Intranet/Internet. It shall support a
minimum of 32 simultaneous users.
F. Event Alarm Notification and actions
1.
The NAC / Router shall provide alarm recognition, storage; routing, management, and analysis to
supplement distributed capabilities of equipment or application specific controllers.
2.
The NAC / Router shall be able to route any alarm condition to any defined user location whether
connected to a local network or remote via dial-up telephone connection, or wide-area network.
3.
Alarm generation shall be selectable for annunciation type and acknowledgement requirements
including but limited to:
a.
To alarm
b.
Return to normal c.
To fault
4.
Provide for the creation of a minimum of eight of alarm classes for the purpose of routing types and
or classes of alarms, i.e.: Electricals, HVAC, Fire, etc.
5.
Provide timed (schedule) routing of alarms by class, object, group, or node.
6.
Provide alarm generation from binary object “runtime” and /or event counts for equipment
maintenance. The user shall be able to reset runtime or event count values with appropriate
password control.
G. Control equipment and network failures shall be treated as alarms and annunciated. H.
Alarms shall be annunciated in any of the following manners as defined by the user:
1.
Screen message text
2.
Email of the complete alarm message to multiple recipients. Provide the ability to route and email
alarms based on:
a.
Day of week b.
Time of day c.
Recipient
3.
Pagers via paging services that initiate a page on receipt of email message
4.
5.
Graphic with flashing alarm object(s)
Printed message, routed directly to a dedicated alarm printer
347
I. The following shall be recorded by the NAC / Router for each alarm (at a minimum):
1.
Time and date
2.
Location (building, floor, zone, office number, etc.)
3.
Equipment (air handler #, accessway, etc.)
4.
Acknowledge time, date, and user who issued acknowledgement.
5.
Number of occurrences since last acknowledgement.
J. Alarm actions may be initiated by user defined programmable objects created for that purpose.
K. Defined users shall be given proper access to acknowledge any alarm, or specific types or
classes of alarms defined by the user.
L. A log of all alarms shall be maintained by the NAC / Router and/or a server (if configured in the
system)
and shall be available for review by the user.
M. Provide a “query” feature to allow review of specific alarms by user defined parameters.
N. A separate log for system alerts (controller failures, network failures, etc.) shall be provided
and available for review by the user.
O. An Error Log to record invalid property changes or commands shall be provided and available for
review by the user.
2.6
Data Collection and
Storage
A. The NAC / Router shall have the ability to collect data for any property of any object and store this
data for future use.
B. The data collection shall be performed by log objects, resident in the NAC / Router that shall have,
at a minimum, the following configurable properties:
1.
Designating the log as interval or deviation.
2.
For interval logs, the object shall be configured for time of day, day of week and the
sample collection interval.
3. For deviation logs, the object shall be configured for the deviation of a variable to a fixed
value.
This value, when reached, will initiate logging of the
object.
4.
For all logs, provide the ability to set the maximum number of data stores for the log and
to set whether the log will stop collecting when full, or rollover the data on a first-in, first-out
basis.
5.
Each log shall have the ability to have its data cleared on a time-based event or by a userdefined event or action.
C. All log data shall be stored in a relational database in the NAC / Router and the data shall be
accessed from a server (if the system is so configured) or a standard Web browser.
D. All log data, when accessed from a server, shall be capable of being manipulated using standard
SQL
statements.
348
E. All log data shall be available to the user in the following data formats:
1.
HTML
2.
XML
3.
Plain Text
4.
Comma or tab separated values
F. Systems that do not provide log data in HTML and XML formats at a minimum shall not be
acceptable. G. The NAC / Router shall have the ability to archive its log data either locally (to itself),
or remotely to a
server or other NAC / Router on the network. Provide the ability to configure the following
archiving properties, at a minimum:
2.7
1.
Archive on time of day
2.
Archive on user-defined number of data stores in the log (buffer size)
3.
Archive when log has reached it’s user-defined capacity of data stores
4.
Provide ability to clear logs once archived
AUDIT LOG
A. Provide and maintain an Audit Log that tracks all activities performed on the NAC / Router. Provide
the ability to specify a buffer size for the log and the ability to archive log based on time or when the
log has reached its user-defined buffer size. Provide the ability to archive the log locally (to the
NAC / Router), to another NAC / Router on the network, or to a server. For each log entry, provide
the following data:
2.8
1.
Time and date
2.
User ID
3.
Change or activity: i.e., Change setpoint, add or delete objects, commands, etc.
DATABASE BACKUP AND STORAGE
A. The NAC / Router shall have the ability to automatically backup its database.
shall be backed up based on a user-defined time interval.
The database
B. Copies of the current database and, at the most recently saved database shall be stored in the
NAC / Router. The age of the most recently saved database is dependent on the user-defined
database save interval.
C. The NAC / Router database shall be stored, at a minimum, in XML format to allow for user viewing
and editing, if desired. Other formats are acceptable as well, as long as XML format is supported.
2.9
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLLERS (DDC)
A. Direct Digital Controllers shall be 16 bit microprocessor based Interoperable LonWorks Controllers.
B. The Network Area Controller (NAC) / Router will provide all scheduling, alarming, trending,
and network management for the LonMark / LonWorks based devices.
C. The DDCs shall communicate with the NAC / Router at a baud rate of not less than 78.8K baud.
The DDC shall provide LED indication of communication and controller performance to the
technician, without cover removal.
349
D. All DDCs shall be fully application programmable. Controllers offering application selection only (non
programmable), require a 10% spare point capacity to be provided for all applications. All
control sequences within or programmed into the DDC shall be stored in non-volatile memory,
which is not dependent upon the presence of a battery, to be retained.
E. The BMS contractor supplying the DDC’s shall provide documentation for each device, with
the following information at a minimum:
1.
Network Variable Inputs (nvi’s); name and type
2.
Network Variable Outputs (nvo’s); name and type
3.
Network configuration parameters (nci, nco); name and type
F. It is the responsibility of the BMS contractor to ensure that the proper Network Variable Inputs and
Outputs (nvi and nvo) are provided in each DDC, as required by the point charts.
G. The supplier of any programmable DDC shall provide one copy of the manufacturer’s programming tool, with
documentation, to the CLIENT.
H. The controller shall be capable of either integrating with other LonMark™ devices or stand-alone
operation.
I.
The controller shall have two microprocessors. The Host processor contains on-chip FLASH program
memory, FLASH information memory, and RAM to run the main HVAC application. The second
processor for LonWorks™ network communications.
a.
FLASH Memory Capacity: 60 Kilobytes with 8 Kilobytes for application program. b.
FLASH Memory settings retained for ten years.
c.
J.
RAM: 2 Kilobytes
The controller shall have an FTT transformer-coupled communications port interface for common modenoise rejection and DC isolation.
K. The controller shall have an internal time clock with the ability to automatically revert from a master
time clock on failure.
a.
Operating Range: 24 hour, 365 day, multi-year calendar including day of week and
configuration for automatic day-light savings time adjustment to occur on configured start
and stop dates.
b.
Accuracy: ±1 minute per month at 77° F (25° C).
c.
Power Failure Backup: 24 hours at 32° to 122° F (0° to 50° C).
O The controller shall have Significant Event Notification, Periodic Update capability, and Failure Detect when
network inputs fail to be detected within their configurable time frame.
P
Rated voltage: 20-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Q
The controller shall have an internal DC power supply to power external sensors. a.
Power Output: 20 VDC ±10% at 75 mA.
R
The controller shall have a visual indication (LED) of the status of the device:
a.
Controller operating normally.
b.
Controller in process of download.
350
c.
Controller in manual mode under control of software tool. d.
Controller lost its configuration.
e.
No power to controller, low voltage, or controller damage. f.
Processor and/or controller is not operating.
S
The minimum controller Environmental ratings:
a.
Operating Temperature Ambient Rating: -40° to 150° F (-40° to 65.5° C).
b.
C). c.
T
Storage Temperature Ambient Rating: -40° to 150° F (-40° to 65.5°
Relative Humidity: 5% to 95% non-condensing.
The controller shall have the additional approval requirements, listings, and approvals:
a.
UL/cUL (E87741) listed under UL916 (Standard for Open Energy Management
Equipment)
with plenum rating.
b.
CSA (LR95329-3) Listed
c.
Meets FCC Part 15, Subpart B, Class B (radiated emissions)
requirements. d.
Meets Canadian standard C108.8 (radiated emissions).
e.
Conforms requirements European Consortium standard EN 61000-6-1; 2001 (EU Immunity)
f.
Conforms requirements European Consortium standard EN 61000-6-3; 2001 (EU
Emission) U
a.
The controller shall have three analog outputs (AO).
Analog outputs (AO) shall be capable of being configured as digital outputs (DO).
b.
Input and Output wiring terminal strips shall be removable from the controller
without disconnecting wiring.
c.
Input and Output wiring terminals shall be designated with color coded labels.
V
The controller shall provide for “user defined” Network Variables (NV) for customized
configurations.
2.10
GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE SOFTWARE A.
Operating System:
1.
The GUI shall run on Microsoft Windows XP Professional.
B. The GUI shall employ browser-like functionality for ease of navigation. It shall include a tree
view (similar to Windows Explorer) for quick viewing of, and access to, the hierarchical
structure of the database. In addition, menu-pull downs, and toolbars shall employ buttons,
commands and navigation to permit the operator to perform tasks with a minimum knowledge of
the HVAC Control System and basic computing skills. These shall include, but are not limited to,
forward/backward buttons, home button, and a context sensitive locator line (similar to a URL
line), that displays the location and the selected object identification.
C. Real-Time Displays.
and functions:
The GUI, shall at a minimum, support the following graphical features
351
1.
Graphic screens shall be developed using any drawing package capable of generating a GIF,
BMP, or JPG file format. Use of proprietary graphic file formats shall not be acceptable. In
addition to, or in lieu of a graphic background, the GUI shall support the use of scanned
pictures.
2.
Graphic screens shall have the capability to contain objects for text, real-time values,
animation, color spectrum objects, logs, graphs, HTML or XML document links, schedule
objects, hyperlinks to other URL’s, and links to other graphic screens.
3.
Graphics shall support layering and each graphic object shall be configurable for assignment to
a layer. A minimum of six layers shall be supported.
4.
Modifying common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and set points shall be
accomplished in a graphical manner.
a.
Schedule times will be adjusted using a graphical slider, without requiring any keyboard
entry from the operator.
b.
Holidays shall be set by using a graphical calendar without requiring any keyboard entry from
the operator.
5.
Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be done by right-clicking the selected object and
selecting the appropriate command from the pop-up menu. No entry of text shall be required.
6.
Adjustments to analog objects, such as set points, shall be done by right-clicking the selected object
and using a graphical slider to adjust the value. No entry of text shall be required.
D. System Configuration. At a minimum, the GUI shall permit the operator to perform the following tasks,
with proper password access:
a.
Create, delete or modify control strategies. b.
Add/delete objects to the system.
c.
Tune control loops through the adjustment of control loop parameters. d.
Enable or disable control strategies.
e.
Generate hard copy records or control strategies on a printer. f.
Select points to be alarmable and define the alarm state.
g.
E.
Select points to be trended over a period of time and initiate the recording of values
automatically.
On-Line Help. Provide a context sensitive, on-line help system to assist the operator in operation and
editing of the system. On-line help shall be available for all applications and shall provide the relevant
data for that particular screen. Additional help information shall be available through the use of
hypertext. All system documentation and help files shall be in HTML format.
F. Security. Each operator shall be required to log on to that system with a user name and password in
order to view, edit, add, or delete data. System security shall be selectable for each operator. The system
administrator shall have the ability to set passwords and security levels for all other operators. Each
operator password shall be able to restrict the operators’ access for viewing and/or changing each system
application, full screen editor, and object. Each operator shall automatically be logged off of the system if
no keyboard or mouse activity is detected. This auto log-off time shall be set per operator password. All
system security data shall be stored in an encrypted format.
G. System Diagnostics. The system shall automatically monitor the operation of all workstations, printers,
352
modems, network connections, building management panels, and controllers. The failure of any device shall
be annunciated to the operator.
H. Programming software shall be same as GUI. The Same GUI can be used to configure the DDCs & NAC.
I. Alarm Console
1.
The system will be provided with a dedicated alarm window or console. This window will notify the
operator of an alarm condition, and allow the operator to view details of the alarm and acknowledge
the alarm. The use of the Alarm Console can be enabled or disabled by the system administrator.
2.
When the Alarm Console is enabled, a separate alarm notification window will supercede all other
windows on the desktop and shall not be capable of being minimized or closed by the operator.
This window will notify the operator of new alarms and un-acknowledged alarms. Alarm
notification windows or banners that can be minimized or closed by the operator shall not be
acceptable.
SPECIAL ENERGY MANAGEMENT REPORTING AND PROFILING APPLICATIONS
These reports are defined below.
1. Aggregate Demand Summary - This report aggregates (totalizes) multiple points (meters) and shows
the peak, minimum, average, and total consumption as well as computes load factor.
By
reducing peak consumption and leveling the total load, volatility is reduced and energy customers
can make significant improvements in their energy procurement. This report will help identify favorable
aggregation combinations and unattractive peaks. Once the user selects this report, they define
parameters such as sites, meters, time period, and commodity. The following screen shot is an example
of Aggregate Demand Summary.
2. Summary Ranking Reports - By selecting this report, the user can identify the 10 worst or 10 best sites in
the database. Once the report type has been selected, parameters to define before the report can be
generated will include the following:
a. Measurement unit – KW, therms, CCF gallons, PSI, etc. The database will search for all
values matching the request.
353
b. Compare an entire facility or normalize by square
foot c. Time periods to compare
d. Highest values or lowest values – Will be able to view either the best or worst 10 points
matching the defined parameters
e. Cost or consumption in future revisions
3. Spectrum Summary Report – A quick view of any point or aggregated point with color coding identifying
the reasonableness of the data value. The chart can report on up to one year of data, with the ability to
zoom to a higher definition. As data values approach and/or exceed historical ranges, the color on the
graph will change to identify such. If all data values are within historical ranges, the user can move on to
other functions. In the following screen shot, the Spectrum Summary Report is reporting on total electricity
for an aggregated point, which consists of 6 schools. The reporting period is six weeks, with the blue
identifying low loads overnight and on weekends. The fourth weekend in the report was a three day
weekend which is identified by a larger blue gap. A user can also see rising consumption (red) as
temperatures rise going into the summer season. When the user clicks on an area of the graph, the data
value along with time stamp will appear. The colors and associated data value ranges are user definable.
The following screen shot is an example of the Spectrum Summary Report.
354
4. Equipment Operation Reports - Users will have the ability to analyze digital points and identify run
times.
Comparisons between sites or points can be made and run times can be graphed. For example,
comparing lighting or HVAC run hours in a group of stores or comparing HVAC run hours in June for
Store 1 versus Store 2. Data will be displayed in time and percentage.
5.
Relative Contribution Report – This pie chart report will give users the ability to identify how
individual points contribute to a total from a point group. The user would select a group of points,
calculate the aggregate consumption of the group, and report on the individual contribution of each.
Data will be displayed both graphically in a pie chart as well as in tabular format. Users could identify
that HVAC is 48% of the building load; lighting is 42%, or Building 1 accounts for 14% of the total
enterprise load and Building 2 contributes
19%. This report will allow users to identify inefficiencies and help perform
budgeting.
355
6. Average Profile – The report will allow the user to average the load for a single load across time periods
and give the average load, and/or aggregate multiple meters (loads) and view the average aggregated
load. This report will be very beneficial when negotiating with energy service providers because it
includes the load profile and consumption totals. With the ability to filter by time periods,
measurement units, points or point groups, weekdays, and weekends, load profiles with associated data
will allow the user to procure exactly the amount of energy required. This reduces risk for the energy
provider and therefore reduces cost for the end- user.
The user will be able to manipulate between 1-minute intervals and hourly intervals. In addition, users will be
able to choose between auto scale and manual scale. For example, if the minimum value is 100KW and the
maximum is 500 kW, the user can have the chart automatically scale between those values or they can select
any range to scale the
400kW range. When printing charts, this may be useful. This will be useful for sophisticated users who need a
higher resolution of data. The following screen shot is an example of the Average Profile Report.
7.
Point Trending – This report will allow the user to choose a single or multiple points and trend the
values over a specified time period. Either analog or digital points can be trended and multiple
variables can be selected to be report. For a visual representation of several point values, the user will
view all points on the left Y-axis. If the user would like to perform a statistical analysis identifying
correlation coefficient and standard deviation between variables, they will have the ability to select a
single point for each Y-axis. If a point group has been created, it would be presented as a single point value.
The same auto scale/manual scale feature discussed in Average Profile Report is available in Point
Trending. The following screen shot is an example of the Point Trending Report.
356
8. Exception Report – This report will identify all data values for the specified period that does not fall in a
user-defined range. Although the range will be user definable, the benchmark or baseline to be
compared against will be historical data. Users can get to this report by selecting it among the library of
report templates, or can automatically be taken here from the Average Profile Report or Point Trending
Report by clicking on an “Exception” button once a profile is being viewed.
2.11
WEB BROWSER CLIENTS
A. The system shall be capable of supporting an unlimited number of clients using a standard Web
browser such as Internet Explorer™ or Netscape Navigator™. Systems requiring additional software
(to enable a standard Web browser) to be resident on the client machine, or manufacture-specific
browsers shall not be acceptable.
B. The Web browser software shall run on any operating system and system configuration that is
supported by the Web browser. Systems that require specific machine requirements in terms of
processor speed, memory, etc., in order to allow the Web browser to function with the FMCS, shall
not be acceptable.
357
C. The Web browser shall provide the same view of the system, in terms of graphics, schedules,
calendars, logs, etc., and provide the same interface methodology as is provided by the Graphical
User Interface. Systems that require different views or that require different means of interacting
with objects such as schedules, or logs, shall not be permitted.
D. The Web browser client shall support at a minimum, the following functions:
1.
User log-on identification and password shall be required. If an unauthorized user attempts
access, a blank web page shall be displayed. Security using Java authentication and
encryption techniques to prevent unauthorized access shall be implemented.
2.
Graphical screens developed for the GUI shall be the same screens used for the Web
browser client. Any animated graphical objects supported by the GUI shall be supported
by the Web browser interface.
3.
4.
5.
6.
HTML programming shall not be required to display system graphics or data on a Web
page.
HTML editing of the Web page shall be allowed if the user desires a specific look or
format.
Storage of the graphical screens shall be in the Network Area Controller (NAC), without
requiring any graphics to be stored on the client machine. Systems that require graphics
storage on each client are not acceptable.
Real-time values displayed on a Web page shall update automatically without requiring a
manual
“refresh” of the Web page.
Users shall have administrator-defined access privileges. Depending on the access
privileges assigned, the user shall be able to perform the following:
a.
Modify common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and set points in
a graphical manner.
1.
Schedule times will be adjusted using a graphical slider, without requiring
any keyboard entry from the operator.
2.
Holidays shall be set by using a graphical calendar, without requiring any
keyboard entry from the operator.
b.
Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be done by right-clicking the selected
object and selecting the appropriate command from the pop-up menu. No entry of text
shall be required.
c.
View logs and charts
d.
View and acknowledge alarms
e.
Setup and execute SQL queries on log and archive information
7.
The system shall provide the capability to specify a user’s (as determined by the log-on
user identification) home page. Provide the ability to limit a specific user to just their
defined home page. From the home page, links to other views, or pages in the system
shall be possible, if allowed by the system administrator.
8.
Graphic screens on the Web Browser client shall support hypertext links to other locations on
the Internet or on Intranet sites, by specifying the Uniform Resource Locator (URL) for the
desired link.
358
2.12
SERVER FUNCTIONS AND HARDWARE
A. A central server shall be provided. The server shall support all Network Area Controllers (NAC)
/ Router connected to the customer’s network whether local or remote.
B. Local connections shall be via an Ethernet LAN. Remote connections can be via ISDN, ADSL, T1
or dial-up connection.
C. It shall be possible to provide access to all Network Area Controllers via a single connection to
the server. In this configuration, each Network Area Controller can be accessed from a remote
Graphical User Interface (GUI) or from a standard Web browser (WBI) by connecting to the server.
D. The server shall provide the following functions, at a minimum:
1.
Global Data Access: The server shall provide complete access to distributed data defined
anywhere in the system.
2.
Distributed Control: The server shall provide the ability to execute global control strategies
based on control and data objects in any NAC / Router in the network, local or remote.
3.
The server shall include a master clock service for its subsystems and provide time
synchronization for all Network Area Controllers (NAC) / Routers.
4. The server shall accept time synchronization messages from trusted precision Atomic
Clock
Internet sites and update its master clock based on this data.
5.
The server shall provide scheduling for all Network Area Controllers and their underlying
field control devices.
6.
The server shall provide demand limiting that operates across all Network Area Controllers.
The server must be capable of multiple demand programs for sites with multiple meters and
or multiple sources of energy. Each demand program shall be capable of supporting
separate demand shed lists for effective demand control.
7.
The server shall implement the BACnet Command Prioritization scheme (16 levels) for safe
and effective contention resolution of all commands issued to Network Area Controllers /
Routers. Systems not employing this prioritization shall not be accepted.
8.
Each Network Area Controller / Router supported by the server shall have the ability to
archive its log data, alarm data and database to the server, automatically. Archiving options
shall be user- defined including archive time and archive frequency.
9.
The server shall provide central alarm management for all Network Area Controllers /
Routers supported by the server. Alarm management shall include:
10.
1.
Routing of alarms to display, printer, email and pagers
2.
View and acknowledge alarms
3.
Query alarm logs based on user-defined parameters
The server shall provide central management of log data for all Network Area Controllers /
Routers supported by the server. Log data shall include process logs, runtime and event
counter logs, audit logs and error logs. Log data management shall include:
1.
Viewing and printing log data
2.
Exporting log data to other software applications
3.
Query log data based on user-defined parameters
359
E. Server Hardware Requirements: The server hardware platform shall have the following
requirements:
1.
The computer shall be an Intel Pentium M based computer (minimum processing speed of 2.4
GHz with 1 GB RAM and a 100-gigabyte minimum hard drive). It shall include a DVD-ROM/CDRW Combination Drive, 2-parallel ports, 2-asynchronous serial ports and 2-USB ports. A
minimum
17” flat panel color monitor, 1280 x 1024 optimal preset resolution, 25 ms response time shall
also
be included.
2. The server operating system shall be Microsoft Windows XP Professional. Include
Microsoft
Internet Explorer 6.0 or later.
2.13
3.
Connection to the BMS network shall be via an Ethernet network interface card, 100 Mbps.
4.
A system printer shall be provided. Printer shall be laser type with a minimum 600 x 600dpi resolution and rated for 60-PPM print speed minimum.
5.
For dedicated alarm printing, provide a dot matrix printer, either 80 or 132 column width.
The printer shall have a parallel port interface.
SYSTEM PROGRAMMING
A.
The Graphical User Interface software (GUI) shall provide the ability to perform system
programming and graphic display engineering as part of a complete software package. Access to
the programming functions and features of the GUI shall be through password access as
assigned by the system administrator.
B. A library of control, application, and graphic objects shall be provided to enable the creation
of all applications and user interface screens. Applications are to be created by selecting the
desired control objects from the library, dragging or pasting them on the screen, and linking them
together using a built in graphical connection tool. Completed applications may be stored in
the library for future use.
Graphical User Interface screens shall be created in the same fashion. Data for the user
displays is obtained by graphically linking the user display objects to the application objects to
provide “real-time” data updates. Any real-time data value or object property may be connected
to display its current value on a user display. Systems requiring separate software tools or
processes to create applications and user interface displays shall not be acceptable.
C. Programming Methods
1.
Provide the capability to copy objects from the supplied libraries, or from a user-defined
library to the user’s application. Objects shall be linked by a graphical linking scheme by
dragging a link from one object to another. Object links will support one-to-one, many-toone, or one-to-many relationships. Linked objects shall maintain their connections to other
objects regardless of where they are positioned on the page and shall show link identification
for links to objects on other pages for easy identification.
Links will vary in color
depending on the type of link; i.e., internal, external, hardware, etc.
2.
Configuration of each object will be done through the object’s property sheet using fill-in the
blank fields, list boxes, and selection buttons. Use of custom programming, scripting
language, or a manufacturer-specific procedural language for configuration will not be
accepted.
360
2.14
3.
The software shall provide the ability to view the logic in a monitor mode. When on-line,
the monitor mode shall provide the ability to view the logic in real time for easy diagnosis of
the logic execution. When off-line (debug), the monitor mode shall allow the user to set values
to inputs and monitor the logic for diagnosing execution before it is applied to the system.
4.
All programming shall be done in real-time. Systems requiring the uploading, editing,
and downloading of database objects shall not be allowed.
5.
The system shall support object duplication within a customer’s database. An application,
once configured, can be copied and pasted for easy re-use and duplication. All links, other
than to the hardware, shall be maintained during duplication.
LonWorks NETWORK MANAGEMENT
A. The Graphical User Interface software (GUI) shall provide a complete set of integrated
LonWorks network management tools for working with LonWorks networks. These tools shall
manage a database for all LonWorks devices by type and revision, and shall provide a software
mechanism for identifying each device on the network. These tools shall also be capable of
defining network data connections between LonWorks devices, known as “binding”. Systems
requiring the use of third party LonWorks network management tools shall not be accepted.
B.
Network management shall include the following services: device identification, device
installation, device configuration, device diagnostics, device maintenance and network variable
binding.
C. The network configuration tool shall also provide diagnostics to identify devices on the network, to
reset devices, and to view health and status counters within devices.
D. These tools shall provide the ability to “learn” an existing LonWorks network, regardless of
what network management tool(s) were used to install the existing network, so that existing
LonWorks devices and newly added devices are part of a single network management database.
E.
2.15
The network management database shall be resident in the Network Area Controller (NAC) /
Router, ensuring that anyone with proper authorization has access to the network management
database at all times. Systems employing network management databases that are not resident, at
all times, within the control system, shall not be accepted.
OBJECT LIBRARIES
A. A standard library of objects shall be included for development and setup of application logic, user
interface displays, system services, and communication networks.
B. The objects in this library shall be capable of being copied and pasted into the user’s database and shall be
organized according to their function. In addition, the user shall have the capability to group objects created
in their application and store the new instances of these objects in a user-defined library.
C. In addition to the standard libraries specified here, the supplier of the system shall maintain an on-line
accessible (over the Internet) library, available to all registered users to provide new or updated objects
and applications as they are developed.
D. All control objects shall conform to the control objects specified in the BACnet specification. E.
The library shall include applications or objects for the following functions, at a minimum:
1.
Scheduling Object. The schedule must conform to the schedule object as defined in the BACnet
specification, providing 7-day plus holiday & temporary scheduling features and a minimum of 10
on/off events per day. Data entry to be by graphical sliders to speed creation and selection of on- off
361
events.
2.
Calendar Object. . The calendar must conform to the calendar object as defined in the BACnet
specification, providing 12-month calendar features to allow for holiday or special event data entry.
Data entry to be by graphical “point-and-click” selection. This object must be “linkable” to any or all
scheduling objects for effective event control.
3.
Duty Cycling Object. Provide a universal duty cycle object to allow repetitive on/off time control of
equipment as an energy conserving measure. Any number of these objects may be created to
control equipment at varying intervals
4.
Temperature Override Object. Provide a temperature override object that is capable of overriding
equipment turned off by other energy saving programs (scheduling, duty cycling etc.) to maintain
occupant comfort or for equipment freeze protection.
5.
Start-Stop Time Optimization Object. Provide a start-stop time optimization object to provide the
capability of starting equipment just early enough to bring space conditions to desired conditions by
the scheduled occupancy time. Also, allow equipment to be stopped before the scheduled unoccupancy time just far enough ahead to take advantage of the building’s “flywheel” effect for
energy savings. Provide automatic tuning of all start / stop time object properties based on the
previous day’s performance.
6.
Demand Limiting Object. Provide a comprehensive demand-limiting object that is capable of
controlling demand for any selected energy utility (electric, oil, and gas). The object shall provide the
capability of monitoring a demand value and predicting (by use of a sliding window prediction
algorithm) the demand at the end of the user defined interval period (1-60 minutes). This object
shall also accommodate a utility meter time sync pulse for fixed interval demand control. Upon a
prediction that will exceed the user defined demand limit (supply a minimum of 6 per day), the demand
limiting object shall issue shed commands to either turn off user specified loads or modify equipment
set points to effect the desired energy reduction. If the list of sheddable equipment is not enough
to reduce the demand to below the set point, a message shall be displayed on the users screen (as an
alarm) instructing the user to take manual actions to maintain the desired demand. The shed lists
are specified by the user and shall be selectable to be shed in either a fixed or rotating order to
control which equipment is shed the most often. Upon suitable reductions in demand, the demandlimiting object shall restore the equipment that was shed in the reverse order in which it was shed.
Each sheddable object shall have a minimum and maximum shed time property to effect both
equipment protection and occupant comfort.
F. The library shall include control objects for the following functions. All control objects shall conform to the
objects as specified in the BACnet specification.
1.
Analog Input Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet standard for data
sharing. Allow high, low and failure limits to be assigned for alarming. Also, provide a time delay filter
property to prevent nuisance alarms caused by temporary excursions above or below the user defined
alarm limits.
2.
Analog Output Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet standard for data
sharing.
3.
Binary Input Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet standard for data
sharing. The user must be able to specify either input condition for alarming. This object must also
include the capability to record equipment run-time by counting the amount of time the
hardware input is in an “on” condition. The user must be able to specify either input condition as the
“on” condition.
362
4.
Binary Output Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet standard for data
sharing. Properties to enable minimum on and off times for equipment protection as well as
interstart delay must be provided. The BACnet Command Prioritization priority scheme shall be
incorporated to allow multiple control applications to execute commands on this object with the
highest priority command being invoked. Provide sixteen levels of priority as a minimum. Systems not
employing the BACnet method of contention resolution shall not be acceptable.
5.
PID Control Loop Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet standard for data
sharing. Each individual property must be adjustable as well as to be disabled to allow
proportional control only, or proportional with integral control, as well as proportional, integral and
derivative control.
6.
Comparison Object - Allow a minimum of two analog objects to be compared to select either the
highest, lowest, or equality between the two linked inputs. Also, allow limits to be applied to the
output value for alarm generation.
7.
Math Object - Allow a minimum of four analog objects to be tested for the minimum or maximum, or
the sum, difference, or average of linked objects. Also, allow limits to be applied to the output value
for alarm generation.
8.
Custom Programming Objects - Provide a blank object template for the creation of new custom
objects to meet specific user application requirements. This object must provide a simple BASIC- like
programming language that is used to define object behavior. Provide a library of functions including
math and logic functions, string manipulation, and e-mail as a minimum. Also, provide a comprehensive
on-line debug tool to allow complete testing of the new object. Allow new objects to be stored in the
library for re-use.
9.
Interlock Object - Provide an interlock object that provides a means of coordination of objects
within a piece of equipment such as an Air Handler or other similar types of equipment. An
example is to link the return fan to the supply fan such that when the supply fan is started, the
return fan object is also started automatically without the user having to issue separate commands
or to link each object to a schedule object. In addition, the control loops, damper objects, and
alarm monitoring (such as return air, supply air, and mixed air temperature objects) will be
inhibited from alarming during a user-defined period after startup to allow for stabilization. When the
air handler is stopped, the interlocked return fan is also stopped, the outside air damper is
closed, and other related objects within the air handler unit are inhibited from alarming thereby
eliminating nuisance alarms during the off period.
10.
Temperature Override Object - Provide an object whose purpose is to provide the capability of
overriding a binary output to an “On” state in the event a user specified high or low limit value is
exceeded. This object is to be linked to the desired binary output object as well as to an analog
object for temperature monitoring, to cause the override to be enabled. This object will execute a
Start command at the Temperature Override level of start/stop command priority unless changed by
the user.
11.
Composite Object - Provide a container object that allows a collection of objects representing an
application to be encapsulated to protect the application from tampering, or to more easily
represent large applications. This object must have the ability to allow the user to select the
appropriate parameters of the “contained” application that are represented on the graphical shell of
this container.
G. The object library shall include objects to support the integration of devices connected to the Network
Area Controller (NAC) / Router. At a minimum, provide the following as part of the standard library
363
included with the programming software:
1.
LonMark/LonWorks devices. These devices shall include, but not be limited to, devices for control of
HVAC, lighting, access, and metering. Provide LonMark manufacturer-specific objects to facilitate
simple integration of these devices. All network variables defined in the LonMark profile shall be
supported. Information (type and function) regarding network variables not defined in the LonMark
profile shall be provided by the device manufacturer.
2.
For devices not conforming to the LonMark standard, provide a dynamic object that can be
assigned to the device based on network variable information provided by the device manufacturer.
Device manufacturer shall provide an XIF file, resource file and documentation for the device to
facilitate device integration.
3.
For BACnet devices, provide the following objects at a minimum:
4.
a.
Analog In
b.
Analog Out
c.
Analog Value
d.
Binary
e.
f.
Binary In
Binary Out
g.
Binary Value
h.
Multi-State In
i.
Multi-State Out
j.
Multi-State Value
k.
Schedule Export
l.
Calendar Export
m.
Trend Export
n.
Device
For each BACnet object, provide the ability to assign the object a BACnet device and object
instance number.
5.
For BACnet devices, provide the following support at a minimum
a.
b.
Segmentation
Segmented Request
c. Segmented Response d. Application Services
e. Read Property
f.
Read Property multiple
g. Write Property
h. Write Property Multiple
i.
Confirmed Event Notification
364
2.16
j.
k.
l.
Unconfirmed Event Notification
Acknowledge Alarm
Get Alarm Summary
m.
Who-has
n.
I-have
o.
Who-is
p.
I-am
q.
Subscribe COV
r.
Confirmed COV notification
s.
Unconfirmed COV notification
t.
Media Types
u.
Ethernet
v.
BACnet IP Annex J
w.
MSTP
x.
BACnet Broadcast Management Device (BBMD) function
y.
Routing
DDE DEVICE INTEGRATION
A. The Network Area Controller / Router shall support the integration of device data via Dynamic Data
Exchange (DDE), over the Ethernet Network. The Network Area Controller shall act as a DDE client
to another software application that functions as a DDE server.
B.
2.17
Provide the required objects in the library, included with the Graphical User Interface
programming software, to support the integration of these devices into the BMS. Objects provided
shall include at a minimum:
1.
DDE Generic AI Object
2.
DDE Generic AO Object
3.
4.
DDE Generic BO Object
DDE Generic BI Object
MODBUS SYSTEM INTEGRATION
A. The Network Area Controller / Router shall support the integration of device data from Modbus
RTU, Ascii, or TCP control system devices. The connection to the Modbus system shall be via an
RS-232, RS485, or Ethernet IP as required by the device.
B.
Provide the required objects in the library, included with the Graphical User Interface
programming software, to support the integration of the Modbus system data into the BMS.
Objects provided shall include at a minimum:
1.
Read/Write Modbus AI Registers
2.
Read/Write Modbus AO Registers
3.
Read/Write Modbus BI Registers
4.
Read/Write Modbus BO Registers
365
C. All scheduling, alarming, logging and global supervisory control functions, of the Modbus
system devices, shall be performed by the Network Area Controller.
D. The BMS supplier shall provide a Modbus system communications driver. The equipment
system vendor that provided the equipment utilizing Modbus shall provide documentation of
the system’s Modbus interface and shall provide factory support at no charge during system
commissioning
2.18
OPC SYSTEM INTEGRATION
A.
The Network Area Controller / Router shall act as an OPC client and shall support the
integration of device data from OPC servers. The connection to the OPC server shall be Ethernet IP
as required by the device. The OPC client shall support third party OPC servers compatible with
the Data Access 1.0 and
2.0 specifications.
B.
Provide the required objects in the library, included with the Graphical User Interface
programming software, to support the integration of the OPC system data into the BMS.
Objects provided shall include at a minimum:
C.
1.
Read/Write OPC AI Object
2.
Read/Write OPC AO Object
3.
Read/Write OPC BI Object
4.
Read/Write OPC BO Object
5.
Read/Write OPC Date/Time Input Object
6.
Read/Write OPC Date/Time Output Object
7.
Read/Write OPC String Input Object
8.
Read/Write OPC String Output Object
All scheduling, alarming, logging and global supervisory control functions, of the OPC system
devices, shall be performed by the Network Area Controller / Router.
D. The BMS supplier shall provide an OPC client communications driver. The equipment system
vendor that provided the equipment utilizing OPC shall provide documentation of the system’s
OPC server interface and shall provide factory support at no charge during system commissioning.
2.19
GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE COMPUTER HARDWARE (DESKTOP)
A. The browser workstation shall be an Intel Pentium based computer (minimum processing speed
of 2.4
Ghz with 1.0 GB RAM and a 100-gigabyte minimum hard drive). It shall include a DVD-ROM/CD-RW
Combination Drive, 2-parallel ports, 2-asynchronous serial ports and 2-USB ports. A minimum
17”flat panel color monitor, 1280 x 1024 optimal preset resolution, 25 ms response time, shall also
be included.
B. Connection to the BMS network shall be via an Ethernet network interface card, 10 Mbps.
C. A system printer shall be provided. Printer shall be laser type with a minimum 600 x 600-dpi
resolution and rated for 8 PPM print speed minimum.
366
OTHER CONTROL SYSTEM HARDWARE FIELD
DEVICES
7.1
ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC CONTROLS RELATED EQUIPMENT
General Requirements
All controls shall be capable of operating in ambient conditions varying between 0-55 deg. C
and
90% R.H. non-condensing.
All Control devices shall have a 20 mm conduit knockout. Alternatively, they shall be supplied
with adaptors for 20 mm conduit.
Ancillary Items
When items of equipment are installed in the situations listed below, the BAS contractor shall
include the following ancillary items :
(i)
WeatherProtection
All devices required to be weatherproofed are detailed in the Schedule of Quantities. IP
ratings for the equipment is mentioned in the respective section.
(ii)
Pipe work Immersion
Corrosion resisting pockets of a length suitable for the complete active length of the device,
screwed
½” (13 mm) or ¾” (20 mm) NPT suitable for the temperature, pressure and medium.
(iii)
DuctMounting(MetalorBuildersWork)
Mounting flanges, clamping bushes, couplings, locknuts, gaskets, brackets, sealing glands and
any special fittings necessitated by the device.
Additional features
7.2
(i)
Concealed Adjustment : All two position
switching devices shall have concealed
adjustment unless detailed otherwise in the Schedule of Quantities.
(ii)
Operating Voltage : All two position switching devices shall operate on 230 v a.c and
all accessible live parts shall be shrouded. An earth terminal shall be provided.
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Temperature sensors for space, pipes and ducts, shall be of the Resistance Temperature detector (RTD)
type or thermistor. These shall be two wire type and shall conform to the following specifications :
1)
Immersion sensors shall be high accuracy type with a high resistance versus temperature change.
367
The accuracy shall be atleast ± 0.33 degrees F and sensitivity of atleast 2 ohm/F.
2)
Immersion sensors shall
be provided with
separate stainless steel thermo well. These
shall be manufactured from bar stock with hydrostatic pressure rating of atleast 10 kgf/cm2.
3)
The connection to the pipe shall be screwed ¾ inch NPT (M). An aluminum sleeve shall be
provided to ensure proper heat transfer from the well to the sensor. Terminations to be
provided on the head. Flying leads shall not be acceptable.
4)
The sensor housing shall plug into the base so that the same can be easily removed without
disturbing the wiring connections.
5)
Duct temperature sensors shall be with rigid stem and of averaging
suitable for duct installation.
6)
shield.
7)
type. These shall be
Outdoor air temperature sensor shall be provided with a sun
The sensors shall not be mounted near any heat source such as windows, electrical
appliances etc. The temperature sensors may be of any of the following types :
1)
2)
3)
4)
7.3
PT 100, PT 1000, PT 3000
NI 100, NI 1000
Balco 500.
Thermistor
HUMIDITY SENSOR
Space and duct humidity sensors shall be of capacitance type with an effective sensing range of 10% to
90% RH. Accuracy shall be + 3% or better. Duct mounted humidity sensors shall be provided with a
sampling chamber. Wall mounted sensors shall be provided with a housing. The sensor housing shall
plug into the base so that the same can be easily removed without disturbing the wiring connections.
The sensors shall not be mounted near any heat source such as windows, electrical appliances etc.
7.4
FLOW METER
Water flow meters shall be either Ultrasonic type or electromagnetic type. For electromagnetic flow
meter, teflon lining with 316 SS electrodes must be provided. The housing shall have IP 55
protection. Vendors shall have to get their design/ selection approved by the Consultant, prior to the
supply.
The exact ranges to be set shall be determined by the contractor at the time of
commissioning. It should be possible to ‘zero’ the flowmeter without any external instruments,
with the overall accuracy of atleast ± 1% full scale.
7.5
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER FOR WATER
Pressure transmitters shall be piezo-electric type or diaphragm type. (Bourdon Tube type shall not
be acceptable). Output shall be 4-20mA or 0-10V DC and the range as specified in the data sheet
depending on the line pressure. Power supply shall be either 24 V AC, 24 V DC or 230 V AC.
368
Connection shall be as per manufacturer’s standards.
The pressure detector shall be capable of
withstanding a hydraulic test pressure of twice the working pressure. The set point shall fall within 40%70% of the sensing range and detector shall have sensitivity such that change of 1.5% from the
stabilized condition shall cause modulation of the corrective element. The sensor must be pressure
compensated for a medium temperature of -10 o C to
60o C with ambient ranging between 0 o C to 55
o C.
7.6
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH FOR PIPE WORK
These shall be used to measure pressure differential across suction and discharge of pumps. The range
shall be as specified in the data sheet. Switch shall be ON with increase in differential. Housing for
these shall be weather proof with IP 55 protection.
The pressure switch shall be capable of
withstanding a hydraulic test pressure of 1.5 times the working pressure. The set point shall fall in 4070% of the scale range and shall have differentials adjustable over 10%-30% of the scale range. The
switches shall be provided with site adjustable scale and with 2 NO/NC contacts.
7.7
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH FOR AIR SYSTEMS
These shall be diaphragm operated. Switches shall be supplied with air connections permitting their
use as static or differential pressure switches.
The switch shall be of differential pressure type complete with connecting tube and metal bends
for connections to the duct. The housing shall be IP 54 rated. The pressure switches shall be available in
minimum of 3 ranges suitable for applications like Air flow proving, dirty filter, etc. The set point shall
be concealed type. The contact shall be SPDT type with 230 VAC, 1 A rating.
The switch shall be supplied suitable for wall mounting on ducts in any plane. It should be mounted in
such a way that the condensation flow out of the sensing tips. Proper adaptor shall be provided for the
cables.
The set point shall fall within 40%-70% of the scale range and l has differentials adjustable over 10%30% of the scale range.
The switches shall be provided with site adjustable scale and with 2 NO/NC
contacts.
7.8
AIR FLOW SWITCHES
Air flow switches shall be selected for the correct air velocity, duct size and mounting attitude. If any
special atmospheric conditions are detailed in the Schedule of Quantity the parts of the switches
shall be suitably coated or made to withstand such conditions.
These shall be suitable for
mounting in any plane. Output shall be 2 NO/NC potential free. Site adjustable scale shall also be
provided.
7.9
AIR PRESSURE SENSOR
The pressure sensor shall be differential type. The construction shall be spring loaded diaphragm type.
The movement of the membrane in relation to the pressure should be converted
by an inductive
electromagnet coupling which would give an output suitable for the controller. The pressure sensor
shall be in a housing having IP 54 ratings in accordance with IEC 529. Suitable mounting arrangement
369
shall be available on the sensor. The sensor shall come complete with the PVC tubes & probes.
7.10
WATER FLOW SWITCH
These shall be paddle type and suitable for the type of liquid flowing in the line. Output shall be
2NO/2NC
potential
free.
7.11
TRANSDUCERS FOR ELECTRICAL SERVICES
Electrical transducers shall be integrated electronic type and rack mounted on the field. These shall
work on
230 V supply with the output being standard type i.e. 4-20 mA, 0- 10 Volts
etc.
Power factor, Voltage, Current, Frequency and Kilowatt transducers shall have standard output
signal for measurement for the specified variable.
Kilowatt-Hour metering (if any) shall be poly-phase; three- element with current transformer (CT)
operated type. The metering shall feature high accuracy with no more than +/- 1% error over the
expected load range. The coils shall be totally encapsulated against high impulse levels.
7.12
LEVEL SWITCH
The
level switches shall have
requirement :
Type
Mounting
Connection
Float material
Stem Material
Output
Switch Enclosure
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
to
meet
the
following
Float Type/Capacitance type/Conductivity type
To suit application.
Flanged ANSI 150 lbs RF Carbon steel
316 SS
316 SS
2 NO, 2 NC potential free
IP 55
7.13 DIGITAL THERMOSTATS
Thermostats for FCU’s should be Digital on/off OR Modulating Type for Actuating 2 way or 3 way Valves
(On- off/Modulating)
Thermostats should display Room Temp and Setpoint simultaneously which is easy to read from atleast 68 feet distance.
Thermostats should have Fan Speed Control Switch (Low-Med-High-Auto). Auto Mode should be able to
save energy by automatically reducing the Fan Speed when Room Temp Achieves Set Point.
LCD Display should be available in Blue or Green Backlit for ease in viewing the Room Temperature and
Setpoint. Thermostats should work on 230V PS for on-off models and 24V for Modulating Thermostats
370
The User Settings should be retained in Thermostat Memory in case of Power
Failure
The Switching Relays should be separately wired and should be mounted inside the Junction Box, so that
the
Thermostat front is sleek in mounting.Thermostat Thickness should be 17mm or
less
Thermostats should have Energy Savings Feature with dual setpoint which can be interlocked with Occupancy
Sensor or Hotel Key Card input. This should be indicated in the LCD Display in the mode it is being operated.
This Programming should be possible by Hotel maintenance Staff.
Thermostats should be similar or equivalent to Honeywell Halo Series Digital Thermostats Model
T6861(on/off) or
T6865(modulating)
version.
7.15
Pressure Independent Dynamic Balancing Valve (ranges from25mm to
150mm)
The Valve should have self Dynamic Flow Control Valves that are pressure independent, two way,
Modulating to accept digital/analog input BMS/Controller signals and should provide position feedback signal
to the control system. The Feedback signal should have the feedback feature of the Valve/Actuator itself without
any need of any additional accessory/instrument/device.
PICV should be capable of maintaining the max flow rate atleast +/-4% Accuracy
The PICV Should be capable of maintaining Linear Temperature Control, Pressure Independence and
Electric Modulation in one Valve body.
• The Flow rates should be field settable electronically upto 60% of the valve Max set Flow rate
• The Differential Pressure Ranges for which the valve can maintain the flow rates should be mentioned
in the
Product literature
•
•
• Valve Actuator housing shall be rated to IP54
• Actuator shall be driven by a 24Vac power supply and shall accept universal Input signals like 0/2-10Vdc
or 420mA signal
• Actuator shall be capable of providing feedback Signal of 0/2-10Vdc to the Control System/BMS
• PICV should have an option for adjusting the Flow Characteristics as per AHU in every PICV to ensure
Linear Temp Control.
• PICV should have an option for changing the Max Flow Rates in future and no additional Instrument
should be required. Flow Values can be changed by entering in LCD Display only and not by any DIP
Switches or Setting Dial to improve accuracy.
• PICV shall provide full valve Authority
• PICV Valve body shall be rated at least PN16
• Max Close off Pressure shall be mentioned in the Product Datasheet.
• Min Working Differential Pressure shall be 30Kpa
• Valve shall be Internal BSP Threaded from DN25 to DN50 and Flanged end Connection for DN65 to DN150
• Min Stroke Length of the Valve shall be 20mm
371
•
•
•
Media Temperature : 0-130 deg C
Valve shall be of Brass/Bronze Construction upto DN50 and Cast Iron upto DN150
Shut off Leakage shall be 0.1 Kvs
7.16 Motorized Butterfly Valve
Valve Body
Type of Valve
Body Material
Disc Material
Stem
Liner Material
Nominal Static Body Rating
Tightness
Medium Temperature
Pipe Connection
Actuator
Type
Motor Supply
Travel Angle
Enclosure
Indicator
Space Heater
Stall Protection
Manual Override
Torque Limit Switches
External Coating
Make
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Butterfly Valve
Cast Iron or Ductile Iron Body
Nickel plated Ductile Iron
SS416
EPDM
PN16
Bubble Tight
-10 dec C to 120 deg C
ISO7005-2
Electric
230 Vac, 50hz/60Hz
90 deg +/- 5 deg
IP67 Waterproof
Continuous Position Indicator
15W 220V Anti Condensation
Built-in thermal protection Cut off at 125 ± 5 Reset at 95 ± 5
By Handwheel, nonclutch design
2 nos
Dry Aluminium Alloy in Painted Black
Honeywell
7.17 On/Off type FCU valves
Two way on/off type FCU valve
The two way FCU valve should be design in such a way that it can withstand a static pressure of 20 bar and a
burst pressure of 100 bar.
The ports are designated in such a way that flow through the two way valve can be in either
direction. The valve shall be designed to handle the fluid temperature from1degreeC to
95degreeC
It can withstand the differential pressure upto 4 Bar.
The valve is of bronze body with stainless steel stem and Noryl cover.
The FCU valve shall have a minimum stroke length of 10mm so that it has the sufficient distance to travel. The
372
hydronic FCU valves shall been designed to meet the European standard EN 60730-2-8.
The actuator shall require the power supply of 220 Volts AC so that no transformer is required.
The actuator is easily removable from the valve so that in case the actuator fails at site it can be easily replaced
without affecting the integrity of the water system.
The actuator shall have the provision to operate manually.
The actuator shall meet the low voltage directive 73/23/EEC. The actuator shall be selected in such a way
that the maximum power consumed by the actuator is 6 Watt.
The valve should be similar or equivalent to Honeywell VC6013 version.
7.18 Snap Acting Digital Thermostats
Thermostats for FCU’s should be Digital on/off for Actuating 2 way or 3 way Valves (On-off/Modulating)
Thermostats should display Room Temp and Set point simultaneously which is easy to read from at least 6-8
feet distance.
Thermostats should have Fan Speed Control Switch (Low-Med-High-Auto). Auto Mode should be able to
save energy by automatically reducing the Fan Speed when Room Temp Achieves Set Point.
LCD Display should be available in Blue or Green Backlit for ease in viewing the Room Temperature and Set
point. Thermostats should work on power supply of 230V for on-off models.
The User Settings should be retained in Thermostat Memory in case of Power Failure
The Switching Relays should be separately wired and should be mounted inside the Junction Box, so
that the
Thermostat front is sleek in mounting. Thermostat Thickness should be 17mm or less
Thermostats should have Energy Savings Feature with dual set point which can be interlocked with Occupancy
Sensor or Hotel Key Card input. This should be indicated in the LCD Display in the mode it is being operated.
This Programming should be possible by Hotel maintenance Staff.
Thermostats should be similar or equivalent to Honeywell Halo Series Digital Thermostats Model T6861
(on/off) version.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A. All work described in this section shall be performed by system integrators or contractors that have
a successful history in the design and installation of integrated control systems.
B. Install system and materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, and as detailed
373
on the project drawing set.
C.
Drawings of the BMS network are diagrammatic only and any apparatus not shown, but
required to make the system operative to the complete satisfaction of the Architect shall be
furnished and installed without additional cost.
D. Line and low voltage electrical connections to control equipment shown specified or shown on
the control diagrams shall be furnished and installed by this contractor in accordance
with these specifications.
E. Equipment furnished by the HVAC Contractor that is normally wired before installation shall
be furnished completely wired. Control wiring normally performed in the field will be
furnished and installed by this contractor.
3.2
WIRING
A. All electrical control wiring and power wiring to the control panels, NAC, computers and
network components shall be the responsibility of the this contractor.
B. The electrical contractor shall furnish all power wiring to electrical starters and motors.
C. All wiring shall be in accordance with the Project Electrical Specifications, the National Electrical
Code and any applicable local codes. All BMS wiring shall be installed in the conduit types specified
in the Electrical Specifications unless otherwise allowed by the National Electrical Code or
applicable local codes. Where BMS plenum rated cable wiring is allowed it shall be run parallel to
or at right angles to the structure, properly supported and installed in a neat and workmanlike
manner.
3.3
WARRANTY
A. Equipment, materials and workmanship incorporated into the work shall be warranted for a period
of one year from the time of system acceptance.
B. Within this period, upon notice by the CLIENT, any defects in the work provided under this section
due to faulty materials, methods of installation or workmanship shall be promptly (within 48
hours after receipt of notice) repaired or replaced by this contractor at no expense to the CLIENT.
3.4
WARRANTY ACCESS
A. The CLIENT shall grant to this contractor, reasonable access to the BMS during the warranty period.
B. The CLIENT shall allow the contractor to access the BMS from a remote location for the purpose of
diagnostics and troubleshooting, via the Internet, during the warranty period.
3.5
SOFTWARE LICENSE
A. CLIENT shall be the named license holder of all software associated with any and all incremental
work on the project(s). The owner, or his appointed agent, shall determine which organizations
to be named in the “orgid” of all software licenses.
B.
CLIENT, or his appointed agent, shall be free to direct the modification of the “orgid” in any
software license, regardless of supplier.
C. The owner, or his appointed agent, shall receive ownership of all job specific software configuration
documentation, data files, and application-level software developed for the project. This shall
include all custom, job specific software code and documentation for all configuration and
programming that is generated for a given project and /or configured for use within based
controllers and/or servers and any related LAN / WAN / Intranet and Internet connected routers
and devices. Any and all required Ids and passwords for access to any component or software
program shall be provided to the owner.
374
3.6
ACCEPTANCE TESTING
A. Upon completion of the installation, this contractor shall load all system software and startup the system. This contractor shall perform all necessary calibration, testing and de-bugging and
perform all required operational checks to insure that the system is functioning in full accordance
with these specifications.
B. This contractor shall perform tests to verify proper performance of components, routines, and
points.
Repeat tests until proper performance results. This testing shall include a point-by-point log to
validate
100% of the input and output points of the DDC system operation.
C. Upon completion of the performance tests described above, repeat these tests, point by point as
described in the validation log above in presence of CLIENT's Representative, as required. Properly
schedule these tests so testing is complete at a time directed by the CLIENT's Representative. Do
not delay tests so as to prevent delay of occupancy permits or building occupancy.
D.
3.7
System Acceptance: Satisfactory completion is when BMS contractor have performed
successfully all the required testing to show performance compliance with the requirements of
the Contract Documents to the satisfaction of CLIENT Representative. System acceptance shall be
contingent upon completion and review of all corrected deficiencies.
OPERATOR INSTRUCTION, TRAINING
A. During system commissioning and at such time acceptable performance of the BMS hardware
and software has been established this contractor shall provide on-site operator instruction to the
owner's operating personnel. Operator instruction shall be done during normal working hours
and shall be performed by a competent representative familiar with the system hardware,
software and accessories.
B. This contractor shall provide 40 hours of instruction to the CLIENT's designated personnel on
the operation of the BMS and describe its intended use with respect to the programmed functions
specified. Operator orientation of the systems shall include, but not be limited to; the overall
operation program, equipment functions (both individually and as part of the total integrated
system), commands, systems generation, advisories, and appropriate operator intervention
required in responding to the System's operation.
C. The training shall be in three sessions as follows:
1.
Initial Training: One day session (8 hours) after system is started up and at least one week
before first acceptance test. Manual shall have been submitted at least two weeks prior to
training so that the owners' personnel can start to familiarize themselves with the
system before classroom instruction begins.
2.
First Follow-Up Training: Two days (16 hours total) approximately two weeks after initial
training, and before Formal Acceptance. These sessions will deal with more advanced topics
and answer questions.
3.
Warranty Follow Up: Two days (16 hours total) in no less than 4 hour increments, to be
scheduled at the request of the owner during the one year warranty period. These sessions
shall cover topics as requested by the owner such as; how to add additional points, create and
gather data for trends, graphic screen generation or modification of control routines.
375
MAKELISTFORBUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM OFASSAMSTATELEGILATIVE ASSEMBLY MAIN
BUILDING
Sl. No.
Description
A)
CENTRAL CONTROL STATION & DIGITAL
CONTROLLERS:
1.0
Supply, installation, testing & commissioning of
the central control station consisting of the
following :
1.0.1
1.0.2
1.0.3
1.0.4
1.1
1.2
1.3
2.0
a
b.
Intel machine Core - i7,
3GB RAM, 500GB HDD, CD/DVD- R/W
drive
and
with necessarrySerial,
parallel, and network communication
ports and cables required for proper
system operationetc
as minimum.
Colour Monitor TFT –
21
inch.
Laser
Printer
Mouse & Keyboard
UPS with 30 minutes SMF battery backup for
BMS equipments in control room for power back
up. BMS Contractor to decide the capacity
keeping in view the power required by BMS
panel.
Software for centralized BMS control system
alongwith required hardwares for interface
between automation level and management
level. The software will be web enabled for
control and monitoring with licensing for
minimum 5 nos. simultaneous web users.
Make List
HP/ IBM
LG/ Samsung
HP/ IBM
HP/ IBM
Emerson/ Luminus/ APC
Honeywell WEBS/ Spyder/ TREND
Web Based system interface modules consisting
of gateways, other interface units required as
per specifications. The units shall be housed in
wall mounted MS cabinets.
Standalone intelligent DDC controllers with 32
bit microprocessor
For
Chilled
Water
System
For AHU's/TFA's/Ventillation Fan's
Honeywell WEBS/ ALERTON/ Spyder/
TREND
Honeywell WEBS/ ALERTON/ Spyder/
TREND
376
c
d
e
f
3.0
4.0
5.0
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
13.
0
a)
b)
c)
d)
14.0
For Plumbing/Fire- Fighting/STP WTP
For Transformers
For HT Panel
For LT Panel
Supply, installation, testing & commissioning
of communicating type room temperature
control units for FCUs with digital display and
3 speed fan (With
Chilled Water Only).
Hand
held
portable operator terminal.
Honeywell WEBS/ ALERTON/
TREND
Honeywell WEBS/ ALERTON/
TREND
Honeywell WEBS/ ALERTON/
TREND
Honeywell WEBS/ ALERTON/
TREND
Spyder/
Spyder/
Spyder/
Spyder/
Honeywell WEBS/ ALERTON/ Spyder/
TREND
Honeywell WEBS/ ALERTON/ Spyder/
TREND
Software Integration
Chiller integrator (4 nos.)
SCHWP system integrator (9 VFD Drives)
Honeywell WEBS/ ALERTON/ Spyder/
TREND
Honeywell WEBS/ ALERTON/ Spyder/
TREND
Hydropneumatic
System integrator (4
VFD Drives)
DG System Integrator
Honeywell WEBS/ ALERTON/ Spyder/
TREND
Fire Alarm System
Integrator
Energy Management System integrator
nos energy meter)
(42
FCU -84 No's
Supply & installation of black enameled MS/GI
conduits in recess/on surface including its
accessories, junction pull boxes GI fish wire,
fixing hardware etc including chasing the
wall/floor and plastering the chased portion
and making good the damages etc. complete
as required.
25 mm dia MS conduit
20 mm dia MS conduit*
25 mm dia GI conduit*
20 mm dia GI conduit*
2 core 1.5 Sq.mm twisted, annealed tinned
copper multistranded conductor PVC
insulated, shielded communication
cable(Controller to Controller).
Honeywell WEBS/ ALERTON/ Spyder/
TREND
Honeywell WEBS/ ALERTON/ Spyder/
TREND
Honeywell WEBS/ ALERTON/ Spyder/
TREND
Honeywell WEBS/ ALERTON/ Spyder/
TREND
BEC/
BEC/
BEC/
BEC/
AKG
AKG
AKG
AKG
Polycab/ Finolex/ Fusion Polymer/
Varsha/ Bonton/ KEI
377
15.
0
2 core 1.5 Sq.mm, twisted pair, annealed
tinned copper multistrand conductor PVC
insulated, signal cable.(From field device to
DDC).
Polycab/ Finolex/ Fusion Polymer/
Varsha/ Bonton/ KEI
16.
0
3 core 1.5 Sq.mm armoured twisted pair,
annealed tinned copper multistrand
conductor PVC insulated cable.
Polycab/ Finolex/ Fusion Polymer/
Varsha/ Bonton/ KEI
17.
0
3 core 1.5 Sq.mm twisted, annealed tinned
copper multistrand conductor PVC insulated
power cable.
Polycab/ Finolex/ Fusion Polymer/
Varsha/ Bonton/ KEI
18.
0
B)
1.
0
4-pair Cat-6 solid insulated copper UTP cable
CHILLER/ PUMPS/ COOLING /TOWER
SYSTEM :
Supply, installation, testing & commissioning
of the following field sensors:-
3
Immersion type temperature sensor for
measuring chilled water
& condenser water temperature at the inlet
& outlet of the chiller, condenser and cooling
tower.
Flow meter for measuring the chilled water
through the common header. (Ultrsonic type)
4
Differential pressure switches across the
pumps for indicating the pump status.
2
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Polycab/ Finolex/ Fusion Polymer/
Varsha/ Bonton/ KEI
Honeywell/ Alerton/ Spyder
Shenitech/Honeywell
Honeywell/ Alerton/ Spyder
Level switches for cooling tower /make up
water tank high & low.
Current relay for cooling tower fan run
status.
PH monitoring of cooling tower sump water
TDS monitoring of cooling tower sump
Veskler/ Sontay/ Filpro
Situ/Setco/ABB
Triton/Omicron
Triton/Omicron
Duct mounted temperature sensor for supply
air temperature.
Duct mounted temperature sensor for return
air temperature.
Differential
pressure switches for
monitoring
Honeywell/ Alerton/ Spyder
Honeywell/ Alerton/ Spyder
Honeywell/ Alerton/ Spyder
the air filter status.
12
13
Differential
pressure switches
across the blower
Sensors for
for indicating the
measuring outside
fan status.
air temperature
Honeywell/ Alerton/
Spyder
Honeywell/ Alerton/
Spyder
378
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Current relays (
for ventilation &
current
relays
Exhaust Fans)
(for
air
washer)
Differential
pressure
switch
Level
switches
for Air
Washer
(DPDT
pump
run status.
Differential
type)
for
tanks.
pressure
switch
Current relays
for pump
status.
Flow
meter
for measuring
the raw water
Pressure
in fire tank
Flame
proof level
Transmitter
(Ultrasonic
Fuel
flow switch
switch
type)
Fuel flow meter
Honeywell/ Alerton/
Spyder
Honeywell/ Alerton/
Spyder
Honeywell/ Alerton/
Spyder
Honeywell/ Alerton/
Spyder
Honeywell/
Alerton/
Spyder
Situ/Setco/
ABB
Shenitech/Hone
ywell
Honeywell/ Alerton/
Veskler/
Sontay/
Spyder
Greisinger/Hone
Filpro
Greisinger/Hone
ywell
ywell
VII) DATAPOINTSSUMMARYFORBUILDINGMANAGEMENTSYSTEM
S.No.
A)
1
Function
Chilled water system
Water Cooled Centrifugal Chillers with VFD
Chiller On / Off command
Common Chilled water supply / condenser
water supply header temperature
Common Chilled water return / condenser
water return header temperature
Chilled water return header flow rate
Auto Manual Switch
Chiller microprocessor (software) integration
for Chiller-intrinsic parameter monitoring and
VFD Integration with BMS
Qty
AI
DI
AO
DO
Remarks
4
4
2
2
1
4
Relay output
Immersion Type
Temperature Sensor
Immersion Type
Temperature Sensor
Electromagnetic type
Flowmeter
Potential free contacts of
selector switch.
Software connectivity
379
Sub Total for Water Cooled Centrifugal
Chillers with VFD
2
Primary Chilled Water Pumps (3W + 1S)
Primary Chilled Water Pump on / off
command
Primary Chilled water Pump run Status
5
4
4
4
Primary Chilled water Pump trip Status
4
Auto Manual Switch
4
Secondary Chilled Water Pumps & VFD
(6W + 3S)
0
4
Sub Total for Primary Chilled Water Pumps
(3W + 1S)
3
4
0
12
Differential Pressure
Switch
Potential free contacts of
contactor.
Potential free contacts of
selector switch.
0
4
9
Variable speed pumping system start/stop
9
Auto Manual Switch
9
Sub Total for Secondary Chilled Water
Pumps & VFD (6W + 3S)
5
Condenser Water Pumps (3W + 1S )
Condenser Water Pump on / off command
Condenser Water Pump run Status
0
4
4
Auto Manual Switch
4
0
12
0
Relay output
Differential Pressure
Switch
Potential free contacts of
contactor.
Potential free contacts of
selector switch.
4
4
4
4
4
8
2
4
CT Make Up Water Tank Level (high/low)
Auto manual switch
Sub Total for Cooling Tower (AC)
Sub Total for Chilled water system
AHUs/TFA/FCUs/Ventilation Systems
9
4
Condenser Chilled water Pump trip Status
Sub Total for CDW pumps
Cooling Tower (AC) (3W + 1S )
Cooling Tower fans on / off command
Cooling Tower fan run status
0
4
Trip Status
Cooling Tower sump water (low/high level)
B)
9
Relay output in VSPS
panel for each set of pump.
Potential free contacts in
VSPS.
Software connectivity panel
for each set of pump
Secondary CHW Pumps microprocessor
(software) integration for intrinsic parameter
control & monitoring
4
Relay output
0
5
22
59
0
0
4
25
Relay output
Current relay
Potential free contacts.
Level Switch
Level Switch
Potential free contacts of
selector switch.
380
1
2
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE AND
HUMIDITY:
Outside air relative humidity monitoring
Outside air temp monitoring
Sub Total for Outside Air Temp. and
Humidity
Horizontal AHU's with Mixing Box
1
1
2
19
19
19
19
28
28
28
28
84
28
Relay output
Diff. Pressure Switch - Air
Diff. Pressure Switch - Air
Duct mount temp sensor
Output signal from the
DDC Controller
Potential free contacts of
selector switch.
28
10
10
TFA air flow/filter status
TFA Fan run Status
10
10
10
Supply Air Temperature monitoring
2 Way Modulating Valve for Chilled water
Line.
10
10
Auto manual switch
FCU start/stop
Room temperature sensor with setpoint
override
19
28
28
Sub Total for AHUs (ceiling suspended)
with Mixing Box
5
19
28
Auto manual selector switch
Sub Total for TFA with Mixing Box
Fan Coil Units
57
Relay output
Diff. Pressure Switch - Air
Diff. Pressure Switch - Air
Duct mount temp sensor
Output signal from the
DDC Controller
Potential free contacts of
selector switch.
28
Fan Start/Stop
Return Air Filter Status
Run Status
Return Air Temperature monitoring
2 Way Modulating Valve for Chilled water
Line.
TFA with Mixing Box
TFA on / off command
0
19
19
Sub Total for Horizontal AHU's with Mixing
Box
4
0
19
Auto manual selector switch
AHUs (ceiling suspended) with Mixing Box
0
19
Fan Start/Stop
Return Air Filter Status
Run Status
Return Air Temperature monitoring
2 Way Modulating Valve for Chilled water
Line.
3
Outside Air RH Sensor
Outside Air Temp Sensor
10
30
10
10
Relay output
Diff. Pressure Switch - Air
Diff. Pressure Switch - Air
Duct mount temp sensor
Output signal from the
DDC Controller
Potential free contacts of
selector switch.
31
Relay output
Communicating type room
temperature control unit
381
Communicating type room
temperature control unit
Chilled / Hot Water Valve start/stop
6
Sub Total for Fan Coil Units
VENTILATION AND EXHAUST FANS:
7
Fan run status
Fan Start/Stop
Sub Total for Ventilation/Exhaust Fan
AIR WASHERS SPRAY TYPE
0
PLUMBING/FIRE FIGHTING / STP/WTP
Water treatment plant and tanks
2
Underground Water Tank & Sumps High/low
Level Monitoring
Overhead Water Tank High/low Level
Monitoring
Flow measurement in the inlet header of
Fire/Raw water tank
Pumps Status (WTP)
Pumps Start/Stop(WTP)
Pump auto manual selector switch(WTP)
Sub Total for Water treatment plant and
tanks
Water Bodies
Pump Start/Stop
Pump Status
Pump Auto manual selector switch
Sub Total for Water Bodies
3
0
0
62
0
62
0
62
62
Current relay
Relay output
4
Air Washer Start/Stop
Air Washer run Status
Air Washer pump run Status
Sub Total for Air Washers
Sub Total for AHUsTFA/FCUs/Ventilation
Systems
C)
1
0
62
4
0
4
4
8
0
4
59
241
57
123
Relay output
Current relay
Differential pressure switch
7
14
Level Switch
12
24
Level Switch
1
3
3
3
1
44
0
3
2
0
2
2
4
0
Electromagnetic type Flow
meter
Differential pressure switch
Relay output.
Potential free contacts.
Relay output
Current Relay
Potential free contacts.
2
HSD Storage and supply system
Day oil tank Tank(6) High/Low Level
12
HSD Pump Start/Stop
HSD Transfer Pump Status
HSD Fuel Flow Status
4
4
4
HSD Fuel Flow Meter
3
Auto Manual Switch
4
Flameproof Level Switch /
controllers by others
Relay output.
Current relay
Fuel Flow Switch.
Fuel Flow Meter (By HSD
Contractor).
Potential free contactsof
selector switch
382
Sub Total for HSD Storage and supply
system
4
Hydro-Pneumatic System
0
27
0
4
4
4
VFD Start/Stop
4
VFD auto manual selector switch
Variable speed Pump System integration with
BMS
Sub Total for Hydro-Pneumatic System
5
6
7
0
Sump pump
Sump Pump Start/Stop
Sump Pump Status
Sump pump Auto manual switch
Sub Total for Sump Pumps
1
2
0
4
4
0
Sewage Treatment Plant (STP)
Pump/Air Blower Start/Stop
Pump/Air Blower Run Status
Auto/Manual Selector Switch
Sub Total for Sewage Treatment Plant
4
4
8
0
0
12
12
24
0
Relay output
Current Relay
Potential free contacts.
4
12
Relay Output
Current Relay
Potential Free Contacts
12
Fire Protection System
Main Fire Pump Run Status
1
1
Diesel Fire Pump Run Status
1
1
Jockey Pump Run Status
2
2
Sprinkler Pump Run Status
1
1
Water Header pressure
Sub Total for Fire Protection System
Sub Total for PLUMBING/FIRE FIGHTING /
STP/WTP
D)
4
Potential free contacts in
VSPS panel for each set of
pumps
Potential free contacts.
Software connectivity
DG SETS, TRANSFORMERS & FIRE
ALARM
DG SETS (5 Nos.)
DG sets panel integration with BMS for
intrinsic parameter monitoring.
Sub Total for DG SETS
Transformers (4 Nos.)
Breakers status
Current, Voltage, KWh, KVA, Pf, Frequency
Monitoring
Differential pressure
switch
Differential pressure
switch
Differential pressure
switch
Differential pressure
switch
Pressure Transmitter
1
1
5
0
0
2
116
0
29
5
Software Integration
0
0
0
0
4
4
Potential free contacts
Integration with Multi
function energy meter
383
Integration with Multi
function energy meter
Potential free contacts
Energy consumption
Bus Coupler status
Sub Total for Transformers
3
4
5
6
Lifts 22 Nos. & Escalator - 2 Nos.
Lift intrinsic parameter monitoring through
software integration.
Sub Total for Lifts
Fire Alarm System
Fire Alarm System microprocessor (software)
integration for monitoring
Sub Total for Fire Alarm System
HT Panel (3)
Breaker Status
Sub Total for Fire Alarm System
LT Panel (2)
Breaker Status
Sub Total for Fire Alarm System
Sub Total for DG SETS , TRANSFORMERS
& FIRE ALARM
GRAND TOTAL
Total Number of Data Points
0
5
9
0
0
24
Software integration
0
0
0
0
Software integration
0
0
0
0
0
13
13
0
0
0
0
36
36
58
0
0
0
0
66
474
57
177
774
3
Potential free contacts
2
Potential free contacts
384
TENDER SPECIFICATION FOR ACTIVE SWITCHING COMPONENTS
PREFERED MAKE: CISCO/JUNIPER OR EQUIVALENT
All Active Switching Component, FO Module , NMS will from Same OEM
SN.
Specification For Core Switch
A
1
a
b
c
d
e
f
2
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Port Density and Architecture
Switch should be of non-blocking architecture for all
ports from day 1
Chassis /Modular Switch should have minimum 8
universal slots
The Switch should support Active – Active Cluster
switching technology using VSS or equivalent
technology. The proposed
VSS or equivalent technology should support high
availability for both Layer 2 and Layer 3 (RIP, RIPng,
OSPF, OSPF v3)
Including
for IPVSS
Multicasting
(PIMtechnology
v4,PIM v6) should
for CCTV video
The proposed
or equivalent
and VOIPseamless
support
applications.
switch over of traffic between the
chassis in case of
any kind of link or hardware failure to ensure no traffic
disruption for real time voice and video applications.
The provision for VSS or equivalent Link or
interconnection between 2 Chassis Switches should be
of min.40Gbps with no single point of failure between
the links. Interface/ port
/card/software for the same should be provided from day
1.
The switch should have following interface configuration
from day1:
a) 48 X GE UTP interface b) 6 X 10GbE SFP+ interface
Performance
350Mpps or higher forwarding rate.
Extensive wire-speed traffic classification for ACLs and QoS
Support Jumbo frame
Support Wire-speed multicasting
620 Gbps or higher Switching Fabric
Min. 64K MAC addresses , support 4096 VLANs
Switch should have inbuilt mechanism for proactively
monitoring about any malfunction like power supply or
internal temperature (full internal environment).
3
a
Reliability
Dual hot swappable PSUs with 1 + 1 redundancy
(Populated)
b
c
4
a
Hot-swappable modules
Hot swappable fan modules
Standards
IEEE 802.2 (LLC)
Compliance
YES/NO
Remarks
385
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
5
a
b
c
d
e
f
6
a
b
c
d
e
7
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
k
8
a
b
c
IEEE 802.1v VLAN classification
IEEE 802.1Q
IEEE 802.1ad (Q-in-Q),VLAN stacking
IEEE 8023ae
IEEE 802.3x flow control
IEEE 802.3z (1000 Base X)
IEEE 802.1p Priority Tagging
IEEE 802.3ab
IEEE 802.3an (10 Base T)
Resiliency
STP, RSTP, MSTP (801s)
Link Aggregation (803ad) groups
Loop Protection and Loop Detection
Sub 50Ms Resiliency for 10G ring based design as per the
IEEE
802.17/RPR
/ ERPS
or equivalent
technology
The
proposed
Ring protection
technology
shall have the
high reliability functionality to handle dual failures and
ensure the convergence of less than 50ms in case of
more than one link broken in the ring.
The proposed Ring protection technology shall be capable
of handling data loop whose path traverse more than a
single ring and the loop occurs when there is a break in a
physical segment that is shared by two rings.
Routing
Should support RIP and RIPng from day 1
Should support VRRP and VRRPv3 from Day 1
Should support OSPF and OSPFv3 from day 1
Should support BGP and BGP4 for IPv6 from day 1
Support Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) and Equal
Cost
Multi-Path
(ECMP) routing from day 1
IPv6
Features:IPv4 and IPv6 Dual Stack
IPv6 Management ,IPv6 ACL (hardware based)
SNMPv6,Telnet v6,SSHv6
NTPv6 Client and server (for time synchronization)
RFC 2464 for IPv6 packet transmission over Ethernet
network
Neighbor Discovery for IPv6
RFC 4862 (SLAAC)
RFC 3596 DNS Extension
Internet Control Message protocol (ICMPv6)
Should support IPv6 Addressing Architecture
Multicast Support
Bootstrap Router for IGMP v1,IGMP v2, IGMPv3,IGMP
Query Solicitation ,MLD Snooping (MLDv1,MLDv2),
MLD for IPv6,PIMv4-SM,PIM-DM,PIM-SSM
RFC 4607 Source specific multicast
Interoperability Rules for Multicast Routing Protocols
386
9
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
10
a
b
c
d
e
f
11
a
b
c
d
e
f
12
a
Security
Support 802.1x support
Should Support Dynamic & Private VLANs , Guest VLAN
Network Access and Control (NAC) features or
equivalent to manage end point security
BPDU Protection and STP Root Guard, Access Control List
based on Layer 3 and layer 4, Dynamic VLAN
RFC 2865 RADIUS, TACACS + and RFC 2866 RADIUS
accounting
Should
support MAC address filtering and MAC
limiting functionality.
The switch should support detection of Denial of Service
(DoS)
attack.
MD5 Message-Digest algorithm , IP authentication using
keyed
MD5 of Service
Quality
Policy based QoS features
traffic classification on priority requirement
Mixed scheduling or equivalent to support complex
traffic queuing requirements
8 QoS queues per port and support Voice VLAN,LLDP-MED
Diffserv, Strict Priority, Round Robin.
Access Control Lists (ACLs) and IEEE 802.1p Priority Tagging
Management :
GUI, Telnet, Industry-standard CLI with built-in Help-menu
Should support software release files, configuration and
other files to be stored for backup with SD card or USB
drives.
Port
mirroring and RMON ( 4 Groups)
Out of band 10/100/1000 Ethernet management
port and console management port
SSH and SNMPv3 for secure management, DDM – Optical
digital diagnostic monitoring as per SFF – 8472 or
equivalent
standards
NTP , Syslog and sFlow or equivalent
Electrical Approvals and Compliances
Restrictions on Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Compliance
and
Energy Efficient Ethernet compliant (EEE) compliance
387
B. Distribution Switch
S.No
1
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
2
a
b
c
3
a
b
c
Technical specification
Advanced Multi Layer switch.
48 * 10/100/1000T with Min 4 * SFP + Ports to
accommodate 1G or 10 G fiber module (single mode
/multimode) for flexibility to choose.
IEEE 802.1AX Link aggregation (static and LACP)
IEEE 802.3ad Static and dynamic link aggregation
IEEE 802.3x Flow control - full duplex operation
Should support Active – Active Clustering - VSS or
equivalent technology for high availability and quick
resiliency. Card/Interface/Port/software/cable should
be
provided
fromfor
dayVSS
one.
The
provision
or equivalent Link or
interconnection between 2 Switches should be of
min.40Gbps with no single point of failure between the
links
The proposed VSS technology or equivalent should
support high availability for both Layer 2 and Layer 3
(RIP, RIPng, OSPF, OSPF v3) Including for IP Multicasting
(PIM v4,PIM v6) for CCTV video applications.
The VSS or equivalent technology should support real
time data mirroring on diversified location (min 800
Meters) as required.
The switch must support Internal load sharing Dual
power supplies , vendors shall propose for Internal
Redundant PSU ' s
The proposed VSS or equivalent technology shall
support
Link Aggregation between different members in an
Active
The switch shall be POE / POE + Compliant in
–accordance
Active cluster
for high
reliability
to IEEE
standards
802.3af and 802.3at .Min
PoE power Budget should be min 370 watt.
Performance Specifications
Min 176Gbps of switching capacity
Min 130 Mpps Switching throughput
Min 16K Address Table
Resiliency
Sub 50Ms Resiliency for 10G ring based design as per
the IEEE 802.17/RPR / ERPS or equivalent technology
The proposed Ring protection technology shall have
the high reliability functionality to handle dual failures
and ensure the convergence of less than 50ms in case
of more
The
Ring protection
technology shall be
thanproposed
one link broken
in the ring.
capable of handling data loop whose path traverse
more than a single ring and the loop occurs when
there is a break in a
physical segment that is shared by two rings.
Compliance
(Yes / NO)
Remarks
388
d
e
f
g
h
4
a
b
c
d
e
5
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
6
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Loop Detection and Loop protection
Control Plane Prioritization (CPP)
Dynamic link failover
Should Support VRRP v2 and VRRP v3
RSTP , MSTP
VLAN
VTP / GVRP
VLAN creation based on protocol ,Port and Subnet
based
IEEE 802.1Q Virtual LAN
Q In Q
Up to 4K configurable VLAN ' s
Layer 3 Features
Equal Cost Multi Path (ECMP) routing, PIMv4-SM, PIMDM, PIM-SSM – from day one.
RIP v2 , OSPF v2, OSPF v3, ECMP(Equal Cost Multipath)
- from day one.
OSPF Graceful restart
Policy-based routing
Route redistribution (OSPF, RIP)
ICMP router discovery messages
Classless Inter-Domain Routing (CIDR)
Domain Name System (DNS) and DNS Relay
RIPng for IPv6 from day one
PIMv6-SM and OSPF v3 Graceful restart
DHCP Client / Relay
DHCP Server
Security
Access Control Lists (ACLs)
Guest VLANs for enforcing security policies
BPDU protection
DHCP snooping, IP source guard and Dynamic ARP
Inspection (DAI)
IP source guard or equivalent
Dynamic ARP Inspection (DAI)
Dynamic allocation of multiple VLAN s on one port for
different user/devices
389
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
O
P
Q
R
S
t
7
a
b
c
d
e
f
9
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
10
a
Network Access and Control (NAC) features or
equivalent to manage end point security
Port-based learn limits (intrusion detection)
or equivalent
MAC address filtering and MAC address lock-down
Private VLANs provide security and port isolation
Secure Copy (SCP)
Strong password security and encryption
MAC-based, web-based IEEE 802.1x authentication
IEEE 802.1x with Web Authentication client monitoring
SSH , SSLv2 ,SSLv3 , SCP
TACACS+ accounting and authentication
DoS attack blocking
RSTP Root Guard
MD5 Message-Digest algorithm, IP authentication
using keyed MD5.
Quality of service
IEEE 802.1p
DSCP Prioritization
Policy-based QoS based classifying traffic based on
MAC , Port , VLAN , Protocol .
ASIC based remarking capabilities
Tail drop for queue congestion control
Strict priority/ weighted round robin
IPv6 Features
Path MTU discovery for IPv6
IPv6 Router Discovery
IPv6 Router Advertisement
IPv6 Router Advertisement Guard
Transmission of IPv6 packets over Ethernet networks
Default address selection for IPv6
DNS extensions to support IPv6
Unique local IPv6 unicast addresses
Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMPv6)
Neighbor discovery for IPv6
IPv6 Stateless Address Auto-Configuration (SLAAC)
IPv6 Router Advertisement (RA) flags option
IPv6 Router Advertisement (RA) guard
IPv4 and IPv6 Dual stack
DHCP Client / Relay for IPv6
DHCP server for IPv6
Management Features
SNMPv1, v2c and v3
390
B. Distribution Switch
S.No
1
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
2
a
b
c
3
a
b
d
c
Technical specification
Advanced Multi Layer switch.
48 * 10/100/1000T with Min 4 * SFP + Ports to accommodate 1G
or 10 G fiber module (single mode
/multimode) for flexibility to choose.
IEEE 802.1AX Link aggregation (static and LACP)
IEEE 802.3ad Static and dynamic link aggregation
IEEE 802.3x Flow control - full duplex operation
Should support Active – Active Clustering - VSS or equivalent
technology for high availability and quick resiliency.
Card/Interface/Port/software/cable should be
provided from day one.
The provision for VSS or equivalent Link or interconnection
between 2 Switches should be of min.40Gbps with no single point
of failure between the
links
The proposed VSS technology or equivalent should support high
availability for both Layer 2 and Layer 3 (RIP, RIPng, OSPF, OSPF v3)
Including for IP Multicasting
(PIM v4,PIM v6) for CCTV video applications.
The VSS or equivalent technology should support real time data
mirroring on diversified location (min 800
Meters) as required.
The switch must support Internal load sharing Dual power supplies
, vendors shall propose for Internal Redundant PSU ' s
The proposed VSS or equivalent technology shall support
Link Aggregation between different members in an Active
– Active cluster for high reliability
The switch shall be POE / POE + Compliant in accordance to IEEE
standards 802.3af and 802.3at .Min PoE power Budget should be
min 370 watt.
Performance Specifications
Min 176Gbps of switching capacity
Min 130 Mpps Switching throughput
Min 16K Address Table
Resiliency
Sub 50Ms Resiliency for 10G ring based design as per the IEEE
802.17/RPR / ERPS or equivalent technology
The proposed Ring protection technology shall have the high
reliability functionality to handle dual failures and ensure the
convergence
lessprotection
than 50mstechnology
in case of more
The proposedofRing
shall be capable of
than
one
link
broken
in
the
ring.
handling data loop whose path traverse more than a single ring
and
loop occurs
whenprotection
there is a break in a
Loopthe
Detection
and Loop
physical segment that is shared by two rings.
Compliance
(Yes / NO)
Remarks
391
e
Control Plane Prioritization (CPP)
f
Dynamic link failover
g
Should Support VRRP v2 and VRRP v3
h
RSTP , MSTP
4
VLAN
a
VTP / GVRP
b
VLAN creation based on protocol ,Port and Subnet based
c
IEEE 802.1Q Virtual LAN
d
Q In Q
e
Up to 4K configurable VLAN ' s
5
Layer 3 Features
b
c
Equal Cost Multi Path (ECMP) routing, PIMv4-SM, PIM- DM, PIMSSM – from day one.
RIP v2 , OSPF v2, OSPF v3, ECMP(Equal Cost Multipath) - from day
one.
OSPF Graceful restart
d
Policy-based routing
e
Route redistribution (OSPF, RIP)
f
ICMP router discovery messages
g
Classless Inter-Domain Routing (CIDR)
h
Domain Name System (DNS) and DNS Relay
i
RIPng for IPv6 from day one
j
PIMv6-SM and OSPF v3 Graceful restart
k
DHCP Client / Relay
l
DHCP Server
6
Security
a
Access Control Lists (ACLs)
a
b
Guest VLANs for enforcing security policies
392
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
BPDU protection
DHCP snooping, IP source guard and Dynamic ARP Inspection (DAI)
IP source guard or equivalent
Dynamic ARP Inspection (DAI)
Dynamic allocation of multiple VLAN s on one port for different
user/devices
Network Access and Control (NAC) features or equivalent to
manage end point security
Port-based learn limits (intrusion detection) or equivalent
MAC address filtering and MAC address lock-down
k
Private VLANs provide security and port isolation
l
Secure Copy (SCP)
m
Strong password security and encryption
n
MAC-based, web-based IEEE 802.1x authentication
O
IEEE 802.1x with Web Authentication client monitoring
P
SSH , SSLv2 ,SSLv3 , SCP
Q
TACACS+ accounting and authentication
R
DoS attack blocking
S
RSTP Root Guard
t
7
MD5 Message-Digest algorithm, IP authentication using keyed
MD5.
Quality of service
a
IEEE 802.1p
b
DSCP Prioritization
c
d
Policy-based QoS based classifying traffic based on MAC , Port ,
VLAN , Protocol .
ASIC based remarking capabilities
e
Tail drop for queue congestion control
f
Strict priority/ weighted round robin
9
IPv6 Features
393
a
Path MTU discovery for IPv6
b
IPv6 Router Discovery
c
IPv6 Router Advertisement
d
IPv6 Router Advertisement Guard
e
Transmission of IPv6 packets over Ethernet networks
f
Default address selection for IPv6
g
DNS extensions to support IPv6
h
Unique local IPv6 unicast addresses
i
Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMPv6)
j
Neighbor discovery for IPv6
k
IPv6 Stateless Address Auto-Configuration (SLAAC)
l
IPv6 Router Advertisement (RA) flags option
m
IPv6 Router Advertisement (RA) guard
n
IPv4 and IPv6 Dual stack
o
DHCP Client / Relay for IPv6
p
DHCP server for IPv6
10
Management Features
a
SNMPv1, v2c and v3
394
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
0
11
a
b
IEEE 802.1AB Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
Web GUI
sFlow or equivalent
Industry-standard CLI with help menu and GUI
CLI script option
Built-in text editor
User-based Security Model (USM) for SNMPv3
View-based Access Control Model (VACM) for SNMP
Console management port
Port mirroring locally within switch and across VSS
or equivalent cluster member
TFTP , NTP And Syslog,
An USB or equivalent memory card socket , allowing
software release files, configuration and other files to
be
stored– for
backup
anddiagnostic
distribution
to other switches
DDM
Optical
digital
monitoring
as per SFF –
8472 or equivalent standards
Built in Self-Test
Multicast Support
IGMP query solicitation
IGMP snooping v1 , v2 and v3
a
IGMP Querier and IGMP Snooping Quereier
MLD snooping (v1 and v2)
MLD Querier
IGMP/MLD multicast forwarding (IGMP/MLD proxy)
, IGMP Snooping Fast - leave , IGMP Filtering ,
IGMP
snooping report suppression , IGMP source address
check
PIM neighbor filtering
, IGMP static entries
PIM for IPv6 , MLD Filtering , MLD Snooping fast
leave , MLD snooping static mrouter ports , MLD
snooping report suppression
PIM - SSM
Pro Active Intelligence features
Event-based triggers allow user-defined scripts to
be executed upon selected system events based on
Time , Date , day and Event based
b
c
The switch shall have pro active intelligence to create
an ICMP polling for service reachability based on IP
address and configure pro active action upon loss or
re establishment of the service reachability
Eco-friendly mode
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
12
d
Switch should have inbuilt mechanism for proactively
monitoring about any malfunction like power supply or
internal temperature (full internal environment).
13
Voice over IP
a
LLDP-MED ANSI/TIA-1057
395
b
Voice VLAN
14
Compliances
a
ROHS compliant is must
b
IEEE 802.3az Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE)
c
UL, cUL, TUV
396
C. Access Switch: (Type 1)
S.No
1
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
2
a
b
c
3
a
b
d
ec
f
g
h
4
a
b
c
d
e
f
5
6
aa
Technical specification
Managed Access switch.
48 * 10/100/1000T with Min 4 * SFP + Ports to
accommodate 1G or 10 G fiber module (single
mode
/multimode)
to choose.
IEEE 802.1AX for
Linkflexibility
aggregation
(static and LACP)
IEEE 802.3ad Static and dynamic link aggregation
IEEE 802.3x Flow control - full duplex operation
Should support stacking for minimum 4 Nos of
switches to be managed by a single IP . Should have
flexibility for
stacking on min 800 meters distance between
members
of individual
Link
aggregation
acrossstack
stackswitches
memberas required.
Port Mirroring across stack member
The switch must support Internal load sharing
Dual power supplies , vendors shall propose for
Internal Redundant PSU ' s
The switch shall be POE / POE + Compliant in
accordance to IEEE standards 802.3af and 802.3at
.Min
PoE power Budget
should be min 370 watt.
Performance
Specifications
Min 176Gbps of switching capacity
Min 130 Mpps Switching throughput
Min 16K Address Table
Resiliency
Sub 50Ms Resiliency for 10G ring based design as per
the IEEE
802.17/RPR
/ ERPS or technology
equivalent technology
The
proposed
Ring protection
shall have
the high
reliability
to handle dual
The
proposed
Ringfunctionality
protection technology
shall failures
be
and
ensure
the
convergence
of
less
than
50ms
in
case
capable
of handling
whose path traverse
Loop
Detection
and data
Loop loop
protection
of
more
than
a single
ring and (CPP)
the loop occurs when
Control
Plane
Prioritization
more than
there
is a one link broken in the ring.
Dynamic link failover
break in a physical segment that is shared by two rings
VRRP v2 and VRRP v3 Scalable
RSTP , MSTP
VLAN
VTP / GVRP
VLAN creation based on protocol ,Port and Subnet
based802.1Q Virtual LAN (VLAN) bridges
IEEE
IEEE 802.3ac VLAN tagging
Q In Q scalable
Up to 4K configurable VLAN ' s
Scalable Layer 3 Features
The proposed access switch shall be scalable to a full
layer
3 switch supporting routing protocols RIP, OSPF,
Security
RIPng
PIM andLists
other
Layer 3 Multicasting features
Access, Control
(ACLs)
without changing the base hardware for future
scalability / further expansion of the network.
Compliance
(Yes / NO)
Remarks
397
bc
d
e
f
g
hi
j
k
l
c
3
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
4
a
b
c
d
e
f
5
a
6
a
b
c
d
e
f
Guest VLANs for enforcing security policies
BPDU protection
DHCP snooping
IP source guard
Dynamic ARP Inspection (DAI)
Dynamic allocation of multiple VLAN s on one port for
different Access
user/devices
Network
and Control (NAC) features or
equivalent to
manage
point security
Port-based
learn
limitsend
(intrusion
detection)
MAC address filtering and MAC address lock-down
Private VLANs provide security and port isolation
Secure Copy (SCP)
Min 16K Address Table
Resiliency
Sub 50Ms Resiliency for 10G ring based design as
per the IEEE 802.17/RPR / ERPS or equivalent
technology
The proposed Ring protection technology shall have
the high reliability functionality to handle dual
failures and ensure the convergence of less than
50ms in case of
moreproposed
than oneRing
link protection
broken in the
ring.
The
technology
shall be
capable of handling data loop whose path traverse
more than a single ring and the loop occurs when
there is a
break
in a physical
that is shared by two rings
Loop Detection
andsegment
Loop protection
Control Plane Prioritization (CPP)
Dynamic link failover
VRRP v2 and VRRP v3 Scalable
RSTP , MSTP
VLAN
VTP / GVRP
VLAN creation based on protocol ,Port and Subnet
based
IEEE 802.1Q Virtual LAN (VLAN) bridges
IEEE 802.3ac VLAN tagging
Q In Q scalable
Up to 4K configurable VLAN ' s
Scalable Layer 3 Features
The proposed access switch shall be scalable to a
full layer 3 switch supporting routing protocols RIP,
OSPF, RIPng , PIM and other Layer 3 Multicasting
features
without changing the base hardware for future
Security
scalability / further expansion of the network.
Access Control Lists (ACLs)
Guest VLANs for enforcing security policies
BPDU protection
DHCP snooping
IP source guard
Dynamic ARP Inspection (DAI)
398
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
p
p
q
r
s
7
a
b
b
c
d
e
8
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
9
a
b
c
d
Dynamic allocation of multiple VLAN s on one port
for different user/devices
Network Access and Control (NAC) features
or equivalent to manage end point security
Port-based learn limits (intrusion detection)
MAC address filtering and MAC address lock-down
Private VLANs provide security and port isolation
Secure Copy (SCP)
Strong password security and encryption
MAC-based, web-based IEEE 802.1x
SSH , SSLv2 ,SSLv3 , SCP
TACACS+ accounting and authentication
DoS attack blocking
RSTP Root Guard
MD5 Message-Digest algorithm , IP authentication
using keyed MD5
Quality of service
IEEE 802.1p
DSCP Prioritization
Policy-based QoS based classifying traffic based on
MAC
, Portbased
, VLANremarking
, Protocolcapabilities
.
ASIC
Taildrop for queue congestion control
Strict priority/ weighted round robin
IPv6 Features
Path MTU discovery for IPv6
IPv6 Router Discovery
IPv6 Router Advertisement
IPv6 Router Advertisement Guard
Transmission of IPv6 packets over Ethernet networks
Default address selection for IPv6
DNS extensions to support IPv6
Unique local IPv6 unicast addresses
Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMPv6)
Neighbor discovery for IPv6
IPv6 Stateless Address Auto-Configuration (SLAAC)
IPv6 Router Advertisement (RA) flags option
IPv6 Router Advertisement (RA) guard
IPv4 and IPv6 Dual stack
DHCP Client / Relay for IPv6
DHCP server for IPv6
Management Features
SNMPv1, v2c and v3
IEEE 802.1AB Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
Web GUI
sFlow or equivalent
399
e
f
g
h
Industry-standard CLI
CLI script option
Built-in text editor
User-based Security Model (USM) for SNMPv3
i
j
View-based Access Control Model (VACM) for SNMP
Console management port
Port mirroring locally with in switch and
across different stack member in a stack
TFTP , NTP And Syslog
An USB or equivalent memory card socket , allowing
software release files, configuration and other files to
be stored for backup and distribution to other
switches
DDM
– Optical digital diagnostic monitoring as per SFF
–
8472
equivalent
Built or
in Self
Test standards
IPv6 Management features
SNMP v6 , Telnet v6 , SSH v6 , NTP v6 and Trace
Route v6
Multicast Support
IGMP query solicitation
IGMP snooping v1 , v2 and v3
IGMP Querier and IGMP Snooping Querier
Pro Active Intelligence features
Event-based triggers allow user-defined scripts to
be executed upon selected system events based on
Time , Date , day and Event based
The switch shall have pro active intelligence to create
an ICMP polling for service reachability based on IP
address and configure pro active action upon loss or
re establishment of the service reachability
Eco-friendly mode
k
l
m
n
o
10
a
11
a
b
c
12
a
b
c
d
13
a
b
14
a
b
c
Switch should have inbuilt mechanism for proactively
monitoring about any malfunction like power supply
or internal temperature (full internal environment).
Voice over IP
LLDP-MED ANSI/TIA-1057
Voice VLAN
Compliances
ROHS compliant is must
IEEE 802.3az Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE)
UL, cUL, TUV
400
D. Access Switch: (Type 2)
S.No
Technical specification
1
Managed Access switch.
24 * 10/100/1000T with Min 4 * SFP + Ports to
accommodate 1G or 10 G fiber module (single
mode
/multimode)
to choose
IEEE
802.1AX for
Linkflexibility
aggregation
(static.and LACP)
IEEE 802.3ad Static and dynamic link aggregation
IEEE 802.3x Flow control - full duplex operation
Should support stacking for minimum 4 Nos of
switches to be managed by a single IP . Should have
flexibility for
stacking on min 800 meters distance between
members
of individual
Link
aggregation
acrossstack
stackswitches
memberas required.
Port Mirroring across stack member
The switch must support Internal load sharing
Dual power supplies , vendors shall propose for
Internal
Redundant
PSU
's
Performance
Specifications
Min 128Gbps of switching capacity
Min 95 Mpps Switching throughput
Min 16K Address Table
Resiliency
Sub 50Ms Resiliency for 10G ring based design as
per the IEEE 802.17/RPR / ERPS or equivalent
technology
The
proposed Ring protection technology shall have
the high reliability functionality to handle dual
failures and ensure the convergence of less than
50ms in case of more than one link broken in the
ring.proposed Ring protection technology shall be
The
capable of handling data loop whose path traverse
more than a single ring and the loop occurs when
there is a break in a physical segment that is shared
by two
Loop
Detection
rings and Loop protection
Control Plane Prioritization (CPP)
Dynamic link failover
VRRP v2 and VRRP v3 Scalable
RSTP , MSTP
VLAN
VTP / GVRP
VLAN creation based on protocol ,Port and Subnet
based802.1Q Virtual LAN (VLAN) bridges
IEEE
IEEE 802.3ac VLAN tagging
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
2
a
b
c
3
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
4
a
b
c
d
Compliance
(Yes / NO)
Remarks
401
e
f
5
a
6
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
p
p
q
r
s
7
a
b
c
d
e
f
8
a
b
c
Q In Q scalable
Up to 4K configurable VLAN ' s
Scalable Layer 3 Features
The proposed access switch shall be scalable to a
full layer 3 switch supporting routing protocols RIP,
OSPF,
RIPng , PIM and other Layer 3 Multicasting
features without changing the base hardware for
future
Security
scalability
/ further
of the network.
Access Control
Lists expansion
(ACLs)
Guest VLANs for enforcing security policies
BPDU protection
DHCP snooping
IP source guard
Dynamic ARP Inspection (DAI)
Dynamic allocation of multiple VLAN s on one port
for different user/devices
Network Access and Control (NAC) features manage
or equivalent end point security
Port-based learn limits (intrusion detection)
MAC address filtering and MAC address lock-down
Private VLANs provide security and port isolation
Secure Copy (SCP)
Strong password security and encryption
MAC-based, web-based IEEE 802.1x
SSH , SSLv2 ,SSLv3 , SCP
TACACS+ accounting and authentication
DoS attack blocking
RSTP Root Guard
MD5 Message-Digest algorithm , IP authentication
using keyed MD5
Quality of service
IEEE 802.1p
DSCP Prioritization
Policy-based QoS based classifying traffic based on
MAC
, Portbased
, VLANremarking
, Protocolcapabilities
.
ASIC
Taildrop for queue congestion control
Strict priority/ weighted round robin
IPv6 Features
Path MTU discovery for IPv6
IPv6 Router Discovery
IPv6 Router Advertisement
402
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
9
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
10
a
11
a
b
c
12
a
IPv6 Router Advertisement Guard
Transmission of IPv6 packets over Ethernet networks
Default address selection for IPv6
DNS extensions to support IPv6
Unique local IPv6 unicast addresses
Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMPv6)
Neighbor discovery for IPv6
IPv6 Stateless Address Auto-Configuration (SLAAC)
IPv6 Router Advertisement (RA) flags option
IPv6 Router Advertisement (RA) guard
IPv4 and IPv6 Dual stack
DHCP Client / Relay for IPv6
DHCP server for IPv6
Management Features
SNMPv1, v2c and v3
IEEE 802.1AB Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
Web GUI
sFlow or Equivalent
Industry-standard CLI
CLI script option
Built-in text editor
User-based Security Model (USM) for SNMPv3
View-based Access Control Model (VACM) for SNMP
Console management port
Port mirroring locally with in switch and
across different stack member in a stack
TFTP , NTP And Syslog
An USB or equivalent memory card socket , allowing
software release files, configuration and other files to
be
stored
backup
anddiagnostic
distribution
to other switches
DDM – for
Optical
digital
monitoring
as per SFF
–
8472
or equivalent features
standards
IPv6 Management
SNMP v6 , Telnet v6 , SSH v6 , NTP v6 and Trace
Route v6
Multicast Support
IGMP query solicitation
IGMP snooping v1 , v2 and v3
IGMP Querier and IGMP Snooping Querier
Pro Active Intelligence features
Event-based triggers allow user-defined scripts to
be executed upon selected system events based on
Time ,
Date , day and Event based
403
b
c
d
13
a
b
14
a
b
c
The switch shall have pro active intelligence to create
an
ICMP polling for service reach ability based on IP
address and configure pro active action upon loss or
re establishment
Eco-friendly
modeof the service reach ability
Switch should have inbuilt mechanism for proactively
monitoring about any malfunction like power supply
or
internal
temperature
(full internal environment).
Voice over
IP
LLDP-MED ANSI/TIA-1057
Voice VLAN
Compliances
ROHS compliant is must
IEEE 802.3az Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE)
UL, cUL, TUV
E. FO Module:
Specification
SN.
G
a
b
c
10G SFP+ Fiber Pluggable Module ( Single Mode)
Data Rate: 10 Gbps, Connector Type: LC, Wave Length:
1310nm,Distance Support: 10 KM
Should support Digital optical Monitoring, Hot Swappable,
RoHS Compliant
Environment
Operating Temperature: -5 To 70 Degree C, Operating
Humidity:0% to 85% (non-condensing)
Compliance
YES/NO
Remarks
F. Network Management Software:
Specification
SN.
J
a
b
Specifications of NMS software:
Automatic topology discovery and creation of
network maps for Layer 3 and Layer 2 network , All
the available
VLANS have high level Network Inventory polling
Should
capability for IP Network nodes, All available line cards ,
Modules , ports , Physical links , VLAN interfaces and all
the
Compliance
YES/NO
Remarks
404
other SNMP capable devices in the network
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
Should have powerful administration control
Detailed performance monitoring and management
Should have extensive fault manage men capabilities
with Real time Event and Alarm notifications , System
Logs and Audit trials
Creation and management of security and QOS policies
Scheduled Device configuration back-up and
restore functionality
Automatic Detection of configuration changes for
easy trouble shooting and Isolation
Should support 3rd party devices and end points
Should have the functionality of Group
provisioning / Scheduled configuration roll out
management
Should have the ability to perform scheduled or
Unscheduled network wide software or
Firmware upgrades
Should have the ability to customize the NMS dash
boards as per the requirements
Should have the ability to perform / create group
of devices for applying same task
Should have extensive Event notification capability
Should provide the flexibility to the network
administrator to assign task to an Individual network
engineer and
assign
/ track
the statustrouble
of the issue
resolution
Shouldownership
have extensive
centralized
shooting
tools
in built
The NMS solution should be preferably from the same
Active switching vendor , in case vendors proposing for
3rd party NMS solution should provide all the
interoperability reports certified by both the NMS
vendor and Active switching vendor on seamless
All
the required Hardware / Software for the NMS
interoperability
solution should be proposed by the bidder
405
G. AAA/RADIUS Server Solution:
Specification
SN.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
Radius server should work in high available with N + 1
high availability with no single point of failure.
Support for 802.1X Based Device Authentication
Support for MAC Based Authentication
Captive portal Access
Support for Certificate based authentication
Native Data base must support minimum 1000 end
points scalable to minimum 4500 end points
Should support Encryption based on Digital
Signature algorithm or equivalent functional
encryption
protocols
Should be on
Unix/Linux/BSD based.
Standards-based and vendor-agnostic, interfacing
seamlessly with network access equipment from
different vendors
Should Adhere strictly to Radius/ AAA open standards
Authentication Protocols to support EAP - TLS , TTLS ,
PAP
Should
and MDbe
5 compatible and interoperability,
supporting current and future network
configurations
Should seamlessly integrate with the switching
solution proposed for AAA and Dynamic VLAN
allocation for
roamingsupport
user profiles
Should
Dynamic Statistics and reports to track
/ View all the authentication requests / track the
duration of
user connection
Radius
Provide
high levelwith
visibility
toaccounting
Administrators to track
who logged onto or disconnected from the RADIUS
server / network
Should support IPv6
The Radius server should be proposed in high available
mode with no single point of failure. In case of the
primary
server failure the secondary server should seamlessly
take
over with
zerosolution
network
disruption
The Radius
server
should
be preferably from
the same Active switching vendor , in case vendors
proposing
for 3rd party Radius server solution should provide all
the interoperability reports certified by both the
RAIDUS server
vendor
and
Active
vendor, on
In
case of
3rd
partyswitching
Radius solution
theseamless
OEM should
interoperability
have
local presence in India and also should authorize
the bidder
participating
Compliance
YES/NO
Remarks
406
PROJECT : PROPOSED NEW STATE LEGISLATIVE ASSEMBLY OF
ASSAM - MAIN BUILDING
MAKE LIST FOR ACTIVE & PASSIVE COMPONENTS OF NETWORKING SYSTEM AND
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
Sl.
D
No.
e
A PART - I : ACTIVE COMPONENTS
s
MAIN BUILDING
c
L3 Core Switch
r
Advanced Modular / Chassis
Switch with 8 x
i
60Gbps Expansion Bays (PSU
not included),
p
Required
t
1
Hot-swappable AC load sharing
PSU
i
o
n
Advanced Layer 3 License
Unit Qty.
Make List
No.
1
CISCO/JUNIPER OR
EQUIVALENT
Nos.
2
CISCO/JUNIPER OR
EQUIVALENT
No.
1
CISCO/JUNIPER OR
EQUIVALENT
IPv6 Pack License (IPv6 Static Routes,
Management, RIPng, MLD Snooping)
No.
1
CISCO/JUNIPER OR
EQUIVALENT
12x 10/100/1000TX expansion module
Nos.
4
CISCO/JUNIPER OR
EQUIVALENT
2 x 10GbE SFP+ slots (unpopulated) expansion
module
Nos.
3
CISCO/JUNIPER OR
EQUIVALENT
4
CISCO/JUNIPER OR
EQUIVALENT
4
CISCO/JUNIPER OR
EQUIVALENT
4
CISCO/JUNIPER OR
EQUIVALENT
CISCO/JUNIPER OR
EQUIVALENT
Distruburion Switch
Stackable Gigabit Layer 3 Switch with PoE+
Nos.
2 48x10/100/1000T + 4xSFP+ slots, internal
Dual AC PSU
1m Stacking cable (includes 2 stacking modules) Nos.
L3 Premium License
Nos.
Access Switch (Type 1)
Stackable Gigabit Layer 3 Switch with PoE+
Nos.
3
48x10/100/1000T + 4xSFP+ slots, internal
Dual AC PSU
1m Stacking cable (includes 2 stacking modules) Nos.
Access Switch (Type 2)
Stackable Gigabit Layer 2+/3 Switch with
4
24x10/100/1000T + 4xSFP+ slots, internal
Dual AC PSU
Nos.
3
3
CISCO/JUNIPER OR
EQUIVALENT
2
CISCO/JUNIPER OR
EQUIVALENT
407
1m Stacking cable (includes 2 stacking modules)
5 FO Module
10km 1310nm 10GBase-LR SFP+ - Hot
Swappable
NMS
6 NMS Enterprise Edition Server Software ,
License key for NMS Enterprise Edition
100 Starter. Supports 100 managed nodes (or
RADIUS/AAA
Server
subscriber CPEs)
andSolution
5 NMS
7 RADIUS
clients Server for 1000 Users
B PART II: ENCLOSURES
Wall
Mount
ENCLOSU
Enclosure, 800mmW
CYBERACK 42U/
RE
8 800mmD ( CRCA Steel Frame with Alumunium
Profiles & Side Panel-2Nos with following
items:
W
all Mount
- Top cover
APW President
with cable15U
entry
/500D
-1no;1
Section
Front
Glass Door 600mmW 15U with lock
Bottom
cover
with
cable
entry
1no;
19”
Horizontal Cable manager, 1U
Fans
230
VAC
90
cfm
Mounting
Angles –with
2 pairs;
Finish
: Powder
PDU 6 x 5/15amp
16AMP
MCB
and
indicator
Hardware
front
panel
(10
nos/pkt)
coated to 80 microns; Matt finish; Color Black
FLEXIBOX 19", 9U/500mmD with front glass
door
Horizontal PDU 6 x 5amp with 5AMP fuse &
Cable
manager,
indicator and
1.5meter
feed1U
cable and
10 Horizontal
3
pin
plug
Cantlever
Shelf,
Fans 230 VAC
90255mmD
cfm
Hardware front panel (10 nos/pkt)
2
CISCO/JUNIPER OR
EQUIVALENT
Nos. 10
CISCO/JUNIPER OR
EQUIVALENT
No.
1
CISCO/JUNIPER OR
EQUIVALENT
No.
1
CISCO/JUNIPER OR
EQUIVALENT
No.
1
APW PRESIDENT/ RITTAL
Nos.
7
APW PRESIDENT/ RITTAL
Nos.
2
APW PRESIDENT/ RITTAL
408
Sl. No
A
1
Description
PART II: PASSIVE COMPONENTS
COPPER CABLE COMPONENTS
Solid Cable Cat 6, 4 pair, UTP, 305m box
must have Fire retardant PVC Compound
(FRPVC) Flame Rating material, All cables
meet and exceed Category 6/Class E
requirements in ANSI/TIA-568-C.2, and
ISO/IEC 11801. Must be RoHS Compliant
Unit
Qty.
Make List
Mtr.
10370
Schneider/SystimaxCompscope/ Tyco
AMP
Nos.
8
Schneider/SystimaxCompscope/ Tyco
AMP
2
Patch panel UTP 24 ports Unloaded, 1U
with Steel-fully power coated. Performance
as per ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 category 6 and
ISO/IEC-11801 Class E.Performance
guaranteed upto 600 MHz extended
frequency, with Performance verified by
ETL. UL listed as per UL94V-0 rated plastic.
RoHS Compliant (lead free). Bezel must be
High Impact flame retardant plastic.
3
Patch panel UTP 48 ports Unloaded, 2U
with Steel-fully power coated. Performance
as per ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 category 6 and
ISO/IEC-11801 Class E.Performance
guaranteed upto 600 MHz extended
frequency, with Performance verified by
ETL. UL listed as per UL94V-0 rated plastic.
RoHS Compliant (lead free). Bezel must be
High Impact flame retardant plastic.
Nos.
2
Schneider/Systi
max- Compscope/
Tyco AMP
4
Cat 6 unshielded copper RJ-45 keystone
jack includes high performance Category 6
snap in 8-position/8-contact (8P8C)
collapsible shutter jack to prevent dust
entering the jack. conforming to IEC 606037-2. The jacks are designed for fast and
easy snap-in and out of wall plates and
patch panels. All jacks are designed in a
180° form and are available with back
interconnection of krone IDC blocks.
Performance as per ANSI/TIA-568-C.2
category 6 and ISO/IEC-11801 Class E,
Performance guaranteed upto 600 MHz
extended frequency, Performance verified
by ETL UL listed as per UL94V-0 rated
plastic, RoHS Compliant (lead free).
Required for Face Plate
Nos.
259
Schneider/Systi
max- Compscope/
Tyco AMP
409
5
1m Cat 6 UTP Patch Cord moulded and
factory crimped. Unshielded Twisted Pair,
Category 6, ANSI / TIA 568-C.2. 24-26 AW G
, multi - stranded copper with Flame
Retardant Polyethylene Insulation
6
2m Cat 6 UTP Patch Cord moulded and
factory crimped. Unshielded Twisted Pair,
Category 6, ANSI / TIA 568-C.2. 24-26 AW G
, multi - stranded copper with Flame
Retardant Polyethylene Insulation
7
Single Port Faceplate for collapsible shutter
jack, Conforms to CAT6 W ork Area Data
I/O Outlet (RJ45) adhering to ANSI / TIA
568-C.2 , ISO/IEC 11801(2002) and
CENELEC EN50173-1 (2002) specifications
8
BACK BOX -(Surface Mount Box) For Single
and Dual
9
384
Schneider/Systi
max- Compscope/
Tyco AMP
259
Schneider/Systi
max- Compscope/
Tyco AMP
259
SchneiderDigilink/ SystimaxCompscope/ Simon
Nos.
259
Schneider/SystimaxCompscope/ Tyco
AMP
Cat 6 unshielded copper RJ-45 keystone
jack includes high performance Category 6
snap in 8-position/8-contact (8P8C)
collapsible shutter jack to prevent dust
entering the jack. conforming to IEC 606037-2. The jacks are designed for fast and
easy snap-in and out of wall plates and
patch panels. All jacks are designed in a
180° form and are available with back
interconnection of krone IDC blocks.
Performance as per ANSI/TIA-568-C.2
category 6 and ISO/IEC-11801Class E,
Performance guaranteed upto 600 MHz
extended frequency, Performance verified
by ETL UL listed as per UL94V-0 rated
plastic, RoHS Compliant (lead free).
Required for Face Plate
20 mm PVC conduit medium duty non FRLS
Nos.
259
Schneider/Systi
max- Compscope/
Tyco AMP
3000
Schneider/Systi
max- Compscope/
Tyco AMP
11
SC-LC type SM 2m. Available in either
1.6mm or 3mm simplex or Duplex Zipcord.
Single Mode mode 9/125 250 micron
primary coated buffers.
Nos.
10
Schneider/Systi
max- Compscope/
Tyco AMP
12
Rack mount LIU 12 PORT 1U,Sliding type,
UNLOADED with Splice Tray and Cable
spool. LIU should accommodate up to 24
connections in only 1U (1.75”), Suitable for
both 19” frames, Security fastened patch
5
Schneider/SystimaxCompscope/ Tyco
AMP
10
Nos.
Nos.
Nos.
Mtr.
Nos.
410
13
cords can exit to left or right, Metal Box
and Splice tray must have Aluminium
powder coated. Must have Fire retardant
plastic for LIU. It should be RoHS Compliant
1x6 SC Adaptor Module Panel - SIMPLEX
Nos.
5
Schneider/SystimaxCompscope/ Tyco
AMP
14
ADAPTOR SC SM SIMPLEX
Nos.
60
Schneider/SystimaxCompscope/ Tyco
AMP
15
PIGTAIL SC SM (9um) SIMPLEX LENGTH- 1m
Nos.
60
Schneider/SystimaxCompscope/ Tyco
AMP
16
16.1
MS powder coated Raceway
MS powder coated Raceway: 200 mm X 50
mm (2mm thickness). Civil work will be
extra.
Mtr.
250
Reputed
16.2
MS powder coated Raceway: 150 mm X 50
mm (2mm thickness). Civil work will be
extra.
Mtr.
50
Reputed
16.3
MS powder coated Raceway: 100 mm X 50
mm (2mm thickness). Civil work will be
extra.
Mtr.
110
Reputed
17
17.1
17.2
17.3
17.4
7
24
17
34
Reputed
Reputed
Reputed
Reputed
1
1.1
Junction Box
Junction Box of size 350 mm X 350 mm
Junction Box of size 250 mm X 250 mm
Junction Box of size 200 mm X 200 mm
Junction Box of size 150 mm X 150 mm
PART III: IP Telephone system
IPT
IPV6 ready
1.2
Nos.
Nos.
Nos.
Nos.
No.
1
CISCO OR
EQUIVALENT
Voice gateways with IPV6 ready
No.
1
CISCO OR
EQUIVALENT
1.3
Hardware - 08 port analog trunk card
No.
1
CISCO OR
EQUIVALENT
1.4
Hardware - 01 port ISDN PRI card
2
CISCO OR
EQUIVALENT
2
2.1
License
IP User License for 125 nos of telephone
sets
Set
1
CISCO OR
EQUIVALENT
2.2
Attendant console License - One hard
console
Set
1
CISCO OR
EQUIVALENT
3
IP Phone handset
Nos.
411
3.1
IP Based Managerial phones (Same make
of EPABX vendor) with 10 keys , IPV6 ready,
color display: Minimum 1/4 VGA, 240 x 320
pixels, 16.7 M colors, backlight,1 GB data
port for PC connectivity, Embedded
wireless blue tooth handset with 2 pins
charge contact and blue tooth headset
support, PoE ready
Nos.
20
CISCO OR
EQUIVALENT
3.2
IP Based Managerial phones (Same make
of EPABX Vendor) with minimum 6 keys ,
Display : Monochrome graphical with
minimum 20 characters, 75 x 12 mm black
& W hite, 10/100 fast ethernet data port
for PC connectivity, PoE ready
Nos.
105
CISCO OR
EQUIVALENT
4
4.1
Attendant Console
IP hard console (same make of EPABX
vendor), POE Ready, IPV6 ready , minimum
40 BLF keys, color display : Minimum 1/4
VGA, 240 x 320 pixels, 16.7 M colors,
Backlight, 1GB Data port for PC
connectivity.
1
CISCO OR
EQUIVALENT
5
5.1
Headset for Attendant Console
Corded BiNaural Voice Tube Headset
compatible with Hard console of OEM
Voice Guidance
Multi-Lingual voice guidenance facility for
system features
PC for IPT system administration
PC compatible with above configuration for
system administration complete with
relevant OS
3
CISCO OR
EQUIVALENT
Set
1
CISCO OR
EQUIVALENT
Set
1
CISCO OR
EQUIVALENT
6
6.1
7
7.1
No.
Nos.
412
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR
INTERNAL SANITARY INSTALLATION WORKS
AT
DISPUR, GUWAHATI, ASSAM
413
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR SANITARY INSTALLATION WORKS
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS :
1.0
The installation shall be carried out in conforming with the requirements of relevant bye-laws of
Municipal and other Authorities in whose jurisdiction, the work is being carried out and also with
specification laid down by Indian Standards in this codes and National Building Code of Practice - No.
SP : 7 - 1983 (Part IX) plumbing services.
1.1
RULES & REGULATIONS :
All materials, supply, erection, testing and commissioning shall comply with the requirements
of the relevant Indian Standards & Codes of Practice as given below :
I.S.
: 2556
:
Vitreous china sanitary fixture.
I.S.
: 2065 - 1988
:
Code of Practice for water supply in Building.
I.S.
: 5329 (Latest Edition.)
:
Code of Practice for sanitary pipe work above ground.
I.S. :
1742 - 1983.
:
Building drainage.
I.S. :
1172 - 1983.
:
Basic requirement for water supply, drainage and sanitation.
I.S. :
3969 – 1970/1729-1964
:
Specification of sand cast iron spigot and socket soil, waste,
vent pipe and fitting.
I.S. :
1239 (Part - I ) - 1990.
:
M.S. Tubes and fittings - galvanised as per I.S. : 4736 - 1986.
I.S. :
1536 - 1976 &
I.S. : 1537 - 1976.
:
Centrifugally cast (spun) pressure pipes and fittings.
I.S. :
782 - 1982
:
Specification for caulking lead.
I.S. :
458.
:
Concrete pipes.
I.S. :
4984.
:
H.D. polythene pipes for potable work.
I.S. :
I.S. :
780.
5961 - 1961.
:
:
Sluice valves.
C.I. gratings for drainage purpose.
I.S. :
1726.
:
C.I. manhole covers and frame.
I.S. :
5455 - 1969.
:
C.I. steps for manholes.
I.S. :
651 - 1980.
:
Salt glazed stoneware pipes and fittings.
I.S. :
783 - 1953.
:
Jointing concrete pipes.
I.S. :
2379 - 1963.
:
Colour code for identification of pipe lines.
I.S. :
4127 - 1983.
:
Laying of glazed stone ware pipe.
414
I.S :
3114.
:
2.
GENERAL:
Quantities of lead and spun yarm for joint.
All water supply, drainage and sanitary work shall be executed by a Licensed Plumbing Contractor
and shall be in accordance with the requirement of relevant bye-laws of Municipal or other
Authorities in whose jurisdiction the work is being carried out.
The diameter of pipes and fittings wherever mentioned shall mean the internal diameter, unless
otherwise specified.
Unless otherwise specified, all exposed pipe work (within duct/outside) such as Centrifugal cast
iron spun pipe H.C.I. soil, waste pipes and fittings, C.I. water pipes and fittings shall be painted
with one coat of red-oxide paint and two coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved colour and
make.
The job shall include the cost of making necessary chases, holes etc. in walls, floors and in other
places and also making good on completion of the work. Any damage caused to floors, walls etc.
during sanitary and plumbing works shall be made good by the contractor to the satisfaction of
Site Engineer.
3.
LICENSED SANITARY CONTRACTOR :
The contractor, who will be entrusted with these works, must possess licenses (both water supply
and drainage) of Municipalities concerned and must have minimum 15 years experience in
executing similar nature and volume of works. The contractor must have an office with telephone
facilities and adequate supervising staff. The supervising staff should be able to read the drawing,
participate in technical discussion and carry out the works as per drawing in a proper workman
like manner complying the relevant bye-laws.
The contractor must be capable in preparing and obtaining sanction for house drainage and
water supplying from Municipality and also to effect the sewer and water connection.
All completion drawings to be drawn by the contractor (Auto Cad drawing) (5 Nos. hard copy and
2 Nos. C.D)
4.
SCOPE OF WORK :
The scope of work consist of the following works of the buildings :
i)
Handing, fitting and fixing carefully the sanitary fixtures, as per Tender.
Documents drawing and instructions of Authorities concerned and effecting necessary
pipe connections, testing etc. complete in all respects.
ii)
Supplying, fitting and fixing including jointing centrifugal cast iron spun pipe H.C.I/U.P.V.C
soil, waste pipes and fittings complete. Prior to fixing, all pipes and fittings are to be
properly checked by water test and internal surface of the H.C.I. pipes and fittings are to
be painted with a coat of black bitumastic anti-corrosive paint. After fixing of pipes lines,
the same are to be tested by smoke test to ensure the system is leak proof.
Providing and fixing on basement ceiling C.I. spun pipe lines including jointing to connect
all vertical soil, waste, pipe lines to outside sewerage and system.
415
5.
iii)
Supplying and fitting and fixing jointing G.I./C.P.V.C. water pipe lines, valves, cocks, pumps,
etc. complete for the purpose. On completion the pipe lines are to be tested by Hydraulic
Pressure Machine to ensure that the system is absolute leak proof.
iv)
Supplying, laying, jointing and fixing underground sewer lines, yard gullies, construction of
inspection pits, etc. complete including testing and effecting sewer connection with
manhole on nearby main sewer line.
v)
Providing all tools and equipments including testing machines required for testing and
supporting & fixing devices so as to install the sanitary fittings, pipe lines etc. securely in
position.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT :
The following method of measurement will be followed unless otherwise settled :
a)
Sanitary fixtures, Water Heater etc. :
These shall be measured as per actual number of units fixed.
b)
Soil Waste & Anti-siphon Pipes & Fittings :
The measurement of pipes shall be taken along the centre line the pipe lines inclusive of
fittings and joints. The number of fittings and special will not be measured separately as . No
extra payment is admissible for testing of pipe lines.
c)
Water Supply Pipes & Fittings :
The measurement shall be taken along the centre line of pipe lines inclusive of Specials.
Number of fittings will not be measured separately. No extra payment is admissible for
testing of pipe line. Number of valves, cocks, pumps etc. are to be measured separately.
d)
Under ground Sewer Lines :
For sewer lines, measurement shall be recorded for the finished length of the pipe line
including joints i.e. overall length of sewer line excluding the internal length of manholes.
For yard gully connections, measurement shall be recorded between the joint of Y.G. and
inside face of manhole.
Number of manhole, pit and yard gullies etc. are to be measured separately.
No extra payment is admissible for testing of sewer lines.
416
6.
INDIAN STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS :
All work under this contract shall be carried out in accordance with the technical specification and
the latest issue of the Indian Standard Specification applicable to the particular class of work. If
Indian Standards are not formulated for any particular materials of work, the relevant British
Standard Specification shall apply. Relevant issues of I.S. Specifications applicable to the
particular work have been described along with the specification for the respective works. In case
of any confusion or dispute regarding the meaning and interpretation of any specification for the
respective works the decision of the Project Manager/Architects shall be final and binding on
the contractor.
7.
EXCAVATION OF TRENCHES (FOR U.G. WATER , SEWER & LINES) :
Excavation shall generally form part of the item under the schedule and shall not be paid
separately unless otherwise specified in the schedule of quantities. It includes excavation in all
kinds of soil including shoring and bailing out water wherever necessary and refilling the excavated
trenches in 15 cms. layers properly rammed and watered and neatly dressed at the top. If the
excavation is done to dimensions
The power shall be mixed with water in the storage tank. If a proprietary greater than those
shown on the drawings or as directed by the Project Manager/Architect, the excess depth shall be
made good at the own cost of the Contractor. The excavation work should be done in a manner
that does not in any way endanger the stability of the adjacent buildings or other structure or
services. Where any road pavements or crossings are cut, these shall be restored to their original
conditions at no extra cost to the Owner. Moreover, after completion of the work, the Contractor
shall have to dress the site including disposal of the surplus earth at his own cost as directed by the
Project Manager/Architect.
The bed width of the trenches shall be the exact width as shown in the drawings or as specified.
In firm soil, the sides of trenches shall be widened by allowing steps of 45 Cm. (1’ - 6”) on either
side after every 1.82 M. depth from the bottom so as to give side stops of (1/4” to 1”) 6mm. to
25mm. Where the soil is soft, loose or slushy, the width of steps shall be suitably increased as
directed by the Project Manager/Architect. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to take
complete instructions in writing from Project Manager/Architect regarding the stepping, sloping or
shoring to be done for excavation in trenches deeper that 1.82 M.
The bed of the trenches shall be made level and firm by watering and ramming. Any soft or
defective spots that are found shall be filled \with concrete in the proportion as specified or as
may be directed by the Project Manager/Architect.
8.0
INSTALLATION OF SANITARY FIXTURES AND FITTINGS :
8.1
General Requirement
The fixtures and fittings shall be provided with all such accessories as are required to complete the
item in satisfactory working conditions, whether specifically mentioned or not in the schedule of
quantities, specifications and drawings.
The sanitary fixtures and fittings shall be installed at the correct assigned position as shown on the
417
drawings and as directed by the Architect, and shall fully meet with the aesthetic and symmetrical
requirements as demanded by the Architect.
All fixtures and accessories shall be fixed in accordance with a set pattern matching the tile or
interior finish as per Architect requirements. Wherever necessary, the fittings shall be centered to
dimensions and pattern as called for. Fixtures shall be installed by skilled workman with
appropriate tools according to the best trade practice. Manufacturer’s instructions shall be
followed for the installation of fixtures. Fixtures in all toilets shall be standard height mounting as
called for on the drawings. Fixtures shall be mounted rigid, plumb, and true to alignment.
8.2
Mock up and Trial Assembly
The installation of the sanitary fixtures and fittings shall be as per the shop drawings approved by
the Architect/Consultant.
The contractor shall have to assemble at least one set of each type of sanitary fixtures and fittings
in order to determine precisely the required supply and disposal connections. Relevant instructions
from manufacturers shall be followed as applicable. This trial assembly shall be developed to
determine the location of puncture holes, holding devices etc. which will be required for final
installation of all sanitary fixtures and fittings. The above assembly shall be subject to final
approval by the Architect.
The fixtures in the trial assembly can be re-used for final installation without any additional
payments for fixing or dismantling of the fixtures.
8.3
Supporting and Fixing Devices
The contractor shall provide all the necessary supporting and fixing devices to install the sanitary
fixtures and fittings securely in position. The fixing devices shall be rigidly anchored into the
building structure. The devices shall be rust resistant and shall be so fixed that they do not present
an unsightly appearance in the final assembly. Where the location demands, the Architect may
instruct the contractor to provide chromium plated or other similarly finished fixing devices. In
such circumstances the contractor shall arrange to supply the fixing devices and shall be installed
complete with appropriate vibration isolating pads, washers and gaskets.
8.4.
Final Installation :The contractor shall install all sanitary fixtures and fittings in their final position in accordance with
approved trial assemblies and as shown on drawings. The installation shall be complete with all
supply and waste connections. The connection between building and piping system and the
sanitary fixtures shall be through proper unions and flanges to facilitate removal/replacement of
sanitary fixtures without disturbing the build in piping system. All unions and flanges shall match
in appearance with other exposed fittings.
Fixtures shall be mounted rigid, plumb and to alignment. The outlets of water closet pans and
similar appliances shall be examined to ensure that outlet ends are butting on the receiving pipes
before making the joints. It shall be ensured that the receiving pipes are clear of obstruction.
When fixtures are being mounted, attention shall be paid to the possibility of movement and
settlement by other causes. Overflows shall be made to ensure that necessary anchoring devices
have been provided for supporting water closets, wash basins, sinks and other appliances.
9.
PROTECTION AGAINST DAMAGES :
418
The contractor shall take every precaution to protect all sanitary fixtures against damage, misuse,
cracking, staining, breakage and pilferage by providing proper wrapping and locking arrangement
till the completion of the installation. At the time of handing over, the contractor shall clean,
disinfect and polish all the fixtures and fittings . Any fixtures and fittings found damaged, cracked
chipped stained or scratched shall be removed and new fixtures and fittings free from defects shall
be installed at his own accosts to complete the work.
10.
SOIL,WASTE AND VENT (ANTI-SYPHONAGE) PIPES & FITTINGS :
a)
H.C.I. Pipes & Fittings :
The heavy cast iron pipes and fittings should be of I.S. marked pipes and fittings conforming
to I.S. : 1729 or 3989/1970 brand of heavy quality. The pipes shall be free from cracks and
other flaws. The interior of pipes and fittings shall be clean and smooth and painted inside
and outside with approved brand anti-corrosive paint.
b)
Cast iron centrifugal cast iron spun pipe fitting as per I.S : 153681537
U.P.V.C Pipes & Fittings :
The heavy quality pipes and fittings should conforming to type ‘B’ quality of I.S : 13591 – 92.
These pipes must have minimum thickness of 3.2 mm. These pipes shall be free from any
floors and smooth and restriction free.
c)
Fixing :
The pipes and fittings shall be fixed to walls by using proper clamps. The pipes shall be fixed
perfectly vertical or in a line as directed. All soil pipes shall be carried up above the roof and
shall have cowl on top.
Where pipes are laid along walls, the pipes are to be fixed 25mm away from the wall surface.
Necessary nails and clamps etc. are to be used for this purpose.
The access door fittings shall be of proper design so as not to form any cavities in which filth
may accumulate. Doors shall be provided with brass bolts for C.I. fittings, doors for U.P.V.C
fittings shall be screwed type.
Connections between main pipe and the branch pipes shall be made by using branches and
bends invariably with access doors for cleaning.
d)
Jointing :
i)
C.I. Pipes :
The annular space between the sockets and spigot will be first well packed in with spun yarn
leaving 35mm from the lip of the socket for lead. The joint may be leaded by using proper
leading rings or if they are not available by wrapping a ring of lamp rope covered with clay
round the pipe at the end of the socket, leaving a hole through which molten lead shall be
poured in (for pipes with sockets facing upwards) 15mm high by making small clay bound
to the socket edge may be used.
The depth of lead joint or C.I. pipes shall be 40 mm for the pipes upto 100 dia.
419
i)
U.P.V.C fittings :
Jointing shall be done with special quality rubber ring.
e)
Testing :
Before the appliances are connected all opening of pipes shall be inspected and tested. All
opening of pipes bend shall be sealed with plugs and water test in small section of pipes
shall be carried out to a static head of 4.5 mtr.
All pipes and fittings including joints will be tested by smoke test and left in working order
after completion. The smoke test shall be carried out as stated under :
Smoke shall be pumped into the drains at the lowest end from smoke machine which
consists of blower and burner. The materials usually burnt are greasy cotton waste which
form clear pungent smoke which is usually detectable by sight as well as by smell, if leaking
occurs at any point of the drain. The contractor will have to rectify all defects traced in such
tests at his own expenses to the complete satisfaction of the Project Manager/Architect. The
traps and soil fittings should be of heavy cast iron and should have water seal at least (2")
50mm deep.
f)
Anti-syphonage Pipes :
Under otherwise specified, anti-syphonage pipes shall be of U.P.V.C with rubber ring joints.
The main anti-syphonage pipes shall be of 50mm dia. internal or as specified and shown in
layout.
11.
LAYING OF WATER SUPPLY PIPES :
a)
The high density polythene pipes and fittings shall run in wall chase or ceiling or as specified.
The fixing shall be done by means of standard pattern holder bat clamps hooks keeping the
pipes about 1.5 cm clear of the wall where to be laid on surface. Where it is specified to
conceal the pipes, chasing may be adopted or pipes fixed in the shafts, ducts etc. provided
there is a sufficient space to work on the pipes with the usual tools. As far as possible, pipes
may be buried for short distances provided adequate protection is given against damage and
where so required special care to be taken at joints. Where directed by the Construction
Manager/Architect, pipe sleeves shall be fixed at a place the pipe is passing through a wall of
floor for reception of the pipe and allow freedom for expansion and contraction and other
movements Under the floors the pipes shall be laid in layer of sand filling.
H.D polythene pipes shall be jointed with threaded and socket joints, using threaded fittings.
Care shall be taken to remove any burr from the end of the pipes after threading..
Compounds containing red lead shall not be used because of the danger of contamination of
water. Pipes and joints for water supply shall be tested to a pressure of 7 kg. per sq.cm.
b)
All cutting holes, chases, trenches etc. at any place necessary in connection with the works
and subsequent mending damages are to be included in the rates and not paid extra unless
otherwise specified.
c)
Internal Works :
Internal H.D polythene pipes and fittings inside the duct walls shall be fixed by means of
420
standard pattern clamps keeping the pipe 20mm clear of the wall every where or concealed
as directed. If pipes and fittings of inside wall is to be fixed concealed, it is to be by chasing
floors and walls as directed. Where it is imperative to fix the pipe in front of a house or in
any conspicuous position, where it looks ungainly, chasing may be adopted. The clamps
shall be fixed closely as per I.S Code. Concealed pipes are to be secured to walls by hooks.
The valves should be fitted with a union/long screw. In long length run of a pipe, at least in
every (10') 3.05 metres apart there should be a UNION Joint.
All pipes and fittings shall be fixed truly vertical and horizontal or as directed by the Project
Manager/Architect.
For pipes carrying hot water G.I. pipes and fittings are to be used.
d)
Disinfecting of piping system and storage tank
Before commissioning the water supply system, the contractor shall arrange to disinfect the
entire system as described in the succeeding paragraph.
The water storage tanks and pipes shall first be filled and water and thoroughly flushed out.
The storage tanks shall then be filled with water again and disinfecting chemical
containing chlorine added gradually while tanks are being filled to ensure thorough mixing.
sufficient chemical shall be used to give water a dose of 50 parts of chlorine to one million
parts of water. If ordinary bleaching powder is used. The proportions will be 150 gm. Of
powder to 1000 liters of water. The power shall be mixed with water in the storage tank. If
a proprietary
brand of chemical is used, the proportions shall be specified by makers. When the storage
tanks is full, the supply shall be stopped and all the taps on the
distributing pipes are opened successively working progressively away from the storage tank.
Each tap shall be closed when the water discharged begins to smell of chlorine. The storage
tank shall then be filled up with water from supply pipe and added with more disinfecting
chemical in the recommended proportions. The storage tank and pipe shall then remain
charged at least for three hours. Finally the tank and pipes shall be thoroughly flushed out
before any water is used for domestic purpose.
e)
Testing :
All pipes and fittings should be tested by hydraulic pressure machine to a pressure of 7 Kg.
per sq.cm. to ensure that pipes have proper threads and that proper materials (such as white
lead and hamp) have been used in jointing. All leaky joints must be made leak proof by
tightening or re-doing at contractor's expenses.
421
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR EXTERNAL SANITARY WORKS
1.a)
LAYING OF C.I. WATER SUPPLY MAIN :
The trenches for pipes shall be excavated true to lines and levels as directed. The bed of the
trench shall have to be truly and evenly dressed all throughout, from one change of grade to the
next.
The gradient is to be set out by means of boning rods and the required depth be excavated at
any point, the trench shall be regarded as directed by the Project Manager/Architects. The
depth of the trench shall be not less than 1.5m. measured from the top of the pipe to the
surface of the ground under the roads.
The width of the trench shall be the nominal diameter of the pipe plus 15” (400 cms) but it shall
not be less than 21” (52.5 cms) 3’ - 0” (90 cms) in case of rock.
The bed of the trench, if in soft or made up earth shall be well watered and rammed before
lying the pipes and the depressions, if any shall be properly filled with earth and consolidated in
9” (22.5 cm) layers.
If the rock is met with, it shall be removed to 6” (15 cms) below the bed level of the pipe and
the trench will be refilled with excavated materials and consolidated.
The excavated materials shall not be placed within 3; - 0” (1 M) or half of the depth of the
trench, whichever is greater from the edge of the trench.
The materials excavated shall be separate and stacked so that in refilling they may be relaid or
compacted in the same order to the satisfaction of the Project Manager/Architects.
The trench shall be kept free from water, shoring and timbering shall be provided wherever
required. Excavation below water table shall be done after de-watering the trenches.
b)
Materials (Cast iron pressure pipes & fittings) :
i)
Centrifugally cast (spun) iron pressure pipes shall conform to I.S : 1536 – 1976 and shall
be of class L.A spigot and socket and/or flanged pipes as specified shall be used.
The pipes shall withstand the hydrostatic test pressures of 24 Kg/Cm². after installation
without showing leakage, sweating or defects of any kind.
ii)
Cast iron fittings for pressure pipes :
Shall conform to I.S : 1538 (Part – I to XXIII) – 1936. The fittings shall withstand hydrostatic
test pressures as given below without showing any leakage, sweating or defects of any
kind.
Test pressure upto 300mm 25 kg/sq.cm.
c)
Laying of pipes and specials :
422
Before being laid, the pipes shall be examined to see that there are no cracks or defects as
described in (1b) above subject to the approval of the Project Manager/Architects, the
damaged position of the cracked pipe may be out at a joint not less than 6” (15cm) beyond
the visible extremity of the cracks
Pipes shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dust and dirt ; special care be taken to clean the
inside of the socket and outside of the spigot.
The pipes shall be lowered into the trench by means of suitable pully blocks, sheer legs,
chains, ropes etc. In no case, the pipes shall be rolled and dropped into the trench. After
lowering, the pipes shall be arranged so that the spigot of one pipe shall be carefully
centered into the socket of the next pipe, and pushed to full distance that it can go. The pipe
line shall be laid to the levels required. Specials shall also be laid in their positions, as stated
above.
Whereas directed, the pipes and specials may be laid on masonry or concrete pillars. The
pipes laid on level ground shall be laid with socket facing the direction of flow of water.
Any deviation either in plan or elevation less than 11¼ shall be effected by laying the straight
pipes round a flat curve, of such radius that minimum thickness of lead at the face of the
socket shall not be reduced below ¼ (6mm) or the opening between spigot and socket
increased beyond ½ (12mm) at any joint. A deviation of about 65mm. can be effected at
each joint in this way. At the end of each day’s work the 1 st pipe laid shall have its open end
securely closed with a wooden plug to prevent entry of water, soil and any other foreign
matter into the pipe.
Cement concrete thrust blocks of suitable design as approved by the Project
Manager/Architects, shall be provided at 45 and 90 bends of the pipes and also at places
where there is likeholld of thrust so as to withstand the dynamic and static forces developed
due to water in pipe line. The thrust blocks shall be made after the joints have been caulked
with lead.
d)
Lead Caulked Joints :Lead caulked joints with molton lead. This type of lead caulking is generally done in providing
joints in gas, water and sewer lines wherever it is practicable to cast lead caulking, but not in
case of wet conditions.
Quantity of lead. :
Weight of lead required for joints for various sizes of C.I. pipes and specials, shall be
approximately as under :
Dia of pipe.
Lead/Jont.
80mm
1.8 kg.
100mm.
2.2 Kg.
150mm.
3.4 Kg.
200mm.
3.4 Kg.
After the lead has been run into the joint, the lead shall be thoroughly caulked. Caulking of
joints shall be done after a convenient length of the pipe has been laid and loaded. The
423
leading ring shall first be removed and any lead outside the socket shall be removed with a
flat chisel and then joint caulked round three times with caulking tools of increasing
thickness and hammer of 4 to 6 lbs. (2 to 3 kgs) weight. The joints shall not be covered till the
pipe line has been tested under pressure though the rest of the pipeline should be covered
to prevent expansion and contraction due to variation in temperature.
f)
Measurement :
The length of pipes shall be measured as laid fixed in running metre excluding specials and
pipes at the joints specials which shall be enumerated separately. The length of pipes shall,
however, not include the portion of spigot within the sockets of pipes at the joints.
2.
SLUICE VALVES /BRASS VALVE :
The sluice valves are used in a pipe line for controlling or stopping flow of water. These shall be of
specified size and shall be of inside not-raining screw type with either double flange or double
socket ends and cap or hand – wheel. These shall in all respects comply with the Indian Standard
Specifications I.S : 780 – 1956). For Class - II valves are used for working pressure of 400’ (122mm)
head.
The body, dome, cover, wedge gate and stuffing box shall be of good quality cast iron, and spindle
of bronze, the nut and valve seats of leaded tin bronze. The bodies, spindles and other parts shall
be truly machined with surfaces smoothly finished. The area of the water way of fittings shall be
not less than the area equal to the nominal bore of the pipe.
The valve shall be marked with an arrow to show the direction of turn for closing of the valve.
The valve shall be fully examined and cleared of all foreign matter before being fixed. The fixing of
the valve shall be done by means of bolts, nuts and 1/8” (3mm.) rubber insertions or chemically
treated compressed fibre board 1/16” (1.5mm.) minimum thickness and of weight not less than 6
Oz. Per sq.ft. with the flanges of spigot and the socketed tail pieces drilled to the same
specifications. The tail pieces shall conform to I. S : 780 – 1938. These shall be jointed to the pipe
line by means of lead caulked joints.
3.
LAYING G.I. WATER SUUPLY PIPE & FITTINGS :
a)
Laying and Fixing :
Where pipes have to be cut or rethreaded ends shall be carefully filed out so that no
obstruction to bore is offered.
In jointing the pipes, the inside of the socket and the screwed end of the pipes shall be
rubbed over with white zinc/lead and few turn of hemp yarn wrapped round the screwed
end of the pipe which shall then be screwed home to the socket with a pipe wrench. Care
must be taken that all pipes and fittings are kept at all times free from dust and dirt during
fixing. Any thread exposed after jointing shall be painted.
b)
All cutting holes, chases, trenches etc. at any place necessary in connection with the works
and subsequent mending damages are to be included in the rates and not paid extra unless
otherwise specified.
424
c)
Internal Works :
Internal G.I. pipes and fittings inside the duct walls shall be fixed by means of standard
pattern holder bat clamps keeping the pipe 20mm clear of the wall every where or concealed
as directed. If G.I. pipes and fittings of inside wall is to be fixed concealed, it is to be by
chasing floors and walls as directed. Where it is imperative to fix the pipe in front of a
house or in any conspicuous position, where it looks ungainly, chasing may be adopted.
The holder bat clamps shall be fixed at a distance not exceeding (10') 3.05 metre apart.
Concealed pipes are to be secured to inside of the walls by hooks. The valves should be
fitted with a union/long screw. In long length run of a pipe, at least in every (10') 3.05 metre
apart there should be a UNION Joint.
All pipes and fittings shall be fixed truly vertical and horizontal or as directed by the Project
Manager/Architect.
For pipes carrying hot water (if required) the pipes should be insulated. The thickness of the
insulating materials shall be 12mm in the case of glass in fibreform, compressed felt end
felted slag or mineral wool and 20mm in the case of asbestos. Cost of the same shall be
included in the rate.
d)
External Work :
For external U.G. work, G.I. pipes and fittings shall be laid in trenches. The width of the
trench shall be of a minimum width of 450mm required for the work. The pipes laid
underground shall not be less than (2') 60 cm. from the ground level. They shall be
surrounded on all sides by sand of approved quality. The work of excavation and refilling
shall be done in accordance with the general specification for earth work.
e)
Painting :
All internal G.I. pipes and fittings shall be painted with paints of approved quality,
manufacturer, colour and shade. The cost of such painting shall be included in the
contractor's rate. All pipes and fittings in external underground work shall be painted with
two coats of anti-corrosive paint. Unless otherwise specified all concealed pipes and
fittings shall be painted with two coats of anti-corrosive paint.
f)
Testing :
All G.I. pipes and fittings should be tested by hydraulic pressure machine to a pressure of 7
Kg. per sq.cm. to ensure that pipes have proper threads and that proper materials (such as
white lead and hemp) have been used in jointing. All leaky joints must be made leak proof
by tightening or re-doing at contractor's expenses.
04.
LAYING OF CPVC PIPE :
a)
All flushing water supply pipe and fittings shall be chlorinated polyvinyle, chloride
(C.P.V.C) having thermal stability.
b)
C.P.V.C pipe & fittings shall conform to relevant Indian Standard. (Shown in description
of item).
425
05.
c)
Jointing shall be with C.P.V.C solvent cement and brass threaded fittings with jute and
cement putty.
d)
Clamp spacing shall be of 1.0M apart.
SANITARY INSTALLATION :
a)
INDIAN TYPE W.C. PAN :
The W.C. Pan shall be of white vitreous china clay of specific size and pattern wash
down type unless otherwise specified. It shall have back flush inlet. The pan shall
be of approved quality and shall bear the mark of the firm manufacturing it and
shall be of best quality. The pan shall be provided with a 100mm ‘P’ or ‘S’ trap as
specified in the item with an approximately 50mnm seal.
b)
FIXING :
The W.C. Pan shall be sunk or raised in floor sloped towards the pan in a workman
like manner, care being taken not to damage the pan in the process of fixing. If
damaged in any, it shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own cost. It shall be
fixed in a proper cement concrete concrete base of 1:3:6 (with a wire netting where
required) proportion, taking care that the cushion is uniform and even, without
having any hollows between the concrete base and pan.
The joint between the pan and the trap shall be made with cement sand mortar 1 : 1
and shall be leak proof.
06.
EUROPEAN TYPE W.C. :
a)
EUROPEAN TYPE/ANGLO INDIAN TYPE CASCADE W.C. :
Can be readily flushed, of wash down type, shall bear the mark of an approved
firm and shall be of best quality. The closet shall be of vitreous china clay
having integrals, trap ‘P’ or ‘S’ with or without
vent hole right or left as directed.
b)
SEAT :
The seat with lid shall be of plastic or as specified with rubber buffers and shall
be fixed in position by using chromium plated(C.P.) brass hinges and screws.
07.
FLUSHING CISTERN :
a)
Unless otherwise specified, low level type flushing cistern shall be of or white
vitreous china /PVC of approved make, 10 litres capacity cistern with internal
fittings, brackets and C.P. flush pipe/PVC flush pipe 40 mm dia. or as specified,
brass C.P. handle etc. The low level type flushing cistern shall be connected with
the E.P.W.C. / W.C. pan by means of 40mm dia. C.P. flush bend/PVC bend and
rubber packing. The inlet pipes shall be of either white P.V.C. connector or brass C.P.
connector or as specified.
426
b)
Unless otherwise specified, low level type flushing cistern shall be of white glazed or
white vitreous china of approved make 12.5 litres (3 gallons) capacity cistern with internal
fittings, brackets and C.P. flush pipe 40mm. dia. or as specified, brass C.P. handle etc. The
low level type flushing cistern shall be connected with the W.C. pan by means of 40mm.
dia. C.P. flush bend and rubber packing. The inlet pipes shall be of either white P.V.C.
connector or brass C.P. connector or as specified.
c)
BRACKETS :
The cistern shall be fixed on cast iron or rolled steel white painted brackets, which shall
be firmly embedded in the wall or fixed by using lugs and screws, Phil plug, rawl plug to
the satisfaction of the Architect/Project Manager.
d)
OVERFLOW :
The cistern shall be provided with 15mm polythene overflow pipe with fittings which
shall terminate into mosquito proof coupling of the approved design with 3.05mm.
dia. perforations. The cistern shall be provided with 15mm polythene overflow pipe with
fittings which shall terminate into mosquito proof coupling of the approved design
with 3.05mm. dia. perforations.
e)
FLUSH PIPE :
The outlet or flush pipe from the cistern shall be of 32mm. dia. G.i. medium quality pipe
or polythene pipe or as specified. The flush pipe shall be 7 ft. high approx, which shall be
connected to the W.C. pan by means of an approved type of joint. The flush pipe shall be
fixed to wall by using holder bat clamps or embedded as required. If the connection
between the cistern and the W.C. pan is made with G.I. pipe the bends and offsets shall
be made cold.
f)
PAINTING :
Inside of cistern and fittings shall be painted with approved bituminous paint and
outside of the cistern, brackets, overflow and flush flush pipe etc. shall be painted
with a primary coat of red oxide and finishing two or more coats of white zinc
or any other colour and shade to match with the painting of the surrounding
walls. The coat of such painting shall be included in the rate quoted for the
flushing cistern.
08.
LAVATORY BASIN :
a)
LAVATORY BASIN :
The basin shall be of white vitreous china of approved make. The size of the basin shall
be as specified. The basins shall be of approved quality and make.
b)
FITTINGS :
Each lavatory basin shall be provided with pillar tap as specified, having a three tap
holes /Centre tap hole with C.P. protruded nose pillar cock heavy type mixer. This
must be included with 32mm dia. C.P. brass waste, C.P. chain, and rubber plug
427
etc. complete in all respect and of approved quality.
c)
FIXING :
The basin shall be supported on a pair of C.I. concealed type brackets embedded or fixed
in position by means of wooden cleats and screws as required. Alternatively this
should be supported on pedestal type brackets as specified. These brackets as specified.
These brackets shall be painted to the required shade.
d)
09.
The waste pipe shall discharge into the floor trap inlet or as specified.
LABOTORY BASIN :
a)
SINKS :
Unless otherwise specified the sink shall be of stainless steel with overflow or sink shall be
Mosaic silvered grey colour. The size of sink shall be as specified. The sink shall be of
approved quality.
b)
FITTINGS :
Each sink shall be provided with 32mm dia. C.P. brass waste, with C.P. brass chain and
rubber plug. The fittings shall be of approved quality.
c)
FIXING :
The sink shall be supported on a pair of C.I. cantilever brackets, embedded or fixed in
position by means of wooden cleats and screws as required. The brackets shall be
painted with approved shade and colour to match with the existing finish.
d)
10.
The waste pipe shall discharge into floor trap inlet or as specified.
TOILET REQUISITES :
a)
MIRROR :
The mirror shall be of approved make glass with beveled edge as specified. The size
and shape of the mirror shall be as specified. It shall be mounted on the
asbestos/masonite sheet and shall be fixed in position by means of 4 C.P. brass
domical screws and washers complete.
b)
WATER CONNECTION :
Water connection to flushing cistern, lavatory basins shall be by means of white P.V.C.
428
connector or C.P. connector with stop cock/ angular stop cock. The size of C.P. connector
and stop cock shall depend upon the size of water pipe connection and shall be as
specified.
c)
SHELF :
Unless otherwise specified the glass shelf shall be of approved quality with edges
rounded off. The glass shelf shall have C.P. brass anodised aluminium guard rail with
C.P. on brass/anodised aluminium brackets. The brackets shall be fixed to the wall with
C.P. brass screws to wooden plug firmly embedded in the wall.
d)
TOWEL RAIL :
The towel rail shall be of C.P. on brass with two nos. C.P. on brass brackets or as
specified. The size of the rail shall be as specified. The brackets shall be fixed by
means of C.P. brass screws to Rawl Plug firmly embedded in wall. This should be
projected 75mm from the wall.
e)
PAPER HOLDER :
The paper holder shall be of C.P. on brass / white glazed earthen ware. It shall be
fixed in position by means of C.P. brass screws.
11.
BRASS WATER FITTINGS :
All water fittings shall be of standard manufacture and shall in all respect comply with the
Indian Standard Specifications. The brass fittings shall be fixed in pipe line in a workman like
manner. Care must be taken to see that joints between fittings are made leak proof. The
fittings and joints shall be tested to a hydraulic pressure of 21 Kg. per Sq.cm. unless otherwise
specified. The defective fittings and the joints shall be replaced at the Contractors expense.
a)
BIB COCK :
The bib cock shall be of specified quality, opening full way, of screw down pattern and
of the size as specified. The tested pressure shall be 21 kgs/ Cm.Sq.
b)
STOP COCK :
The stop cock shall be of specified quality, opening full way, of screw down pattern and of
the size as specified.
c)
FULL-WAY VALVE :
The full way valve shall be of gunmetal, fitted with wheel and shall be gate valve type,
opening full way, of the size as specified.
d)
BALL VALVE :
The ball valve shall be of approved quality and manufactured in brass with copper ball
429
float/polythene float and shall operate freely and efficiently in water.
e)
SHOWER ROSE :
The shower rose shall be of specified quality with flat bottom of specified diameter with
uniform perforation. The inlet size shall be (3/4” or 1/2”) 20 MM. or 15 MM. as specified.
A stop cock of the requisite size shall be provided to control the inlet water supply to the
shower rose.
430
LIST OF APPROVED MAKES OF PLUMBING WORKS
1.
VITREOUS CHINA SANITARY WARE.
:
‘PARRYWRE’ /JAQUAR.
2.
C.P. BRASS FITTING.
:
JAQUAR OR ESS BRAND OR SIMILAR
APPROVED MAKE.
3.
CAST IRON SOIL, WASTE & ANTI-SYPHONAGE
PIPES & FITTING.
:
BIC OR SILIMAR APPORVED CALCUTA
CONFORMING TO
(I.S : 1729 ) C.I. I.S : 3989 OF APPROVED
MAKE.(HEPCO/NICO).
4.
CAST IRON CENTRIFUGAL CAST SPUN PIPES
AND FITTINGS.
FOR SOIL, WASTE LINE.
:
KESORAM/ELECTRO STEEL,OR SIMILAR CAL
CONFORMING TO
I.S : 1536 & 1537.
5.
G.I. MILD STEEL PIPES.
:
TATA - MEDIUM QUALITY/SIMILAR
APPROVED QUALITY CONFORMING TO I.S
: 1239.
6.
G.I. PIPES FITTINGS.
:
‘R’ BRAND.
7.
U.P.V.C/PIPES & FITTINGS FOR WASTE
WATER AND RAIN WATER.
:
KISAN / OR SIMILAR APPROVED
CONFORMING TO I.S : 13591 & 13592 1992
8.
STONEWARE PIPES, GULLY TRAP ETC.
:
PERFECT POTTERIES, JOBBALPUR/ OR
EQUIVALENT ‘ISI’ MARKED.
9.
G.M. VALVES AND COCK.
:
LEADER/ZOLOTO.
10.
PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE.
:
LEADER/ZOLOTO.
11
PAINTS.
:
ASIAN/SHALIMAR.
12.
SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMP FOR BASEMENT.
:
KSB/KIROLOSKAR/PHU GA
13.
CAST IRON MANHOLE COVER.
:
‘KAPOOR’ OR SIMILAR APPROVED BRAND
CONFURMING TO I.S : 1726.
14.
HIGH DENSITY POLYTHENE PIPES FOR WATER
DISTRIBUTION LINE.
UNDER CONSIDERATION.
:
FINOLEX/SUPREME/AVSL CONFORMING TO
I.S : 4984 - 1978
15.
C.P.V.C. PIPE
:
ASTROL / ASHIRBAD.
431
SECTION : 6
SECURITIES AND OTHER FORMS
432
BID SECURITY (BANK GUARANTEE)
WHEREAS, _____________________________[name of Bidder] (hereinafter called “the Bidder”)has
submitted his bid dated ______________________________________[date] for construction of
_______________________________________[name of Contract hereinafter called “the Bid”].
KNOW ALL PEOPLE by these presents that We _______________________________________
[name of Bank] of ________________________________________ [name of country] having our
registered office at ______________________________________________[hereinafter called “the
Bank”) are bound unto __________________________________ [name of Employer] (herein after
Called “the Employer”) in the sum of _________________________________* for which payment
Well and truly to be said Employer the Bank itself, his successors and assigns by these presents.
SEALED with the Common Seal of the said Bank this ____________ day of _________ 20 _____
THE CONDITIONS of this obligation are:
(1)If after Bid opening the Bidder withdraws his Bid during the period of Bid validity specified in the
Form of Bid.
OR
(2)If the Bidder having been notified to the acceptance of his bid by the Employer during the period of
Bid validity.
(a)Fails or refuses to execute the Form of Agreement in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders, if
required; or
(b)Fails or refuses to furnish the Performance Security, in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders;
or
(c)Does not accept the correction of the Bid price pursuit to Clause 27.
We undertake to pay to the Employer up to the above amount upon receipt of his first written
demand, without the Employer having to substantiate his demand, provided that in his demand the
Employer will note that the amount claimed by him is due to him owing to the occurrence of one or
any of the three conditions, specifying the occurred condition or conditions.
This Guarantee will remain in force up to and including the date ____________________** days after
the deadline for submission of Bids as such deadline is started in the Instructions to Bidder or as it may
be extended by the Employer, notice of which extension (s) to the bank is hereby waived. Any demand
in respect of this guarantee should reach the Bank not later than above date.
DATE _________________SIGNATURE ________________________________
WITNESS ___________________________SEAL ________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
[Signature, name and address]
*The Bidder should insert the amount of the guarantee in words and figures denominated in Indian
Rupees. This figure should be the same as shown in Clause 16.1 of the Instructions to Bidders.
433
**45 days after the end of the validity period of the Bid. Date should be inserted by the employer
before the Bidding documents are issued.
434
PERFORMANCE BANK GUARANTEE
To
EXECUTIVE ENGINEER, PWD (BLDG.), ASSAM
PCC DIVISION, DISPUR, GUWAHATI-6
WHEREAS _________________________________________ [ name and address of Contractor]
(hereinafter called “the Contractor”) has undertaken, in pursuance of Contract No. ____________
dated _____________ to execute ______________________________ [name of Contract and brief
description of works] (hereinafter called “the Contract”).
AND WHEREAS it has been stipulated by you in the said Contract that the Contractor shall furnish you
with a Bank Guarantee by a recognized bank for the sum specified therein as security for compliance
with his obligation in accordance with the Contract;
AND WHEREAS we have agreed to give the Contractor such a Bank Guarantee:
NOW THEREFORE we hereby affirm that we are the Guarantor and responsible to you on behalf of the
Contractor, up to a total of ______________________________________ [amount of guarantee]*
_____________________________ (in words), such sum being payable in the types and proportions
of currencies in which the Contract price is payable, and we undertake to pay you, upon your first
written demand and without cavil or argument, any sum or sums within the limits of
_________________________ amount of guarantee] as aforesaid without your needing to prove or to
show grounds or reasons for your demand for the sum specified therein.
We hereby waive the necessary of your demanding the said debt from the contractor before
presenting us with the demand.
We further agree that no change or addition to or other modification of the terms of the Contract or
of the works to be performed there under or of any of the Contract documents which may be made
between your hand and the Contractor shall in any way release us from any liability under this
guarantee, and we hereby waive notice of any such change, addition or modification.
This guarantee shall be valid until 28 days from the date of expiry of the Defect Liability Period.
Signature and Seal of the guarantor ___________________
Name of Bank ___________________________________
Address ________________________________________
Date _________________
________________________________________________________________________________
*An amount shall be inserted by the Guarantor, representing the percentage of Contract Price
specified in the Contract including additional security for unbalanced Bids, if any and denominated in
Indian Rupees.
435
BANK GUARANTEE FOR ADVANCE PAYMENT
To
EXECUTIVE ENGINEER, PWD (BLDG.), ASSAM
PCC DIVISION, DISPUR, GUWAHATI-6
____________________________________ (Name of Contractor)
Gentlemen:
In accordance with the provisions of the Conditions of Contract, sub-clause 51.1(“Advance Payment”)
of
the
above
mentioned
Contract,
_________________________________________________________________________________
[Name and address of the Contractor] (hereinafter called “the Contractor”) shall deposit with
_____________________________________________ (Name of Employer) a bank guarantee to
guarantee his proper and faithful performance under the said Clause of the Contract in an amount of
______________________________________________________[amount
of
guarantee]*
_________________________________ [in words].
We, the ______________________________[bank or financial institution], as instructed by the
Contractor, agree unconditionally and irrevocably to guarantee as primary obligator and not surety
merely, the payment to_____________________________ (Name of the Employer) on his first
demand without whatsoever right of obligation on our part and without his first claim to the
Contractor, in the amount not exceeding ________________________[amount of guarantee]*
___________________________________[in words].
We further agree that no change or addition to or other modification of the terms of the Contract of
works to be performed there under or of any of the Contract documents which may be made
between______________________________________[Name of the Employer] and the Contractor,
shall in any way release us from any liability under this guarantee, and we hereby waive notice of any
such change, addition or modification.
This guarantee shall remain valid and full effect from the date of the advance payment under the
Contract until _______________________________________[name of the Employer] receives full
repayment of the same amount from the Contractor.
Yours truly,
Signature and Seal ________________________________
Name of Bank /Financial Institution___________________
Address ________________________________________
Date _________________
*The Bank or Financial Institution, representing the amount of the Advance Payment, and
denominated in Indian Rupees, shall insert an amount.
436
INDENTURE FOR SECURED ADVANCES
FORM 31
(For use in cases in which the contract is for finished work and the contractor has entered into an
agreement for the execution of a certain specified quantity of work in a given time)
This indenture made the ___________________ day of ___________________________20 ______
BETWEEN ___________________________________(hereinafter called the Contractor which
expression shall where the context so admits or implies be deemed to include his executors,
administrator and assigns) or the one part and the Employer of the other part.
Whereas by an agreement dated ___________________________ (hereinafter called the said
agreement) the contractor has agreed.
AND WHEREAS the contractor has applied to the Employer that he may be allowed advanced on the
security of materials absolutely belonging to him and brought by him to the site of the works the
subject of the said agreement for use in the construction of such of the works as he has undertaken to
executive at rates fixed for the finished work (inclusive of the cost of materials and labour and other
charges).
AND WHEREAS the Employer has agreed to advance to the Contractor the sum of Rupees
____________________________________________________________ on the security of materials
the quantities and other particulars of which are detailed in Accounts of Secured advances attached to
the Running Account Bill for the said works signed by the Contractor on ________________ and the
Employer has reserved to himself the option of making any further advance or advances on the
security of other materials brought by the Contractor to the site of the said works.
Now THIS INDENTURE WITNESSETH that in pursuance of the said agreement and in consideration of
the sum of Rupees ___________________________ on or before the execution of these presents paid
to the Contractor by the Employer (the receipt where of the Contractor doth hereby acknowledge)
and of such further advances (if any) as may be made to him as a for said Contractor doth hereby
covenant and agree with the President and declare as follows:
(1)That the said sum of Rupees __________________________________ so advanced by the
Employer to the Contractor as aforesaid and all or any further sum of sums advanced as aforesaid
shall be employed by the Contractor in or towards expending the execution of the said works and for
no other purpose whatsoever.
(2)That the materials details in the said Account of Secured Advances which have been offered to and
accepted by the Employer as security are absolutely the Contractor’s own property and free from
encumbrances of any kind and the contractor will not make any application for or receive a further
advance on the security of materials which are not absolutely his own property and free from
encumbrances of any kind and the Contractor indemnified the Employer against all claims to any
materials in respect of which an advance has be made to him as aforesaid.
(3)That the materials detailed in the said account of Secured Advances and all other materials on the
security of which any further advance or advances may hereafter be made as aforesaid (hereafter
called the said materials) shall be used by the Contractor solely in the execution of the said works in
accordance with the directions of the Engineer.
4)That the contractor shall make at his own cost all necessary and adequate arrangements for the
proper watch, safe custody and protection against all risks of the said materials and that until used in
construction as aforesaid the said materials shall remain at the site of the said works in the
Contractor’s custody and on his own responsibility and shall at all times be open to inspection by the
Engineer or any officer authorized by him. In the event of the said materials or any part thereof being
437
stolen, destroyed or damaged or becoming deteriorated in a greater degree than is due to reasonable
use and wear thereof the Contractor will forthwith replace the same with other materials of like
quality or repair and make good the same required by the Engineer.
(5)That the said materials shall not be any account be removed from the site of the said works except
with the written permission of the Engineer or an officer authorized by him on that behalf.
(6)That the advances shall be repayable in full when or before the Contractor receives payment from
the Employer of the price payable to him for the said works under the terms and provisions of the said
agreement. Provided that if any intermediate payments are made to the Contractor on account of
work done than on the occasion of each such payment the Employer will be at liberty to make a
recovery from the Contractor’s Bill for such payment by deducting there from the value of the said
materials than actually used in the construction and in respect of which recovery has not been made
previously, the value for this purpose being determined in respect of each description of materials at
the rates at which the amounts of the advances made under these presents were calculated.
(7)That if the Contractor shall at any time make any default in the performance or observance in any
respect of any of the terms and provisions of the said agreement or of these presents the total
amount of the advance or advances that may still be owing of the Employer shall immediately on the
happening of such default be repayable by the Contractor to be the Employer together with interest
thereon at twelve percent per annum from the date or respective dates of such advance or advances
to the date of repayment and with all costs, charge, damages and expenses incurred by the Employer
in or for the recovery thereof or the enforcement of this security or otherwise by reason of the default
of the Contractor and the Contractor hereby covenants and agrees with the Employer to reply and pay
the same respectively to him accordingly.
(8)That the contractor hereby charges all the said materials with the repayment to the Employer of
the said sum of Rupees ____________________________________ and any further sum of sums
advanced as aforesaid and all costs, charges, damages and expenses payable under these presents
PROVIDED ALWAYS and it is hereby agreed and declared that not withstanding anything in the said
agreement and without prejudice to the power contained therein and whenever the covenant for
payment and repayment herein before contained shall become enforceable and the money owing
shall not be paid in accordance there with the Employer may at any time thereafter adopt all or any of
the following courses as he may deem best:
(a)Seize and utilize the said materials or any part thereof in the completion of the said works on
behalf of the contractor in accordance with the provisions in that behalf contained in the said
agreement debiting the contractor with the actual cost of effecting such completion and the
amount due to the contractor with the value of work done as if he has carried it out in
accordance with the said agreement and at the rates thereby provided. If the balance is against
the contractor, he is to pay same to the Employer on demand.
(b)Remove and sell by public auction the seized materials or any part thereof and out of the
moneys arising from the sale retain all the sums aforesaid repayable or payable to the
Employer under these presents and pay over the surplus (if any) to the Contractor.
(c)Deduct all or any part of the moneys owing out of the security deposit or any sum due to the
Contractor under the said agreement.
(9)That except in the event of such default on the part of the contractor as aforesaid interest on the
said advance shall not be payable.
(10)That in the event of any conflict between the provisions of these presents and the said agreement
the provisions of these presents shall prevail and in the event of any dispute or difference arising over
the construction or effect of these presents the settlement of which has not been here-in-before
438
expressly provided for the same shall be referred to the Employer whose decision shall be final and
the provision of the Indian Arbitration Act for the time being in force shall apply to any such reference.
439
GOVERNMENT OF ASSAM
OFFICE OF THE CHIEF ENGINEER : PWD, BUILDING, ASSAM, GUWAHATI
No
Dated Guwahati the
2015
LETTER OF ACCEPTANCE
To
_________________________________(Name and address of the Contractor)
__________________________________
__________________________________
Sub:
Dear Sirs,
This is to notify you that your offer dated ___________________________for execution of the
________________________ (name of the contract and identification number, as given in the
Instructions to Bidders) for the Contract Price of Rupees __________________ (__________
___________________________) (amount in words and figures), as a corrected and modified in
accordance with the Instructions to Bidders is hereby accepted by the department of P.W.D.
We accept / do not accept that _______________________ be appointed as the Adjudicator.
You are hereby requested to furnish performance Security, in the form detailed in Para 34.1 of ITB for
an amount equivalent to Rs._________________ within 21 days of the receipt of this letter of
acceptance valid upto 28 days from the date of expiry of Defects Liability Period i.e. upto
___________ and sign the contract, failing which action as stated in Para 34.2 of ITB will be taken.
Yours faithfully,
Chief Engineer, PWD (Bldg.), Assam,
Chandmari, Guwahati - 3
440
Issue of Notice to proceed with the works
________________________(date)
To
_________________________________(Name and address of the Contractor)
__________________________________
__________________________________
Dear Sirs,
Pursuant to your furnishing the requisite as stipulated in ITB Clause 34.1 and signing of the
construction of ______________________________________________________________
__________________________________________ at a bid of Rs.____________________
You are hereby instructed to proceed with the execution of the said works in accordance with the
contract documents.
Yours faithfully,
( Signature, name and title of signatory
Authorized to sign on behalf of Employer )
441
Agreement Form
Agreement No………………………………………………………………………………………….
This agreement made this…………………….... day of…………………………….between Chief Engineer, PWD
(Bldg.),Assam,Chandmari, Guwahati-3 (hereinafter called “the Employer”) and
………………………………………………………………… ( name and address of contractor ) hereinafter called “the
contractor” of the other part.
Whereas the Employer is desirous that the Contractor execute…………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………….. (names and identification number of Contract)
(hereinafter called “the works”) and the Employer has accepted the Bid by the Contractor for the
execution and completion of such works and the remedying of any defects therein, at a cost of
Rs………………………………………
NOW THIS AGREEMENT WITHNESSETH as follows :
In this Agreement, words and expression shall have the same meanings as are respectively
assigned to them in the conditions hereinafter referred to any they shall be deemed to form
and be read and construed as part of this Agreement.
In consideration of the payments to be made by the Employer to the contractor as hereinafter
mentioned, the Contractor hereby covenants with the Employer to execute and complete the works
and remedy any defects therein in conformity in all aspects with the provision of the contract.
The Employer hereby covenants to pay the contractor in consideration of the execution and
completion of the Works and the remedying the defects wherein Contract Price or such other sum as
may become payable under the provisions of the contract at the times and in the manner prescribed
by the Contract.
The following documents shall be deemed to form and be ready and construed as part of this
Agreement viz.
i.Letter of Acceptance;
ii.
Notice to proceed with the works;
iii.
Contractor’s Bid
iv.
Condition of Contract : General and Special
v.
Contract Data
vi.
Additional condition
vii.
Drawings
viii.
Bill of Quantities and
ix.
Any other documents listed in the contract data as forming part of the contract.
442
Time of completion: 9 (nine) Months
In witnessed whereof the parties there to have caused this Agreement to be executed the day and
year first before written.
The common seal of ……………………………………………………….............................. was hereunto affixed in
the presence of :
Signed, Sealed and delivered by the said …………….……………………… …………. ………
… ………………………………………………..…………………………………………………….
in the presence of :
Binding Signature of Employer ………………………………………………….
Binding Signature of Contractor…………………………………………………….
443
UNDERTAKING
I, the undersigned do hereby undertake that our firm M/s………………………………………..
………………… …………. agree to abide by this bid for a period …………….…………………
……………………………………………… days for the date fixed for receiving the same and it shall be binding on
us and may be accepted at any time before the expiration of that period.
_________________________________________
( Signed by an Authorised Officer of the firm )
Title of Officer
Name of Firm
444
SAMPLE FORMAT FOR EVIDENCE OF ACCESS TO OR
AVAILABILITY OF CREDIT FACILITIES
( CLAUSE 4.3 OF ITB )
BANK CERTIFICATE
This is to certify that M/s. ………………………………………………………….…………… is a reputed company with
good financial standing.
If the contract for the work, namely construction ……………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
is awarded to above firm, we shall be able to provide overdraft/credit facilities to the cost of
Rs…………………………………………………… (Rupees ………………………………………
to meet the working capital requirements for executing the above during the contract period.
-------------------------------------------------
( Signature )
Name of the Bank ………………………………………..
Senior Bank Manager
Address of the Bank
445
AFFIDAVIT
1.
I, the undersigned, do hereby certify that all the statements made in the required
attachments are true and correct.
2.
The undersigned also hereby certifies that neither our firm M/s…………………
………………………………. have abandoned any worked by CPWD/ State PWD in India nor
awarded to us for such works have been rescinded, during the last five years prior to the
date of this bid.
3.
The undersigned hereby authorize (s) and requested any Bank, person, firm or
corporation to furnish pertinent information deemed necessary and requested by the
Department to verify this statement or regarding my (our) competence and general
reputation.
4.
The undersigned understand and agrees that further qualifying information may be
requested and agrees to furnish any such information at the request of the Department /
Project implementing agency.
____________________________________
(Signed by an Authorised Officer of the Firm)
__________________________
Title of Officer
____________________________________
(Signed by an Authorised Officer of the Firm)
_________________________
Title of Officer
_________________________
Name of Firm
________________________
Date
446
UNDERTAKING
I, the undersigned do hereby undertake that our firm M/s………………………………………..
………………… …………. would invest a minimum cash upto 25% of the value of the work during
implementation of contract.
_________________________________________
( Signed by an Authorised Officer of the firm )
Title of Officer
Name of Firm
Date
447
AUTHORITY
Chief Engineer PWD (Bldg) Assam, Chandmari, Guwahati-3 is hereby authorized to seek reference
from my Banker, as and when required.
Name & Address of Banker
With Contact No./ Fax No.
Date:
Place:
Signature of Bidder
Name (Capital Block letters):
Address:
448
UNDERTAKING FOR BID VALIDITY
Bid for the work:
An undertaking is hereby given that the bid submitted by me/us shall remain valid for a period not less
than 180 days after the deadline date for submission specified in clause 20.
Date:
Place:
Signature of Bidder
Name (Capital Block letters):
Address:
449
SECTION 7
FORM OF BID
450
FORM OF BID
Description of the Works
To
The Chief Engineer, PWD (Building),
Assam, Chandmari,
Guwahati – 3.
We offer to Execute the Works describe above and remedy any defects therein in conformity with
the conditions of Contract, specifications, drawings, Bill of Quantities and Addenda for the sums(s) of
Rs…………………………….(Rupees ………………………………………………….)
We undertake, if our Bid is accepted, to commence the Works as soon as is reasonably possible after
the receipt of the Engineer’s notice to commence, and to complete the whole of the works comprised
in the contract within the time stated in the document.
We agree to abide by the Bid for the period of 180 days from the date fixed for receiving the same,
and it shall remain binding upon us and may be accepted at any time before the expiration of that
period.
Unless and until a formal agreement is prepared and executed this Bid, together with your written
acceptance thereof, shall constitute a binding contract between us.
We understand that you are not bound to accept the lowest or any bid you may receive.
We accept the appointment of _________________________________________________
as the Dispute Review Expert.
(OR)
We do not accept the appointment of _____________________________________________
_______________________ Review Expert and propose instead that Shri_______________
_____________________appointed as Dispute Review Expert, whose BIO-DATA is attached.
Dated this ______________ day of _____________________/2010.
Signature ______________________________in the capacity of ___________________duly
Authorized to sign bids for and on behalf of ____________________________(in block capitals or
typed)
______________________________________________________
Address
______________________________________________
Witness
______________________________________________
Address
______________________________________________
_____________________________________Occupation.
451
SECTION : 8
BILL OF QUANTITIES
452
SECTION : 9
DRAWINGS
453
The drawings may be seen/ collected from the office of the Executive Engineer, PWD (Building), PCC
Division, Dispur, Guwahati-6 Assam in due course.
454
SECTION : 10
DOCUMENTS TO BE FURNISHED BY THE BIDDER
455
DOCUMENTS COMPRISING THE BID
The Bid to be submitted by the Bidder as Volume-IV of the BID DOCUMENTS refer Clause 8 of the ITB
shall be in 2 (Two) parts comprising the followings :
PART – I shall be names as “TECHNICAL BID “and shall comprise:
Bid Security in form specified in SECTION – 6
Qualification information and supporting documents as specified in SECTION – 2
Certificates, Undertakings, Affidavits as specified in SECTION-6 & 2
Any other information pursuant to Clause 4 of the ITB
Undertakings that the Bid shall remain valid for the period specified in Clause 15.1 of ITB
PART – II shall be named “FINANCIAL BID “and shall comprise.
Form of Bid as specified in SECTION – 7
Priced Bill of Quantities for Items specified in SECTION – 8.
Part – I will be separately sealed and marked in accordance with the sealing and marking Instructions
in Clause 19 and signed at very pages by the Bidder or authorized signatory.
Part – II shall be submitted online.